FAST Survey

Reference Manual

For ProMark 500

& Z-Max.Net
Important Notice:
The Magellan FAST Survey software version 2.3 is derived from the Carlson SurvCE software version 2. So is its
documentation.
The present Magellan documentation is a facsimile of the Carlson documentation. Only the legal sections and the
cover pages of the original copy have been swapped for Magellan legal mentions and cover pages.
Because FAST Survey and SurvCE are similar in many respects, all explanations provided in this manual for
SurvCE are also valid for FAST Survey.

Copyright Notice
Copyright 2003-2008 Magellan Navigation Inc. All rights reserved.

Original Publication
08/01/2001

Last Revised for Technical Content

06/07/2007

Trademarks
All product and brand names mentioned in this publication are trademarks of their respective holders.

Magellan Professional Products - Limited Warranty (North, Central and South America)
Magellan Navigation warrants their GPS receivers and hardware accessories to be free of defects in material and
workmanship and will conform to our published specifications for the product for a period of one year from the
date of original purchase. THIS WARRANTY APPLIES ONLY TO THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THIS PRODUCT.
In the event of a defect, Magellan Navigation will, at its option, repair or replace the hardware product with no
charge to the purchaser for parts or labor. The repaired or replaced product will be warranted for 90 days from the
date of return shipment, or for the balance of the original warranty, whichever is longer. Magellan Navigation
warrants that software products or software included in hardware products will be free from defects in the media
for a period of 30 days from the date of shipment and will substantially conform to the then-current user
documentation provided with the software (including updates thereto). Magellan Navigation's sole obligation shall
be the correction or replacement of the media or the software so that it will substantially conform to the then-
current user documentation. Magellan Navigation does not warrant the software will meet purchaser's requirements
or that its operation will be uninterrupted, error-free or virus-free. Purchaser assumes the entire risk of using the
software.
PURCHASER'S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS WRITTEN WARRANTY OR ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY SHALL
BE LIMITED TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT, AT MAGELLAN NAVIGATION'S OPTION, OF ANY DEFECTIVE
PART OF THE RECEIVER OR ACCESSORIES WHICH ARE COVERED BY THIS WARRANTY. REPAIRS UNDER
THIS WARRANTY SHALL ONLY BE MADE AT AN AUTHORIZED MAGELLAN NAVIGATION SERVICE CENTER.
ANY REPAIRS BY A SERVICE CENTER NOT AUTHORIZED BY MAGELLAN NAVIGATION WILL VOID THIS
WARRANTY.
To obtain warranty service the purchaser must obtain a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) number prior to
shipping by calling 1-800-229-2400 (press option #1) (U.S.) or 1-408-615-3981 (International), or by
submitting a repair request on-line at:
http://professional.magellangps.com/en/support/rma.asp. The purchaser must return the product postpaid with a
copy of the original sales receipt to the address provided by Magellan Navigation with the RMA number.
Purchaser’s return address and the RMA number must be clearly printed on the outside of the package.
Magellan Navigation reserves the right to refuse to provide service free-of-charge if the sales receipt is not provided
or if the information contained in it is incomplete or illegible or if the serial number is altered or removed.
Magellan Navigation will not be responsible for any losses or damage to the product incurred while the product is
in transit or is being shipped for repair. Insurance is recommended. Magellan Navigation suggests using a
trackable shipping method such as UPS or FedEx when returning a product for service.
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, ALL OTHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING THOSE OF FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE, MERCHANTABILITY OR NON-
INFRINGEMENT, ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED AND IF APPLICABLE, IMPLIED WARRANTIES UNDER ARTICLE
35 OF THE UNITED NATIONS CONVENTION ON CONTRACTS FOR THE INTERNATIONAL SALE OF GOODS.
Some national, state, or local laws do not allow limitations on implied warranty or how long an implied warranty
lasts, so the above limitation may not apply to you.
The following are excluded from the warranty coverage: (1) periodic maintenance and repair or replacement of
parts due to normal wear and tear; (2) batteries and finishes; (3) installations or defects resulting from installation;
(4) any damage caused by (i) shipping, misuse, abuse, negligence, tampering, or improper use; (ii) disasters such
as fire, flood, wind, and lightning; (iii) unauthorized attachments or modification; (5) service performed or
attempted by anyone other than an authorized Magellan Navigations Service Center; (6) any product, components

p. 2
or parts not manufactured by Magellan Navigation; (7) that the receiver will be free from any claim for
infringement of any patent, trademark, copyright or other proprietary right, including trade secrets; and (8) any
damage due to accident, resulting from inaccurate satellite transmissions. Inaccurate transmissions can occur due
to changes in the position, health or geometry of a satellite or modifications to the receiver that may be required
due to any change in the GPS. (Note: Magellan Navigation GPS receivers use GPS or GPS+GLONASS to obtain
position, velocity and time information. GPS is operated by the U.S. Government and GLONASS is the Global
Navigation Satellite System of the Russian Federation, which are solely responsible for the accuracy and
maintenance of their systems. Certain conditions can cause inaccuracies which could require modifications to the
receiver. Examples of such conditions include but are not limited to changes in the GPS or GLONASS
transmission.) Opening, dismantling or repairing of this product by anyone other than an authorized Magellan
Navigation Service Center will void this warranty.
MAGELLAN NAVIGATION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO PURCHASER OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST
PROFITS, DAMAGES RESULTING FROM DELAY OR LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF OR DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF
BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY OR ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY EVEN THOUGH CAUSED BY NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHER FAULT OFMAGELLAN NAVIGATION OR NEGLIGENT USAGE OF THE PRODUCT. IN NO EVENT WILL
MAGELLAN NAVIGATION BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SUCH DAMAGES, EVEN IF MAGELLAN NAVIGATION HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
This written warranty is the complete, final and exclusive agreement between Magellan Navigation and the
purchaser with respect to the quality of performance of the goods and any and all warranties and representations.
This warranty sets forth all of Magellan Navigation's responsibilities regarding this product. This limited warranty is
governed by the laws of the State of California, without reference to its conflict of law provisions or the U.N.
Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, and shall benefit Magellan Navigation, its successors
and assigns.
This warranty gives the purchaser specific rights. The purchaser may have other rights which vary from locality to
locality (including Directive 1999/44/EC in the EC Member States) and certain limitations contained in this
warranty, including the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages may not apply.
For further information concerning this limited warranty, please call or write:
Magellan Navigation, Inc., 471 El Camino Real, Santa Clara, CA 95050-4300, Phone: +1 408 615 5100, Fax: +
+1 408 615 5200 or
Magellan Navigation SAS - ZAC La Fleuriaye - BP 433 - 44474 Carquefou Cedex - France Phone: +33 (0)2 28
09 38 00, Fax: +33 (0)2 28 09 39 39.

Magellan Professional Products Limited Warranty (Europe, Middle East, Africa)

All Magellan Navigation global positioning system (GPS) receivers are navigation aids, and are not intended to
replace other methods of navigation. Purchaser is advised to perform careful position charting and use good
judgment. READ THE USER GUIDE CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT.
1. MAGELLAN NAVIGATION WARRANTY
Magellan Navigation warrants their GPS receivers and hardware accessories to be free of defects in material and
workmanship and will conform to our published specifications for the product for a period of one year from the
date of original purchase or such longer period as required by law. THIS WARRANTY APPLIES ONLY TO THE
ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THIS PRODUCT.
In the event of a defect, Magellan Navigation will, at its option, repair or replace the hardware product with no
charge to the purchaser for parts or labor. The repaired or replaced product will be warranted for 90 days from the
date of return shipment, or for the balance of the original warranty, whichever is longer. Magellan Navigation
warrants that software products or software included in hardware products will be free from defects in the media
for a period of 30 days from the date of shipment and will substantially conform to the then-current user
documentation provided with the software (including updates thereto). Magellan Navigation's sole obligation shall
be the correction or replacement of the media or the software so that it will substantially conform to the then-
current user documentation. Magellan Navigation does not warrant the software will meet purchaser's requirements
or that its operation will be uninterrupted, error-free or virus-free. Purchaser assumes the entire risk of using the
software.
2. PURCHASER'S REMEDY
PURCHASER'S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY UNDER THIS WRITTEN WARRANTY OR ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY SHALL
BE LIMITED TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT, AT MAGELLAN NAVIGATION'S OPTION, OF ANY DEFECTIVE
PART OF THE RECEIVER OR ACCESSORIES WHICH ARE COVERED BY THIS WARRANTY. REPAIRS UNDER
THIS WARRANTY SHALL ONLY BE MADE AT AN AUTHORIZED MAGELLAN NAVIGATION SERVICE CENTER.
ANY REPAIRS BY A SERVICE CENTER NOT AUTHORIZED BY MAGELLAN NAVIGATION WILL VOID THIS
WARRANTY.
3. PURCHASER'S DUTIES
To obtain service, contact and return the product with a copy of the original sales receipt to the dealer from whom
you purchased the product.

p. 3
Magellan Navigation reserves the right to refuse to provide service free-of-charge if the sales receipt is not provided
or if the information contained in it is incomplete or illegible or if the serial number is altered or removed.
Magellan Navigation will not be responsible for any losses or damage to the product incurred while the product is
in transit or is being shipped for repair. Insurance is recommended. Magellan Navigation suggests using a
trackable shipping method such as UPS or FedEx when returning a product for service.
4. LIMITATION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN ITEM 1 ABOVE, ALL OTHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING
THOSE OF FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR MERCHANTABILITY, ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED
AND IF APPLICABLE, IMPLIED WARRANTIES UNDER ARTICLE 35 OF THE UNITED NATIONS CONVENTION ON
CONTRACTS FOR THE INTERNATIONAL SALE OF GOODS.
Some national, state, or local laws do not allow limitations on implied warranty or how long an implied warranty
lasts, so the above limitation may not apply to you.
5. EXCLUSIONS
The following are excluded from the warranty coverage:
(1) periodic maintenance and repair or replacement of parts due to normal wear and tear;
(2) batteries;
(3) finishes;
(4) installations or defects resulting from installation;
(5) any damage caused by (i) shipping, misuse, abuse, negligence, tampering, or improper use; (ii) disasters such
as fire, flood, wind, and lightning; (iii) unauthorized attachments or modification;
(6) service performed or attempted by anyone other than an authorized Magellan Navigations Service Center;
(7) any product, components or parts not manufactured by Magellan Navigation,
(8) that the receiver will be free from any claim for infringement of any patent, trademark, copyright or other
proprietary right, including trade secrets
(9) any damage due to accident, resulting from inaccurate satellite transmissions. Inaccurate transmissions can
occur due to changes in the position, health or geometry of a satellite or modifications to the receiver that may be
required due to any change in the GPS. (Note: Magellan Navigation GPS receivers use GPS or GPS+GLONASS to
obtain position, velocity and time information. GPS is operated by the U.S. Government and GLONASS is the
Global Navigation Satellite System of the Russian Federation, which are solely responsible for the accuracy and
maintenance of their systems. Certain conditions can cause inaccuracies which could require modifications to the
receiver. Examples of such conditions include but are not limited to changes in the GPS or GLONASS
transmission.).
Opening, dismantling or repairing of this product by anyone other than an authorized Magellan Navigation Service
Center will void this warranty.
6. EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
MAGELLAN NAVIGATION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO PURCHASER OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
LOST PROFITS, DAMAGES RESULTING FROM DELAY OR LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF OR DAMAGES ARISING OUT
OF BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY OR ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY EVEN THOUGH CAUSED BY NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHER FAULT OFMAGELLAN NAVIGATION OR NEGLIGENT USAGE OF THE PRODUCT. IN NO EVENT WILL
MAGELLAN NAVIGATION BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SUCH DAMAGES, EVEN IF MAGELLAN NAVIGATION HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Some national, state, or local laws do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages,
so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
7. COMPLETE AGREEMENT
This written warranty is the complete, final and exclusive agreement between Magellan Navigation and the
purchaser with respect to the quality of performance of the goods and any and all warranties and representations.
THIS WARRANTY SETS FORTH ALL OF MAGELLAN NAVIGATION'S RESPONSIBILITIES REGARDING THIS
PRODUCT.
THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC RIGHTS. YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS WHICH VARY FROM
LOCALITY TO LOCALITY (including Directive 1999/44/EC in the EC Member States) AND CERTAIN LIMITATIONS
CONTAINED IN THIS WARRANTY MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
8. CHOICE OF LAW.
This limited warranty is governed by the laws of France, without reference to its conflict of law provisions or the
U.N. Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, and shall benefit Magellan Navigation, its
successors and assigns.
THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT AFFECT THE CUSTOMER'S STATUTORY RIGHTS UNDER APPLICABLE LAWS IN
FORCE IN THEIR LOCALITY, NOR THE CUSTOMER'S RIGHTS AGAINST THE DEALER ARISING FROM THEIR
SALES/PURCHASE CONTRACT (such as the guarantees in France for latent defects in accordance with Article
1641 et seq of the French Civil Code).
For further information concerning this limited warranty, please call or write:
Magellan Navigation SAS - ZAC La Fleuriaye - BP 433 - 44474 Carquefou Cedex - France.
Phone: +33 (0)2 28 09 38 00, Fax: +33 (0)2 28 09 39 39

p. 4
 Table of Contents
End-User License Agreement 7
Installation 10
Using the Manual 10
System Requirements 10
Microsoft ActiveSync 11
Installing SurvCE 16
Authorizing SurvCE 20
Hardware Notes 22
Color Screens 22
Memory 22
Battery Status 23
Save System 24
Carlson Technical Support 24
User Interface 25
Graphic Mode 25
View Options 28
Quick Calculator 29
Hot Keys & Hot List 31
Instrument Selection 36
Input Box Controls 36
Keyboard Operation 40
Abbreviations 41
FILE 43
Job 43
Job Settings (New Job) 44
Job Settings (System) 46
Job Settings (Options) 47
Job Settings (Format) 52
Job Settings (Stake) 53
List Points 63
Raw Data 67

p5
 Feature Code List 89
Data Transfer 101
Import/Export 107
Delete File 111
Add Job Notes 113
Exit 113
EQUIP 115
Instrument Setup 115
Setup (Total Station) 123
Setup (GPS) 128
GPS Base 131
GPS Rover 141
GPS Utilities 150
Configure (General) 153
Configure (View Pt) 158
Configure (Sets) 159
Localization 162
Monitor/SkyPlot (GPS) 180
Check Level (Total Station) 184
Tolerances 185
Peripherals 187
About SurvCE 193
SURV 195
Orientation (Instrument Setup) 195
Orientation (Backsight) 199
Orientation (Remote Benchmark) 201
Orientation (Robotics) 203
Store Points (TS) 205
Store Points (TS Offsets) 210
Store Points (GPS) 213
Store Points (GPS Offsets) 216
Stake Points 222
Stake Line/Arc 228
Stake Offset 245
Elevation Difference 250
p6
 Grid/Face 258
Resection 262
Set Collection 266
Leveling 276
Auto By Interval 288
Remote Elevation 290
Log Raw GPS 292
COGO 312
Keyboard Input 312
Inverse 313
Areas 315
Intersections 317
Point Projection 323
Station Store 327
Transformation 328
Calculator 332
Manual Traverse 339
ROAD 344
Centerline Editor 344
Draw Centerline 352
Profile Editor 353
Draw Profile 356
Template Editor 357
Draw Template 363
Utilities 364
Stake Slope 386
Store Sections 412
Stake Road 427
MAP 438
Basics 438
FILE 442
VIEW 454
DRAW 460
COGO 472
TOOLS 487
p7
Tutorials 500
Tutorial 1: Calculating a Traverse (By Hand) with 500
SurvCE
Tutorial 2: Performing Math Functions in Carlson 502
SurvCE Input Boxes
Tutorial 3: Performing a Compass Rule Adjustment 503
Tutorial 4: Defining Field Codes, Line/Layer 509
Properties & GIS Prompting
Tutorial 5: Standard Procedures for Conducting GPS 531
Localizations
Instrument Setup by Manufacturer 543
Total Station (Geodimeter/Trimble) 543
Total Station (Leica TPS Series) 549
Total Station (Leica Robotic) 554
Total Station (Leica/Wild Older Models) 563
Total Station (Nikon) 564
Total Station (Pentax) 565
Total Station (Sokkia Set) 567
Total Station (Sokkia Robotic) 571
Total Station (Topcon 800/8000/APL1) 572
Total Station (Topcon GTS) 580
GPS (Allen-Osbourne) 580
GPS (CSI - DGPS Max) 580
GPS (DataGrid) 581
GPS (Leica 500/1200) 581
GPS (Leica GIS System 50) 585
GPS (Navcom) 585
GPS (NMEA) 590
GPS (Novatel) 592
GPS (Septentrio) 593
GPS (Magellan/Ashtech) 593
GPS (Sokkia) 597
GPS (Topcon) 599
GPS (Trimble) 605
GPS Utilities by Manufacturer 611
p8
 GPS Utilities (Leica 500/1200) 611
GPS Utilities (Navcom) 613
GPS Utilities (Sokkia and Novatel) 620
GPS Utilities (Magellan/Ashtech) 620
GPS Utilities (Topcon) 625
GPS Utilities (Trimble) 626
Troubleshooting 627
GPS Heights 627
Handheld Hardware 627
Miscellaneous Instrument Configuration 630
Supported File Formats 630
Raw Data 633
File Format 633

p9
Installation
This chapter describes the system requirements and installation instructions for
Carlson SurvCE.

Using the Manual

This manual is designed as a reference guide. It contains a com plete description of
all commands in the Carlson SurvCE product.

The chapters are organized by program menus, and they are arranged in the order
that the menus typically appear in Carlson SurvCE. Some commands are only
applicable to either GPS or total station use and may not appear in your menu.

Look for the icons for either GPS mode and/or total station mode, found at the
start of certain chapters. These icons will be located at the top (header) of these
pages, or at the start of a chapter.

For some commands both icons will be shown, indicating that the SurvCE
command can be used in both GPS and total station modes.

System Requirements
The information below describes the system requirements and installation
instructions for Carlson SurvCE.

Software
 Windows CE® version 3.0 or later. Handheld PC.
 Microsoft ActiveSync 3.7 and later.

p10
RAM and Hard Disk Space Requirements
 64 MB of RAM (recommended)
 16 MB of hard disk space (minimum)

Hardware (Required)
 StrongARM, XScale or compatible processor (hardware must be supported by
the Microsoft operating system being used)

Hardware (Optional)
 Serial cable for uploading and downloading data.

Microsoft ActiveSync
Microsoft® ActiveSync® provides support for synchronizing data between a
Windows-based desktop computer and Microsoft® Windows® CE based portable
devices. Microsoft ActiveSync 3.7.1 supports Microsoft Windows 98 (including
Second Edition), Windows NT Workstation 4.0 SP 6, Microsoft Windows ME,
Windows 2000 Professional Edition, and Windows XP.

You should have a serial cable that was included with your mobile device. Attach
this cable from your desktop PC to the mobile device.

Before you can install Carlson SurvCE, your desktop PC must have Microsoft
ActiveSync installed and running. If you have ActiveSync on your desktop PC,
you should see the ActiveSync icon in your system tray. If you do not see this icon
in the tray, choose the Windows Start button, choose Program s and then choose
Microsoft ActiveSync. If you do not have ActiveSync installed, insert the Carlson
SurvCE CD-ROM and choose “Install ActiveSync”. You may also choose to
download the latest version from Microsoft. After the ActiveSync installation
starts, follow the prompts. If you need more assistance to install ActiveSync, visit
Microsoft’s web site for the latest install details.

Auto Connection
If the default settings are correct, ActiveSync should automatically connect to the
mobile device. When you see a dialog on the mobile device that asks you if you
want to connect, press Yes.

Manual Connection

p11
If nothing happens when you connect the cable, check to see if you have the
ActiveSync icon in your system tray. If you see this icon, right click on it and
choose “Connection Settings”. You should see the following dialog:

Be sure that you have selected the appropriate COM port or USB options.
Assuming that you are using a COM port connection, you will choose the COM
port (usually this will be COM1). Click Connect at the top right. You will now see
the Get Connected dialog.

p12
You now need to manually "link" to the remote device. Focus on the mobile device
while still observing your PC screen. Observe the above dialog and, with your
device properly connected to the PC, be prepared to click the Next button at the
bottom. Now look at the mobile device screen for the "PC Link" icon.

First, click Next on the PC. Then immediately double-tap the PC Link icon. (You
may have to do the double-tap more than once.) If successful, after you press Nex t,
the following screen will appear and the connection will be made.

p13
In ActiveSync, you will then see the New Partnership dialog. Click No to setting
up a partnership, and click Next. When you see the icon in the system tray, and it
is green with no "x" through it, you are connected. Once you are connected, you
should see the following dialog. It should say "Connected":

p14
Troubleshooting
If you cannot get connected, make sure that no other program is using the COM
port. Programs to check for include any Fax/Modem software and other data
transfer software. If you see anything you think may be using the COM port, shut it
down and retry the connection with ActiveSync.

Enabling COM Port Communication for ActiveSync on Allegro, Panas onic

Toughbook 01 and other CE devices
In order for ActiveSync to communicate, it may be necessary to direct the CE
device to utilize the COM port as a default. Some may come set default to USB.
Go to Start (on Allegro, blue key and Start button), then Settings, and open the
Control Panel. Next choose the Communications icon, then PC Connection.
Choose COM1 at a high baud rate, such as 57,600 baud. This will download
programs and files at a high rate of speed. On the Allegro, use PC Link to connect
to PC with ActiveSync. On the Panasonic Toughbook, do Start, Run, and in the
Open window, type in “autosync –go” (autosync then spacebar then “m inus” go).
Then go to Start, then Settings, and open the Control Panel. Choose the
Communications icon, then PC Connection. Change Connection to Serial Port @
115K. Make sure “Enable direct connections to the desktop computer” is checked.

p15
Note: When using SurvCE ’s Data Transfer option, you will need to disable Serial
Port Connection (uncheck Allow Serial Cable). This is done in the Connection
Settings in ActiveSync. This option must be enabled again in order to use
ActiveSync.

Installing SurvCE
Before you install Carlson SurvCE, close all running applications on the mobile
device.

1. Connect the mobile device to the desktop PC and ensure that the ActiveSync
connection is made.
2. Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive on the desktop PC. If Autorun is
enabled, the startup program begins. The startup program lets you choose the
version of SurvCE to install. To start the installation process without using
Autorun, choose Run from the Windows Start Menu. Enter the CD-ROM
drive letter, and setup. For example, enter d:\setup (where d is your CD-ROM
drive letter).
3. On the desktop PC, a Welcome dialog will appear. Click Next.

4. On the next dialog, you must read and accept the Carlson SurvCE End-User
License Agreement (EULA). If you agree with the EULA, click "I accept ..."
p16
 and then select Install. If you do not agree with the EULA, click "I do not
accept ..." and the installation program will quit.

5. The next dialog asks you to confirm the installation directory. Press Y es.

6. At this point, the necessary files will be copied to the mobile device. A dialog
will appear to show installation progress.

p17
p18
7. You are given a final chance to check your mobile device. Click OK when you
are ready.

8. After this has completed, the next figure will appear on the mobile device
showing the installation progress. When this dialog disappears, the
installation is complete.

How-To Update Carlson SurvCE Using a Memory Card

This process requires that you have a memory card with sufficient free space and
WinZip installed on the desktop computer.
1. Download the appropriate Carlson SurvCE executable to your desktop PC.
There are several executables, therefore it is important to get the right one
based on the type of hardware you own.
2. Make sure that you have exited Carlson SurvCE on the handheld.
3. Launch WinZip on the PC.
4. In WinZip, select “File Open Archive”.
5. In the WinZip “Open Archive” dialog, choose “Archives and .ex e Files” from
the “Files of type” drop list and navigate to the location of the downloaded
p19
 Carlson SurvCE executable.
6. Still in the “Open Archive” dialog, highlight the downloaded Carlson SurvCE
executable and select the “Open” button.
7. Highlight the file that has the .CAB extension and select the “Extract” button.
There should only be one .CAB file.
8. Close WinZip.
9. Remove the memory card and put it into the handheld device.
10. Turn on the handheld device.
11. Using “My Computer” on the desktop of the handheld device, navigate to the
memory card and locate the .CAB file.
12. Double-Click to open the .CAB file and answer “OK” or “YES” to all of the
prompts and dialogs.
13. Carlson SurvCE should be installed or updated and the .CAB file will remove
itself from the memory card.
14. Launch Carlson SurvCE and verify the version number and date by selecting
“Equip About Carlson SurvCE”.

Authorizing SurvCE
The first time you start SurvCE, you are prompted to register your license of the
software. If you do not register, SurvCE will remain in demo mode, limiting each
job file to a maximum of 30 points.

Choose Yes to start the registration process, or No to register later.

p20
SurvCE registration is done via the Internet at the following address:

http://update.carlsonsw.com/regist_survce.php

You will be required to enter your company name, phone number, email address,
your SurvCE serial number, and the registration code that the program will
generate. After you submit this information, your change key will be displayed
and emailed to the address that you submit. Keep this for your permanent records.

If you do not have access to the Internet, you may fax the above information to
606-564-9525. Your registration information will be faxed back to you within 48
hours. During this time, you may continue to use the program without restriction.
After you receive your Change Key, enter it, and press OK.

After you register SurvCE, you should perform a RAM Backup or a System Save.
If you do not do this, then your authorization code could be lost the nex t time the
computer reboots.

p21
If you cannot find this on your Start menu, then open the Control Panel, and
choose RAM Backup.

Hardware Notes
If SurvCE quits responding, you can reset the hardware by following the
applicable procedures described in the hardware documentation.

Color Screens
SurvCE 1.21 or greater enables viewing of color. Any red, green, blue or other
colored entities in DXF files will retain their color when viewed within SurvCE.
Points will appear with black point numbers, green descriptions and blue
elevations. Dialogs and prompting will utilize color throughout SurvCE.

Memory
Memory on most CE devices can be allocated for best results. We recommend
setting “Storage Memory” to a minimum of 16,000 KB. The following discussion
is an example for setting that memory . An equivalent process should be used for

p22
other CE devices, as available.

The SurvCE controller will function better during topo and stakeout with the
"Storage Memory" set to around 18,000 KB. Use the following process to check
and/or change the settings:

Go to the start menu by simultaneously hitting the Blue Key and Start.
Choose Settings, then Control Panel , then double click on System. Touch
the Memory tab and slide the pointer toward the left, which is the Storage
Memory side, so that Allocated is around 18,000 KB .

Keep in mind that to upgrade software, this setting may need to be changed back,
so that the Program Memory has more available. To change, do as above but slide
the pointer toward the right, which is the Program side, so that Allocated is
around 18,000 KB. This assures that there is enough Program memory, so that the
new updates can be saved.

Once the upgrade or additional software is added, you can change it back so that
the pointer is more toward the Storage Memory -- around 18,000 KB.

After changing these settings, or updating software, it's a good idea to do a "Save
System".

Battery Status
The black icon that appears at the top of every screen is designed to indicate
battery status. Full black should indicate full battery. As battery levels decrease
the black recedes to full white (out of battery).

On some CE devices, there is no way to detect battery status, so the battery icon
does not change. On some devices such as the Jett CE (Carlson Ex plorer), a
partial indication of battery status is detected as follows:

p23
 Good - 100%
 Low - 50%
 Critical – 10%

Save System
After installing SurvCE or making any system level changes (e.g. memory
settings), its highly recommended that you perform a Save System on the device.

Examples:

Carlson Explorer
Start  Programs  SaveReg

Allegro
Start  Programs  Utilities  Save System

Carlson Technical Support

Contact information for tech support for SurvCE is provided below:
Carlson Software, Inc.
Corporate Headquarters
Maysville, KY, USA
Tel (606) 564-5028
Fax (606) 564-6422
e-mail: [email protected]

Customer Service, Technical Support, Repair:

If you need assistance with your Carlson Software products, please call by
telephone, or send an e-mail to the address above. Support hours are Monday
through Friday, 7:00 A.M. to 9:00 P.M. (EST, GMT -5 hours).

p24
User Interface
This chapter describes the general user interface features of SurvCE.

Graphic Mode
p25
Icons
SurvCE 2.0 can be configured to show either the traditional letter icons or new
graphical icons for several functions. To set this option, go to the EQUIP tab,
select Configure and toggle the "Use Graphic Icons" check box .

 This icon will Read a measurement (ALT-R).

 Total Station Only. This icon will Traverse to the measured point
by advancing your setup (ALT-T).

 This icon will Store a point. This function is also performed via
the Enter key. (ALT-S).

 This icon will lead to a dialog where the user can Average up to
999 epochs of GPS readings (ALT-A).

 This icon leads to Offset reading screens with options for

keyed-in offsets as well as offsets taken by laser devices that measure distance
only, or distance and azimuth (ALT-O).

 This icon will take you to the Configure dialog, also found on the
EQUIP tab. Here you set many preferences in SurvCE such as the number of
readings to average, function of the Store icon, and whether to display the
Hgt/Desc prompt on Save (ALT-C).

 This icon will advance stake location incrementally to the Next

point or station (ALT-N).

 This icon returns to the previous stakeout settings dialog where

you can Modify the current design stake data.

 This icon allows the user to override the design Elevation

(ALT-E).
 OK: This icon will accept the dialog.

 Back: This icon will return you to the previous dialog.

p26
 Exit: This icon will return you to the main menu and dismiss any
changes (ALT-X).
 Standby/Search: Robotics only. This status icon shows the instrum ent
is in standby and when pressed, puts the instrument in search m ode.
 Locked: Robotics only. This icon shows that the instrument is locked,
and when pressed, places the robotic total station in Standby mode, meaning it
will suspend tracking mode (e.g. allows you to place the pole down, drive a
stake, then resume work).
 Tracking is On: Robotics only. This icon shows that the instrum ent is
continuously measuring distances (tracking) and when pressed will stop the
EDM.
 Tracking is Off: Robotics only. This icon shows that the instrum ent is
NOT continuously measuring distances (not tracking) and when pressed will
start the EDM.
 Prism Mode: This icon shows that the instrument is currently
configured to read a prism and when pressed will switch the instrument to
reflectorless mode.
 Reflectorless Mode: This icon shows that the instrument is currently in
reflectorless mode and when pressed will switch the instrument to prism
mode.

 Stop/Go: This icon, inside of Auto By Interval, begins and

pauses the action of recording points (ALT-G ).

 Monitor/SkyPlot: This icon will take you to the Monitor/SkyPlot

screen for GPS status and Coordinate and Lat/Long display (ALT-D).

 Tripod: This will take you to the Instrument Setup dialog. This dialog
contains Backsight, Setup, Robotics and Remote Benchmark (ALT B).

 Zoom Extents: This zooms the entire drawing to fit the screen.

 Zoom In: Zooms in 25%.

p27
 Zoom Out: Zooms out 25%

 Zoom Window: Zooms into a rectangular area that you pick on the
map screen.

 Zoom Previous: Zooms to the previous view. SurvCE remembers up

to 50 views.

 View Options: Displays the View Options dialog box, where you can
control aspects of points such as the symbol, the style of the plot and the
freezing or thawing of attributes such as descriptions and elevations. To avoid
“point clutter”, you can even set it to show only the last stored point along
with setup and BS. See the View Options section of this manual.

Pan
You can also pan the screen simply by touching it, then holding and dragging your
finger or stylus along the screen surface. Pan is automatic and needs no prior
command.

View/Edit Points by Touch

You can edit or delete any point by simply clicking on it graphically.

Text Mode
The Text screen uses a large character size for easy viewing, and limits options to
Monitor/Skyplot, Offset and Store. You can return to the Graph view by tapping
the Graph button. You can also temporarily view your points on the screen by
tapping Map, then tap Back to return to the text-based data collection screen.
Note that the program will remember which screen you were in last (Graph or
Text) and return to that mode of data collection automatically.

View Options
The graphic view has all of the standard zoom icon as well as a view setting icon.
This icon allows you to change the way the graphical items will be displayed.

p28
 Show Only Last Stored Point (ALT-F): This toggle will result in SurvCE
only displaying the linework collected, the instrument and backsight points,
and the last point collected. This is a popular setting to reduce the clutter of
numerous points displayed all at once.
 Freeze All: This toggle will freeze (hide from view) the point attributes (e.g.
Point ID, Elevation and Description). Each attribute can be toggled off
separately as well.
 Decimal in Point Location: This toggle will adjust the text location so that
the point location is the decimal point of the elevation.
 Redraw: After adjusting the settings, exit and commit your changes by
selecting redraw.
 Set Color Attributes: This button will allow users to specify the colors of the
point text (color units only).

Quick Calculator
From virtually any dialog entry line in the program, the ? command will go to the
Calculator routines and allow copying and pasting of any selected calculation
result back into the dialog entry line.

For example, if you were grading a site that had 19.5” of subgrade, and had
modeled the top surface, you need to grade to the top surface with a vertical offset
of -19.5/12. You could quickly obtain the value in feet by entering ? in the
Vertical Offset field within the Elevation Difference dialog, as shown in this next
figure.

p29
This leads immediately to the Calculator dialog, with its four tabs, or options,
many with sub-options. Using the Standard tab, we can enter 19.5/12 and get
1.625 as shown. Then select the Copy button, which places the value in the
banner line at the very top of the screen. Then choose Paste in the upper right to
paste the value back into the Vertical Offset dialog edit box. These calculations
can also be done directly from the edit box within the Vertical Offset dialog. You
could enter "19.5 in" for inches, which would auto-convert to feet or the current
units setting. In this same edit box, you could also enter 19.5/12, which would do
the division directly in the edit box. This figure shows the Calculator screen.

p30
Hot Keys & Hot List
The ALT key commands take the form ALT-C (Configure Reading) or ALT-N
(Next Point). The ALT key and the subsequent "Hot Key" (“C” or “N”, as
mentioned here) can be entered at nearly the same time or with any delay desired.
If you press ALT and delay the entry of the hot key, you will see a text instruction:
“Waiting for HotKey… Press Alt again to return”. A second ALT returns to the
previous position in the program without executing any command. ALT- < and
ALT- > will brighten or darken screens on “At Work” brand CE data collectors.

List of Hot Key Commands Activated by ALT

Many of the hot keys work only within related data gathering commands, as
opposed to working from the main menus. Hot Keys vary by command. For
example, in the Store Points screen, the hot keys are as follows.

 ALT-R: Read
 ALT-S: Store (or Shot/Store)
 ALT-O: Offset
 ALT-C :Configure Reading
 ALT-B: Backsight

p31
Here is a list of other common hot keys:

 ALT-E: Target Elevation — From the stakeout screen in any Stakeout

Line/Arc command, Offset Stakeout, Elevation Difference and virtually all
stakeout commands except Stakeout Points, ALT-E will allow the user to enter
an alternate design elevation different from the computed current design
elevation.
 ALT-F: Foresight Only Toggle. When in the Store Points graphic screen and
taking new shots, ALT-F will freeze all but the setup point number, backsight
point number and current foresight shot. This is helpful when points are
densely located. Alt F again returns to the full point plot. Linework remains.
 ALT-H: Help. Takes you to the Help menu.
 ALT-I: Inverse. Does a quick inverse, and upon exit, returns you to the
command you were in.
 ALT-J: Joystick. Applies only to robotic total station. Takes you to the
Settings option. ALT-J typically only functions if you are configured for a
robotic total station. ALT-J will work from within data gathering commands
and from the main menus.
 ALT-L: List, as in Feature Code List. When entered in any Description field,
this will recall the Feature Code List, which displays the characteristics
(layer/linework) of the feature code. This serves not only as a way to select the
code and apply it to the description, but it also serves as a handy rem inder of
the code’s properties.
 ALT-M: Menu. Returns you to the dialog of the local command, keeping all
current inputs. For example, in Intersection, you are returned to the entry
dialog, with all entered point numbers, distances and azimuths intact, allowing
you to alter one or more and re-calculate. Except when used as a “local”
menu return, ALT-M will switch to the map screen.
 ALT-N: Next. Moves you to the Next point or station in the Stakeout
commands.
 ALT-T: Traverse. Takes a reading and advances the setup to the measured
point. The instrument setup dialog is presented for verification.
 ALT-V: Shortcut to View the Raw Data, Point Data, Feature Codes and
Cutsheets.
 ALT-W: Write a Note anytime with this command. Notes store to the Raw
File.
 ALT-X: Shortcut to Exit most commands. Similar to Esc (escape key).
 ?: The ‘?’ character can be used in any field that requires a numerical entry to
p32
 access the Calculator. (The Sokkia SDR8100 is an exception. This device
uses the ‘=’ symbol.)

In most measurement screens you can also select the SurvCE icon at the top left to
access the hot list of shortcuts to other routines.

While in any Topo or Stakeout routine, a number of features are accessible by

pressing ALT, followed by the corresponding Hot Key. Below is a list of Hot
Keys arranged by routine and equipment type.

Action in Topo Mode Summary

Key GPS Conventional TS Robotic TS

A Take Read and Store (All) Read and Store (All)
Average
Reading
B Total Station Setup Total Station Setup
C Configure Configure Reading Configure Reading
Reading
D Monitor Manual Read Leica: Toggle EDM; Others:
GPS Manual Read
E

p33
F Freeze Freeze Points Freeze Points
Points
G Start/Stop Start/Stop Interval
Interval Recording
Recording
H Help Help Help
I Inverse Inverse Inverse
J Sokkia Motorized: Joystick
Joystick
K Calculator Calculator Calculator
L Feature Feature Code List Feature Code List
Code List
M View Map View Map View Map
N
O Offset Offset Point Collection Offset Point Collection
Point
Collection
P List Points List Points List Points
Q Toggle Toggle Prompt for Toggle Prompt for Hgt/Desc
Prompt Hgt/Desc
for
Hgt/Desc
R Read Read and Store
S Store Store Store
T Traverse Traverse
U
V View Raw View Raw File View Raw File
File
W Write Job Write Job Notes Write Job Notes
Notes
X Exit to Exit to Main Menu Exit to Main Menu
Main
Menu
Y Toggle Toggle Graphics/Text Toggle Graphics/Text Mode
Graphics/ Mode
Text
Mode
Z Zoom to Zoom to Point Zoom to Point
Point

p34
Action in Stakeout Mode Summary

Key GPS Conventional TS Robotic TS

A
B Total Station Setup Total Station Setup
C Configure Configure Reading Configure Reading
Reading
D Monitor GPS Leica: Toggle EDM
E Set Target Set Target Elevation Set Target Elevation
Elevation
F Freeze Points Freeze Points Freeze Points
G
H Help Help Help
I Inverse Inverse Inverse
J Sokkia Motorized: Joystick
Joystick
K Calculator Calculator Calculator
L Feature Code Feature Code List Feature Code List
List
M View Map View Map View Map
N Next Next Point/Station to Next Point/Station to
Point/Station to Stake Stake
Stake
O
P List Points List Points List Points
Q
R Read Read and Store
S Store Store Store
T
U
V View Raw File View Raw File View Raw File
W Write Job Notes Write Job Notes Write Job Notes
X Exit to Main Exit to Main Menu Exit to Main Menu
Menu

p35
 Y Toggle Toggle Graphics/Text Toggle Graphics/Text
Graphics/Text Mode Mode
Mode
Z Zoom to Point Zoom to Point Zoom to Point

Instrument Selection

The user can switch between current instruments using the Instrum ent Selection
flyout on the top bar of the SurvCE.

Input Box Controls

When point IDs are used to determine a value, the program will search for the
point IDs in the current job. If not found it will then search in the control job, if
active.

Formatted Distance/Height Entries

Entries for distances or heights that include certain special or commonly
understood measurement extensions are automatically interpreted as a unit of
measurement and converted to the working units as chosen in job setup. For
example, a target height entry of 2m is converted to 6.5617 feet if units are
configured for feet. The extension can appear after the number, separated by a
space (2 m), or can be directly appended to the number (2m). For feet and inch
conversion, the second decimal point informs the software that the user is entering
fractions (See Below). Recognized text and their corresponding units are shown
below:

 f or ft: US Feet
p36
 i or ift: International Feet
 in: Inches
 cm: Centimeters
 m: Meters
 #.##.#: Feet and Inches (e.g. 1.5.3.8 = 1'5 3/8" either entry format is
supported)

These extensions are automatically recognized for target heights and instrument
heights, and within certain distance entry dialogs. Entries are not case sensitive.

Formatted Bearing/Azimuth Entries

Most directional commands within SurvCE allow for the entry of both azimuths
and bearings. Azimuth entries are in the form 350.2531 (DDD.MMSS),
representing 350 degrees, 25 minutes and 31 seconds. But that same direction
could be entered as N9.3429W or alternately as NW9.3429. SurvCE will accept
both formats. Additional directional entry options, which might apply to
commands such as Intersection under Cogo, are outlined below:

If options in Job Settings are set to Bearing and Degrees (360 circle), the user can
enter the quadrant number before the angle value.

Example
120.1234

The result is N20°12’34’’E.

Quadrants
1 NE
2 SE
3 SW
4 NW

In the case where Job Settings have been set for Bearing, and the user would like
to enter an Azimuth, the letter A can be placed before the azimuth value and the
program will convert it to a Bearing.

Example
A20.1234

The result is N20°12’34’’E.

p37
In the case where Job Settings is set to Azimuth and the user would like to enter a
bearing, the quadrant letters can be used before the bearing value.

Example
NW45.0000

The result is 315°00’00”.

Formatted Angle Entries

Interior Angle: The user can compute an angle defined by three points by entering
the point IDs as <Point ID>,<Point ID>,Point ID>. The program will return the
interior angle created by the three points using the AT-FROM-TO logic. Such
entries might apply to the Angle Right input box in Store Points when configured
to Manual Total Station.

Example
1,2,3

Using the coordinates below, the result is 90°00 ’00”. Point 2 would be the vertex
point.

Pt. North East

1 5500 5000
2 5000 5000
3 5000 5500

Mathematical Expressions
Mathematical expressions can be used in nearly all angle and distance edit box es.
For example, within the Intersection routine, an azimuth can be entered in the form
255.35-90, which means 255 degrees, 35 minutes minus 90 degrees. Additionally,
point-defined distances and directions can be entered with a comma as separator,
as in 4,5. If point 4 to point 5 has an azimuth of 255 degrees, 35 minutes, then the
same expression above could be entered as 4,5-90. For math, the program handles
“/”, “*”, “-“ and “+”. To go half the distance from 103 to 10, enter 103,10/2.

Point Ranges
When ranges of points are involved, such as in stakeout lists, a dash is used. Y ou
can enter ranges in reverse (e.g.. 75-50), which would create a list of points from
75 down to 50 in reverse order.

p38
Survey Data Display Controls
ANGLE
The angle control will display the angle as defined by the current settings in Job
Settings.

Options are available for Azimuth (North or South) or Bearing combined with the
option of Degrees or Grads.

Format
The display format of degrees uses the degree, minute, and second symbols. For
the case of a bearing we display the quadrant using the characters N, S, W, E.

Example Bearing
N7°09'59"E
Example Azimuth
7°09'59"

All angular values entered by the user should be in the DD.MMSS format.

Example
7.0959
The result is 7°09'59".

Formulas
Formulas can be entered for working with angles. The format must have the
operator after the angle value.
Example
90.0000 * 0.5
The result would be 45°00’00”

DISTANCE
The distance control will display the value using the current Job Settings unit. Y ou
can enter a formula using the mathematical operators as described above.

Inverse
You can compute a distance from a point-to-point inverse by entering <Point
ID>,<Point ID>.
Example
1,2
Using the coordinates listed below, the result is 500 ’.
Pt. North East

p39
1 5500 5000
2 5000 5000

STATION
The station control will display the value using the current Job Settings format.
The same options described above for distance input box es apply.

SLOPE
The slope control will display the value using the current Job Settings format.

Keyboard Operation
Carlson SurvCE allows the user to operate the interface entirely from keyboard
navigation, as well as touch screen navigation. The rules for keyboard navigation
are outlined below:

Controls
 Button (Radio Buttons, Check Boxes and Standard Buttons )
o Enter: Select the button.
o Right/Left Arrows: Move to the next tab stop.
 Right [Tab]
 Left [Shift+Tab]
o Up/Down Arrows: Move to the next tab stop.
 Down [Tab]
 Up [Shift+Tab]
o Tab: Move to the next tab stop.
 Drop List
o Enter: Move to the next tab stop.
o Right/Left Arrows: Move to the next tab stop.
 Right [Tab]
 Left [Shift+Tab]
o Up/Down Arrows: Move through the list items.
o Tab: Move to the next tab stop.
 Edit Box
o Enter: Move to the next tab stop. For any measurement screen,

p40
 if focus is in the description edit box , take a reading. For all
other edit boxes, ENTER moves through the tab stops.
o Right/Left Arrows: Move through the text like standard
windows.
o Up/Down Arrows: Move to the next tab stop.
 Down [Tab]
 Up [Shift+Tab]
o Tab: Move to the next tab stop.
 Tab
o Enter: Move to the next tab stop.
o Right/Left Arrows: Move through the tabs.
 Right Next Tab
 Left Previous Tab
o Up/Down Arrows: Move to the next tab stop.
 Down [Tab]
 Up [Shift+Tab]
o Tab: Move to the next tab stop.

Abbreviations
 Adr: Address
 AR: Angle Right
 Avg: Average
 Az: Azimuth
 Bk: Back
 Calc: Calculate
 Char: Character
 Chk: Check
 cm: Centimeter
 Coord(s): Coordinate(s)
 Ctrl: Control
 Desc: Description
 Dev: Deviation
p41
 Diff: Difference
 Dist: Distance
 El: Elevation
 Fst: Fast
 ft: Foot
 Fwd: Forward
 HD: Horizontal Distance
 HI: Height of Instrument.
 Horiz: Horizontal
 Ht: Height or Height of Antenna with G PS.
 HT: Height of Target.
 ID: Identifier
 ift: International Foot
 in: Inch
 Inst: Instrument
 Int: Interval
 L: Left
 m: Meter
 No: Number
 OS: Offset
 Prev: Previous
 Pt: Point ID
 Pts: Points
 R: Right
 Rdg: Reading
 SD: Slope Distance
 Sta: Station
 Std: Standard
 Vert: Vertical
 ZE: Zenith

p42
FILE
This chapter provides information on using the commands from the File menu.

Job
This command allows you to select an existing coordinate file for your job or to
create a new coordinate file. The standard file selection dialog box appears for
choosing a coordinate file, as shown in the next figure. Buttons for moving up the
directory structure, creating a new folder, listing file names and listing file details
appear in the upper right corner of the dialog box .

p43
All data points you collect are stored in the coordinate (.crd) file you select or
create. The .crd file extension will automatically be appended to the file name.

Select Existing Job

To select an existing job, browse to and select an existing file, then select OK (the
green check icon).

Create a New Job

To create a new job, simply enter a new name and select OK. You can control
where your job is saved by browsing to the desired folder where the job is to be
created before entering the new name and selecting OK. You can also create a new
folder for this new file name. Following job creation, you will be asked to enter in
Job Attribute information. This feature lets you set up prompting for each new job
with job-related attributes like Client, Jurisdiction, Weather Conditions and the
like. This is discussed in detail in the Job Setting section.

Note: If you key in a coordinate file that already exists, it will load the file instead
of overwriting it with a new file. This benefit to this feature is that you cannot
accidentally overwrite an existing coordinate file from within Carlson SurvCE.

Job Settings (New Job)

p44
This tab allows you to configure how all new jobs will be created.

 Prompt for First Pt: This option specifies whether or not SurvCE will
prompt you to specify a starting point when starting a new job. If enabled, you
specify the default starting point coordinates in the left column. This applies
for total station use only.
 Prompt for Units: This option specifies whether or not SurvCE will prompt
you to set the units when you start a new job.
 Use Last Job Localization: If this feature is enabled, each new job will use
the previous job’s localization file and project scale. If this feature is
disabled, each new job will start out with no localization and a project scale of
1.0. The default value is off.
 Attach Last Control Data: This allows the user to use the same control file
on all new jobs. With this option off, the control file will automatically be
deactivated during new job creation.
 Cutsheets: Auto-Save by job will automatically create cutsheet files (in the
last format used) for each new job. If your job was named Macon1.crd, then
the 3 cutsheet files created would be Macon1-Pt.txt (for non-alignment,
point-only stakeout), Macon1-CL.txt (for stakeout involving alignments) and
Macon1-Sl.txt (for slope staking). Recall Previous will allow the user to use
the same cutsheets on all new jobs. With Manual, the control file will
automatically be deactivated during new job creation and you will need to
create cutsheet files within the Stake tab of Job Settings.
p45
 Use Template DXF: This allows users to create an empty DXF file that
contains all of the layers and colors that will be used and displayed in the
field. The advantage of this is in particular with use of Feature Codes for
linework. If you designate code 201, for example, as a pavement edge in the
layer BitPav, you could make a blank DXF drawing with BitPav layer created,
set to color blue. Then using that "template dxf" file, everytime you code a
201, you will see the blue linework as an extra confirmation of correct coding.
This color-coding could be repeated for other often used layers.
 Define Job Attributes: This lets you set up prompting, for each new job, for
job-related attributes like Client, Jurisdiction, Weather Conditions, Party
Chief and other notes. These will prompt when each new job is started, and
the attributes and entries will appear in the raw file (.rw5) file. Select Add to
enter new attributes.

Job Settings (System)

This tab allows you to define the units for the current job.

p46
 Distance: Select the units that you want to use. Choices include US Feet,
International Feet, and Metric. If US Feet or International Feet is selected, you
have the option to display distances as decimal feet (Dec Ft) or Feet and
Inches (Inches). This is a display property only and will not change the format
of the data recorded to the raw file.
 Angle: This offers the option of degrees (360 circle, 60 minutes to a degree
and 60 seconds to a minute) or gons (also refered to as grads- 400 circle and
fully decimal). An angle of 397.9809 gons is equivalent to 358 degrees, 10
minutes and 58 seconds. (Note: you can verify this in Cogo, Calculator,
Conversion tab). The Angle Unit configuration impacts commands such as
Inverse, Traverse, Sideshot, Input-Edit Centerline and other commands where
a direction is displayed or entered.
 Zero Azimuth Setting: Allows you to specify the direction for zero azimuth,
North or South.

Job Settings (Options)

This tab allows you to set configuration options for the current job.

p47
 Time Stamp Each Point: When enabled, a date and time stamp will be noted
in the raw file beside each point. Raw files in Carlson SurvCE have a .RW5
extension and are nearly identical to the TDS .RW5 format. See the image
below for simple SurvCE .RW5 file.

 Store GPS Accuracy in Raw File : This option is available when configured

p48
 to any GPS equipment. If enabled, the horizontal and vertical quality as
reported by the GPS will be stored to the raw file with each point (RMS or
CEP/SEP typically).
 Auto Load Map and Auto S ave Map: Maps can be viewed in the MAP and
Graphic views within Carlson SurvCE. These maps can be created by using
the command IDXF which imports a DXF drawing file. AutoCad DXF
formats 12 through 2000 are fully compatible and will import. Micros tation
DXF files and DXF files from other CAD programs will also work. Linework
(referred to as polylines) can be produced within the MAP view by using the
PL (polyline) command, or other commands such as Offset (O2 and O3). In
addition, use of Feature Codes, where linework is associated with field codes
such as EP for edge-of-pavement, will lead to the drawing of polylines in the
Map view. These maps can then be auto-saved whenever you ex it a
coordinate file, and auto-loaded whenever you load a particular coordinate
file. The maps are saved in DXF format. It is typical to enable both Auto
Load Map and Auto Save Map if you want to auto-recall your latest map. If
Auto Load Map is on and Auto Save Map is turned off, you will recall the
map that was saved previously—when Auto Save Map was on. If you want to
start your map from a clean slate (from the point plot only —which always
appears in map view), you can turn off Auto Load Map and re-enter the
program. Then add polylines, use IDXF to import maps (polylines), then click
on Auto Save Map and Auto Load Map and you will store and recall only the
new linework.

p49
 Note: The above graphic display is non-default. In the Map screen, the
normal display includes pull down menus. These can be disabled by selecting
Preferences under the Tools menu. The screen shown below will appear with
display options. The pull down menu format is recommended, since it
contains the same graphic space, and also responds identically to keyed-in
commands (such as PL for polyline).

 Recall Job Road Files: This command only applies to Stakeout Centerline,
Offset Stakeout, and Point Projection in the non-roading version of Carlson
SurvCE. When enabled, this option will recall the last roading files
(centerlines, profiles, templates, superelevation files, etc.) used in road
stakeout. Routines in the Road menu such as Stake Road and Slope Staking
will automatically recall the last-used roading files
 Recall Job Localization: Enabling this option is advisable if you are working
on the same job with GPS equipment for several days. It allows you to set up
the base in the same location, change only the base antenna height in
Configure Base (if applicable), then continue to work. You must have at least
1 point in the file (which initiates the RW5, “raw”, file) for the GPS
localization to be auto-recalled. With this option disabled, you would have to
go to Localization within the Equip menu and Load the stored localization
(.dat) file. Even with the option turned on, you can always move to a new job
and create or load another localization file. The localization file (*.dat file) is
recalled as long as there is at least one coordinate point in the job.

p50
 Use Code Table for Descriptions: This feature will cause the codes in the
feature code list to appear as selectable options when storing points. When
enabled, Configure Reading is set to Ht/Desc Prompt on Save. If the code
table includes FL, EP, IP and LP for example, these appear within the Store
Point routine.

 Use Control File: The control file is used for selecting and using points that
don’t exist in your current working file.
 Select File: You need to select a file for the control file. The chosen file
appears, and will remain as the default control file, even when the control file
option is disabled (in which case it is grayed out). Control files remain
associated with active coordinate files.

General Rule: Carlson SurvCE will always look for the defined point in
the current working file first, and then the control file. If the point is not
found in either file, a warning that the point does not ex ist will be
displayed. You can force a point to come from the control file or the
current file, regardless of settings, by using the List icon to the right of
the point ID input box. While in the point list selection window, select
the Control file radio button prior to selecting the desired point.
Stakeout Option: Control files work similarly in stakeout. However,
you can go to the STAKEOUT tab in Job Settings and set the program to
give priority to the control file points when duplicate points ex ist. If this

p51
 option is turned on, and the selected point is found in both files, you will
actually be staking out the point from the control file.
Coordinate File Rule: At no time will a point be automatically copied
from the control file into the current file. This allows users to avoid large
gaps in coordinate files and eliminates the potential for conflicting points.
Raw Data File Rule: Any time a point is occupied, the occupation
record (OC) is written to the raw file for processing purposes. There will
not be an SP record written for control file points, only an OC record.
Note that if the raw file is reprocessed, the point will be written to the
current coordinate file.

Job Settings (Format)

This tab allows you to select the viewing format of the data displayed and entered
in the current job.

 Coordinate Display Order: This option allows you to display coordinates

with the order of North then East or East then North.
 Angle Entry and Display: Options are Bearing or Azimuth. This applies to
numerous commands, such as prompting and displays in Sideshot Traverse

p52
 (the backsight as azimuth or bearing), Intersections, and Inverse.
 Vertical Observation Display: Allows you to set the default prompting to
Zenith (0 degrees up, 90 degrees level), Vertical Angle (90 degrees up, 0
degrees level) or Elevation Difference (up is positive in absolute units, down
is negative). Normally combine Elevation Difference with Horizontal
Distance. If combined with Slope Distance, the non-zero Elevation Difference
will be used to compute the equivalent zenith angle and will reduce the Slope
Distance to a lesser Horizontal Distance. (Applies to entries in Manual Total
Station mode).
 Distance Observation Display: Options are Slope or Horizontal. This
applies to the values displayed from total station readings.
 Slope Entry and Display: Whenever slopes are reported or prompted, you
have the option to specify the default in Percent, Degrees or Ratio; however,
some commands such as 3D Inverse will automatically report both slope and
ratio and are unaffected.
 Station Display: This option impacts the display of centerline stationing,
sometimes referred to as “chainage”. In the U.S., for example, roads designed
in feet are “stationed” by every 100 feet, so that a road at linear position
14280.5 is given a station of 142+80.50. Metric roads in the U.S. are often
stationed by kilometers, where the same road position has a station of
14+280.500. You can configure the placement of the “+” as desired,
independent of your configuration for metric vs feet units. You can also
configure for a purely decimal display of stationing/chainage, as in 14280.500.
This display form shows up in such commands as Input-Edit Centerline,
within the Start Station dialog box. Please note that you should still input the
stationing in purely numeric form, without the “+” convention. Only the
display is impacted by this option.

Job Settings (Stake)

This tab allows you to set configuration options for the stakeout routines.

p53
 Precision: Use this to control the decimal precision reported during stakeout
routines.

 Store Data Note File: This option specifies whether or not to store the
stakeout data in the note file (.NOT) for the current job. At the end of staking
out a point, there is an option to store the staked coordinates in the current
job. Note (.NOT) files are associated with points, so you must store the point
to also store the cutsheet note. This additional data includes the target
coordinates for reference. Keep in mind that the cut and fill data is also
stored in the raw file. You can also store an ASCII cutsheet file using the
button at the bottom of the dialog, so storing into the note file is somewhat
redundant. SurvCE does not show the cutsheet note within List Points (notes
turned on), since this feature only shows notes that begin with “Note:” The
one advantage of the note file is that notes are viewable in association with
points using Carlson Software office products such as Carlson SurvCadd,
Carlson Survey, or Carlson Survey Desktop. See command Cutsheet Report,
option Note File.

 Control File Points have Priority for Stakeout: This option, which applies
to both total stations and GPS, will give priority to the control file point
during stakeout, when the point requested ex ists in both the current file and
the control file.

p54
 Note: Use this option with care. You may not realize that this option
is set, and will discover that directions to your expected stakeout point
of 10 are really based on a point 10 from another file altogether – the
control file.

 Use Automatic Descriptions: This allows you to have descriptions

automatically entered for staked locations based on the settings defined by
the Auto Descriptions dialog.

Stake Offset Desc

This allows you to define what the ID is called for each offset location in the Stake
Offset routine.

Auto Descriptions
This button allows you to configure the point description when you store points in
stakeout. The very act of storing a staked point is optional. Y ou can stake a point
or a station and offset, but must click Store Point within the stakeout screens to
actually store a point. If you do choose to store the point, the description is
configurable. See image below.

p55
A user in Australia or Great Britain might want to change the STA for
“Station” to CH for “Chainage”. An example of a typical stake
description, based on your configuration settings, is shown at the
bottom left of the screen. The first line (STK1317 CB#22 CUT
2.100) represents a typical Stake Point description, where CB#22 is
the description you would enter, and the rest is governed by your
Stake Description settings. Similarly, if centerline-based stakeout is
being conducted, then the lower line would apply. The description
(CL in this case) is the only aspect entered by the user in the field
during stakeout. All the rest is reported based on your Stake
Description settings. If you turn off an item, note how it will not
appear in the reported “sample” description. The “+” in the station
can also be configured to appear or not appear, but this is set globally
within the Units Tab of Job Settings. The behavior of the On/Off,
Up/Down and Update buttons is identical to that discussed above in
the Cutsheet discussion.

Other routines, particularly Cross Section Survey and Slope Staking

(part of the Roading features), have their own settings for
descriptions. When any automatic description for stakeout is turned
on, the program will no longer default to the last-entered description;
it will use the “automatic” description instead. If you type a new
description, you will turn off the “automatic” stakeout description. If
you delete the default (new) description, the program will return to

p56
 using the automatic stakeout description. To delete, you can simply
place the cursor in the description field and hit the delete key — there
is no need to first highlight the description.

Alignment Settings
This dialog allows the user to define how all alignments and roads are staked.

Alignments Tab
 Increment from Starting Station: For centerlines that start on an “odd”
station such as 1020 (10+20 in U.S. stationing format), this option would
conduct stakeout by interval measured from station 1020. So a 50 interval
stakeout, instead of being 1050, 1100, 1150 would be 1020, 1070, 1120, etc.
 Extend Alignments: This projects a tangent line off of the first and last
segments of the alignment for extending them beyond their defined limits.
 Stake Start and End Stations: This instructs the software to stop at these
critical locations even when they do not fall on the even station.
 Stake CL Alignment Points: This instructs the software to stop at these
critical locations even when they do not fall on the even station.
 Stake Profile Points: This instructs the software to stop at these critical
locations even when they do not fall on the even station.
 Stake High and Low Points: This instructs the software to stop at these
critical locations even when they do not fall on the even station.

p57
 Combine Station Equations: This allows the user to overlap the station
equations.
 Apply Station Equations: This allows the user to ignore the station equations
so that the station reflects the length of the alignm ent.
 Offset Gap Type: Fillet: This allows the user to define the offset gap type
used when defining offsets within Stakeout Line/Arc routine at a straight
corners as: radius fillet or radius zero fillet.
 Limit Station Range: When selected, the program will not automatically
advance beyond the natural start and end of a given centerline.
 Use Station and Offset List: Use this option to load a predefined list of
stations and offsets. This allows the Stake Offset routine to use a pre-defined
list of station, offset, and elevation information as defined by the user. This is
sometimes referred to as “Cutsheet” list. An ASCII file with a .CUT file
extension is required. The file format is shown below:

Station, Offset, Elevation, Description, as in

20100, -11.5, 102.34,
20109.23, -11.5, 102.35, PC

Road Tab

 Next icon advances to: This defines how the "Next" icon will behave. It can
advance to the next station or the next offset location.

p58
  Stake Section File Locations: This instructs the software to stop at these
critical locations even when they do not fall on the even station.
 Sections Include Catch Points: This instructs the software whether or not
the design sections were extracted to the shoulder or the design catch
location. If the design catch location is included in the section, the software
will automatically determine the pivot point at the next interior section point
for slope staking purposes. The design slope ratio will be determined by the
last two points in the section.
 Always Zoom All: This zooms the preview window automatically to fit the
extents of the current section.
 Zoom In/Out: This determines the zoom increment of the preview window.
 Vertical Scale: This allows the user to exaggerate the scale vertically.
 Degree of Curvature: This allows the user to define the value of the base
value used to define the degree of curvature: 100 ft it is the default value
used for US Feet or US International Feet.
 Use Railroad Type Curves: This allows the user to define the use of
railroad definition for the curves present within the alignment used inside the
Stakeout Line/Arc routine.

Cutsheets
There can be as many as three cutsheet files active at one time, one for point
staking cutsheets, one for centerline staking cutsheets and one for slope stake
cutsheets. All three cutsheet files can be given distinct names, and any of the three
can be turned on or off for purposes of storing. It is even possible to have a fourth,
named, cutsheet file if cutsheets are turned on within Cross Section Survey in the
Roading menu. And finally, if cutsheets are reported from the raw file, a distinct
new name can be assigned prior to recalling the raw file and creating the cutsheet
file. All cutsheet files are ASCII and can be viewed in a tex t editor or an Excel
Spreadsheet.

The Cutsheets button leads to the following options:

p59
 Point Stakes: Toggling this option on enables writing to the selected
cutsheet file. The buttons allow the user to select the file, customize the Point
Cutsheet report format as well as edit and view the current point cutsheet
file. This applies to the command Stake Points.
 Alignment Stakes: Toggling this option on enables writing to the selected
cutsheet file. The buttons allow the user to select the file, customize the
Alignment Cutsheet report format, and edit and view the current alignment
cutsheet file. This applies to commands within Stake Line/Arc, and to Offset
Stakeout, Point Projection and Stake Road (in Roading) and includes station
and offset options in the stored file, as well as cut/fill. A special
“centerline-style” cutsheet file, containing station and offset inform ation, can
be named and saved within the Roading command, Cross Section Survey.
This file is viewable in the editor within Set Cl Cutsheet Format, but has no
cut/fill values, just “as-built” data. Centerline-based cutsheets have more
configurable options in the report, such as Stake Station, Staked Offset,
Design Station and Design Offset. The Design Point ID is one of the
configurable items to report, and since commands such as Offset Stakeout,
Point Projection and Stake Road do not stake out Point IDs, the program
uses either the command name (CL for Stake Centerline, PP for Point
Projection), offset reference, or template ID as the “design point name”.
“RCurb”, for example, would be the name given to the design point in Offset
Stakeout for top of curb, right side. This might lead to a variety of ID names
for the design point.
 Slope Stakes: Toggling this option on enables writing to the selected

p60
 cutsheet file. The buttons allow the user to select the file, customize the
Slope Stake Cutsheet report format as well as edit and view the current slope
stake cutsheet file. This applies only to the commands Stake Slope and Stake
Road available within Roading. Slope Stake Cutsheets have an ex tra option
to “Include progressive offsets report”, and also have different options such
as “Pivot Offset” , “Slope Ratio” and “Elevation: PP/CP” (Elevation of Pivot
Point and/or Offset Point). Note that columns can serve a dual purpose in
the slope stake report. If progressive offsets are enabled, the header lines
(such as Design Station) are ignored for the additional information, and you
obtain the incremental, delta distance and elevation from each point on the
section or template from the offset stake to the catch and then all the way
into centerline. These last three options allow you to customize the
respective output report. To change an item label, highlight the item, change
the Header Label field, then tap Update Item. You can select an item in the
list and turn it ON or OFF (no reporting). You can also control the order of
the report items by using the Move Down and Move Up buttons. Changes
must be made prior to starting a new cutsheet file.
 Select File: Tap this button to select the output file. The file name is shown
below this button.

Format
Select the format button to configure each cutsheet to your liking. Column order
and column headers are completely user-defined and any column can be turned off
if not useful.

p61
  Header Label: You can substitute header text of your own choice for the
defaults. Here, the text Pt ID was substituted for Design Pt#. Tap Update
Item after changing a Header Label. These changes should be done prior to
starting a new cutsheet file—they cannot be applied retroactively to a file
that already contains information. However, the header line in that file (e.g.
Market.txt) can always be edited using Notepad or any tex t editor to
accomplish the change.
 Down-Up: Items in the list can be moved up and down to change their
order. For example, if you prefer Fill before Cut in the report, just move Cut
down below Fill.
 Cutsheet from Raw: SurvCE automatically stores cutsheet data and header
information to the raw file for the job. You can capture and report the
cutsheet information directly from the raw file. Before doing this, it is
recommended that you start a new cutsheet file, configure the header lines,
and order of information as desired, then run “Cutsheet from Raw”.

Edit File
Select this option to edit and review the cutsheet file. Shown below is a point
cutsheet file as viewed in the Edit File option. Notice that the vertical bars of the
spreadsheet can be moved left and right to condense the display and who more of
the header lines. Just pick them in the title line and move them. The Cutsheet
editor also includes the ability to insert and delete lines. If you insert a line and
enter a Design Elevation and a Stake Elevation, the program will compute the cut
or fill. Using the Special button, you can increase or decrease the Pt ID, Design
Elevation or Stake Elevation by any desired amount, and the cut or fill will be
computed. Do not use the Special button to directly modify the cut or fill.

p62
List Points
This command will list all of the points in the current coordinate (.crd) file. You
can also edit any point in the list.

p63
The above figure shows the List Points dialog. The point list includes Point ID,
Northing, Easting, Elevation, and Description. Columbs can be shifted to condense
the display, as desired. The new positions, however, are not stored.

 Details: The number of points and highest point number in the file will
now appear in the Details option.

 Settings: Select the Settings button to customize the List Points

display. The next figure shows the Settings dialog for List Points.

p64
 Show Point Notes: Notes can be placed in any order on the list, or can
be disabled, as shown above. (Only notes entered in response to “Prom pt
for Point Notes” or “Edit Notes” within List Points itself will display.
Notes for GPS accuracy, time stamps and cutsheets, for ex ample, appear
in the raw file but not within List Points.)
Add to Next Pt ID: This makes it possible to number sequentially using
1 or add 2 to every point to skip every other number.
Move Up/Down: To rearrange the order of the fields, highlight a field
and use the Move Down and Move Up buttons.
Display Name: To rename a field, highlight it, enter a new name in the
Display Name field and then tap Update Item. This feature allows
customization so that, for instance, Northing and Easting could become
X and Y as renamed.
Precision (Elevation Digits - North & East Digits): The decimal
precision for each field can also be set in the Options dialog.

 Edit: To edit a point in the list, double tap on it or highlight the point and tap
the Edit button. You may edit any aspect of the point. To edit, move the cursor
into the field of the aspect to modify and enter the new value. Choose OK to
enter the edited point into the coordinate file, or choose Cancel to negate your
modifications. The Input/Edit Attributes button refers to GIS data attributes
associated with a point. These GIS attributes will export in the form of shape
files (Tools pull down in the Map screen). Few surveyors currently need the
GIS attributing features of Carlson SurvCE, but these features help link
p65
 SurvCE to the ESRI world, just as the DXF output of linework links to the
CAD world.

Note: If only the description value is edited, the raw data file will be
updated without writing a store point record. If any other value that
would change the point position is edited, the raw data file will record a
store point record with the new position of the point.

 Add: To add a point, press the Add button. The Add Point dialog appears
and you must enter the point ID, northing and easting. A store point record
will be written to the raw data file.
 Find: To find a point ID, tap the Find button. You can search for a point by
Point ID or description, but not both at the same time. When searching by
description, any part of the description can be used to find the point and the
search "gs*" has the same effect as "gs" to find points beginning with gs.
Both would find the description “gs Sta 1+00 L25”.

p66
 Delete: To delete a point, highlight a point ID and tap the Delete button. You
will be asked to confirm this choice before the point is actually deleted.
 Control File: When a control file is specified, List Points offers the option to
select the control file and to list the control file points. This feature enables
the From List option found throughout SurvCE to access Control Points. The
number of points and highest point number in the control file will now appear
in the Details option.

Raw Data
Carlson SurvCE creates a raw file (.RW5) that contains various lines of survey
data similar to a surveyors' field book. The data contained in the RW5 file will
vary depending upon whether a total station, robotic total station, or G PS is used
during the survey. The name of the RW5 file will default to the specified job name
(jobname.RW5). This command enables viewing and editing of the raw survey
data, as well as traverse closure and adjustment computations for the survey, for
both total station and GPS raw data. If total station shots are involved, a graphical
representation of the traverse can also be viewed using this command.

p67
Total Station and GPS Use
Total station adjustments are conducted differently from GPS adjustments (
Process GPS). If you wish to adjust your GPS first for control, and then calculate
your total station traverse, first select Process GPS. Then use Process No Adjust
, or Compass , as desired.

Process Raw File Operations: Total Station, GPS, Reporting,

Editing
SurvCE has made available four different types of raw file processing. You can
process or draw your total station traverse, report out the Direct-Reverse
measurements, Process GPS, and Review and Edit the RW5 file.

Note that for all processing where new coordinates are calculated, beginning with
SurvCE 2.0, upon exit the program will prompt you whether or not to store the
newly calculated points into the coordinate file. This provides the flexibility to
experiment with different processing settings and options without impacting the
actual stored coordinates, until you deliberately choose to do so.

Total Station Adjustments

If you wish to adjust or draw a total station traverse, you would choose any of the
following: Process No Adjust, Angle Balance, Transit, Compass , Crandall or
Draw Traverse Lines. All of these commands have the same four-tab menu
system, outlined below.

p68
 Total Station Tab: Reduce to Grid Coordinates will perform a “ground to
grid” calculation based on your GPS projection used, viewable in the
projection tab. The Scale setting will multiply all distance measurements by
the entered scale factor. Apply Curvature and Refraction will compute
curvature and refraction distinctly on all raw measurements and adjust
accordingly.

p69
 GPS Projection Tab: This tab, critical for GPS calculation, only applies for
total station work when Reduce to Grid Coordinates is set on within the
Total Station Tab. To change the active projection, go to the GPS tab under
Job Settings.

 Redundancies Tab: This screen covers the handling of multiple

p70
measurements to the same point, known as redundancies. There are three
options for Method: Use First, Use Last or Average. For ex ample, if you
shot point 10 a total of four times, you could choose to use the first reading,
the last reading or average them all. If you select Average, then the Average
Type option becomes available. Here you can choose from coordinate or
distance measurement. If you shot point 10 four times, twice from two
different setups, and then chose coordinate under the Average Options
drop-down, then the 4 northings and eastings computed would be averaged. If
you chose instead Distance Measurement, then the two measurements would
first be averaged, and then the two distinct coordinates calculated for point 10
(using the averaged measurements) would themselves be averaged.

The Backsight Reciprocal option provides special treatment for reciprocals.

A foresight to point 15 from a setup on 14, followed by a backsight from 15 to
14, makes a pair of “reciprocal” readings. The backsight reciprocal reading
can be ignored (for its impact on recalculating the occupied point), or the
Elevation component of the reciprocal measurements can be averaged, or both
the Elevation and Distance can be averaged, to recalculate the setup (occupied
point) coordinates. The program will calculate reciprocals for backsight direct
(BD) records. First set Backsight Reciprocals to Average Elevation. Then if
you foresight from 2 to 3, for example, then occupy 3 and backsight 2, the
stored BD record will lead to an averaged delta Z calculation for point 3
within Process No Adjust or any of the other adjustment options. If the
Tolerances entered above are exceeded, then warning screens appear during
the processing.

Note: If there are significant redundancies in a traverse (reciprocal

readings, D&R sets, multiple measurements to the same point from
different setups, multiple tie shots into control) then it is recommended
that the raw file be processed in a Network Least Squares program back
at the office, such as SurvNet which is an add-on to Carlson Survey or
Carlson Civil.

p71
 Other Tab (for D&R Measurements): This tab contains settings for how to
use direct and reverse (D&R) measurements. For the vertical angles, you can
balance the direct and reverse measurements or use Direct-Only. When you
have Foresight measurements and Backsight measurements (e.g. slope
distance/zenith angles) between the same points (e.g. reciprocals) in Direct
and Reverse surveys, you can Balance Foresight-Backsight measurements
(apply reciprocals) or use the Foresight data only. For purposes of warning
screens, you can also set the Angle Tolerance and Distance Tolerance for
Direct and Reverse measurement processing.

Process No Adjust
This command processes the RW5 file and computes coordinate values for the
surveyed data. No angle balance or traverse adjustment is applied. The Process
Raw Data Options dialog shown below appears after selecting Process No
Adjust.

p72
You can report the traverse only or compute all measurements by clicking on
Report Sideshots. If you click on Report Closure, then you need to specify a
Reference Closing Point ID, which is the point that the last traverse point is
closing to, or trying to match. The Reference Closing Point ID is not a point in
the traverse—it is the point the traverse is trying to close on. It can be entered as a
point ID or a coordinate.

Note: To preserve coordinate values of the initial setup and backsight, particularly
with D&R measurements involved, it is recommended that Redundancies be set
to Average by Distance Measurement , if averaging is used.

Pressing OK leads to the calculation and the report screen for Process No Adjust.

p73
Angle Balance
This method of processing applies an angle balance to the traverse lines when
calculating the coordinates. The angle balance takes the angular error divided by
the number of traverse lines and adjusts the angle of each traverse line by the
calculated amount. The angular error is the difference between the angle balance
shot and a reference angle. The program will prompt you to enter the traverse shot
to use as the angle balance shot. The measured direction between the occupied
point and the foresight point in the specified angle balance shot is then compared
to a reference angle. The reference angle is specified as a bearing, azimuth or by a
traverse line defined by entering a From Point and a To Point. The angle balance
process is initiated by selecting the angle balance option from the process raw file
menu.

p74
The Angle Balance Measurement dialog appears in the figure. Suppose a given
traverse started at 24, traversed up to 25, then around a loop and back to 24 (point
45). If point 45 was the end point or closing shot, the traverse leg from 45 to 46
could be the angle balance shot. It is very common, for ex ample, in closed-loop
traversing to take a closing angle shot from the closing point (45) by measuring the
angle along the first traverse leg (24 to 25). That is what occurred in the case of
this sample traverse.

p75
Next, the Reference Closing Angle dialog appears. Enter the bearing or azimuth
of the reference angle, or define the reference angle with points by entering in the
desired point numbers in the From Point and To Point fields. If using bearing or
azimuth, enter the bearing in DD.MMSS format and then select the correct
quadrant from the format field located at the bottom of the dialog. Once the
reference angle has been defined, then the angular error display will update with
the calculated angular error. The measured closing bearing and measured closing
azimuth is displayed at the top of the dialog box. If the reference angle has been
defined by point numbers, then the reference closing angle field will update and
display the defined angle. There is no need to select a format from the format field
if point numbers are used.

p76
Pressing the OK button, or the enter key, will execute the angle balance process,
and the process results will be displayed. The results display shows the closure
results before angle balance and after angle balance.

p77
The angular adjustment applied to each traverse leg is also displayed, along with
unadjusted angles and adjusted angles for each traverse leg. The adjusted
coordinates are written to the coordinate file replacing the unadjusted coordinate
values.

Transit, Compass, Crandall Adjustments

These methods apply the selected rule to the traverse lines when calculating the
coordinates. After adjusting the traverse points, the sideshots can also be
recalculated. The closure error is calculated as the difference between the
specified ending point and a reference point. The ending point is specified in the
initial dialog.

p78
You can change the ending point to correspond to the point in the traverse that
closes back to the existing reference point. In the current ex ample, point 26 is the
final shot, and is closing to an existing point, 10.

The reference point is specified by point ID or by entering the northing, easting

and elevation of the reference point.

p79
The process results show varying information depending on selected options from
the Process Raw Data Options dialog box.

 Reference Closing Point ID: The desired closing point number must be
entered into this field. If the closing point does not exist in the coordinate file,
the known coordinates can be entered into the North, East and Elevation fields
on the dialog box.
 Apply Angle Balance: This option performs an angle balance on the traverse
lines before the selected adjustment routine is processed. With this option
enabled, the Angle Balance Shot must be chosen from the Angle Balance
Measurement Dialog box. The adjustment method is applied without angle
balance computations.
 Vertical Error Adjustment: The vertical error between the starting and
ending points will be calculated and displayed in the results screen. An
adjustment value is determined and applied to the traverse points proportional
to their measured distance.
 Report Point Adjustment: The adjusted point coordinates and the original
point coordinates will be displayed in the results display under the adjusted
point comparison section.
 Report Unadjusted Points: Displays the unadjusted points in the results
screen.
 Report Sideshots: Displays sideshot data, original and adjusted, in the
results screen.

If Angle Balance is enabled, you will be asked for the closing angle shot, and the
reference closing angle screen will appear, which you complete as described in the
Angle Balance section above. The closure method will be applied to the
coordinates before or after angle balance, depending upon whether angle balance is
enabled.

The routine will conclude, for all three closure methods, by displaying the final,
adjusted angles, distances and coordinates. The coordinate values in the CRD file
will change as a result of the closure adjustment.

Draw Traverse Lines

This command employs the same four-tab screen as Process No Adjust and the
other adjustment routines. It displays a preview of the traverse configuration by
drawing lines between the traverse points. To start the command, select Draw
Traverse Lines from the Process Raw Menu. Inside the dialog, enter the
beginning and ending points to be drawn and press enter. The figure below shows
p80
an example of the results. To exit the preview screen, select the MENU button at
the top right of the screen.

Direct-Reverse Report
This command creates a report of direct and reverse shots along with the resulting
averaged shots. The residuals are the difference between the measurement and the
final average. Shown below is a direct and reverse report for a shot taken from
point 1, backsighting point 4 and foresighting point 100.

Direct-Reverse Report
Observations
Type Setup FSight HorzAngle Distance Vertical
BD 1 4 359.5958 279.8760 89.4827
BR 1 4 179.5945 279.9490 270.1114
FD 1 100 336.1603 211.2160 75.0056
FR 1 100 156.1601 211.2150 284.5848

BD 1 4 359.5948 279.9500 89.4824

BR 1 4 179.5942 279.9500 270.1111
FD 1 100 336.1608 211.2150 75.0052
FR 1 100 156.1601 211.2170 284.5850

Reduced Sets
HorzAngle Residual FS Diff. BK Diff.

p81
 336.1610 0.0004 0.0002 0.0013
336.1619 0.0005 0.0007 0.0006
Vertical Residual Diff.
75.0104 0.0004 0.0016
75.0101 0.0004 0.0018
Distance Residual Diff.
211.2155 0.0002 0.0010
211.2160 0.0002 0.0020

Means
HorzAngle SD Distance SD Vertical SD
336.1615 0.0004 211.2158 0.0002 75.0103 0.0001

Process GPS
If GPS measurements are detected in the RW5 file, then the Process GPS button
becomes available within Process Raw. The main dialog appears.

 GPS Tab: This tab displays the scale factor, which can be modified. If you
process the GPS coordinates with a scale factor other than 1, then the
coordinates will be calculated at a scaled distance from the first point in the
localization file. The Localization File and Geoid Files are shown (above,
Market12.dat), but can be changed by tapping the appropriate buttons, leading
to a file selection screen.

p82
 The Transformation Types are Plane Similarity (recommended default) and
Rigid Body , or No Scale . For One Point Localizations, north can be defined
by State Plane Grid or Geodetic North.

 Projection Tab: Displays selectable GPS grid system projections. This

projection list is created on the GPS tab under Job Settings.

p83
 Redundancies Tab: For multiple GPS measurements on the same point ID,
you can Use First, Use Last or Average all Readings.

When all settings are correct, select OK. The results appear in the Review File
dialog.

Edit Raw (RW5) Survey File

p84
The Raw Survey Notes can be reviewed and edited by selecting Edit Rw5 File. A
typical application of this feature is to edit or add rod height records. This is
useful in the event that changes in rod heights were not recorded at the tim e that
they were changed. The editor allows changes to virtually all measured data, but
will record the original data as a note (that cannot be deleted). Entries can be
Added, Edited or Removed, but even if removed, original data is retained in a
note.

To edit, highlight the desired line.

Tap the Edit button, and the line will appear in a specially formatted Edit dialog,
tailored to the type of data selected.

p85
For example, to change the foresight point to 101, click into the Foresight Point
dialog box, enter "101", then press OK. The data will be changed and a note added
showing the original data and indicating when it was edited.

If you click Add, you may then to select from a variety of record types.

p86
The Network Least Squares tab is a special option that allows you to designate
measurements for eventual processing in the Carlson SurvNet program (office
network least squares software).

If, for example, you pick Measure Standard Error, you can enter errors
appropriate for your instrument. This will reduce the entries required to process the
network least squares adjustment when back in the office.
p87
The Find option lets you globally change any set of characters in the raw file. It is
useful for changing a series of descriptions to a new description for purposes of
field-to-finish drawing. It is also useful for finding a particular shot that you recall
by number or description. For example, assume that you learned that the rod
height you noted as 4.700 was actually 4.833 due to an extra attachment measuring
0.133 in length. This feature would allow you to easily change all 4.700 rod
heights to 4.833. Direction “Up” would replace all occurrences of HR4.700 prior
to the currently highlighted line in the raw file. You can limit the search by use of
the In Field option by selecting only Descriptions, Notes or Points, or search All
records.

p88
Feature Code List
This command allows you to define default, ready-to-use descriptions. You can
create multiple feature code lists and each list can contain an unlimited number of
codes. Each feature code consists of a short code, a longer description, a polyline
toggle, and a polyline type setting. The initial dialog is shown below.

p89
Add a Feature Code
 Add: To add a code to the list, select this button. The Add Code dialog will
appear.

Select a Feature Code File

 Load: The Load button allows you to select a file to open or edit. Choose an
existing file or enter a new file name to create a new Feature Code List.
Feature Code List files have a *.FCL file extension.

Edit an Existing Code

 Edit: If you wish to edit an existing code, double tap on the code or highlight
it and tap Edit. It will appear in the Edit Code dialog.

Saving the Feature Code List

 Save As: Select the Save As button to save the file. Choose an existing file or
enter a new file name to create a new feature code list.

Remove an Existing Code

 Remove: To remove a code from the list, highlight an existing code and press
the Remove button. SurvCE will ask you to confirm deletion of the code.

The Add Code dialog is shown below. Below the figure is a description list of the
various options and buttons available in the dialog.

p90
Code: Enter the name of the Feature Code. For example, you might use
EP for edge of pavement.
Full Text: Enter a description for the code. This is only for your
information. It will not be added to the point description. It is
particularly helpful when using numeric codes, to remind you of what
they refer to.
Polyline ON: This setting determines whether points with this code are
joined together with linework when the points are plotted.
Polyline is 3D: Choose whether the polyline should be 3D or 2D. If you
choose YES, then each polyline vertex is located at the elevation of the
point. If you choose NO, then the entire polyline is constructed on
elevation 0, regardless of each point’s elevation. This setting is not
applicable if Polyline On is set to NO.
New Attributes: This option leads to GIS type attributing, where you can
further describe the code (e.g. fence) with additional attributes. For
example, one attribute might be Fence Type, and there may be 4 options,
with a default option. These can be set up, one time, by using the Add
option within New Attributes. Once setup, whenever a fence is chosen,
the attributes can be selected from a list. These attributes will be stored
in the raw file and most importantly, will output to an ESRI Shape file
(Map Screen, File pull down, Export SHP File). You can even control
the prompt and what the default attribute is (in this ex ample, “barbed
wire”) and whether each attribute entry is required, or just optional. With
this setting, any shot to “FL” for fence will jump into the GIS attribute

p91
screen. The setup screen for attributes is shown below.

Fence type is a user-defined attribute. But many attributes of the feature

are known by Carlson SurvCE (e.g. the current instrument being used, the
date and time, etc.). These types of known attributes appear in a list of
special codes, selectable above, and shown in the figure below.

p92
 Now, when you are collecting the points with an “FL” code, and the
program detects that you have shot a “point-only” feature, or if you are
shooting a line, that you have ended the line (e.g. FL END), then you will
be prompted for the attributes.

If there are several attributes associated with the fence (eg. height,
condition, etc.), then the Next and Previous buttons will be active. If
you have just taken three points along a fence line with G PS, the raw data
file will appear, within FILE  Raw Data  Edit RW5 File.

You also have the option not to save the attribute information, in which
case it will not appear in the raw file or be convertible to shape files using
the command Export SHP File found under File in the Map screen.

Special Code Suffixes

 Special Codes: In addition to the codes that you add to the Feature Code List,
there are some predefined code suffixes that you may use to end lines or start
curves. For example, FL END could end the fence line, with “END” being a
predefined special code. The need to append codes is one reason that the
"END" button on your data collector is useful, to move to the END of the
existing description so you can append a special code. Y ou can substitute new
codes for default codes, such that “..” can be substituted for “END” to end a
line. The special code suffixes can also be entered as prefix es, as in PC EP
(for start curve) rather than EP PC. Special Codes should be separated from
your actual feature codes by a space. However, the alias of “..” can go right
up against the feature code as in “FL..”. The special codes are described
below.

PC & PT: Used to specify the point of curvature (PC) and point of
tangency (PT) of a curve. If you are taking shots on a curve, use PC to
specify the beginning of the curve and PT to specify the end of the curve.
The PC special code will activate a 3-point arc automatically, so use of
the PT code in a 3-point arc is redundant and therefore it is not necessary.
You can even do a reverse curve by entering the PT instead as PC.
However, if you are picking up a meandering stream or tree line, PT is
useful to end the curving feature, and the program will “best fit” a curve
through all the surveyed points between the PC and PT codes.

p93
CLO: Use this code to close a figure. This tells the software to close
from the last point coded as CLO back to the first point of the figure.
Note that after using a special code such as "CLO", appended with a
space to the description code "BLD", that the program automatically
removes the special code as it defaults the next description to "BLD".
The "CLO" code also has the effect of ending the line and starting a new
line. It only works with codes defined as 2D or 3D polylines.

p94
SMO: Use this code to smooth the line through all of the points. This
code must occur on the first point of the line.

JPN: Use this code followed by a point ID to create a new line segment
between the current point and the entered point ID.
END (or ..): Use this code to end the line. You can also set any code for

p95
Begin Line, but keep in mind with SurvCE you only need to end a line,
and the next point with the same description will begin a new line.
RECT: This special code can be used in 2 different ways. You can take
measurements to 3 sides of a building and on the third side, add the
special code RECT, and the program will create a 4-sided building. Or
you can measure two sides of a building and enter the distance right
(RECT30) or distance left (RECT-20) to create the other, parallel sides.
Both methods are illustrated below.

OH and OV: You can also create horizontal offset lines and you can
offset these same lines vertically as well by combining OH and OV as in
EP OH0.5 OV0.5 (which might create a 6" over, 6" up back of curb
parallel 3D polyline). You can even do multiple offset lines as shown
below:

p96
This example here leads to a series of 4 parallel lines (for railroad tracks
in this case), all offset to the left (negative) of the direction of the points
120 through 126.

The OH and companion OV commands are flexible in that they can be

entered after the first point measured, such as on point 121 or 122.

p97
Using Short-Cut Icons to Append Special Codes
With the Prompt for Height and Description turned on within Configure,
you have the opportunity to choose from your ex isting descriptions saved
in your Feature Code List, whenever you store points. You also have the
ability to select icons for the special codes as shown here:

These codes going from top to bottom , starting at the left, represent start
line, end line, close line, select active line (when multiple lines are being
drawn with the same code), start curve, end curve, rectangle, "more", and
in the next screen, you obtain Offset Horizontal and Offset V ertical.

Pre-Formatted Special Codes

SurvCE has several pre-made files of codes used by certain highway
departments and others. These can be selected from the drop list by
selecting Special Codes within the Feature Code command.

p98
When a specified format is selected such as Geopak (MO DOT), the
standard codes all change, including the separator code. Whereas for
normal coding, a space is used to separate a description from a special
code (eg. EP PC), with MO DOT coding, a "-" (dash) would be used as
the separator, as in EP-EC. The users of these systems need to be
familiar with the required coding. For example, with Geopak (MO DOT)
coding, a typical edge of bituminous survey might be coded: 201-BS,
201, 201, 201-C, 201-C, 201-EC, 201, 201-ES. Note that Geopak
requires a start line and end line and requires coding on all arc points (C
or EC). This coding will process correctly in SurvCE, but SurvCE will
also process this coding if the "-BS" is omitted on the first measurement.
Use of the special icons within the Hgt/Description prompt screen will
append the correct special codes that are active. G eopak also requires
points to process linework, so it will not respond to the OH feature and
the CLR feature, which create lines without always creating points for
each vertice. With Geopak-style configurations, you can click the

p99
 Settings button at the top of the screen (left of the green checkmark) and
require that all linework be created with associated points, for processing
in Geopak.

The upper 3 items in Settings appear for all feature code list scenarios,
and are default off when SurvCE is shipped.

 Use FCL Path to Store *.GIS: If GIS attributing is being used, you can
store the GIS data directly into any special subdirectory used for the
applicable Feature Code List. So if you maintain several feature code lists,
each with attributing specified for certain descriptions, the G IS attribute data
can be placed in the directory of the associated feature code file.
 Store GIS Line Data to Vertices: When lines are created by field coding,
points at the vertices are also created (except for features created by RECT
and OH). In addition to associating attribute data with the linework itself, you
can click this option to store the GIS attribute data to each point on the line
that was surveyed.
 Use FCL Only: If this option is selected, you will be prompted with a
warning screen if you use a field code that is not found in the feature code list.
This is a more rarely used feature, and will lead to a lot of ex tra prompting in
the field if field crews choose new codes as they work.

Reprocessing the Field Codes

p100
Using the command Field to Finish, found under the Tools pulldown menu in the
Map screen, you can reprocess your field codes after editing any aspect of your
point data. So if you left off an "end line" command, you can edit the point,
change the description, and re-process the linework. In the example using the code
RECT25 above, if you edited that point and changed it to RECT50, it would draw
a twice as large building when you run Field to Finish, and RECT-25 would draw
the same building but instead in the opposite direction.

Data Transfer
This command prepares Carlson SurvCE for transferring data to and from a
desktop PC. Data Transfer requires that a companion program on the PC is running
to receive and send files. SurvCE, using the Data Transfer option, must
“handshake” with the program on the PC in order for the transfer to be successful.
A serial cable must connect the PC to the handheld device running SurvCE. COM
ports must be identified correctly, as well as baud rates.

 Carlson/C&G Transfer: This option is designed to work with Carlson

Software and C&G office products (SurvCADD/Carlson Civil, Carlson
Survey, Carlson Survey Desktop, Carlson Connect in Autodesk products,
X-Port, CG Survey and CG SurvNET). It also works with the standalone
SurvCom program that is included with the purchase of SurvCE. The
p101
 handshake is designed for simplicity and robustness. Carlson Software
products use the same native file formats as SurvCE, so no file conversion
occurs — only transfer.
 Kermit Transfer: This command leads to a send and receive screen that
works with the Kermit program on the PC. This is a readily available data
transfer program.
 SDR Transfer: This command is designed to work with existing programs
that communicate with the SDR. For example, if you have LDD, Intergraph,
SurvCADD/Carlson Civil, SelectCAD or other software that contains an
SDR33 transfer routine, then this option is designed to mimic that protocol.
When an RW5 file is selected, it is automatically converted to a Sokkia RAW
file and downloaded to the PC. When a CRD file is selected, it is
automatically converted to a Sokkia RAW file with “08” records for points.
This allows you to use and process the data in SurvCE similarly to the data in
the SDR33. You can also upload into the SurvCE field computer Sokkia
RAW files that contain point records. All the points will be stored in a CRD
file on SurvCE.
 TDS Transfer: This command is used to transfer data from SurvCE to TDS
Foresight or other programs that have a TDS Link routine.

Sending data to a computer using the Carlson Transfer Option

1. Connect your serial cable to your PC. Select Data Transfer from the File
menu. Choose Carlson/C&G Transfer. This leads to a File Transfer screen
on SurvCE, which prompts “Awaiting Connection”. All further action takes
place on the PC side. There is no time delay in this handshake. SurvCE will
wait for the PC program to catch up. When you connect the cable from
SurvCE to the PC, Microsoft ActiveSync may interfere and display “Connect
to PC?” If you get this question, select No and on your PC, disable the
Microsoft ActiveSync serial linkage if it is on.
2. Execute SurvCom, or for Carlson Survey or SurvCADD/Carlson Civil us ers
(July, 2001 build or later), choose Tools, Data Collectors, SurvCE/SurvStar
option. If you get “Failed to open COM 1 error code -3”, the most likely
errors are lack of cable connection or interference by Microsoft ActiveSync.
If connection is automatically established, SurvCE will display, “Connected to
PC”.

p102
3. If only the left side of the screen on the PC displays data, then you do not have
a connection yet. Press the Connect button located at the bottom left of the
file transfer dialog. The transfer program will respond with "Retrieving File
List". Once the file list has been retrieved, the left side of the dialog box will
show files located in the specified path on the PC, and the right side of the
dialog will show the files located in the designated path on the remote. You
can change directories by scrolling to the top of the file list and choosing Up
One Level (just like in Windows). In the above dialog, a filter is applied so
that only files in the form of *.crd are displayed. Filters such as this can be set
up using the Options button.
4. To transfer one or more files, simply select or highlight the desired files and
select the Transfer button. More than one file can be transferred from the
remote to the PC or from the PC to the remote during the transfer process.
Standard Windows selection options apply. For ex ample, selecting one file
and then, while pressing the shift key on the PC, selecting another file deeper
on the list, will select all the files in between the first and last selected. You
can also select the first file to transfer and press and hold down the shift key
and use the down arrow to specify the range of files to transfer. Pressing and
holding the control key on the keyboard allows for the selection of multiple
files in any selection order, by picking the files with the left mouse button.

p103
5. After the files have been selected, press the Transfer button. When the
transfer is complete, the program will display the "Transfer Complete"
message and will then proceed to update the file lists on the PC and the
Remote.

Note: The process of importing points to the data collector mimics the process of
exporting points to the office computer, but in reverse. If a point is found to
already exist on the data collector, options appear to Overwrite All (Yes All) or
Cancel All (No All).

SurvCom Commands
These commands are found and can be seen in the SurvCom dialog box shown
above.
 Connect: After selecting Data Transfer from the File menu, press this button
to connect to the PC. Once connection is made, the status line on the file
transfer utility dialog box will show "Connected to the remote machine".
 Transfer: Pressing this button transfers selected files from either the Remote
to the PC, or the PC to the Remote.
 Set Path: This option allows for the specification of the desired source and
destination drives and folders for both the PC and the Remote device. For
example, if you were downloading, or copying files from the Remote device to
the PC, to specify a source path on the remote device, select the Remote
Machine toggle and then type in the desired path in the path field. To specify
a destination path on the PC, select the Local PC toggle and type in the
desired path the path field. When a change to either path is made, the transfer
utility will retrieve a new file list from the specified paths.
 Make Dir: This option allows for creation of directories on both the PC and
the Remote device. Specify the machine to create the directory on and then
enter the directory name.
 Delete: This option allows you to delete the tagged files.
 Rename: Select a file and rename it.
 Options: This command allows you to set various options for data transfer.
The dialog shown in the figure below will appear.

p104
 Com Port: You must select which com port on the PC to use.
File Mask: You must select a file filtering syntax.
Directory Sort: You must select how to sort the list of files.
Display Special Files: Toggle whether or not you should see special
files.
Confirm Overwrite: Check this to confirm before overwriting files.
Baud Rate: You must choose the baud rate for transferring data.
Protect Remote Files: Check this to protect files on the mobile device.
Archive RW5 Files: Toggle YES or NO.

 Geoid: This command will carve out a portion of the Geoid 99, EGM96,
Canadian CGG2000, Canadian HT2.0, Canadian HT1.01, Australian GDA94
and Great Britain OSG-MO2 grid files and send it to SurvCE. Since thes e
geoid grids are very large, the program carves out a precise portion of it and
avoids overloading the memory on the remote device running SurvCE. You

p105
 will be prompted for the directory, on the PC, of the source Geoid grid file,
and the approximate latitude and longitude of the job, and the size of the area
desired in miles, kilometers or degrees of latitude and longitude.

 F2F Conversion: This converts the more thorough and detailed Carlson
Survey field code file (for field-to-finish work) to the more simplified Feature
Code List that runs in SurvCE. The Feature Code List in SurvCE handles
Linework (on or off), Line Type (2D or 3D), Layer (= Code) and Full Text
(Description).
 Send Points: The command allows for the sending of a range of points.
 Exit: This command will exit the File Transfer Utility

Note: The following two options appear in the Data Transfer dialog only if
detected or available:

 Infrared Transfer: This command leads to a send and receive screen that
works with the Window Socket IrDA server/client objects only between two
CE mobile devices. This is a readily available data transfer program. It works,
for example, from Ranger to Ranger. Please make sure you align your devices
so that the infrared transceivers are within one meter of each other, and the
transceivers are pointing at each other. For an easy connection it is preferable
to start first the server (the device that will receive the data file) and after that
p106
 the client (the device from which the data file will be sent).
 Bluetooth Transfer: If the mobile device has a Bluetooth emulated serial
COM port, the user will be able to select it from the list, and transfer data
from/to another device that has Bluetooth available.

Import/Export
This command allows you to import an ASCII file to job data or ex port job data to
an ACSII file. When you choose this command, you will see a secondary dialog in
which you will be prompted to choose to Import or Ex port.

Import ASCII File

This command converts point data from an ASCII tex t file into the SurvCE format.
The source ASCII file can contain any combination of point number, northing,
easting, elevation, and description. You may select any of the predefined formats
or create your own custom format. Since some of these source file formats (like
Carlson CRD and TDS CR5) are not ASCII but are actually binary, Import ASCII
file can be used to import points from certain non-ASCII type files . This next
figure shows the Import ASCII dialog box .

p107
 Source File Format: You must choose the format of the source file. The
choices include

User Defined: For importing most .TXT and .ASC files. The coordinate
order in the Choice field is used.
Traverse PC: For importing Traverse PC .TRV files .
TDS: For importing TDS .CR5 files. Note that CR5 files can contain
point numbers in excess of 32760. If point IDs exceed that value, it is
best to set Alphanumeric as the point ID type under New Job in Job
Settings prior to importing.
Geodimeter: For importing Geodimeter .OBS files .
Trimble POS: For importing Trimble .POS files.
CRD File: Allows you to import a SurvCE CRD file into the current,
active CRD file, and set the range of points to import. Note that this
method can be used to move a subset of points from one CRD file over to
another file, as shown below.

p108
 SDR File: For importing point data within Sokkia SDR files.

 File: You may type in the file name to import.

 Select: Choose this button to browse for the file name.
 Common Formats: If your Source File Format is set to User Defined,
choosing one of these settings copies the contents into the Choice field, which
will be used to import the file.
 Choice: If you are importing an ASCII file with a special form (e.g.
A,Survey,1254552.123,498135.12,1109.23,iron pin,54) then you want a
format that skips the first two columns (A and Survey) and does Easting (X),
Northing (Y), Elevation (Z), Description (D) and Point ID (P), so your format
will be: S,S,X,Y,Z,D,P. If there is no point ID in the ASCII file, you s imply
omit the P in the entered format, and the program will prompt for a starting
point number or ID and will number each subsequent point sequentially.
 Preview: Shows you a preview of the first line of the ASCII file. This is
helpful in determining the correct coordinate order format.
 Header Lines: Specifies the number of header lines to skip in the ASCII file.
 Add to Pt ID’s: Specifies a value to be added to each point ID during the
import process.
 Pt Protect: Specifies whether or not to check each point ID to see if it already
exists in the current CRD file. If this is toggled ON and you attempt to import
point ID’s that already exist, you will then be prompted to overwrite each
p109
 existing point or to cancel the operation.

Export ASCII File

This command converts SurvCE point data to an ASCII tex t file. The next figure
shows the Export ASCII dialog box. Choose a coordinate order, type of delimiter,
range of points and precision. After choosing the settings in this dialog box , press
OK. A standard file dialog will appear. In this dialog, choose a name for your
ASCII file and then press OK. After the file is written, a dialog will appear telling
you that the conversion if finished.

 Coordinate Order: You must specify the output format for the ASCII file.
There are seven different formats to choose from. Each can either be space or
comma delimited, giving you a total of fourteen choices. Two of the options
include quotes around the description field so that your descriptions can
include spaces and/or commas.
 Type of Delimiter: You must specify the character used for delimiting the
fields in the output ASCII file. You may choose either a space or a comma.
 Range: You must specify the range of points to output. Ranges can be
separated with commas, as in 1-40,101-199,A1-A44.
 Export Notes: When this option is enabled, any point notes associated with
the current job will be exported to a .NOT file. These files are used with
SurvCADD (and other Carlson office software products).

p110
 Export Attributes: GIS attributes can be assigned to points that are stored
based on settings in the Feature Code List. If a point that is shot is a manhole
(e.g. MH) and attributes such as concrete, 5 rungs, 2 inlets are entered for this
point, these attributes will be exported to an ASCII file for use by ex ternal
programs when this option is enabled.
 Decimals: You must specify the output precision for northings, eastings, and
elevations. This setting does not affect point IDs or descriptions. After
choosing the settings in this dialog box , press OK. A standard file dialog will
appear. In this dialog; choose a name for your ASCII file and then press OK.
After the file is written, a dialog will appear to let you know that the process is
finished. This next figure shows the result of ex porting a job to an ASCII file.

Delete File
This command allows you to remove any existing file from any directory to free up
memory. This figure below shows the standard file selection dialog, where you can
choose the file name to delete.

Note: It is always a good idea to back-up your data by transferring it to a PC

before deleting files. Carlson SurvCE does not require you to back-up your data
before deleting.

p111
Select the file you wish to delete from the standard file selection dialog box and
pick OK. SurvCE will ask if you want to delete all files associated with the job
(eg. the .dxf file, the .rw5 file, etc.).

Press Yes, if you wish to continue. SurvCE will then warn you if the file or files to
be deleted have never been downloaded before.

p112
Press Yes, if you wish to continue. You will be asked to confirm your file selection
once more. Press Yes to accept the deletion of the file or files, or No to cancel the
selection.

Add Job Notes

This command allows you to enter job notes as ASCII text. These notes are saved
with the job in the raw data file.

Exit
This command will exit the Carlson SurvCE program. The software presents the
p113
confirmation dialog.

If you choose Yes, SurvCE will exit and your data files are saved. If you choose
No, SurvCE does not exit.

p114
EQUIP
This chapter provides information on using the commands from the Equip menu.

Instrument Setup
p115
The Total Station routine allows the user to configure their total station
communication and operation settings. The tabs shown are configured based on the
selected instrument (see specific instrument for details).

Current
The routine also provides an instrument recall feature that allows the user to store
and recall all instrument related settings as a user named configuration. Configure
all of the settings as desired, and select the save button to nam e and store the
custom configuration. Settings that will be retained are as follows:
 Instrument Settings

 Communication Settings

 Configure Settings

 Stakeout Reference Settings

 Load: This button will load all settings defined by the selected icon.

 Save: This button will save the current settings and allows the user to

p116
 enter the name of new icons that will be created to represent the instrument
settings.

 Rename: This button will allow the user to rename the selected icon.

 Delete: This button will remove the selected icon.

Comms
The Comms tab allows you to specify communication parameters for the data
collector. For certain equipment, a “Bluetooth” wireless serial connection is
possible. The user can detect if there is any Bluetooth emulated serial COM port
available on the CE device by using the “Set Port to Bluetooth” button. SurvCE
can use Bluetooth to communicate only with instruments that have Bluetooth
incorporated on it. Also, the user can change the name and the password for the
Bluetooth present on the instrument end by using the “Bluetooth Settings” button.
The dialog shown below will allow the user to change the existing name and
password for the Bluetooth on the remote device.

 Port Number: You must select the COM port to use. This is the comm
port of the data collector.

p117
 This is a Bluetooth Port: For some of the newer equipment, a
“Bluetooth” wireless serial connection is possible. SurvCE can use Bluetooth
to communicate only with instruments that have Bluetooth incorporated on
them. Do not use this toggle unless you are certain that you have Bluetooth.

 Baud Rate: You must select the baud rate for data transfer.

 Parity: You must select the parity setting.

 Char Length: You must select the character length setting.

 Stop Bits: You must select the stop bits setting.

 Defaults: Clicking Defaults will utilize the standard default settings for
the configured instrument.

Bluetooth Wireless
Bluetooth is automatically detected. The com port settings to use Bluetooth vary
from unit to unit. For example, Com3 is typical for the Compaq Ipaq and Com5 is
typical for the Topcon FC1000, though it may use any of Com 4, 5 or 6. On the
Allegro, the Bluetooth port is typically Com 4, 5, 8 or 9. The Bluetooth serial com
port settings can be found in the “My Bluetooth Device” m enu selection.

Bluetooth connection is available, for ex ample, with Thales ZMax. For

Thales/Ashtech, set the baud rate in Comms Setup to match the baud rate set for
Port C on the ZMax receiver which is typically used for Bluetooth
communication.

For Topcon, set the baud rate in Comm Setup to match the baud rate for Port B on
the Hiper receiver, which is typically used for Bluetooth.

If Bluetooth is available, and the Bluetooth option is clicked on, when you OK the
Comm Setup screen, the Bluetooth port will be searched for and if found, a
confirmation screen is presented.

p118
The program then proceeds to the Bluetooth Manager screen. This screen gives
you the option to choose which GPS receiver you would like to connect to via
Bluetooth. If you click Cancel, no Bluetooth connection will be established. Select
a receiver and click Connect.

First time into this routine, no receivers will be listed. Select Find Receiver and

p119
you can add the connected receiver to the list. Find Receiver will “ghost” if
bluetooth is not an active Bluetooth connection to a receiver. Find Receiver will
only work on ARM processor devices, which includes the Allegro and Symbol
8100.

Find Receiver
When you click Find Receiver to add another receiver to the list, a dialog pops up.
The dialog below is for a Socket Bluetooth driver.

p120
Delete Receiver
Highlight a Bluetooth Receiver and click Delete Receiver button to remove the
device. You will be prompted before removing the device.

Set Receiver PIN

You can enter the receiver PIN by clicking “Set Receiver PIN”, and you can
change the receiver name by clicking “Set Receiver Name”.

p121
The default PIN is different for each manufacturer and ex amples for PINs are
below. Please see your equipment manuals for your equipment PINS.

Topcon 11111
Leica 00000
Thales 12345

Bluetooth Manager
The Bluetooth Manager will appear in many places: entry into the program,
clicking OK from Comm Setup, Configure Base, and Configure Rover (it works
the same from all of them). After making a successful connection, the software will
let the user know. If the connection fails, there will be a warning.

p122
Trouble-shooting Note: Be sure the GPS receiver is turned on before trying to
connect, and that you are within 30 feet of the receiver. If the user can ’t see the
device from the Bluetooth Devices program, it is not going to work in SurvCE.
The Bluetooth Manager works somewhat better with a passkey but it is not strictly
necessary. Sometimes the Bluetooth registry settings don ’t work correctly with an
empty passkey. A pass key is the name the Bluetooth driver uses for a password.
This is always used on Thales/Ashtech and can be used on Topcon. It m akes the
Bluetooth connection more reliable.

Setup (Total Station)

Settings/Search

p123
 EDM Mode: Available methods are Standard (1.5 to 2 seconds), Fast, and
Reflectorless. In all modes of data collection, you are in “Rapid Tracking”
mode. Clicking that icon goes to the “No Distance” or “Tracking Only Mode”
(no distance measurements). Avoiding taking distance measurements will
save battery usage. So the “Dist” button refers to the selectable mode you will
“go to,” not the mode you are currently in. In Rapid Tracking mode, the store

p124
icon will always take a “Rapid Tracking” shot, and pressing enter will take a
Rapid Tracking shot if Enter is configured to Store only (to mimic the store
icon). Pressing the read icon will always cause configured reading to be
taken, as will Enter when set to Read and Store. The next figure shows the
Rapid Tracking mode, which follows the movement of the prism by taking
rapid distance measurements, much like RTK GPS.

Note that in the above figure we are in “Fast” read mode for a configured
reading, and in “Rapid Tracking” mode for display and quick readings by S.
Clicking the “No Dist” icon leads to angle measurement only, as shown in
this figure:

p125
 Foresight/Backsight Prism Offset: This drop down menu provides a list of
standard prism offsets. Whenever a prism constant is changed, a note is
written to the raw (RW5) file. When you select one of the prisms from the list
(Circle, Mini, etc), the value that is shown in parenthesis is the actual value
sent to the instrument. i.e. 0.0 for Circular, 17.5 for Mini. If you select
"30mm" or "40mm", we send - 4.4 and 5.6 respectively (30-34.4 and 40-
34.4). The user may also type in any value they choose. In this case, we will
send that value exactly, unmodified, to the instrument.
 (360) (23.1): Prism offset of 23.1 (Leica model).
 Circle (0.0): Standard Leica round prism.
 Mini (17.5): Leica mini prism.
 ReflTape (34.4): Equates to zero offset (wall, surface).
 30mm: Other manufactures (Sokkia, Seco).
 40mm: Other manufacturers.
 Use ATR: When this feature is enabled, ATR (Auto Target Recognition) will
be used when configured to standard or fast reading. When running the robotic
in remote mode with ATR turned on, and when performing a “Set Angle and
Read” in the backsight screen (a standard measured backsight), the ATR
connection will be taken into consideration, so that the angle set is relative to
the center of the prism, not necessarily the crosshairs of the instrument. The
“Set Angle” and “Check Angle” functions will still be relative to the
crosshairs.
 Laser Pointer: Ideal for indoor or dark evening surveying, this feature causes

p126
 the instrument to emit a red beam. It is often used when doing reflectorless
work and makes a red mark on the wall, floor or object being surveyed. This
is useful for confirming the position prior to the shot. The beam should not be
directed into someone’s vision or eye.
 Power Search Enabled: The Power Search option may be available with
motorized total stations. This option activates the “PowerSearch” button in
the “banner line” at the top of the survey and stakeout screens. When Power
Search is pressed, the total station will typically find the prism in 10 seconds
regardless of the direction it is initially pointed. If it has found one prism and
you hit “Power Search” again, it will leave that prism and find the nex t one. If
you have only two prisms on the job (foresight and backsight), it will
conveniently rotate from the foresight to the backsight and back again each
time it is pressed.
 Work Area: This will define a limiting area for searching. This can speed
up both the standard ATR Search and the PowerSearch. The Work area angle
ranges apply to both searches. The Show button will show the two positions
of the search window, first by moving immediately to Position 1. Y ou will be
prompted to press OK to see Position 2. Having defined a “window” of
searching, Center will move that window to a new center position. Y ou will
be prompted to “Sight on Centered Position and Press OK”. The Define
button prompts you to shoot the lower left and upper right positions, which are
then displayed above under “Work Area”. If the Work Area is set to start at
0.0000 horizontal, for example, searching would send the instrument to the
backsight point.
 Tracking and Reflectorless: The upper left of the screen controls the ATR
Search, and the upper right controls the PowerSearch. The Work area angle
ranges apply to both searches. The Show button will show the two positions
of the search window, first by moving immediately to Position 1. Y ou will be
prompted to press OK to see Position 2. Having defined a “window” of
searching, Center will move that window to a new center position. Y ou will
be prompted to “Sight on Centered Position and Press OK”. The Define
button prompts you to shoot the lower left and upper right positions, which are
then displayed above under “Work Area”. If the Work Area is set to start at
0.0000 horizontal, for example, searching would send the instrument to the
backsight point.

p127
Manufacturer Setup Instructions
For manufacturer specific information, please consult with the Instrument Setup by
Manufacturer section.

Setup (GPS)
Both Base and Rover GPS are configured with Receiver and RTK in
the same manner. Base GPS requires additional setup and is covered
in the GPS Base section. GPS Rovers section covers the
configuration of GPS networks and internet corrections.

Receiver Tab
This tab is used to Configure the receivers Antenna, set the elevation
mask and for some gps position rates.

p128
 Receiver Model: SurvCE will auto-detect the receiver model and display it in
this list. It will also auto-detect the port setting for data and the port baud.
 Antenna Type: The entire list of supported antennas is available for selection.
To select an antenna press the "List" button and search the list by
manufacturer. In this dialog, the user can also verify the antenna offset values
or create custom antenna types.
 Antenna Height: Entered as a either "vertical" or "slant" height in the current
job units. The slant height is the distance from the base of the pole or from
the “hub and tack” up to a mark or defined slant measurement point on the
edge of the antenna (See NGS for more details). The vertical height is
measured plumb, straight down from the base (where it screws into the
antenna) of the antenna to the ground.
 Use Internal Antenna: Many GPS units now have internal antennas. Select
this option if not using an external antenna.
 Elevation Mask: This specifies the cutoff vertical angle above the horizon.
Any satellites below this angle will be left out of calculations.
 Position Update Rate: This option allows the user to set the position update
rate for the GPS readings. 1 Hz will display one reading per second, while 5
Hz is 5 times per second.

p129
RTK Tab
The RTK tab is used to configure the GPS RTK communications.

 Device: This list contains the supported devices that deliver or receive RTK
messages, such as a radio or IP modem. If an External Radio is selected, the
user will need to specify the Port, Baud, Parity and Stop Bits that the radio
manufacturer requires. For internal radios, SurvCE will detect the proper
settings.
 Network: This list allows you to configure and connect to various networks
(e.g. NTRIP).
 Message Type: You must select the RTK message type that you wish to
broadcast and receive. This is the format of the RTK message that is either
sent from the base and received by the rover.
 Base ID: This is typically used to isolate paired devices. The user specifies
that the base is "ID 1", then the rover should be set to only listen for "ID 1" so
that other base stations that might be in the area do not interfere.
 Send Rover Position to Network: This will output a NMEA GGA message
for networks that require it.

Manufacturer Setup Instructions

For manufacturer specific information, please consult with the Instrument Setup by
Manufacturer section.

p130
GPS Base
GPS Base
For GPS equipment, it is necessary to set up the base antenna and record the
correct antenna height, the antenna type (for certain equipment), and the m ethods
used for localizing (obtaining the desired coordinates).

Much of GPS Base is common to most instruments. For ex ample, the Base Ant.
Height would be entered in feet or meters, depending on the setting specified in
Units within Job Settings. Vertical or Slant height refers to the method used to
measure the height of the base antenna. Vertical refers to the distance from the
ground point to the antenna disk, measured plumb. Slant refers to the distance
from the edge of the antenna disk down to the ground point directly beneath the
center of the antenna. Elevation Mask refers to the degrees above the horizon
above which satellites will be used for GPS “correction” calculations, and below
which satellites will be ignored. Keep in mind that it is not always better to lower
the elevation mask below 10 or 15 degrees. Satellites closer to the horizon than 10
degrees will often degrade the calculation of coordinates.

The “alternative” to GPS Base is GPS Rover. GPS receivers can usually function
as either type, but must be “configured” for the role they will serve. You will be
warned when you switch receiver configuration from Base to Rover and vice versa,
to confirm that is what is intended.

With all RTK GPS Equipment selections (except GPS Simulation), GPS Base will
first bring up settings and then proceed to the 6-option G PS Base screen which
“locates” the base position.
After completing the GPS communications setup and clicking on the Ok button the
Base Configure dialog will be presented. These button options "locates" the base
position. The 6-button GPS Base options (3 buttons per “tab”), common to all, are
discussed first, followed by equipment-specific settings.

p131
GPS Base for All RTK GPS Brands
For all brands of GPS, the GPS Base button is the command that configures the
base receiver for broadcasting GPS corrections to the rover. You must click the
GPS Base button in while you are connected to the base receiver. The base needs
a set of coordinates to use as its stationary position. G iven that you are configured
for a particular coordinate system, there are 2 main “types” of localizations: (1)
Enter an Accurate Base Position and work from that point outward on the scale
and “true north” of that system (no rover localization), (2) Enter an Accurate or
Semi-Accurate (Read from GPS) Base Position and then localize to known rover
points that transform to the local coordinate system (required if the local system is
not true GPS north). There is also a “mixed” base-rover approach. To use the
base in the localization, you should configure the base with the "Use Local
Coordinates" option under "From Known Position". Here, you configure the base
by entering the local point (5000, 5000,100) and start a new localization file (or
use an existing one if it applies). Then, at your rover, you can add more points to
the localization as necessary. In this case, a single rover point within Localization
will produce a scale factor and best fit to the local coordinates.

There are six methods to set the stationary base position, organized into 2
categories: From New Position includes Read from G PS, Enter Lat/Long and
Enter Grid System Coordinates. The From Known Position tab includes
Previously Surveyed Point, Use Local Coordinates and Read From File. When
you are starting a new job (no information in the raw RW5 file yet), always use the
options in From New Position.

p132
From New Position Options
 Read from GPS - This method takes a specified number of GPS readings
from the base receiver’s autonomous position and uses it as its “true” position.
The autonomous position can be off of the actual position by 150 feet. The
base will calculate corrections based on this autonomous position. If you set
up the base with this method, the rover points must be used for localization
since the corrections they are using are based on the approx imate position of
the base antenna. Read GPS, combined with rover-based localization, is one
of the most common methods used to start a GPS survey. When Read from
GPS is used, the program will present the current position, as shown:

p133
 Latitude: N 42d21 ’28.35882”
Longitude: W 71d08 ’12.87540”
Elevation: 116.376

Continue with Base Setup?

Yes No

If you like the result, press Yes and continue on. You will then be prompted for
the Reference Station Number. This is an “ID” that will store to the raw file and
permit post-processing of the raw GPS data. A typical entry is 0001. The final
prompt will say,

Base Configuration Successful. Save Settings to File?

Yes No

Answering Yes will bring up an entry screen for the reference file name.
Reference files are stored with a “.ref” extension. It is important to save a
reference file if you plan to return to the job at another date. Without re-localizing
to control points, you can set up over the same base position, recall the reference
file, and enter the new antenna height for the base position, and start working.

The Read from GPS option is sometimes referred to as “Find Me”. This option is
accurate to about 10 to 50 meters, typically, and it enables the corrections to
broadcast with enough accuracy to permit localization and sub-centimeter real-time

p134
work. Be sure that your GPS zone in Job Settings is set correctly before using this
option. Also, give the base enough time to find itself. When first set up, the base
receiver has to “collect” satellites and “resolve ambiguities”. If you Read from
GPS too early, you may find a position, but one that is not fully resolved and ends
up slowing down the speed at which the rover fixes.

 Enter Lat/Lon - Requires you to enter the latitude and longitude for the
position of the base antenna. This is useful if you are setting up over a
monument whose latitude and longitude is known. It can also be used over a
control point whose position is known from GPS post-processing. This will
put you on the NAD83, NAD27, UTM or other coordinate system specified in
Job Settings, GPS Tab. You can still do a rover-based alignment to transform
to a local system. Rover-based localizations are always improved by more
accurate base positioning. If the GPS detects that your entered Lat/Long is
not near the current GPS readings, the program will warn the user.

This method should be used if you are reasonably sure of the accuracy of the
latitude and longitude—it should be at least as accurate as the “Read from
GPS” option, or otherwise you will have difficulty getting a “fix” on the rover.
If it is a very accurate latitude and longitude, you will get the best results.
Pressing OK leads to the option of store the base position as a reference file,
similar to Read from GPS.

p135
 Enter Grid System Coordinates : Requires you to enter the grid system
northing and easting for the point that the base is occupying. This applies to
any projection that you have configured, including U.S. state plane, worldwide
UTM or any individual country or user-defined grid system. This is useful if
you are setting up over a monument whose coordinates you know. An
accurate base position, either by entry of Lat/Long or Grid System
Coordinates, will enable immediate data collection without rover-based
localization, but also will improve rover-based localization.

The Coordinate method is similar to the Lat/Lon method, since Lat/Longs convert
to Grid Coordinates based on the current coordinate system set in Job Settings,
GPS option. The Grid Coordinates will convert back to the Lat/Long coordinates
needed by SurvCE to configure the base.

p136
From Known Position Options
 Previously Surveyed Point: This requires you to enter the coordinates, on the
configured coordinate system, of a known, surveyed point. This will
transform and localize to the local coordinate system, and optionally can be
followed by rover-based localization. The known point must be found in the
RW5 file in a form that includes its Lat/Long (a previous GPS measurement).

p137
 This Lat/Long, just as with New Position options, is used to establish the base
position. This method requires that you are working within an ex isting job
that has a raw file including Lat/Long positions for the points being used. This
next figure is an example of the prompting.

Like the other options, this continues on by showing the corresponding

Lat/Long for the coordinate and allowing the user to save the result in a
reference file.
 Use Local Coordinates: If you have “localized” using option 5 (Localization)
within the Equip menu, you obtain a “dat” file. This localization file is used to
convert any Lat/Long reading into a local coordinate. By the same token, you
can take a local coordinate, run it back through the dat file and obtain a
Lat/Long for the base receiver setup. That is the procedure used in this
option.

p138
 When OK is pressed, you will be asked to load the associated “.dat” file, in a
dialog similar to below:

 Read From File - Reads a previously saved base position file. All of the other
methods of setting up the base let you save the base position at the end of
setup. If you return to a site, set up the base in ex actly the same position, use

p139
Read From File to use the same base position and you don ’t have to re-align
the rover: the old alignment is still valid.

This option recalls a reference file in a dialog similar to that above. Then you
will receive the standard prompting.

This is followed by the Reference Station ID prompt (showing the default ID).
The “new” base antenna height, which will change with each new set up, is
entered back at the first set of dialogs. A message is displayed after successful
configuration from a file. Only if you set the base antenna on the same
horizontal and vertical position each day would the base antenna height
remain fixed. If the base antenna height and x,y position is the same from day
to day, then you do not need to do G PS Base each day. You would simply
power up the base, power up the rover and start working in that case. Keep in
mind that in certain power surge conditions, receivers can lose their settings,
and a re-configuration may be necessary, even if the base receiver antenna has
not been moved.

Note: In SurvCE 1.50.006 or later, a “quick connect” is performed when you

exit and re-enter the SurvCE program. In earlier versions of SurvCE (before
August 20, 2004) and after the release of SurvCE 1.50 in May, 2004, it was
necessary to conduct a fresh G PS Base after exiting SurvCE.

Note: One method of obtaining Latitude/Longitude and state plane

p140
 coordinates in the U.S. is to occupy a point, any point, for two hours or more,
logging the static data, then subm it the Rinex file to the NGS “OPUS”
program accessible on the web. You must log the data with dual frequency
equipment. The OPUS program is fully automated, and will return the x,y,z,
lat, long, ellipsoidal height and orthometric height. This data can then be
entered in during base localization. Though most post-processing programs
(Trimble Geomatics Office, Leica SKI-Pro) use proprietary post-processing
file formats, they will output the ASCII “Rinex” format needed by OPUS.

GPS Rover
GPS Rover
For many brands of GPS, receiver perform differently depending on whether they
are set as base or rover. Even though the receivers are identical, they perform
differently depending on whether they are configured as a base or a rover.
Multiple rover receivers can communicate with a single base receiver. The GPS
Rover command is used to set the rover receiver to the correct parameters and to
instruct the receiver that it is, in fact, a rover.

Connecting a GPS Rover to a Modem or Base

Network
There are several methods for connecting to an available network. The RTK tab in
the GPS Rover dialog configures the modems and network settings.

p141
The dialog is designed to be filled out from the top to bottom, and from left to
right. First select the device you will use to connect to the remote modem or
network.

If a particular receiver model supports an internal modem or radio, meaning it is

integrated into the receiver; those devices are shown first in the list. When an
internal device is shown in the list, it means that model could have the device
p142
inside, but does not guarantee it. The user will have to know if the receiver was
purchased with an integrated radio or modem.

External radios and modems are shown next and then one of the last options is
“Data Collector Internet”, which is a special case explained below where the data
collector provides access to the internet instead of a modem inside the receiver or
connected to the receiver..

Once a device that is capable of connecting to the internet is selected, the Network
combo box is enabled. Select the type of network connection you will use.

Here is a brief summary of the different network types available:

TCP Direct: For connecting to a single modem at a base or to a VRS

network or another network that doesn’t require a special login.

The configure button for TCP Direct brings up this window:

p143
To add a new base or network address, select <New> in the Name field and
replace the “<New>” text with what you want to call the connection and fill out the
Address and Port fields. Most modems support either an IP address (Ex :
192.202.228.252) or a URL addres s (Ex: www.basenetwork.com).

UDP Direct: This works exactly like the TCP Direct option but uses UDP
protocol instead of TCP. Most networks use TCP.

NTRIP: This option is for base networks that support NTRIP protocol. Pressing
the Configure button shows the NTRIP Broadcasters (Also called Casters) that
have been previously connected to.

p144
The default is for rtcm-ntrip.org which if connected to will download information
about many Broadcasters (casters) all over the world. They will be shown the nex t
time NTRIP Configure is selected. Select an existing caster or select <New> in
the Name combo box and replace with a different name and fill out the other
information. If the Default User and Password fields are filled out, they will be
used as the default user name and password for all the bases at that caster.

When the green checkbox is selected, SurvCE will have the modem connect to the
address of the Broadcaster and establish a connection. The Broadcaster then
supplies a table of bases (also known as mountpoints) available at that
Broadcaster. SurvCE puts the table of bases into the next window that comes up.

p145
If you don’t like the name of the base supplied by the Broadcaster, you can change
it to something else you prefer and SurvCE will remember your preference but still
ask the Broadcaster for the correct base.

Select the base you want to use and press the green check box . You are brought
back to the RTK tab with the base you selected as the current Base ID. You can
change the Base ID in the RTK tab without going back to the NTRIP Configure
p146
button.

Note that with NTRIP, SurvCE already knows if the base wants the rover position
sent and what type of corrections are being sent. Those settings are shown in the
RTK tab and are grayed out to guarantee that they stay on the correct setting.

SpiderNet: Networks that require that a GPUID message be sent to the network
should use the SpiderNet option. The SpiderNet Configure window comes up
when the Configure button to the right of the SpiderNet option is pressed.

p147
Add a new network by selecting <New> in the Name combo box and typing in the
name of the network and filling out the other fields. If the User Name and
Password fields are left empty, the GPUID message is not sent to the network.

Just like when using a radio, the RTK Port combo box is to identify which port on
the receiver should be configured to accept RTK corrections. The Baud, Parity,
and Stop Bits combo boxes specify the settings for the RTK port. Message Type
identifies what type of RTK correction message the receiver should be ex pecting.

Base ID when using a network is a combo box to select the name of the network or
base the modem should connect to. Use the Network Configure button to change
the bases available in this list.

“Send Rover Position to Network” if turned on will cause the receiver to

periodically send GGA messages out of the RTK port to the base or network.

Connecting a Data Collector to the Internet

There are several ways of connecting a data collector to the internet – Cell phone
cards inserted into the data collector, connections to a cell phone with a data plan,
etc. These instructions assume that an internet connection has already been
established to the data collector. One way to tell that the data collector is
connected to the internet is to browse the internet using Internet Ex plorer. For
p148
information about how to connect a data collector to the internet using an Enfora
cell card in an Explorer 600+, search Carlson Knowledge Base for “Enfora”.

Once the connection to the internet has been established, start SurvCE and select
Configure Rover in the Equip tab.

Press the Configure button to the right of the Data Collector Internet option.

p149
Select the COM port on the data collector that is connected to the RTK port of the
GPS rover receiver. It cannot be the same port that is used to control the receiver
and is selected in the G PS Rover Comms tab. It may be a serial port or a BT port
with a connection that has already been established.

After selecting the port and pressing the green check to accept the input, select the
network type in the RTK tab. Other settings are just like using the other modem
selections as explained in the section “Connecting a GPS Rover to a Modem or
Base Network”.

GPS Utilities
p150
Every GPS manufacturer and model has a different set of G PS Utilities. The
primary purpose of the Receiver Utilities is reset and/or troubleshoot the GPS
receiver.

Common GPS Utilities

 Reset Receiver: This command performs a soft reset of the GPS receiver. Soft
p151
 resets will reinitialize the receiver like a power cycle. Soft reset does not
delete the memory.
 Factory Reset or Hard Reset: This command will erase the memory of the
receiver and restore the setting to a factory settings.
 Power Off Receiver: This will power down the receiver.
 Save Settings to Receiver: Stores receiver settings to internal memory.
 Beep Off: Turns off the receiver alarms.
 Radio Channel: Change the channel radio channel of the G PS.
 Configure RTK Device: Use this page to change your RTK data port
settings. This can also be done during base or rover configuration.
 Check RTK: This tells the user why they aren’t in RTK fixed.
 Send Command to Receiver: You can send what are known as “pash”
commands, internal Thales/Ashtech codes, to the receiver. This should be
done only in consultation with your Thales dealer.
 Reset RTK Engine: This resets the carrier phase ambiguities. This is a useful
command if you are having difficulty obtaining lock and want to start the
process of fixing over again. Receiver settings are retained (so you can think
of it as a “soft reset”).
 Bluetooth Settings: The Bluetooth settings in SurvCE ’s Bluetooth Manager
(discussed in Comm Setup) do not actually change anything in the receiver
itself. In order to make changes to the receiver ’s internal Bluetooth settings, it
is necessary to go into Receiver Utilities and click on Bluetooth Settings.

GPS Utility for GPS Simulation

If running GPS simulation, the starting point can be reset using the special GPS
utility. Enter the new Lat/Lon for the position.

p152
GPS Utilites by Manufacturer Setup
Manufacturer specific information is available in the G PS Utilities by
Manufacturer section.

Configure (General)
This tab allows you to select settings and preferences that apply to observations
taken in the field. These options remain set from job to job. If an option is not
applicable, it is grayed out. Configure is accessible from within any routine where
the C or Configure Icon is present. These options can also be accessed by
pressing ALT-C on the keyboard.

p153
 Store Fixed Only: When enabled, only data gathered in the fix ed (locked)
status will be stored to the point file. If you attempt to store data when the
receiver is not fixed, a message will appear stating, "Position is not fix ed!
Continue storing?" The program will prompt to store the point anyway. This
allows for overwriting the Store Fixed Only option without having to go back
to the Configure menu.

p154
 Prompt for Total Station Setup: This option determines whether or not the
software will display the current setup and orientation values each time the
user enters a survey routine.
 Prompt for Height and Description: When this option is enabled, you will
be prompted after each shot to enter the target height and description. Though
this adds an extra prompt screen to each shot, it can reduce errors, as you no
longer have to anticipate the shot and get the correct information entered
ahead of time. This prompt screen is shown in the figure below. When it
appears, you will have the option to enter a point description and change the
point number and the target height. Note that all the field codes identified in
the Feature Code List under File are available for touch or arrow key
selection, provided this option is activated in Job Settings (Use Code Table
for Descriptions). Also, if you enter the first character of a code (for ex ample,
"I" for IP), the first field code starting with that character will be highlighted,
allowing you to arrow key to the one you want, or accept the highlighted
option. This entry is not case-sensitive. Disable the Prompt For Height and
Description option to save time while taking points, or if you are certain that
your height and description will not change from shot to shot. If the option is
disabled, you must be sure that the correct target height and description have
already been entered.

Note: In the Height/Description Prompt screen, you will see pre-defined

Feature Code points indicated with a large dot. 2D polylines will show as a simple
line, 3D polylines will show as a line with a "Z" indicator, and descriptions entered
p155
that are not found in the feature code list will appear with the "fieldbook" symbol
above.

 Prompt for Point Notes: Point Notes are additional descriptions that can be
stored with a point. A regular point consists of a point ID (number or
alphanumeric), northing, easting, elevation, and description (up to 32
characters). Point Notes are a way to add an unlimited number of lines of tex t
to a point. With this toggle enabled, you will be prompted for notes after
collecting a point. The notes are stored in a file with the same name as the
coordinate file, but with a .NOT extension. For example, a job called
TOPO.CRD would have a note file called TOPO.NOT.
 3D Mode: This option allows you to toggle between 2D or 3D data. In 2D
mode, all elevations will be stored as 0.0
 Use Virtual Keyboard: This option provides a software keyboard for data
collectors without keyboards.
 Use Graphic Icon: This option toggles between the traditional letter icons (in
versions prior to SurvCE 2.0) and the new graphic icons.
 Use Audible Alerts: Turn on or off data collector sound alarms.
 Use Alphanumeric Format: When this option is enabled, SurvCE will allow
alphanumeric point numbers such as 2A or T1105. When this option is
disabled, SurvCE will only allow numeric point number entry. Note: this
setting only affects new jobs, not existing ones. Using purely numeric files
can increase operation speed in very large files, however, this option limits
points to just over 32,000. An alphanumeric format will be necessary for files
larger than 32,000 points. A comment will be added in the Rw5 file “ —CRD:
Alphanumeric” or “—CRD:Numeric”, based on the format used.
 Show Continuous Total Station Angles: This allows you to display angles
continuously within SurvCE. This option is especially useful when using
On-board versions of SurvCE.
 No. of Readings to Avg (TS & GPS) : Specifies the number of readings that
will be taken and averaged on each observation. Values between 1 and 9 are
accepted for Total Stations and 1-999 for GPS. If the tolerance is ex ceeded
between readings, a warning screen will appear.

Note: The Num Dist Readings setting does not apply to Manual Total
Station mode. In this mode, you can use the Calculator to average
distances. When prompted for Slope Distance, enter “ ?” to bring up the
calculator. Choose the Scientific Tab. Follow the tutorial below to
average three values:

p156
 141.213 Enter
141.211 Enter
141.220 Enter

Now press + on the keyboard twice and with the first +, 141.220 is added
to 141.211 to get 282.431, then with the second + you get 423.6440.

Then enter 3 and type “/”(backslash) for divide. This gives the result:
141.2147.

Choose the Copy button at the bottom of the screen, then Paste at the
top.

 Enter/Store Icon (TS & RTS/GPS) : Since the Enter key is a convenient
and popular way to take shots in the Store Points command, SurvCE allows
you to specify the effects of this key. These different functions of the Enter
key apply not only to Store Points but also to Elevation Difference . The
function of the Enter key is set separately for Total Stations and GPS. The
different options are described below. Note: Most users choose Read then
Store.

Store Then Read: This option similar to the effects of the Read key on
the original SDR data collectors. After a backsight, the first time Enter is
used, it will take the shot and display the results. Then when you
foresight the next point, Enter will “Store Last, Read Next”. This
procedure is best used with the above Hgt/Desc Prompt on Save
disabled. If that option is on, then when you turn to the new shot and
press Enter, the new shot doesn’t take right away, but instead, you are
prompted for the target height and description of the previous shot. That
could cause some confusion. But with Hgt/Desc Prompt turned off, this
method can be very efficient. You press Enter and take your first shot.
You see the results displayed, and can alter descriptions or target heights
or point numbers for that shot. You sight your next foresight, and press
Enter and the previous shot is correctly stored and the nex t is taken. The
information is displayed. You can review and alter it. You sight your
next foresight, press Enter and store the last shot and shoot the nex t, etc.

Read then Store: With this option, the Enter key takes the shot and
stores the point. This option works very well with the Hgt/Desc Prompt
on Save turned on, in which case Enter key takes the shot, then displays

p157
 the results and provides an opportunity for editing as in the Store Point
dialog shown above.

Read or Store: The first Enter key takes the reading and the second
Enter key stores the reading.

Configure (View Pt)

These settings control the reporting appearance of the stakeout navigation
information. The Method setting allows you to choose the stakeout inform ation
that is most appropriate for your situation and personal preference. The options
for Method are described in detail below.

Method Options:
 North-South, East-West: When total stations are used, the direction to go in
stakeout can be North-South, East-West. For instance, the program might
advise, "North 3.582, East 1.917." This method is better suited to GPS work
and is subject to having a sense, in the field, of the north direction.
 In-Out, Left-Right: Nearly all surveyors choose this method. If you are
staking a point located 100 meters from the instrument, and take a
measurement at 97 meters, the program will respond, “Out 3”. If the In-Out,
Left-Right method is selected, then the Ref. Object and Directions From

p158
 options become available to further define left-right. The Ref. Object box
allows you to choose a stationary point by which the directions will be
referenced. This point can be either the instrument or a known point. If Ref.
Object is set as instrument, then left is defined as left of the line between the
instrument and the rod. Likewise, if Ref. Object is point then left is defiined
as left of the line between the point and the rod. The second option,
Directions From, allows you to decide whether the directions are relative to
the stationary point selected in Ref. Object or to the moving Rod.
 Direction to Point—Azimuth, Distance: This directs you to the point for
stakeout by the total distance and the azimuth, in either the 360 degree circle
or a 400 degree circle if configured to grads. The Use Horizontal Clock
system option converts the 360 (or 400) circle into a 12-hour circle with 60
minutes per hour, and is used in certain military applications. North is 12 o ’
clock.
 CL In-Out, Forward-Back if Alignment available : This option overrides
the settings above, and if the stakeout involves a centerline, the program will
direct the user by distance in to or out from the centerline and forward or back
along the centerline.

Configure (Sets)
This tab allows the user to define how the software will handle angle sets,
reciprocals, and direct and reverse.

p159
 D&R: The user can choose to measure direct and reverse readings for
backsight, traverse, resection, topography, or stakeout routines. If the user
measures direct and reverse for the backsight readings, all foresight readings
that also are recorded direct and reverse will be recorded and computed as
angle sets. If the backsight reading is only measured direct, then foresight
points that are measured direct and reverse are then combined to produce an

p160
 average observation record for the vertical circle, which is stored in the .rw5
file as a sideshot (SS) record. For calculation purposes, the routine only
averages the distances using both vertical circle readings, and uses the direct
horizontal reading for the direction. Both the direct and reverse readings are
stored in the .rw5 file as a note record. When disabled, (default setting) only
the direct foresight shot will be taken. This option improves accuracy on
elevation measurements and mimics a feature found on the SDR data
collectors. The Resection D&R will also apply to Remote Benchmark.
 Reciprocal Calc: The Reciprocal Calculation option has three settings: No,
Prompted, and Always. It governs the calculation of the elevation of foresight
points taken with a total station, where a backsight measurement is also taken.
When set to Always, the program will calculate the distance to the foresight
point and delta elevation by combining the foresight and backsight
measurements. When set to Prompted, the program will detect the backsight
measurement and ask the user if the occupied point should be calculated using
both previous foresight and current backsight. If set to No, the program
calculates foresight points based only on the foresight measurement. If, for
example, you had a vertical difference of +1.2 going up to the foresight, and
then when you backsighted the difference was -1.0, the program would
calculate the average difference (1.1) and would lower your occupied point by
0.1 “on-the-fly”, prior to conducting foresights. This is useful for multi-setup
topo work, in particular, where no further adjustment is anticipated. For
closed traverse or high-precision work, it is recommended that you run with
Reciprocals off and use the adjustment options found in your office software
or within Cogo, Process Raw File, in SurvCE. Reciprocals, because they
re-calculate your occupied point by combining the backsight with the prior
foresight information, should be used with care, because they will degrade the
precision of the work if backsights are not precisely measured, with correct
target heights.
 Reverse Face Angles Only: When taking Face 1 and Face 2 foresights, or
when doing Set Collection, the program will use the distance from the direct
reading only, but will use the horizontal and vertical angles from both the
direct and reverse face readings. This setting is repeated and displayed within
Configure in Set Collection. Any change in either location controls the
setting. (Note that in Manual Total Station, you will be prompted for reverse
face distance, but the entry will not be used.) When using robotic total
stations, which do not take distance measurem ents in reverse face, setting
Reverse Face Angles Only is necessary to use motorized direct and reverse
readings.
 Reverse Face - Auto Turn: This option is for motorized instruments only and
when enabled will automatically turn the instrument to the reverse face.
p161
 Reverse Face - Auto Read: This option will immediately take a reading after
the instrument has turned to the reverse face. You must make sure that the
auto targeting option is on.

Localization
This command allows you to define the project coordinate system, geoid usage,
and scale factors, as well as align on a local coordinate system for GPS. Further
discussions on localization are found in Tutorial 2 near the end of the manual.

System Tab
Click Edit Projection List to add to the list and to create user-defined projections.
The user may select a predefined or ceate a user-defined coordinate projection
system

p162
 Projection: If you click the arrow to the right of the current projection, you
can select from a list of projections that you have previously created. But to
select a projection that you haven’t previously used, choose Edit Projection
List.
 Edit Projection List: Click this button to select a predefined projection or
define a new projection.
 Add Predefined: If you click Add Predefined, you can set the
country/projection to use at the top of the dialog, then choose the zone within
the projection. For example, in the United States, State Plane 83 is a common
projection, with various grids available covering all states. If Austria is
selected, options for that country appear.

p163
 Country: Some of the projections available for selection in the Country
category are discussed below:

NAD 27: When selecting this coordinate system, you will also need to
specify a state plane zone. SurvCE will use data files to perform a
NADCON datum shift from WGS84 to NAD27 coordinates. By default,
only data files for the continental U.S. are loaded to the data collector. If
you are working outside this region, please load the appropriate files
from your CD to the SurvStar\NADConv directory. NAD27 uses the
Clarke 1866 ellipsoid.
NAD 83: When selecting this coordinate system, you will also need to
specify a state plane zone. NAD 83 uses the G RS80 ellipsoid.
UTM: The ellipsoid used in the Universal Transverse Mercator
calculation is determined by the Datum selection. If you choose the
option, “WGS 84/Automatic Zone Selection”, the zone is determined by
the lat/lon values read in from the receiver. If you know your UTM zone,
you can also select it. Whenever SurvCE does a reverse calculation
(from UTM to WGS84) you will be prompted to enter a zone number.
3TM (Canada): This system is also referred to as “MTM”. It is a 3
degree zone width Transverse Mercator calculation. You may select
between the Clarke 1866 ellipsoid and the WGS84 ellips oid.
New Zealand: You may select between “NZGD2000” and “NZGD49”.
Both use the Transverse Mercator calculation. NZGD2000 uses the
GRS80 ellipsoid. NZGD49 uses the International 1924 ellipsoid. You

p164
 may specify a Meridional Circuit with either datum. To select the circuit,
press the Define button. You will see a pull-down list with all
Meridional Circuits as well as the option to pick None.
RGF 93 (France): This system requires that you have the file named
“Predef1.csl” in the SurvStar directory on the data collector. If this file is
not found, please re-install SurvCE.
NTF (France): This system requires that you have the file named
“Predef1.csl” in the SurvStar directory on the data collector. If this file is
not found, please re-install SurvCE. NTF is an approx imation of the
NTF-GR3DF97A grid transformation.
NTF-GR3DF97A: This system is a grid transformation that requires the
files “Predef1.csl” and “gr3df97a.bin” to be in the SurvStar directory on
the data collector. The “Predef1.csl” file is part of the default installation.
You will need to use Data Transfer to copy the “gr3df97a.bin” file from
your CD to your data collector.
OSTN02 (UK): This system is a grid transformation that requires the
files “Predef1.csl”, “ostn02_x.bin” and “ostn02_y.bin”. The
“Predef1.csl” file is part of the default installation. You will need to use
Data Transfer to copy the “ostn02_x.bin” and “ostn02_y.bin” files from
your CD to your data collector.
RD2000: This is the RD NAP transformation for the Netherlands. This
system is a grid transformation that requires the file “Predef1.csl”,
“X2C.grd” and “Y2C.grd”. The “Predef1.csl” file is part of the default
installation. You will need to use Data Transfer to copy the “X2C.grd”
and “Y2C.grd” files from your CD to your data collector.
Denmark 34: Used for all cadastral mapping and for most technical
mapping carried out in Denmark. System 34 is a two dimensional -
horizontal - coordinate system. System 34 is based on the National
Geodetic Reference Network and is divided into two different zones, one
covering Jutland and Fuen, and the other covering Sealand. The island of
Bornholm has its own coordinate system called System 45.

 Add User Defined: To define a new coordinate system, go to the Localization

under the EQUIP tab. You will find the Edit Projection List button under
the SYSTEM tab. Then select the Add User Defined button. Enter a name for
your system (e.g. PRVI for Puerto Rico/Virgin Islands), then select a
projection (in the example below, Lambert_Conformal_Conic_2SP) and enter
the appropriate parameters. Note that all latitude and longitude values are in
decimal degrees and False Northing and False Easting are always presented in
meters. All entries involving degree must be in decimal degrees based on a
360 circle.

p165
New Datum: You may select a predefined Ellipsoid or set your own
parameters by typing in a new ellipsoid name and entering values for a
and 1/f. The values for dX, dY, dZ, rot X, rot Y, rot Z and scale are “to
WGS84”.

If the values you have are “from WGS84”, simply reverse the sign of

p166
 each value (positive becomes negative and vice versa). You will need to
save the system to a file. You may save the system to a “.sys” file or a
“.csl” file. Sys files contain only one system definition. Csl files contain
multiple system definitions. Both files are ASCII text files using
OpenGIS WKT (Well Known Text) format.

Load File: To load a user-defined coordinate system from a file, Click

under the Edit Projection List button under the SYSTEM tab in
Localization. Select Add User Defined and then Load File. Change the
File Type at the top to “.sys” or “.csl” depending on the type of file you
are loading. A “.sys” file will be associated with each job. You can load
the projection last used on a survey job by loading its “.sys” file. Select
your file and hit OK. If you have selected a ".csl" file, you will be asked
to choose from a list of system definitions found in the file. For the “.csl”
type, you may verify that the details of your system have been loaded
correctly by clicking the edit option.

TS Tab
The TS tab is where you specify the total station scale and adjustment options.

p167
 C & R (Curvature and Refraction) : This option applies only to total station
configurations and will be unavailable when your instrument is configured to
any GPS option. This factor causes an adjustment in distance measurement.
Effects are negligible except over long distances. It is recommended that this
toggle be enabled, except in those very rare cases where the instrument factors
in curvature and refraction.
 Sea Level Correction: If the sea level correction toggle is enabled, the
horizontal distance at the source point's elevation is reduced to the sea level
chord using the mean height of the vector. Typically this value is negligible
unless measuring very long distances.
 Scale Factor (TS): For most applications, the Scale Factor should be set to
1.0 to work on the ground with a total station. The scale factor represents the
combined grid/elevation factor that reduces ground distances to grid.
Therefore, for total stations, the scale factor acts as a multiplier. All distance
measurements taken by a total station will be multiplied by the scale factor.
Because there are two potential uses of the scale factor (to adjust G PS
measurements and to adjust total station measurements), two distinct scale
factors are stored and recalled for any job, one for total stations located on the
TS tab and one for GPS located on the G PS tab.
 Calculate: This routine will calculate the combined factor based on entered
coordinates. The coordinates must fall within the selected grid system, and the
elevation must be orthometric.

p168
GPS Tab
The GPS tab is where you define the RTK methods, geoid file, and GPS scale
factor.

 RTK Method (Transformation Types): The transformation can be by plane

similarity, rigid body, or seven-parameter Helmert methods. Plane Similarity

p169
 and Rigid Body both use a best-fit least-squares transform ation. The
difference is that the rigid body method does a transformation with a
translation and rotation, without scale. The plane similarity does a rotation,
translation and scale. These two methods only apply when two or more points
are held horizontally in the points tab. The Helmert method requires the user
to enter the seven parameters on the BY HELMERT tab.

 RTK Method (North Type): This option applies to the rotation when using
one-point localization. For this alignment method, the state plane coordinate is
translated to the local coordinate. Then the rotation can use either state plane
grid north or geodetic north.
 Scale Factor (GPS): For most applications, the Scale Factor should be set to
1.0 to work on the grid coordinate system using GPS. The scale factor
represents the “combined” grid/elevation factor that reduces ground distances
to grid. Therefore, for GPS, the scale factor acts as a divisor. All GPS
coordinates will also be divided by the scale factor. In this way, the same
“ground to grid” number can be used to convert total station shots to the grid,
or alternately to convert GPS shots to the ground.

To match the coordinates of any standard transform ation (e.g. UTM, NAD83),
the scale factor should be set to 1.0. When configured to total stations, the
Calculate option will calculate the combined grid/elevation factor from any
entered coordinate—based on your current state plane zone setting. This can

p170
 allow you to go “ground to grid,” to reduce the distance m easured by total
station to the sea level grid distance of GPS. If set to a GPS configuration,
Calculate becomes Read GPS . The Read GPS option is grayed out if a
multi-point localization is active. In that case, the scale factor is fixed by the
localization itself, and is the inverse of the value appearing in localization,
because within Units , we display the “ground to grid” number, whereas in
localization, we display the “grid to ground” multiplier. For base or one-point
rover localizations, Read GPS applies. After converting the LAT/LONG
from the GPS to the state plane coordinates and computing the grid and
elevation factors, the Scale Factor is applied as the final adjustment to the
coordinates. This adjustment is used on the X and Y coordinates, but not Z. In
GPS, the Scale Factor is applied by dividing the distance between the
coordinate and a base point by the Scale Factor. The coordinate is then set by
starting from the base point and moving in the direction to the coordinate for
the adjusted distance.

The base point is the first point appearing in the GPS Localization option. If
there are no points specified in Localization, then 0,0 is used as base point.
The Scale Factor can be entered directly or calculated using the grid factor
and elevation for the current position. When using the current position, the
program will read the LAT/LONG from the GPS receiver. The scale factor is
then calculated as: (State Plane Grid Factor - (Elevation/Earth Radius)). A
scale factor can be used to make grid-to-ground conversions between identical
points. This is useful if you want to adjust the lesser sea level distances of
GPS to the ground (greater) distances measured by total stations whenever you
are above sea level. The grid to ground scale factor is lower at higher
elevations because it acts as a divisor (the scale factor is always defined as
“ground to grid”). In summary, when configured to GPS, the scale factor
(typically <1) can be used to go “grid to ground” through division, and when
configured to total stations, the scale factor (typically <1) can be used to go
“ground to grid” through multiplication. It can also be used for any other
scaling purpose desired, but be advised that any scale factor used for G PS is
used as a divisor. Because there are two potential uses of the scale factor (to
adjust GPS measurements and to adjust total station measurements), two
distinct scale factors are stored and recalled for any job, one for total stations
located on the TS tab and one for GPS located on the GPS tab.

 Geoid Separation File : This option will incorporate the geoid undulation in
determining the orthometric elevation of the measurement. The definition of
the geoid model as currently adopted by the National Geodetic Survey is the
equipotential surface of the Earth's gravity field which best fits, in a least

p171
 squares sense, global mean sea level. Orthometric elevation measurements are
used in survey calculations. In order to convert ellipsoid heights (He) as
measured by GPS into orthometric elevations (Eo), you must provide for a
correction between the GPS-measured ellipsoid (reference ellipsoid) and a
constant level gravitational surface, the geoid. This correction is the geoid
undulation (Ug). Use XPort or SurvCOM to download the Geoid Separation
File. This option only has significant impact with one-point alignments. The
zip file containing the Geoid Files (GSF, Geoid99 or EGM) is found on the
SurvCE installation CD, and a portion of any such file can be specified (by
size and center point) for downloading to the data collector using Carlson
X-Port or Carlson SurvCom.

How To Use Geoid Files with Carlson SurvCE

1. Download and/or install either Carlson X-Port or SurvCOM to the desktop
computer.
2. Download and/or install “CarlsonGeoidGrids.exe” to a location on your
desktop computer (Typically installed to the “…\Program Files\Carlson
X-Port\” directory).
3. If you have Microsoft ActiveSync already installed on your computer, make
sure that it is not currently occupying the COM port.

To do this:
Launch ActiveSync and select Connection Settings from the File menu.
Remove the check box that refers to the port you intend to use with
Carlson X-Port (Typically COM1).
Select OK to exit Connection Settings and close ActiveSync.

4. Connect your handheld device to your desktop com puter using a serial cable.
p172
5. Run Carlson SurvCE on the handheld device and select Data Transfer from
the FILE tab.
6. From within the Data Transfer dialog, select the SurvCADD(Carlson
Civil)/Carlson Survey Transfer option.
7. Leave the data collector waiting for communications as shown by the
resulting File Transfer dialog.
8. Launch either Carlson X-Port or SurvCOM from your desktop computer. If
you are using Carlson X-Port, select Carlson SurvCE/SurvStar/G2 from the
Tools menu to launch SurvCOM.
9. From within SurvCOM, and while connected to the handheld computer via a
serial cable, you should be able to see the contents of the handheld device on
the right and the contents of the desktop computer on the left sim ultaneously.
If you do not see the handheld device on the right, you are not connected.
10. Select the Geoid icon located at the bottom of the S urvCOM dialog.
11. From within the Set Geoid Area dialog, verify the path to the geoid files is set
to the installed location of these files as defined in step 2 of this document
(Typically “…Program Files\Carlson X-Port\”).
12. Select the desired geoid model to extract an area from.
13. Key in the approximate latitude and longitude of the center of the area.
14. Define the grid size for the area you want the model to cover (Supported sizes
are 50-250 miles, 80-400 kilometers and 1-5 degrees, however, keep the s ize
100 miles or smaller for better performance).
15. Name the geoid model with any name that you want (e.g. "geoid"). Y ou may
want to name this file with a logical name for the location of the area for
future reference (e.g. "geoid-LA").
16. Select the OK button to automatically transfer the file to the “…\Survstar\”
directory of the handheld device. A copy of the file will also be created on
your desktop computer in the currently selected folder.
17. On the handheld device, go to the FILE tab and select Job Settings, then
choose the GPS tab.
18. Select the Geoid Separation File button and choose the geoid file you created
and transferred with SurvCOM.
19. You have now completed the definition and selection of the geoid file. Select
OK to exit the Job Settings dialog.

Points Tab
This tab is where the user adds pairs of positions to create a localization.

p173
 View: The local coordinates are shown in the POINTS tab by default.
Pressing View will switch the view to show the geodetic, Lat/Lon
coordinates.
 Scale: The Scale Factor, shown in the Localization dialog when two or more
localization points are used, is a multiplier and represents “grid to ground”.
When configured to GPS in release 1.50.004 or higher of SurvCE, any GPS
localization scale factor is displayed within the UNITS tab of Job Settings in
inverse form to represent “ground to grid”.
 Add: Enter the alignment or localization points by coordinate values or by
entering a point number. If you choose the point number method, you can
enter a point number or select them from the point list. If you choose the
From List method, you can access points in the Control File, if a Control File
is active (See Job Settings, Options). You can average as many readings as
you like when you add points, and view the range and residuals. It is
recommended that you use the point number option and carefully hand-enter
your local grid system coordinates first, using either List Points, option Add,
or Keyboard Input. Entry of coordinates “on-the-fly”, in the field, provides
opportunity for error. Once you click OK in the coordinate dialog, you will
have three options for establishing the G PS position for the named local point.

Add Method 1--Read GPS: This allows you to collect measurements

from the GPS receiver and average as many readings as you choose.
Once the readings are complete, the software will present a dialog that

p174
displays the range and residuals of the averaged readings.

Add Method 2--Enter Latitude/Longitude: This allows you to

hand-enter known geodetic coordinates for the local position. The
elevation should be the ellipsoid elevation in the current job units if a
geoid model is not applied. If a geoid model is applied, then the elevation
should be the orthometric elevation in the current job units. This method
allows manual entry of a localization file without occupying points in the
field. Note that you do not enter the decimal point for decimal seconds.

If you use manual entry of a localization data set, it is important that you
either utilize an existing base GPS receiver with the fixed antenna
location that was used to survey the original geodetic positions, or that
you set up your base on a known GPS position measured previously
using that localization data set. Good survey practice would include
checking into known positions to verify the quality of your hand-entered
GPS localization and verifying low residuals in the Localization screen.
With all data pairs used for both horizontal and vertical control (none
turned off), the resolutions for this data set will appear.

Add Method 3--From Raw File: This allows you to use a point from the
raw data file that has been previously collected via GPS. This is just like
Read from GPS except you are recalling a point previously measured
and stored in the raw file. For this to work, you must have the base

p175
 antenna in the same position as when the original raw file was collected,
or you need to set your base antenna over a known coordinate from the
original survey, and enter those original coordinates and the new base
antenna height within the command Configure Base.

 Delete: Allows you to delete the selected item from the list. Note that it is not
necessary to delete a localization point if you simply want to avoid using it.
You can disable both the horizontal and vertical component of the point, but
keep it available for use later.
 Edit: Allows you to edit the selected item in the list. It will display the
northing, easting and elevation of the localization point, which can be
changed.
 On/Off: Allows you to remove the horizontal or vertical components of your
localization points. This is a frequently used feature that enables the use of
one point for vertical control only (turn off its horizontal component) and
other points for horizontal control (turn off their vertical, if appropriate).
Points with no known elevation (0 for example), would obviously be used
only for horizontal control, as shown in this ex ample.

Note that in this example, it takes three horizontal control points, active “H On
= Y” to get horizontal residual results, and four vertical control points, active
“V On = Y” to get vertical residual results. You can employ trial and error to
remove different points from consideration both vertically and horizontally

p176
 and watch the residuals of the remaining control points improve or degrade.
In this way, if you have four or more total control points, you can determine
the best combination to use as horizontal and vertical control.
 Load: This allows you to load any localization file for modifying or for the
purpose of associating it to the current job. Note that the OK button must be
used if the intention is to associate the loaded file to the current job.
 Monitor: Goes to the standard Monitor screen. This is particularly useful to
verify the quality of your satellite coverage and your fixed or float status. You
always want the best possible fixed status when conducting a rover-based
localization.
 Save: Allows you to save the control points in a file.
 2 pt Rotate Only: Allows you to use the second point in the localization file
for direction but not for scaling. In this case, any scale factor set on the
UNITS tab in Job Settings would be active.
 OK: Pressing OK will temporarily recall the current Localization as you
work. If you change the Localization file, Save, then Cancel, the original
Localization file will still be active. Pressing OK is what makes it active, and
current. In this case, you would need to Load the new Localization file and
press OK to make it active. You can choose to Add localization points
midway on a job, and not actually use them by pressing Save, then Cancel.
Then when the job is complete, you can recall the Localization file with all the
old and added localization points, go to Process Raw File, and re-calculate all
surveying points according to the new Localization.

Discussion of Localization Techniques

If you do a base localization by entering Latitude and Longitude or known
coordinates on the designated coordinate system , then you do not need to add
localization points. A base localization would put you on grid north and grid scale
and would work for any new job where you are not trying to match ex isting
coordinates. However, any time you are working on a project that has ex isting
coordinates, you will most likely need to do a Localization. Even if that ex isting
job is supposedly on state plane, UTM or another known coordinate system , the
project coordinates often fail to match grid scale and grid north ex actly, requiring
localization. When localizing, it is advisable to use at least three points for
horizontal control and four points for vertical control, in order to get a measure of
residuals (or accuracy). The program will “best fit” a plane through all activated
(H=On and/or V=On) control points. The residuals are how much each activated
point is off of the plane surface. Because multiple elevation points may create a
slightly tilted plane, some surveyors will verify that the vertical control has low
residuals and is accurate using multiple vertical control points, then turn off all but
p177
one (V=Off) and use only the nearest vertical (elevation) as they progress through
the job.

Note: The Scale Factor chosen in UNITS under Job Settings will cause all
GPS measurements to be adjusted by the scale factor. For GPS, scale factors
can only be entered for one-point localizations (base or rover). For
multi-point rover localizations, the scale factor is computed by the localization
and fixed. It appears grayed out under UNITS in Job Settings . When a scale
factor is used for one-point localizations, scaling occurs along the vector
outward from the single localization point in the direction of the measured
point. For GPS, the scale factor acts as a divisor. A scale factor of 0.9 will
calculate the measured point 1/0.9 units further away from the single
localization point. Therefore, it is recommended that you keep the scale factor
set to 1.0. When configured to total station, the scale factor is sometimes used
to go “ground to grid”. When configured to GPS, the scale factor in is
sometimes used to go “grid to ground”, to better match total station scaling.
The scale factor is defined as “ground to grid”. To go “ground to grid” from
high elevations, for example, it would be less than 1. It would multiply total
station measurements and reduce them to grid. It would divide GPS
measurements and expand them to ground. If your goal is to work on the
specified state plane, UTM or other grid coordinate system, and you are
planning to use a one-point localization, then the scale factor should be set to
1, unless you are trying to match “ground” coordinates, where the coordinates
are “true north” but not “true scale”. In all other cases, matching ground
coordinates with GPS is best accomplished with a multi-point rover-based
localization. The resulting “effective” scale factor multiplier will appear in
the localization screen, such as the 0.999779 value shown in the last figure.

After a change in a localization file, any points measured in the field by G PS will
be converted from Lat/Long to local coordinates by using the new localization file.
For this reason, it is a good idea to re-convert older GPS measurements to the
same, compatible coordinate system by going to Process Raw Data, option
Process GPS, within the COGO tab.

Geoid Files
The Geoid file is loaded onto SurvCE using Carlson X-Port. You first select the
area of interest, then X-Port “carves out” the geoid for that area and downloads it
to SurvCE. You set the Geoid file to use in the G PS tab of Job Settings. The
Geoid should be used principally with one-point localizations. Starting with a
known position for the base (or using a one-point rover localization and
approximate base position), the program will add or deduct the geoidal separation

p178
from the computed Z value on all measurements, and will match more closely to
geoid-based surface elevations. The Geoid can also be used with multiple-point
rover localizations, since the added accuracy provided by the geoidal calculation
can reduce vertical residuals. This is true, however, only if the points being
matched had Z values that, themselves, considered the geoid. Since you will get a
best-fit plane that minimizes vertical residuals with or without use of the geoid, it
is often not used with rover-based localizations.

Changing or Updating the Localization File

There are two ways to change a localization file. One method is to edit an ex isting
file by deleting elements, and the second is to add additional localization points.
In either case, whenever a change in the “.dat” localization file is detected, you are
prompted whether you would like to re-process any previously stored GPS points
found in the raw file. The dialog below appears.

If you answer Yes, you will be directed to the Process GPS command found
within COGO, Process Raw File.

Recalculating Stored GPS Points

There is no requirement to survey all localization points first, unless you are doing
stakeout. For simple topo or data gathering, you can set up your base, survey in
one or two localization points with the rover, then gather data in Store Points as
needed. As you move cross country and encounter another known, or unex pected,
control point, you can localize on it and add it to the list. The nex t step would be
to verify residuals, and if the results are good, you can reprocess the raw file and
keep your entire survey fully updated. If the residuals are disappointing, you can
choose not to include the new point in the localization file. Either remove it or
turn its H and V components off. You can also choose Process Raw File to
recalculate all GPS measurements at any time.

Including the Base Position in the Localization File

p179
To use the base in the localization, you should configure the base with the Use
Local Coordinates option under From Known Position. Here, you configure the
base by entering the local point (5000,5000,100, etc.) and start a new localization
file (or use an existing one if it applies). Then, at your rover, you can add more
points to the localization as necessary.

Localization and the Raw File

If the scale for GPS is determined from the localization, a “GPS Scale” record of
1.0 and a “Localization Scale” equal to the calculated scale appearing in the
Localization screen will be written to the RW5 file.

Using the Localization File to Improve Base Localizations

through Logging Static Data
The Localization File (.dat) typically applies to rover-based localizations. But if
you did a Read GPS on your base antenna position and then took G PS shots with
no rover localization, and logged static data on the base in the meantime, it is
possible to submit that logged information to the OPUS program and obtain an
accurate base position. At this point, it is still possible to recalculate all the field
shots taken earlier from the less accurate base. To do so, follow the procedure
outlined below.
1. Store the Base Point (Reference Tab in the Monitor screen).
2. Add a point to the now-empty Localization File. For the local point, enter the
grid system coordinate computed by OPUS or other program. For the
geodetic Lat/Lon point, review the raw file and select the point you stored for
the base.
3. Reprocess the raw file through the localization. All CRD points should then
be relative to the new calculated (eg. OPUS-generated) coordinate .

Monitor/SkyPlot (GPS)
The Monitor/Skyplot command allows you to review local position and quality of
data.

 Quality: Under the QUALITY tab you monitor the status and number of
satellites. You can also see values for horizontal and vertical RMS values, as
well as HDOP, VDOP, PDOP, TDOP and GDOP values. Some instruments
refer to RMS values as CEP and SEP. For the CSI DGPS and the Sokkia Axis
3 receivers using OmniStar, the BER value will be shown in order to give
indication of the strength of corrections received. When set to CSI DGPS, the

p180
 age of corrections is also displayed. The number of satellites (SATS) is
shown.

The Status is shown as either:

AUTONOMOUS: No radio communication between base and rover.

DGPS: Corrections from a differental sources such as WAAS or SBAS.
FLOAT: Communication has been established, but ambiguities have not
been resolved.
FIXED: Position has been resolved.

 Position: Under the POSITION tab you see the current position given in
latitude, longitude, ellipsoid elevation, geoid separation, and orthometric
elevation. You will also see the local grid coordinates here.

p181
 SATView: Under the SATView tab, the spatial orientation of the satellite
constellation is shown. Click on any satellite number to see details. Y ou can
also toggle satellites on and off if supported by the GPS.

 SATInfo: This tab shows information on Satellites.

 PRN is the satellite reference numbers. * indicates satallite in use for position

p182
 calculation.
 AZI: is the satellite azimuth.
 ELV: is the satellite elevation above the horizon.
 S/N: is the signal to noise ratio indicating quality of satellite signal.

 Ref: The REF tab to the right of SAT Info appears with most G PS
configurations (not with GPS Simulation). The REF tab will show the base
station information stored to the reference file, which is created during base
configuration. The Magellan/Ashtech GPS, for ex ample, will show the
distance from rover to base. The base coordinates can also be stored by
pressing the Store button.

You simply enter a point number and description, and the precise base
coordinates are stored in north, east and elevation, according to the
localization file settings. Then the base coordinate point can be used for total
station work as a setup or backsight. If a base position of 0,0,0 is detected,
representing in invalid base setup, the Store button will be grayed out.

p183
 With Leica GPS, it also shows the status of the radio signal in the middle two
lines. If the radio signal is interrupted, a “No Radio” message will appear.
The Utilities button associated with the Leica GPS configuration takes you
straight to the radio settings, including cell modem configuration.

Check Level (Total Station)

This feature is only available on instruments that provide information from
electronic compensators. It allows the user to Check the level of the instrument
from within the software.

p184
 Tilt T: Shows the compensator value.
 Tilt L: Shows the compensator value.

Tolerances
This command allows you to set operating tolerances for the collection of points.

Total Station Tolerances:

p185
 H. Obs: This specifies the horizontal observation tolerance as an angle field.
A tolerance of zero is not allowed.
 V. Obs: This specifies the vertical observation tolerance as an angle field. A
tolerance of zero is not allowed.
 Edm tol (mm): EDM fixed tolerance in millimeters specifies the EDM error
that is independent of the length of the line measured.
 Stakeout Tol: This specifies the maximum difference between the target
location and actual staked point. When the staked point is beyond the
tolerance, SurvCE displays a warning dialog. The Stakeout Tolerance is
systematically applied to all stakeout commands. The program will respond
with a warning screen such as “Stakeout is beyond the Tolerance Setting. Do
you wish to continue storing?” The angle and distance tolerances are applied
to multiple distance measurements (when Configure Reading specifies
multiple Num Dist Readings) and when multiple angle measurements are
taken in Set Collection or processed in Process Raw File.

GPS Tolerances:

p186
 CEP/HRMS Tol: A measurement of accuracy defined by the radius of the
circle containing 50 percent of the individual measurements being made, or
the radius of the circle within which there is a 50 percent probability of being
located.
 SEP/VRMS Tol: A measurement of accuracy defined by a sphere within
which there is a 50 percent probability of locating a point or being located.
SEP is the three-dimensional analogue of CEP.
 Stakeout Tol: This specifies the maximum difference between the target
location and actual staked point. When the staked point is beyond the
tolerance, SurvCE displays a warning dialog.

Note: CEP tolerance and SEP tolerance are only used by Trimble. All others refer
to it as HRMS and VRMS Tolerance.

Note: Even if you are fixed, if you attempt to store points and your GPS tolerance
values are exceeded, you will obtain a warning screen.

Peripherals
A Peripheral is a device that must be used in tandem with a GPS receiver or a total
station. Peripherals can all be configured from the Peripherals menu under the
p187
EQUIP tab. Lasers, Light Bars, and Depth Sounders are all supported as
peripherals. If a peripheral is not currently in use, it is strongly recommended that
you deactivate it, so it does not slow down other operations. Lasers such as the
Leica Disto can be used for horizontal offsets, and can be set to supplement the rod
height for data collection “at the pole” using robotic total stations or GPS for
marine or ATV surveys.

Lasers
Currently supported lasers are Laser Atlanta, Leica Disto, Laser Impulse IP200,
Laser Impulse CR400, and Sokkia Contour. If you have a different laser, contact
Carlson Software to discuss adding support for it. With G PS enabled, a laser can
be used to provide an offset from a GPS reading. For more information, see the
GPS Offset section of the manual. With a robotic total station enabled, a laser can
be used to automatically measure the rod height of each total station reading.

To activate a laser for use with GPS, follow these steps:

1. Plug in your laser to any of your device’s COM ports; make sure that it is
adequately charged, and turn it on.
2. Enter the Peripherals menu, and select the LASER tab, as shown above.
3. Check Active
4. Select the type of laser you are using.
5. Enter the height of your laser from the ground. This value will be added to the
vertical offset returned by your laser. For accuracy, this value should be
specified with respect to the same ground elevation that your GPS rod height

p188
 was specified.
6. Directions for aligning your laser will be given in a different section. For now,
leave the laser alignment value set to 0.
7. If you want GPS to be automatically updated between each laser read, enable
Auto GPS Update. If you want the Read Laser button to automatically
trigger the laser, enable Auto Laser Read.
8. Set appropriate COM port settings. To load the default settings for the laser
you specified, select the Default button. However, you will still need to set
your COM port number manually.
9. Click OK to save settings, or Cancel to revert back to your old settings.

Activating a laser for use with a robotic total station follows a similar procedure.
Attach the laser to the prism, pointing towards the ground. Every total station read
will automatically trigger the laser, and the read value will be used as the rod
height.

Using the Laser

1. Once the laser has been properly set up, enter the G PS Offset method and
press Read Laser.

2. A progress window should pop up, indicating that Carlson SurvCE is ready to
read from the laser. Aim the laser and fire at a target point. Keep firing until
your laser returns a valid reading, and the progress window disappears.
3. To test whether your shot was successful, verify that the values on your screen
correspond to the values on your laser’s internal display. Note that not all
lasers return azimuth and vertical offset data, in which case this information
will have to be entered manually.

Laser Alignment
This option is only relevant to lasers with internal compasses. The purpose of this
option is to allow you to compensate for any discrepancy between the laser ’s

p189
internal compass and the North determined by G PS. The alignment factor will be
automatically added to all azimuth values returned by the laser. The alignment
factor can either be entered manually, or calculated using the laser and GPS. To
calculate this factor using the laser, follow these steps:
1. If you don’t already have two known points in your vicinity, use GPS to store
two points within 50 feet of each other.
2. From the LASER tab of the Peripherals window, select Align Laser.

3. Choose an Occupied Point from your point list, and prepare to fire your laser
from that point.
4. Choose a Target Point from your point list, and prepare to fire your laser at
that point.
5. Click Read Laser, and when the "Reading Laser" progress bar appears, fire
your laser at the target point from your occupied point. An azimuth reading
will appear in the Laser Reading box, and two values will be calculated. The
Reference Angle is the azimuth of the vector from the occupied point to the
target point. The Alignment Factor is the difference between the azimuth read
by the laser and the Reference Angle.
6. Press OK, and the Alignment Factor that was calculated will appear in the
Laser Alignment box.
7. Click OK again to save the new alignment settings.

Laser-Specific Configurations
If you’re having trouble establishing communication with the laser, you may need

p190
to change certain settings on your laser’s instrument panel. Here are laser-specific
setup instructions for some of the lasers supported by SurvCE.

 Laser Atlanta: Make sure your Laser Atlanta baud-rate and message formats
agree with those you specified in SurvCE. Also, make sure the laser format is
set to Laser Atlanta Original (LA1KA). Consult your Laser Atlanta manual
for instructions on how to do this.
 Laser Impulse: Make sure your Laser Impulse baud-rate and message formats
agree with those you specified in SurvCE. Supported formats are IP200, and
CR400. Consult your Laser Impulse manual for instructions on how to do this.
 Leica Disto: Make sure your Leica Disto’s baud-rate agrees with those you
specified in SurvCE. Consult your Laser Impulse manual for instructions.
 Sokkia Contour: Make sure your Sokkia Contour’s baud-rate agrees with
those specified in SurvCE. Consult your Sokkia Contour manual for
instructions.
 MDL LaserAce: Using SurvCE 1.50.008 (or higher), you can use the
LaserAce, but should configure your peripherals screen to Impulse (CR400).
Using the MDL selection will invert the inclination. Use 9600 baud rate. Use
a Topcon/Sokkia data cable (not a Nikon cable!). The laser must be
configured to the same units as the job since SurvCE does not convert the
measurement.

Depth Sounders
Currently supported depth sounders are Horizon, Hydrotrac, Innerspace, and
Odom Digitrace. If you have a different depth sounder, contact Carlson Software
to discuss adding support for it. You can use a depth sounder with GPS to map an
underwater surface. When the depth sounder is enabled, SurvCE will alternate
between reading from GPS and reading from the depth sounder, so if you aren ’t
using a depth sounder, you must be sure this feature has been deactivated, or you
may experience slow GPS readings. When active, incoming Depth readings are
viewable in Monitor/Skyplot. Elevation values in the Store Point screen are
automatically depth adjusted.

p191
To activate the Depth Sounder, follow these steps:
1. Plug in your Depth Sounder to any of your device ’s unused COM ports and
turn it on.
2. Enter the Peripherals menu, and select the DEPTH SOUNDER tab, as shown
above.
3. Check Active
4. Select the Type of Depth Sounder you are using.
5. If the Unit Mode radios are not grayed, you will have to set the units to
correspond to those output by the depth sounder.
6. Specify the Port the Depth Sounder is plugged in to.

Light Bars
Currently supported light bars are Mikrofyn and Apache. Light bars can be used
with either GPS or total stations to provide prominently displayed direction
arrows, when staking out a polyline/centerline, or in the Elevation Difference
routine, when trying to cut or fill toward a target elevation.

p192
To activate the light bar, follow these steps:
1. Plug in the light bar to any of your device’s unused COM ports and turn it on.
2. Enter the Peripherals menu, and select the Light Bar tab, as shown above.
3. Check Active
4. Select the Type of light bar you are using.
5. Set the Grading Tolerance to the maximum permissible deviation from the
target path or elevation.
6. Specify the Port the Light Bar is plugged in to.

About SurvCE
This command allows you to view information about Carlson SurvCE and your
registration.

p193
Change Registration
The Change Registration button will open the SurvCE product registration dialog
box. This dialog will allow the user to register SurvCE.

p194
SURV
This chapter provides information on using the commands from the Survey menu.

Orientation (Instrument Setup)

p195
The instrument setup dialog is displayed upon entering every active survey routine,
unless "Prompt for Total Station Setup" is clicked off within Configuration. You
also go directly to the Orientation screen whenever you click the tripod icon in all
survey and stakeout routines. So if "Prompt for Total Station Setup" is clicked off,
but your occupied point has changed, then within the survey routine, tap the tripod
icon (lower right) to update the occupied point and other setup information.

When simply confirming the backsight information, if the OK button (green

checkmark) is active, you can simply press Enter or click OK to move on to the
active survey screen. If the OK button is grayed out, that means the program has
detected a new occupied point (or the first one of the survey). Then you must click
the Backsight screen and take an angle and/or distance measurement to the
backsight.

When configured to robotic total stations, the Tripod icon takes you first to the
robotics control screen for quick adjustments, and then back to more foresights.
From there, you can tab to the backsight screen to access all of the backsight
functions, then easily return when you are finished to the Foresight Screen.

 Occupy Point: You can manually enter the occupied point ID (occupied/setup
point) or click the List icon and select the point from a list of points. You can
also choose the point by clicking the Map icon and selecting the point from
the map itself by tapping a specific point. Finally, a third icon offers the
p196
 ability to occupy a station and offset on a known horizontal alignment, without
knowing a point number.

In the Station/Offset method, you must load a horizontal alignment (centerline) file
and then specify a station and offset. If you click the "store to disk" icon, it will
store the station and offset and after clicking OK in this dialog, you will be
prompted for a description, and the next available point will automatically be
assigned. If you enter a station and offset that is equivalent to a known point, that
point will populate in the Pt ID field. And if you enter a point in the Pt ID field, it
will confirm to you the station and offset. In road work, this option can be used
simply for confirmation of the correct station and offset for any entered point.

 Instr. Height: This is the height of the instrument from the center of
measurement (typically middle of the lens) to the tack in the hub,or ground
elevation over which the instrument is set. Units for the instrument height
will be set according to the options in Job Settings. The units for the job are
displayed (ft, ift or m). If you brought a feet and inches tape to the field, and
you are set in decimal feet units, you can enter the instrument height as 63" (in
which case 5.25 will be computed) or as 5.6.3.8 (5 feet 6 and 3/8", in which
case 5.5313 will be computed).
 Backsight point: Here you enter your backsight point ID, or pick it from a list
or from the map itself, using the icons to the right. You can also click the
station and offset icon, as with the occupied point. A backsight point ID is
required, even if you choose to enter an azimuth or bearing only.
p197
 Backsight Bearing or Azimuth: This displays the bearing or azimuth
between the two entered points, when both points have coordinates. If Angle
Type, in Job Settings, is set to bearing, then a backsight bearing will appear.
If set to azimuth, then the backsight azimuth is shown. (Azimuth should
always be used with a 400 circle/gons configuration). When both point IDs
have coordinates, the backsight is fixed and predetermined and therefore the
bearing/azimuth field is disabled since it cannot be altered. However, if the
backsight point has no coordinates, then you must enter a backsight bearing or
azimuth, which will be used to calculate the null or zero coordinate point ID.
 Target Height: This is the height in feet or meters (depending on your
configuration) of the target, from ground elevation to the center of the lens for
example. Even if working in English units, you can enter a 2 meter target
height using 2m. This converts to 6.5617 feet automatically after you press
Enter.

Note: The backsight target height will default to the previous backsight
target height on future setups. The foresight target height is kept distinct
and will default to previous foresight target heights, but will not
automatically match the backsight target height. If you prefer to survey
by setting the prism pole to a fixed height for both backsights and
foresights, be aware that you will have to put in 2 initial target heights:
one for the first backsight in the backsight screen and one for the first
foresight in the foresight screen, in order to get both “remembered”
values established.

 Use Backsight Ht for Foresights : This option will link the backsight height
and the foresight height to accommodate the use of a single prism for both the
backsight and foresight readings, rather than a fixed tripod at the backsight
and roving pole scenario.
 Confirm NEZ: This option will display the full coordinates and description of
both the setup and backsight points. By default, the Setup coordinates will be
displayed. You can tab to the backsight coordinates. Press Enter or tap OK to
exit this dialog.
 Configure: This accesses the Configure screen for a variety of condition or
settings changes (e.g. Hgt/Desc prom pt on save).
 Backsight: Continues to the Take Backsight screen.
 OK or pressing Enter: Continues straight to the Foresight screen. If OK is
not highlighted and not ghosted, pressing OK will still go to the Foresight
screen, even if Enter does not.

p198
Orientation (Backsight)
The backsight dialog has Setup and Results tabs showing the results of a
measurement to the backsight.

 Set Angle Option List: There are three options for setting the reference angle
in backsight. They are found in the options list at the upper left of the Take
BS screen:

Set to Zero: This is the most commonly used option. A message is sent
to the instrument to set it to zero, then the backsight is taken at a zero
reference angle. Angles are then typically turned to the right from zero.
Set to Backsight Azimuth: In this scenario, the backsight direction in
the gun is set to the azimuth of the backsight. For ex ample, if the
backsight azimuth is 180 degrees, then an angle to the right of 10 degrees
would read 190 degrees from the instrument. This is useful in
underground mine surveying because it ensures that the readings
displayed by the total station always refer to true azimuth. Some
surveyors are “azimuth” surveyors and others prefer “set zero”.
Use Current (Do Not Set Angle): Uses whatever direction reading is
already in the instrument.

p199
 Set Angle and Read: This button will set the horizontal angle and read the
distance to the backsight. The program defaults to the Set Angle and Read
option (the large, lower button), on the assumption that in most cases, you will
be taking a distance measurement to the backsight.
 Set Angle: This button will only set the horizontal angle. If you are just
backsighting an object or plumb bob without a measurement, choose Set
Angle. You can tap Set Angle on the screen or, using the keyboard, enter
ALT-S. (Note: On most buttons, the underlined letter in the name is the
hotkey which, in combination with the ALT key, will access the function of
the button. On this menu, for instance, ALT-A would go to Check Angle.)
 Check: This enables the surveyor to determine whether the instrument has
drifted off the point. Based on what is presented here, the surveyor m ay decide
to reset the BS angle, or to actually re-level and re-shoot the BS point. More
commonly, you would do a Check Backsight after taking a large set of
foresights. You may want to be sure that you haven ’t bumped the instrument
or experienced settlement in the tripod legs.
 Check Angle: This button will simply read the angle currently in the
instrument and compare it to the reference angle. Choose Check Angle to
re-sight on the backsight and obtain an angular error report (no distance
comparisons are made).
 Turn to BS: With robotic total stations, you have the option to automatically
turn to the backsight. This button will turn the instrument to the previously set
backsight angle so that a Check Angle or Set Angle can be performed. Once
you press OK to go back to the foresight screen, the instrument will
automatically prompt if you want to return to the previous foresight position.

Whether in a conventional or Manual Total Station configuration, pressing Set

Angle and Read or pressing Enter will cause a backsight to be taken. In Manual
Total Station configuration, a dialog will appear for you to manually input the
angle and distance measurements.

Pressing Enter or OK completes the backsight setup and leads to the foresight
screen, where shots are taken, readings are presented, and points are plotted
graphically.

Types of Total Station Backsights - Handling Missing

Information
The SurvCE backsight procedure will allow last minute entry of the backsight
coordinate values if none are found, or will calculate the backsight coordinates
using the azimuth and distance of the measurement. If both the Station and
p200
Backsight have coordinates (non-zero northings, eastings and elevations), the
backsight azimuth is computed, and the coordinate values are not altered.

Known Station and Backsight Azimuth to Backsight Point of

Unknown Coordinates
In the case that the coordinates of the station are known and you shoot a backsight
point of unknown coordinates, a backsight point will be calculated. Note that
when a zero-coordinate backsight point is encountered, the program will prompt
the user to "Enter Coordinates or Use Azimuth". This prompt appears only when
the Use Azimuth option has been selected. If you choose only to Set Angle, the
backsight point will not be calculated, but is still a viable entry in the raw file.
Some raw file processing programs make use of this backsight point with zero
coordinates as a backsight azimuth reference. It is recommended that you use
distinct new point IDs for all foresight points. Don ’t re-use a backsight point ID
that served as a “dummy” point to initiate the “set zero” backsight, unless you plan
to re-use it for the same backsight again.

Orientation (Remote Benchmark)

This is a command for total station applications only, in which the elevation of one
or more remote, but known, points is used to compute the elevation of the
occupied Station. The Remote BM tab is the 2nd to the right in the Backsight
screen. The main screen is shown below.

p201
 Read: You have the option to transfer the elevation from a single benchmark
by taking a reading on it, any number of times, in any face. You may also use
multiple benchmark points, any number of times, in any face. If you turn on
Direct and Reverse for Resection in Configuration, Sets tab, robotic
instruments will perform a D&R automatically for remote elevation readings
as well.

p202
 Results: The readings taken on the benchmark are reported in the Results
dialog. All of the readings taken will determine an average instrument point
elevation.
 Store: Click Store to update the instrument point elevation. A store point
record will be recorded to the raw data file.

Orientation (Robotics)
The term “Robotics” applies to G eodimeter, Trimble 5600, Leica, Sokkia and
Topcon robotic instruments. The Robotics tab has some variations per equipment
type.

Arrow Keys for Joystick

ALT-J will take you directly to the robotics dialog from elsewhere in the program.
The arrow-key motion is sometimes referred to as the Joystick Speed.

Leica: Tapping once in the direction you want (e.g. up) causes the instrument to
move slowly, two taps medium, and 3 taps fast speed. Tapping the other direction
(e.g. down) stops the movement.

Geodimeter/Trimble: Press the arrow key once. After a small delay, the

p203
instrument will move an incremental amount. Do not rush too many presses as they
all will be completed.

Topcon: Holding down the arrow keys on the keypad of the CE data collector
allows you to move the base instrument up and down, left and right. When you
release the key, the motion stops.

 Search: This button will initiate a search to look for the prism or reflector.
For Leica, Search initiates an ATR search. Pressing the Search or
Quick-Lock buttons will lock the instrument to the prism and put the
instrument back into tracking mode.
 PowerSearch: For Leica, the PowerSearch option will conduct a fast search,
typically less than 10 seconds. PowerSearch will find the prism regardless of
the original direction the instrument is pointing.
 QuickLock: Topcon has an additional search option called Quick-Lock
which appears when configured for Topcon 800/8000 Remote using RC2. A
Quick-Lock search will find the prism in less than 15 seconds.
 Standby: This button takes the instrument out of tracking mode. This is
useful, for example, in allowing the user to set the prism pole down to drive a
stake.
 Turn to Angle: This button opens an additional dialog that prompts you for
the angle to turn (which can be entered, picked from the Map, or point-based).
See the figure below. You can turn to a known point number or to an entered
horizontal and zenith angle using Turn Angle. When enabled, the Search
After Turn option, searches and locks on a prism after turning the angle
(potentially changing slightly the computed angle). Change Face reverses the
face. The lower three buttons (Turn Left 90, Turn 180 and Turn Right 90)
are common angle turns and minimize user entry when needed.

p204
 Settings: This button leads to a series of settings screens that allow you to dial
in the speed of motion, range of motion, and other factors governing
arrow-key driven movement and automatic searching.

Store Points (TS)

This command is designed for total stations and manual entry. It is the principal
data collection routine with total stations. Store Points interacts with numerous
settings, including the feature codes that will draw line work. All settings in
Configure Reading will impact Store Points, including the Number of Distance
Readings, Average Direct & Reverse, Hgt/Desc Prompt on Save, Angle Only in
Reverse Face and Function of Enter Key.

Foresights
The Foresight screen is entered automatically after exiting the Backsight screen.
In the backsight screen, if the green checkmark ("OK") is active, you can go
directly to the Foresight screen by pressing Enter or clicking the icon itself. And if
you turn off "Prompt for Total Station Setup" within Configure, you go directly to
the foresight screen if there is already a valid backsight. There are two major types
of Foresight Screens: (1) Standard Total Station, (2) Robotic Total Station. See
the Store Points (GPS) section of this manual for more information on GPS. Only
total station screens will be discussed here.

p205
Standard Total Station Foresight Screen
Store Points (standard sideshots and traverses) can be run in either full graphics
mode or full text mode. The Text screen is accessed by tapping the helmet in the
upper left and selecting Text. To go back to graphics, click the helmet and select
Graph. Graphic backgrounds can include linework that you create yourself using
commands such as PL and 2DP and O2 (offset) in the Map view. Graphics can
also include drawings that you import from DXF using the command IDXF (“in”
DXF) found in the Map view of SurvCE. When you ex it SurvCE, this linework
can be configured to “save on exit” and stay associated with your point file. Note
that linework drawn by feature codes or IDXF is on layers which can be “frozen”
(hidden) or “thawed” (shown) by the Layer command under View in the Map
screen. The Text and Graphic screens are shown below.

Enter saves the measurement immediately. If you do a Read, you can review the
data within the Text view. If you re-enter the rod height, it re-calculates the Z
elevation of the measured point. As you enter the description, a pulldown appears
of your Feature Code List or previously entered descriptions. As each letter is
entered, such as "e" for edge of pavement, every description beginning with "e" or
"E" appears, enabling quick selections. Some users prefer the tex t screen to take
readings because of the larger buttons and tex t size. The program remains in the
Text mode until Graphic mode is chosen again.

p206
Unless the rod hgt/description prompt is enabled, the Store Points screen is
designed to “quick-store” points, where the user is ex pected to enter, ahead of
time, the correct description and rod heights in the edit boxes shown at the bottom
of the dialog.

Note: SurvCE is designed to produce a 1 keystroke point store, by pressing Enter.

If you experience more prompts storing a point, it is because you have certain
p207
settings active that cause additional prompts. These settings include 2 options
within Configure (Prompt for Height and Description, Prompt for Point Notes),
Store FCL Only within Feature Codes, Special Codes, Settings (will prompt if
description does not match a feature code), the use of GIS attributes as set in
Feature Codes, or the use of "Read or Store" rather than "Read and Store" within
Configure. "Read or Store" will turn the first Enter into Read (to review the shot)
and the second Enter into Store. Set to "Read and Store" with no Prompt for
Height/Description, points are typically stored as fast as you press Enter.

 Sokkia-Style: The SDR33 and earlier SDR data collectors have a convenient
concept for “Store Last, Read Next”. In this method, you get your
descriptions set up and take a shot. The reading is displayed at the bottom line
of the screen. You examine it, satisfy yourself it is correct, move to the nex t
point, and take another shot. This was done on the SDR collectors with the
Read key, but with SurvCE, can be accomplished with Enter.
 Normal Foresight Style: The most typical method is the "Read and Store"
procedure as set in Configure. This takes a one keystroke measurement. But
you must remember to enter the height and description ahead of time, before
pressing Enter. If you want an "after-shot" chance to change the height and
description, turn on "Prompt for Height/Description Prompt" within
Configure. The Enter key can also be used for Read First, Store Later. This
is the “Read or Store” version. Your first Enter is a read, only (like pressing
R or entering ALT-R). Your second Enter is a store, which can be followed
by the Hgt/Desc Prompt on save. This is the most cautious designation of the
use of the Enter key for taking shots. Note below that after the read, the point
is displayed with a question mark, and the raw data is displayed. It is saved
only when Enter is pressed again (or S is pressed, or even Alt S—all of which
store a previous Read). In the final Store Point dialog (with Rod Hgt/Desc
prompt turned on), you will find the Point Description field. Along with the
designated Feature Code list, all descriptions entered for the current job will
accumulate in the available Point Description List, allowing the user to select
the text graphically, arrow key to the desired text, or highlight and select the
correct text after entering the first character in the edit box . An entry of “P”
goes right to all text starting with the letter “P”. Then you can select the one
you want. The Enter key will continue on at this point.

Height/Description Prompt
When this option is turned on within Configure (EQUIP menu), you obtain the
full list of Feature Codes plus any descriptions you have entered that are not
included in the Feature Code list. Shown below is a reflectorless shot (rod
height=0) with Height/Description Prompt on.
p208
Symbols are shown as circles, and polyline features as lines. Polylines that are 3D
include the "Z". As a short-cut to entering the special codes to start and stop lines,
you can use the icons that appear at right. Of the 8 icons shown, going left to right
starting at the top, they represent start polyline, start curve, end polyline, end
curve, close polyline, close rectangle, designate specific "unfinished" active line,
and "more options", leading to icons for Offset Horizontal and Offset V ertical.

Robotic Features
The status of the robot is displayed in the upper left-center, nex t to TEXT and
above the Map. Status modes include:
 Tracking: Locked onto the prism and following it (shows a lock symbol).
 S tandby: Stopped in the last position it was in and ready to resume Tracking.
 Searching: Looking for the prism (shows a binoculars symbol).
 No Data: Brief mode between losing the prism and beginning an automatic
search.

The search/s tandby and lock icons let you initiate a Search after a lost lock
condition, or go to Standby if currently locked (to drive a hub and stop the gun
from moving), or go back to Lock, from Standby (after driving the hub). In the
graphic shown above, you are in Prism Mode (as opposed to reflectorless, which
would show a line through the prism). You are locked and "tracking" real-time,
meaning distance measurements are being taken.
p209
The tracking icon, takes the EDM signal on and off. With the signal on, more
power is used, but you gain a lot by seeing continuous, real-time distance readings
and by seeing your position on the screen, in the form of a triangle. Shots are
nearly instantaneous, but respond to the “fast-tracking” m ode of the EDM
(typically 10mm). If taken out of EDM Tracking, you lose your real-time
movement on the screen, but measurements will respond to the accuracy of your
Equipment Settings, which may call for standard or fine mode.

Note: The response to losing lock when taking foresights with robotic total
stations is for the instrument to stop where it is. If you have enabled Search when
Lost Lock in instrument settings, the instrument will start searching immediately
on loss of lock. Alternately, when running remotely, you can use the
joystick-arrow controls to move the instrument towards you and obtain lock again.

Store Points (TS Offsets)

Making offset points using a total station requires entry of ALT-O or selection of
the O/Offset button within the Store Points Foresight Screen. If you are set to the
graphical icons in Configure, you would select the "offset to tree" icon. This
works from both the Graphic and Text screens when foresighting. There is no
distinct total station "Offset” command—it is an offshoot (literally) of standard
Store Points. The total station Offset command must be selected each time it is
used. It has three options:

 Distance/Angle (sometimes referred to as “Shoot a Big Tree”): The

Distance/Angle method requires two measurements. The first measurement is
the distance, followed by the prompt to read the angle. Note that the dialog,
shown in the next figure, prompts you to Read Distance first.

p210
In the case of shooting a large tree, where the goal is to shoot the center of the tree,
you would take a shot to the middle-side of the tree, equivalent to the distance to
the center of the tree. Then you would take a second shot, as prompted, to the
middle of the tree, for horizontal angle only. Note that for the elevation of the
shot, you can use the distance measurem ent or the angle measurement (second
reading), and apply the vertical offset, if any, accordingly. After both
measurements are taken, the results are displayed. You are then returned to the
dialog to take your next offset.

 Point (Plus/Minus): The Point Offset takes a shot and deducts or adds a
distance relative to the line-of-sight in all three directions (L/R, In/Out,
Vertically Up/Down) using the dialog shown in the nex t figure.

p211
 Before the shot, tap Read. After the shot, when the raw data is displayed in
the lower left, tap Store. You will remain in the command until you tap Close
.

Repeat Shots Using Offsets

When taking multiple measurements in traffic or other conditions where you must
move away quickly, one technique is to use the Offset button in Store Points, and
then the Point method. You do a Read and enter 0 for all offsets, then Store. Then
change the description and tap Store again (no additional Read is necessary), and a
second point with a different description (or rod height, or offset) is stored. Some
office software programs require distinct readings on the same point to process
multiple descriptions, in which case the use of Offsets to store multiple readings
with one field measurement is recommended.

p212
 2-Point Offset: This creates a 2-point 3D “vector”, where the offset direction,
distance, and vertical offset are computed from the delta N, delta E and Delta
Z of the two points that are measured or entered. If Read Inst is enabled, then
the two points are measured in the field. If, instead, you wish to obtain the
offset vector from two points, then disable Read Inst and enter the two point
numbers. The offset entered will extend the vector from point “P2” in the
direction of “P1” to “P2”. The vector offset will also impact the elevation that
is calculated. This might be used to calculate a point at the top of a cliff, for
example, where you stand above the cliff top, pick up two points on the slope
to the cliff edge, and estimate the distance to the cliff face from the second
point. The offset by two points routine will write an SS record in the RW5
file (raw file), which enables re-processing.
 Settings: The Settings tab appears with robotic total stations running remotely
(from the prsim) and permits reading the target height from a laser and
accesses the entire range of laser devices found in the Peripherals menu
option under Equip.

Store Points (GPS)

Store Points is the principal data collection routine for GPS equipment. Store

p213
Points interacts with numerous settings, including the feature codes, and will draw
line work. The Store Points screen in GPS shows the cursor moving on the screen
in real-time. Shots can be taken anytime by pressing Enter. The screen will pan
automatically, so you are always in view as you move. Points will plot on the
screen as shots are taken.

In GPS mode, Enter has only one function: Read & Store. The after-shot antenna
height and description prompt can be enabled in Configure (C or ALT-C from the
Store Pints screen.). If you don't have the height and description prompt turned on,
then each shot is a single press of Enter, and you must enter antenna height,
description, or point ID changes prior to pressing Enter and taking the shot.

For GPS, coordinates, status (Fixed, Float, Autonomous) and HRMS and VRMS
accuracy estimates are displayed at all times. The icons at the left are for zooming
and panning. From top to bottom, they are: zoom ex tents, zoom in, zoom out,
zoom window, zoom previous and point display control. If you prefer to work in a
pure text screen, without graphics, you can tap the helmet icon and select TEXT.
The following dialog will appear.

p214
The Text screen uses a large character size for easy viewing, and limits options to
Monitor/Skyplot, Offset and Store. You can return to the graph view by tapping
the GRAPH button. You can also temporarily view your points on the screen by
tapping Map, then tap Back to return to the text-based data collection screen.
Note that the program will remember which screen you were in last (Graph or
Text) and return to that mode of data collection automatically.

In addition to pressing Enter, Points can be Stored by selecting this

icon (ALT-S).

Average

With GPS, since shots tend to cluster around the true point location, it may add to
accuracy to Average 10 or more GPS readings when taking measurements. You
will be prompted for how many readings to take (up to 999). Taking 100 readings
is also a way to gauge how fast your GPS equipment takes measurements. If 100
readings are taken in 10 seconds, you are reading at 10 per second, or 10 hertz
(hz). After the readings are taken, a display appears showing the range and
standard deviation of the readings.

p215
 Offsets
This icon leads to Offset reading screens with options for keyed-in offsets as well
as offsets taken by laser devices. These devices can measure distance only or
distance and azimuth (ALT-O). See Store Points (GPS Offsets) for more details.

Configure
This icon will take you to the Configure dialog, also found on the EQUIP tab.
From this dialog you can set the number of readings to average, specify to only
store fixed readings, and turn on or off the Hgt/Desc prompt on Save (ALT-C).

Monitor/SkyPlot
This icon will take you to the Monitor/SkyPlot screen for GPS status, coordinates
and Lat/Long display (ALT-D).

Store Points (GPS Offsets)

The GPS Offset command allows you to calculate and store points by specifying

p216
an offset from a GPS position. Offsets can either be entered manually or read
automatically from a laser. There are three GPS offset methods: Distance/Angle,
Intersection, and Two Point. The current method can be set from the Method tab.

Distance/Angle Offset
In the Distance/Angle method, offsets can be specified manually by choosing the
OFFSET tab, or with a laser, by choosing the LASER tab.

 Manual Offset: Under the OFFSET tab, offsets are specified by entering
azimuth, vertical, and horizontal distance offset values as show below. The
azimuth can either be specified with respect to north, or with respect to a
specified point. Current GPS coordinates are shown at the bottom, and can be
updated via the Read GPS button. When all necessary data has been entered,
you’ll be able to store by tapping Store, or preview the point you’re storing by
selecting Map, or Results.

p217
 Laser Offset: For more accurate offsets, lasers can be used for either the
distance (with direction and vertical offset entered by the user) or for both
distance and direction (where the laser gun includes compass directions). The
Leica Disto, for example, provides distance only. The Laser Atlanta provides
both distance and direction. Laser measurements are popular on construction
sites and mine sites where it is dangerous to stand beneath highwalls and
unstable rock conditions. Readings are taken from a safe location to the rock
or dirt face. They are also useful for utility pole surveying and other forms of
“windshield” surveys. The laser devices are often mounted on the pole
beneath the GPS antenna. Special poles are available that offset around the
lasers, allowing them to mount vertically, in-line with the center of the pole. If
the antenna height is 2.5 meters, and the laser is mounted 0.7 meters below the
antenna and 1.8 meters above the ground, you would enter 1.8 as the laser
height. Laser types and laser height are set by clicking Settings in the LASER
tab within Offset. This takes you to the same screen as can be found from the
main menu on the EQUIP tab, under Peripherals. Under the LASER tab,
offsets are read automatically from the laser attached to the serial port. Upon
triggering the laser, you will see the reading displayed in terms of five
parameters: Horizontal Offset, Vertical Offset, Slope Offset, Azimuth, and
Zenith Angle, as shown below. The azimuth can either be specified with
respect to north, or with respect to a specified point. Current GPS coordinates
are shown at the bottom, and can be updated with the Read GPS button, or
you can choose to have the G PS position read automatically before each point
store by choosing Settings and enabling Auto GPS Update. When all
p218
necessary data has been entered, you’ll be able to store by clicking Store, or
preview the point you’re storing by clicking Map or Results. Before you can
begin using the Laser offset feature, you must configure the laser, either by
clicking Settings, or by selecting Peripherals from SurvCE’s main menu.
Under the peripherals menu, you will have to activate your laser, select your
laser type, and choose a COM port. It is also recommended that you deactivate
all other peripherals except GPS while using the laser. For more details on
laser setup, see the Peripherals section of this manual. Once you have
activated a laser, you may click Read Laser to begin collecting data from the
laser. In order to expedite the data collection process, the methodology for
reading an offset from the laser has been optimized so that you do not need to
touch your data collector between shots. This option can be enabled by
selecting Multiread Laser. If you are a first-time user, it is recommended that
you disable this option. If Multiread Laser is disabled, pressing Read Laser
will pop up a dialog asking you to trigger the laser, as shown below. From
here, you can either cancel, or fire the laser to record the shot. If Multiread
Laser is enabled, when you press Read Laser, a dialog will appear asking you
to trigger the laser, as shown below. Each time you trigger the laser, a new
shot will be collected, and if there was a previous shot, it will be automatically
stored. Between shots, the laser reading and the offset-adjusted position to be
stored are displayed. If Auto GPS Update is enabled during peripheral setup, a
new GPS position will be read for each shot. If a bad reading is taken, you can
prevent it from being stored by pressing Reject Last Shot. When finished,
click Exit Shot Sequence.

p219
 Results: Before storing, you can preview the data by selecting the RESULTS
tab. If valid data has been entered in the LASER or OFFSET tab, the result
will appear as shown below. In this window, you can also change the G PS
antenna height, or specify a vertical difference for your target point. You can
also specify the point ID and description for the point that will be stored.

Offset by Intersection
Use Offset by Intersection to calculate a point based on two G PS positions and two
distance offsets. The distance values can either be manually entered or input with a
laser. To use a laser, you must first activate it by selecting Settings. For more
information on laser setup, see the Peripherals section of this manual.

 Offset: Under the OFFSET tab, press Read Point 1 to read the first point
from GPS. Now enter the distance of the point to be stored, or press Read
Dist 1 to read this distance from a laser. Repeat this process for the second
point. Switch to the RESULTS tab to see your solution. If your distances and
GPS can’t be triangulated, you may have to return to this tab to adjust the
values.
 Results: After you have two GPS positions and two distances that form a
valid triangle, click on the RESULTS tab to view the resulting point. If valid
data has been entered in the OFFSET tab, the result will appear as shown
below. In this window, you can adjust the GPS antenna height, or specify a

p220
 vertical difference for your target point. You can also specify the point ID and
description for the point that will be stored. The intersection method generates
two solutions, so you will have to select which one you want by clicking the
appropriate radio button.

Offset by Two Point

Use Offset by Two Point to calculate a point based on two GPS positions and a
distance from the second point. If Straight is selected, the distance offset from the
second point is along the 3-D vector created by the two GPS points. If Left or
Right is selected, the offset is perpendicular to the 2-D vector created by the two
GPS points, and the second point ’s elevation is used as the elevation of the
resulting point. The distance offset can either be manually entered or input with a
laser. To use a laser, you must first activate it by selecting Settings. For more
information on laser setup, see the Peripherals section of this manual.

 Offset: Under the Offset tab, press Read Point 1 to read the first point from
GPS. Repeat this process for the second point. The GPS antenna height used
for each GPS read can be adjusted individually by editing the HT fields. Now
enter the offset of the point you would like to store, or press Read Dist to read
it from a laser. Finally, specify the direction of your offset, and switch to the
RESULTS tab to see your solution.
 Results: After you have two GPS positions and an offset, click on the
RESULTS tab to view the resulting point. If valid data has been entered in the

p221
 OFFSET tab, the result will appear as shown below. In this window, you can
specify a vertical difference for your target point. You can also specify the
point ID and description for the point that will be stored.

Stake Points
This command allows you to stakeout a selected point by guiding you to the point
with a series of commands and directions. Various options can be set in EQUIP,
Configure, View Point to adjust how the directions are provided to best suit your
needs. You should also review the Job Settings under FILE before staking. The
dialogs are varied slightly with respect to total station or G PS equipment. Both
types are documented here, illustrating the differences between the dialogs.

Note: While in graphics mode stakeout, if you press the down arrow key, you can
increase the plan view size and eliminate some of the text information. Pressing
the up arrow key again reveals the cut and fill.

After selecting OK, the main stakeout window appears in MAP view. In manual
total station mode, the angle to turn to and the distance to the stake point will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen. Shown below are the graphic icons, set
under EQUIP, Configure, using a robotic total station in prism mode (not
reflectorless).

p222
A read function is required to update the directional display information. You
should see your points in the map with an icon showing your target location (the
circle with the X inside).

Shots are taken typically by pressing Enter. Enter also transitions automatically
from the Stake Points entry screen to the Stk Pt shot screens above. Point Stakeout
can be conducted without touching the screen. Both screens are ex plained below,
starting with the graphic Stk Pt screen.

 Total Station Only: After reading and taking the shot, the display will be
updated with a distance and direction to the stakeout point. Buttons on the
right from top to bottom are Read, Store, Next, Menu, Configure and Setup.
 GPS or Robotic Total Station with Tracking On: Your current position is
read immediately (no Read button needed).
 Point ID: This is the point which you are staking. You can enter it in here and
hit the enter key to view the elevation, northing and easting before selecting
OK. If you want to stake out a range of points, you can enter in the points in
the following format: 3-10,2,15-20. This would stake out the points from 3-10
sequentially, then point 2, then 15 through 20 sequentially. If you are using a
control file in total station mode, and you enter a point number which also is
present in the current job file, it will choose the control file point if Control
File Has Priority is enabled in the stakeout section of Job Settings. If you
enter a point number that is not in the control file, but is in the current job ’s

p223
 coordinate file, then that point will be used. You can also select the points to
stakeout from a list by selecting the List icon. If you select the List option,
you can select the points for stakeout from the active job file or the control
file. To do this, you must toggle between the files using the Job and Control
toggles at the top of the dialog. You can select a range of points by selecting
the first point to stake then pressing the shift key and selecting the last point to
stake. All points between the two selected points will be staked in sequential
order. You can also add to the selection of points to be staked by pressing and
holding the CTRL button and individually selecting the points to be staked.
The final way to select an individual point to be staked is by selecting the
Map icon and tapping on the point to be staked.
 Add to List, Pick from List: When you select or enter multiple points, they
appear in the Point ID dialog window. You can then pick Add to List and
create a list of these points in the order they were selected. When you Add to
List, the Point ID dialog is cleared, and you can select more points, place them
in the dialog and click Add to List again. Then you can stake any of them
using Pick from List, where the points appear as shown below:

 Source: When you press Enter after selecting the point (or points), the
program will display the source of the points, either as Current Job or Control
File. The display of the source is important for verification. You may
discover, for example, that someone has turned on Control File Points have
Priority in the stakeout settings, and this is a way to catch the m istake.

p224
 Northing, Easting, Elevation: You must have a northing, easting and
elevation entered for the point you are staking out. If you type in the point
number of an existing point and hit OK, these values wiill appear
automatically. The description of existing points is displayed at the bottom of
the dialog.
 Point by Direction: In addition to staking a point ID or entered coordinate,
you can stake a point defined by a direction and distance, and even slope,
from the entered point coordinate. This allows you to stake points without
calculating point numbers or point IDs for the target point. Simply enter the
bearing/azimuth, horizontal distance and also slope, if applicable. If the
distance entry is not known but must be computed, the calculator is accessible
from the distance dialog box by hitting the ? button. Shown below is a
stakeout of a point calculated at NE45 degrees, 100 feet, from point 10.

View Pt
Depending on your settings in the View Pt tab of Configure (in the EQUIP tab),
the direction to stake will either be Right/Left Distance, Azimuth and Distance, or
North/South East/West Distances. The cut or fill is the elevation difference
between the point read and the point being staked. Normally, you take a shot
simply by pressing Enter. After a total station shot is taken, you will see your
“In-Out” distance to the target point. For total station stakeout, the direction of the
reference is shown by a little arrow in the lower right of the screen.

p225
Store Point Dialog
Selecting S to Store will display the Stakeout Report. You can turn off the Store
Point option, and just reference the Stakeout Report screen for information. If the
tolerance distance is exceeded for staking out, you will be notified and asked if you
want to continue storing. (Stakeout Tolerances are set under Tolerances in the
EQUIP menu).

p226
The coordinates for the Stake Point and the Target Point are displayed. The delta
North, East and the elevation difference (Cut/Fill) are also displayed. The vertical
offset input boxes allow for elevation calculations based on the input vertical offset
values. The vertical offsets can be entered in inches in English units in two forms
(10" using the inch designator, or 0.10.3.8 for 0 feet 10 and 3/8ths inches). The
second form requires 3 decimals to be used.

If Store Carlson Cutsheet Data in Note File has been enabled, the vertical
offset(s) specified will be recorded in the .not file for the job. If under Set
Cutsheet Format in the Stakeout section of Job Settings, a Set Pt Cutsheet Format
has been established with a named file for storage, then cut and fill data will be
saved to a cutsheet ASCII file. If using GPS, the HRMS, VRMS, and PDOP
values are also displayed. Fields for Point number and point description input are
also displayed. If, for example, you choose not to store a staked point, but only
report the design point, design elevation, surveyed elevation and the cut and fill,
you could produce a simple cutsheet report as shown below. One vertical offset
per shot was recorded (-10"). The cutsheet can be reviewed from within the active
stakeout screen using Alt V. You can also click on the helmet and go to V iew
Data, when actively staking out, and you will be returned to the stakeout screen.
Cutsheet data is always stored to the raw file, so if you forgot to store the cutsheet
information, you could create a new point cutsheet file and select "Cutsheets from
Raw File".

Pressing OK (which optionally will Store Point if enabled) will return to the

p227
Stakeout Points dialog to select the next point for staking. If the Use Control File
option is set under the Job Settings, you have the option of staking control file
points. If you enter in a point number to store that is the same as a point number in
the control file, the point in the control file will remain unchanged. It will only
modify the point in the current coordinate file. If the point being stored is the same
as one in the current job file, the Point Protect dialog box appears stating that the
point you chose is already used. The nex t available point number is listed with the
option to overwrite the current point, or use the new number.

Stake Line/Arc
This command opens a secondary dialog where you can choose between Define
Line, Define Alignments, Define Arc (3 points), and Define Arc (PC, PT, Value).
Define Line is documented below.

Define Line
This command allows you to stakeout to a line between two points by guiding you
to the point with a series of commands and directions.

This option is for setting out points along a line including the cut or fill, or for
staking out points relative to the line. One application, for ex ample, would be
staking a pipe between two known points (inlet and outlet), where offset stakes can
be set with cut/fill noted. Station Store might even be used to calculate, in
p228
advance, the inlet and outlet points based on a known station, offset and elevation.
For all staking, there are configuration settings that govern the type of instructions
you receive in stakeout. You should review the settings in the Stake tab under Job
Settings, as well as the Configure option within Equip before staking. The
dialogs are varied slightly with respect to total station or G PS equipment. Both
types are documented here, illustrating the differences between the dialogs.

Stakeout by Define Line also has a Point On Line tab that enables, in total station
mode, staking of the intersect with the specified line on the current line-of-sight.
This is often used to set stakes or flagging along a property line that is obscured by
trees. The surveyor finds a gap in the line, takes a reading to the prism and is
advised how far to Move In or Move Out to stake the line at the current
line-of-sight. The Point on Line tab also includes the standard perpendicular
method, where any measurement is used to compute the direction and distance to
move to go to the point on the line perpendicular to the measured point. For G PS
configurations, Point On Line offers only the Perpendicular method.

The Define Line dialog gives you the following options:

 First Point ID: This is the starting point of the line. You can enter the point
here by point ID. The first button brings up the list points dialog where you
can select the starting point of the line from a list. The button directly to the
right allows you to choose your point from the map instead. If you pick a
point from the map in a crowded area of points, you will be directed to the list

p229
 points dialog to select the desired point among those near to your chosen
position.
 Second Point ID: Pressing Enter from the first point moves the curser to the
second point. This is the ending point on the line that is only available for
entry if Method is set as two Point for defining the line. The procedure for
selecting this point is the same as for the first point.
 Azimuth: This option will be available for input only if Method is set to
Azimuth. If Method is set to Two Point, then the Azimuth is inactive, but still
displays the azimuth or bearing between the two points of the line. The
Azimuth method will prompt for bearing if Angle Type is set to bearing in
the Format section of Job Settings.
 Slope (%): Just like the Azimuth, this option will be available for input only
if Method is set to Azimuth. If Method is set to Two Point, then the slope is
inactive, but still displays the slope between the two points of the line.
 Method: This options lets you choose how to define your line. The available
options are by two points, or one point and an azimuth and slope.
 Start Station: This option defaults to 0 within Stakeout Line, but can be
changed to any starting station.
 Confirm NEZ: Selecting this button brings up the Confirm NEZ dialog box.
This screen displays each point as a tab at the top of the screen. Listed is the
point number, Northing, Easting, Elevation and Description of the point(s)
selected for the line. After you confirm the points, selecting the back arrow
will take you back to the line definition screen. Pressing Enter after Confirm
NEZ automatically continues to the next screen.

Define Alignments (Horizontal)

Stakeout Centerline only requires a horizontal alignment, but you have the option
to specify a vertical alignment which will lead to cut and fill results as well.
Additionally, you can specify a reference alignment. This feature allows you to
stake the offset off of one alignment (e.g. curb) and report the station of a reference
alignment (e.g. centerline).

p230
 Centerline File: Select a centerline file defined in the Roads Menu or
uploaded and converted to “.cl” format.
 Select Polyline: Select a polyline on the screen to define the alignment.
 Define Point List: Enter a sequence of points to define the alignment.
 Use Ref. CL: Toggle this on to enable the use of a reference alignment. This
will be the alignment from which the stationing is reported. The offsets and
critical locations will remain relative to the main centerline alignment.
 Select: Use this option to select the reference alignment file.
 Preview: Displays the alignment graphically.
 Edit: Use this to edit the selected alignment.
 Save As: If an alignment was defined by points or a polyline, you can
optionally save it as a centerline file.
 Start Station: Enter the starting station unless it was pre-determined by a
centerline file.
 End Station: This shows the ending station of the selected alignm ent.

Defining Alignment (Vertical)

This is optional in this command. If your goal is to ignore elevations and you are
auto-recalling roading files, the Vertical Alignment will be used and cut/fill will
appear unless you turn off Apply Vertical Alignment.

p231
 Profile File: Select a profile file defined in the Roads Menu or uploaded and
converted to “.pro” format.
 Select Polyline: Select a 3D polyline on the screen to define the profile.
 Define Point List: Enter a sequence of points that have elevations to define
the profile.
 Preview: Displays the profile graphically.
 Edit: Use this to quickly edit the selected profile.
 Save As: If the profile was defined by points or a polyline, you can optionally
save it as a profile file.
 Start Station: Enter the starting station unless it was pre-determined by a
profile file.
 End Station: This shows the ending station of the selected alignm ent.
 Apply Vertical Alignment: Toggles on/off the vertical alignment for 2D or
3D staking.

Note : For file names to be recalled, Recall Job Road Files needs to be enabled
within Job Settings, Options .

Shown below is an example of what will you see when you tap Preview in either
tab. Notice that the centerline is shown, along with any existing point numbers in
the vicinity.

p232
As with all options, the alignment selection screen continues into the Station/Offset
screen where you select your station and offset to stake out. Using Define
Alignments, the Point on Line option becomes Point on CL in the screen that
follows. With both horizontal and vertical alignments defined, the final stakeout
screen (eg. station 375) includes cut and fill values. Shown below is an ex ample in
GPS mode. The centerline was picked from the screen (Select Polyline) and the
vertical alignment was selected from a file.

p233
Define Arc (3 Points)
This routine requests three points to define a unique arc, which is then used for
stakeout by station and offset. The first point becomes the beginning of the arc.
The prompting is shown below.

The points can be entered in, chosen from the list points button, or selected from

p234
the map. After selecting the three points, choose OK (green checkmark) to go to
the Stakeout Arc dialog. The special stations are limited to PC (start) and PT
(end). After choosing a station and offset to stake and selecting OK, the main
stakeout window appears in map view. In total station mode, an angle to turn to
and a distance to go will be displayed at the bottom of the screen. Taking a
reading to the current target position will update the display with a new out/in
distance and a right/left distance depending upon your job settings. Y ou should
see your points and centerline or curve in the map with an icon of the point you
need to stakeout to (the circle with the X inside). When using GPS, after selecting
OK to the Stakeout Arc dialog, you will be placed in the Map screen at your
current position with directional instructions to the target point continually
updating. You can click "RR" to stake out a 3-point arc by railroad definition.

Define Arc (PC, PT Value)

This option for defining the arc requires four input parameters: the Start point, End
Point, Curve Direction, and any of the following: Radius Point, Radius Length,
Arc Length, Delta Angle or Degree of Curvature. The starting station defaults to
0, but can also be changed. See the figure below.

When selecting the PC point, option Radius Point and PT point, enter the point ID,
choose the point from the list points screen button, or pick the point from the map
button. After selecting OK you will be directed to the Stakeout Arc dialog. After
selecting OK to the Stakeout Arc dialog, the main stakeout window appears in
map view. Here we are staking station 75 at 0 offset. In total station mode, an

p235
angle to turn to and a distance to go will be displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Taking a reading to the current target position will update the display with a new
out/in distance and a right/left distance depending upon your reference settings in
Configure Reading. You should see your points and arc in the map with an icon
of the point you need to stakeout to (the circle with the X inside). When using
GPS, after selecting OK to the Stakeout Arc dialog, you will be placed in the
Map screen at your current position with continuously updating instructions to the
stakeout point.

Stake Line/Arc (Station/Offset)

Selecting OK on the Define Line, Define Alignments or Define Arc dialogs
presents the Stake Line dialog for defining the stake location parameters (e.g.
offset or elevation).

p236
 Station: This is where you enter the station to stakeout.

 Station +: You can advance to the next station as defined by the

alignment points or station interval using the right green arrow icon.
 Station -: You can go back to the previous station as defined by the
alignment points or station interval using the left green arrow icon.
 Station List: Select a specific station using the station list icon.
 Interval: This is where you choose the distance by which to increment the
stations.
 Calculate Interval: This is used to divide the entire line into equal
parts, which results in a calculated, non-rounded, incremental station.
 Offset/Skew List: This is where you enter in the offset distance from the line.
Select one of the left/right radio buttons to determine the offset side. This list
also provides additional methods of offsetting, such as Skewed Offsets,
Bisectors, Intersections and PI or Radius Points. A Skew Forward angle is
measured forward from the perpendicular, and a Skew Back angle is measured
back from the perpendicular. So looking forward down a tangent centerline, a
pipe with a skew of 70 degrees (in DD.MMSS) from the forward tangent
would be a Forward Skew Angle of 20 degrees, as measured forward from the
perpendicular (normal) offset.
 Elevation: This is the design elevation. If the defined geometry is 2D, then

p237
 this option will be active.
 Override Design: This allows the user to override the design elevation of 3D
geometry.
 Off. Inc: This is for entering an optional incremental offset along the line.
This is a rarely used feature that would trend the offsets away or in to the
centerline.
 Segment: This defines the current segment of the alignment based on the
entered station.
 Cutsheet: This shows the currently selected Alignment Cutsheet file.

 Settings: This icon takes you to the Job Settings that apply to alignm ent
staking. See Job Settings (Stake) for more details. Note that this is where you
instruct the software to include and stop at critical alignment locations.

Stake Line/Arc (Point On Line)

The Point On Line option appears when Define Line or Define Alignments is
selected. It offers a Perpendicular to Line method for total stations and G PS. This
method projects any shot onto the alignment perpendicular or radial in curves, and
prompts for the distance and direction to move to the alignment intersect point.
However, only if you select Define Line as the method to define the alignment and
you are set to total stations, is there a "Find Intersect to Line" option, which
enables “line-of-sight” staking of lines. This is often used by surveyors who are
setting line in tree lines, moving to gaps in the trees for readings, then moving
in-out along the line-of-sight and driving stakes when perfectly on line. It is useful
for any line or boundary staking, such as property lines, right-of-ways and
construction lines. For GPS, only the Perpendicular method is available.

Total Stations: The Offset to Line option is grayed out when the Find Intersect to
Line method is selected and available only when the Perpendicular option is
chosen.

p238
Total Stations, Define Line, Point On Line, Inters ect to Line: The Intersect
Method is used to set line by moving in or out at the current line of sight. A major
application is setting line where the line is largely blocked by trees or obstructions,
and you must set the line in gaps where you do have a line of sight.

In the Intersect mode, the first screen always displays the target point on the line
(or the extension of the line), perpendicular to the setup or station point. When the
first reading is taken, the program will display the In-Out distance to the line along
p239
the line-of-sight.

When staking a line defined by points with zero elevation, the cut or fill values will
be displayed but should be ignored. Notice that the screen ex pands to show more
graphics by pressing the down arrow key.

p240
Total Stations/GPS, Perpendicular to Line: When configured for the
Perpendicular to Line method, the program will show the direction and distance to
move to find the nearest point on the line to the measured point. The instruction
received (In/Out versus North/South or Azimuth/Distance) will depend on the
setting within Configure Reading.

The “Turn to AR” advice at the top of the screen refers to the angle to turn to
intersect the defined line at 90 degrees from the instrument location. For GPS, the
Point-On-Line screen instructions are similar.

p241
Stake Line/Arc (Point on Arc)
Both the Stake Arc (3 Points) and the Stake Arc (PC, PT, Value) routines have a
Point On Arc option similar to the Point On Line option. In the dialog below, we
have chosen to calculate a left 25 offset from the arc. Any measured point will
then be translated radially onto the arc that is 25 units left of the specified arc.

p242
When a measurement or GPS reading is taken, the target point will be radial to the
curve, at 25 units offset from the curve, as shown below.

The above example might be useful for setting stakes at a 25 ’ building setback
from the right-of-way line. For GPS, information is provided “real-time”. As you
move, you see the instructions to contact the nearest point on the arc (or offset to
the arc). For total stations, you are first instructed to measure to the nearest point
on the arc (or arc offset) from the instrument setup. Then after you take any shot,
the instruction refers to that measurement.

Note: The Turn to AR advice refers to the angle to turn to contact the centerline at
90 degrees (right angles) to the instrument setup.

After selecting OK, the main stakeout window appears in map view. In total
station mode, it will be waiting for a shot or reading. You should see your points
in the map with an icon showing the location of your target (the circle with the X
inside).

Note: If the points defining the line are at zero elevation, the program will still
report a cut and fill -- in this case a cut from the GPS elevation of 839.52 all the
way to zero. If the points defining the line are at a known elevation, the elevation
will be interpolated to determine the design and target elevation of the point to
stake, and will be applied to a zero offset or non-zero offset stakeout position.

p243
Store a reading and the coordinates for the Stake Point and the Target Point are
displayed. Store by pressing Enter or S to Store. The delta North, East and the
elevation difference (Cut/Fill) are also displayed. The Vert Offset 1 and Vert
Offset 2 allow for elevation calculations based on the input vertical offset values.
In English units, a vertical offset of -10" can be entered for ex ample in that form,
and the program will auto-calculate -0.833 as the offset. If Vertical Offsets are
detected, and a point is stored, you are prompted for additional descriptions for the
vertical offsets. If "Alignment Cutsheet" storage is on (as set in Job Settings, Stake
tab), an additional cutsheet "row" will be created for each vertical offset. Shown
below is a stakeout of station 125, Right 12, and the resulting Report screen.

p244
Note that you have the option to store a point in stakeout. If the point being stored
is the same as one in the current job file, the Point Protect dialog box appears
stating that the point you chose has already been used. The nex t available point
number is listed with the option to overwrite the current point, or use the new
number. If you "Show Station/Offset", you will see the Station and Offset of the
design (1+25.000 R12.000) and staked point (1+25.000 R11.979), for example.

All cut and fill data, including vertical offsets, will be stored in the Alignment
Cutsheet File if named and turned on within Job Settings, Stake tab, Cutsheets.
Finally, the data is always stored to the raw (.rw5) file as cut/fill (cutsheet)
information. If you forgot to create a cutsheet file, you can make a new one, and
when formatting the cutsheet, select "Cutsheets from Raw" as one of the options.
You can review the cutsheet with the shortcut, Alt V , from the active stakeout
screen. This will return you directly to stakeout. If using G PS, the HRMS,
VRMS, and PDOP values are also displayed, as are Fields for Point ID and point
description input. After the point has been stored, you are taken back to the
Station/Offset dialog to select the next point for staking.

When you return to the Stakeout Line screen after storing a point, there is a tab
option for Next Alignment that allows you to define a new alignment, without
exiting the command.

Stake Offset
p245
This command will stake out up to two user-defined horizontal offsets to a
centerline at any station, as well as an unlimited number of offsets per station, if
you are using a predefined Cutsheet Station and Offset List (loaded using the
Settings button). It will also stake out the centerline itself. Station intervals can be
entered, and the program will auto-detect, at the user ’s option, special stations such
as the TS, SC, PC, PT, CS, ST and vertical curve points (including high and low
points). Because individual stations and offsets can be entered, and also because
pre-made station and offset lists can be recalled in the field, Offset Stakeout can be
applied to virtually any offset point along a centerline.

Prerequisites and Procedures

Stake Offset requires both a horizontal and vertical alignment. If total stations are
involved, Stake Offset passes through the normal backsight confirmation screens
that Store Points and other forms of Stakeout require.

The Offset Stakeout command is a three-screen routine. The first screen identifies
and loads in the alignment files. The second screen identifies the offset points to
stake (slopes and distances) and the intervals or lists of stations/offsets to stake.
The final screen goes to the standard graphics, shows the target points, and guides
you to the destination, with N for Next continuing onto the next station in the
interval or list.

Identifying the Alignments

The first screen has tabs for selecting both the horizontal and vertical alignments.
See Stake Line/Arc for more detail.

Settings
Use this button in the upper part of the screen to select predefined station lists and
critical stopping points along the alignments.

p246
Within this option, you can click the Stake tab and edit your default Stake Offset
Descriptions shown below. See Job Settings (Stake) for more details.

Entering the Offset Points as Slopes and Distances

The Offset Stakeout screen allows you to enter one or two offsets from the
centerline. The first offset requires a presentage slope and a distance. The second

p247
offset is for a curb or ditch, and is prompted in the form of “distance over” and
“elevation change up or down”.

 Settings: The Settings button returns to the Settings dialog, allowing you to
load another cutsheet list or specify more or less special stations. Note that in
Settings, if you called for a Station and Offset List, then most of the options in
the Offset Stakeout dialog are fixed, and your only choice is to stake the
particular offsets named in the list. Also note that Offset Stakeout, when not
using a List, allows for the staking of three points on the Left or Right Side:
Center, Curb (or Ditch) and EOP. On the left, it becomes LEOP, LCurb or
LDitch. On the right, it becomes REOP, RCurb or RDitch. You must enter
data for the right as well as the left if you are staking both sides of a road. So
there are five points total that can be staked when you use the dialog entry,
since the centerline is covered in both the Left and Right scenarios.
 Back: The Back button returns to the first screen.
 Station: This is where you enter the station you wish to stakeout.

 Station +: You can advance to the next station as defined by the

alignment points or station interval using the right green arrow icons.
 Station -: You can go back to the previous station as defined by the
alignment points or station interval using the left green arrow icon.
 Station List: Select a specific station using the station list icon.

p248
 Interval: This is where you enter the distance by which the stations should be
incremented.
 Calculate Interval: This is used to divide the entire line into equal
parts, which results in a calculated, non-rounded, incremental station.
 Next Offset: The green arrow found to the right of the offset entry box
will switch from RCurb to REOP to CL and back, and the large solid circle
will move and highlight the correct location. These abbreviations are defined
in the Settings dialog or the Stakeout tab of Job Settings.
 Left/Right: You can specify whether to stake the left or right side of the road.
The offsets are applied symmetrically. If you have a special case on a specific
side of the road, do the right and left separately, with separate slope and
distance entries.
 Offset: This is the first offset from centerline. Units are as configured in Job
Settings (feet or meters).
 X-Slope: This is the first offset slope. Negative represents downhill.
 Stake Curb/Ditch: This will allow the user to input and activate a second
offset defined by offset distance and height from the first offset.
 Stake Curb/Ditch (Height): This is the vertical difference from the first
offset to the second offset. A positive entry is interpreted as a curb and a
negative (downhill) entry is interpreted as a ditch.

p249
 Stake Curb/Ditch (Offset): This is the distance from the first offset to the
second (outer) offset.

When using a Cutsheet Station and Offset list, you must select the List button,
highlight the offset you wish to use and press Select. The routine will stay on this
offset as it progresses through the stations until the user selects List again and
specifies a new offset.

The Stake Offset command will store to the Alignment Stakes cutsheet file format
if the file is named and made active for storing. The data can include station and
offsets as formatted.

Elevation Difference
This routine will report a cut/fill in comparison to a design surface at any location
within a project. The Elevation Difference command will save cutsheet data if
cutsheet files are named and made active within Job Settings, Stake tab. For any
surface where a centerline is defined (Road Design and Section, or
Grid/Triangulation/Elevation with centerline defined), the routine will not only
report, but optionally store cuts, fills and centerline position data into an
alignment-style cutsheet file. With no centerline defined, the Road, G rid and

p250
Elevation methods will store cut and fill data into a point-style cutsheet file.
Elevation Difference can also be used with a light bar.

Prerequisites and Procedures

There are five types of data that can be used to define the design surface.
 Grid File : You may use a .GRD file that has been created using software
packages including Carlson Civil or Carlson Survey. You must transfer this
file to the collector via the File Transfer routine prior to running this
command.
 Triangulation File: You may use a .TIN file created within SurvCE using the
Triangulate & Contour command found in the Map screen under Tools,
Surface. You can also use a .TIN or .FLT file that has been created in
Carlson Civil or Carlson Survey office products, in which case you must
transfer this file to the collector via the File Transfer routine prior to running
this command. Note that triangulation files can be imported from LandXML
or DXF format using the command File, DTM Import, found in the Map
screen.
 Elevation: You may use known elevation that you specify in the Set
Elevation field.
 Road Design: This method requires a Template, Centerline and Profile file at
a minimum, and can utilize superelevation and template transition files.
 Section: This method requires a Cross Section file and a Centerline file.
 Select Type of Surface Model: Specify the type of surface to be used. With
the exception of the Elevation method, the 4 other methods allow the option to
specify a vertical offset (such as to subgrade) and lead to a follow-up file
selection dialog.
 Set Elevation: This option is available when the Elevation method is used for
defining the surface model. Enter the desired elevation of your surface in this
field.

p251
 Vertical Offset: This is used in conjunction with grid, triangulation, roading
and section files. It allows the user to vertically offset the surface (as defined
in the file) by the amount specified in the box.
 Use Centerline for Station-Offset : This allows the user to specify a
horizontal alignment file (.cl file) for reporting station and offset of your
current location to the reference alignment. With total stations this is reported
whenever a shot is taken. Using GPS or robotic total stations, with tracking
on, your current position is updated in real time as the rover or prism is
moved. This option is available with Grid, Triangulation and Elevation types
of surface models. (A centerline is required for Road Design and Section-type
surfaces).
 Stakeout Grid Pattern (GPS Only) :The first prompt asks if you want to use
the last stakeout pattern. To make a new pattern, you specify, in effect, the
lower left corner (“left side” option) or the lower right corner (“right side”
option) of a rectangle, and specify the starting point, direction point. Shown
in the figure below is a 10x10 layout at 50’ interval (10 rows and columns are
added to the starting point, producing 11x 11 grid points). The number of cells
in the grid ranges from 1x1 to 20x20, and are laid out in a grid beginning at
the starting point going towards the direction point.

p252
 The program will then show the grid point nearest to your GPS position.

 Light Bar Settings: This button allows you to specify parameters for enabling
the light bar, setting the grading tolerance, and specifying the COM port. The
two light bars currently supported are Mikrofyn and Apache. SurvCE can
actually drive the grading process, as shown below, where an Apache light bar

p253
 is used on a motor grader. In effect, this offers extremely low cost "grade
indicate" machine control.

Pressing OK from the main Elevation Difference dialog will first prompt the user
to load the surface files involved (unless elevation method was selected). Then,
when OK is pressed again, the ELEV DIFF screen in the following figure will
appear. This screen provides the user with a plan view of the project. When a shot
is taken, cut or fill from the current vertical location to the design surface is
reported in the lower left portion of the screen. The computed design surface
elevation for your current location is also reported.

p254
When Road Design Files are selected, there is an ex tra Settings option at the top
of the screen that is used for setting the location of the Profile position on the
template.

p255
In road design, the position of the profile is sometimes placed on an inside
edge-of-pavement or at some other offset from centerline, as defined by a fix ed
offset, a template ID or even a completely distinct reference horizontal alignment.
Even when specified, the application of the special profile can be turned off and
on. Note that the "Off" status is equivalent to the default condition of profile grade
at Template ID "Center". If the Profile positioning is set to "On" in Settings, you
will always be promped with the Settings dialog after loading the Roading files, so
that you are reminded of any unusual, active profile offset before continuing by
pressing Enter (OK) or changing a setting.

If you click the helmet icon in the upper left of the screen and select View Data
from the Help options, or enter Alt V, you can select Cutsheets and the Edit File
option to review the stored cut and fill data at any time, assuming a "cutsheet" file
has been named and set active. The data might appear as follows:

p256
The order of the columns in the cutsheet is set by the user when the cutsheet file is
named. In this case, the "Use Centerline for Station-Offset" was clicked on, and
the shots were stored to the "alignment-based" cutsheet because a centerline was
active. All shots were cut, so if you scrolled right to the fill column, it would be
blank. Columns can be extended and compressed by moving the vertical bar
between columns. In addition, cut and fill data is also stored to the Raw File
associated with the job name. Then when a new cutsheet file is named, you can
choose, "Cutsheets from Raw File". For those users who always want a cutsheet
file to be made in commands such as Elevation Difference, you can auto-create a
new cutsheet with the job name as the prefix, whenever you start a new job, by the
following selection within Job Settings, New Job tab:

p257
Grid/Face
This command enables points on both vertical and non-vertical planes to be
coordinated by angle-only observations. This feature is m ost often used to pick up
details of a building where the prism cannot be placed. You first establish the
plane, then take angle-only observations for features such as windows.

The building face is defined by observing three accessible points on the building or
by entering their known coordinates. After angle-only observations are made,
SurvCE then calculates and stores coordinates of the angle intersection observation
with the plane. You can use SurvCE to survey the vertical face of a building or
other vertical planes.

Vertical Plane Survey

The Define Plane dialog can be accessed by selecting the Grid/Face option from
the SURVEY tab of the main menu.

p258
 Point 1, Point 2, Point 3 : These fields indicate the points that define the
building face plane. Both Point 1 and Point 2 must have horizontal
coordinates to properly define the building face. For a vertical plane survey,
point 3 is not required and can be left blank.
 Get Coords : This function allows for three methods to define the coordinates
of a point. The coordinates of the points can be manually entered into the
Northing, Easting and Elevation fields. Manually entered coordinates will not
be stored in the coordinate file.

p259
Existing point IDs can be entered into the Point ID field. These points must be
defined by coordinate data. As soon as you enter the point ID, press enter and the
coordinates will appear in the Northing, Easting, and Elevation fields. Ex isting
points can be selected from a points list by selecting the Point List icon. Highlight
the desired point and press enter or tap OK.

Existing points can be selected from the map screen by selecting the map icon. To
p260
select a point, tap it on the screen. If two or more points are close together on the
screen, you will be asked to select the intended point from the point list.

Lastly, the points can be taken with the total station by pressing Read.

After you have specified the two defining points for the building face plane,
SurvCE will determine the available solution. One of the following messages will
be displayed in the dialog box.

 Vertical - SurvCE has enough data to fix a vertical plane (the vertical
example is shown in this above figure).
 3D - SurvCE has enough information to fix an arbitrary plane.

Press OK, and the following dialog will appear. The building face or vertical
plane is drawn as a solid line, and any measurement taken by angle only reading
(eg. angle right of 270, zenith angle of 83 degrees), will plot as a point with
calculated x,y,z position, such as point 20.

Non-Vertical Plane Survey

Surveying a non-vertical plane is similar to surveying a vertical plane. Once the
plane has been defined, picking up detailed observations follows the same general
process detailed above. All three points must be defined for a non-vertical plane
survey. When defining a non-vertical plane, the three points cannot be in a line.

p261
Resection
This command allows you to calculate coordinates of an unknown instrument setup
point given the angles and distances from up to 20 distinct reference points. The
reference points are recalled from your working job file. If a control file is active
in Job Settings, and the entered point ID is not found in the current working
coordinate file, then the point will be recalled from the control file automatically.
You can also access points from the control file by using the from list icon.

Direct and Reverse measurements can be activated within the Configure screen in
Resection. The options within Configure expand (eg. for "Auto Turn" capability)
if you are using motorized or robotic total stations versus conventional total
stations. If you choose Direct & Reverse, then the reverse measurements count as
part of the 20 allowable measurements, so the max imum number of reference
points becomes 10. As long as you have at least 2 distinct points, you can shoot
the same point twice or more with a direct or D&R measurement.

Elevations can be ignored on any measurement. Angle Only Readings can be

mixed in as well. This is useful when sighting radio towers and church steeples
with known coordinates. In fact, all of your resection points can be measured by
angle only, in which case 3 or more points are necessary for an accurate
calculation. Sometimes if the 3 angle-only points are in the same quadrant of view,
p262
a solution won't be found, requiring additional points. When elevations are used,
measurements will contribute to the calculation of the setup point elevation. After
entering the routine, the first screen appears as follows:

The points can also be selected from the point list or directly from the map screen
by pressing either the list or map icons. You will also be prompted for the
Instrument Height and a Target Height. On reading #1, you will be asked if you
want to Set Zero on the first resection point (optional).

If you press Configure, you can set standard errors for the measurements, as
shown below. These settings allow you to take advantage of network least squares
and weighting in the calculation performed by SurvCE. The default values are
shown. You can also enable Direct & Reverse measurements here, in addition to
using EQUIP, Configure.

p263
Press Read when you are ready to take a measurement. The angle right, zenith
angle, and slope distance are recorded.

Repeat this process for all measurements of the resection. After the second
measurement, there is enough information to conduct the resection calculation, so
the Calculate button at the top of the dialog becomes active and can be selected.
If you select Calculate, you can review the data, then return to taking more shots
by hitting Cancel rather than OK, which would prompt to store the point.

Any time Calculate is selected, the Review Resection screen appears. The input
data is displayed in a list structure, and you have the ability to turn certain
measurements on/off and recalculate the solution, without the necessity of
re-measurement. You can also edit point numbers, instrument and rod heights, and
more here. When satisfied with your edits and the solution, you can store the
results of the resection.

Since there is redundant data, the final calculated coordinate differs slightly from
the individual measurements. The command reports the calculated coordinate ’s
northing, easting, and elevation, and the difference between the calculated
coordinate and the individual solutions as residuals, which indicate the quality of
the data. High residuals suggest a problem with the input data. If you select the
red X in the Review Resection Screen, you are returned to the Read screen in case
you want to collect more shots. Here in the Read screen you can truly Cancel if
that is your intention. Shown here is a resection to 2 points using D&R (direct and

p264
reverse), with angle only in the reverse face. Note that even in a 2-point resection,
a closure calculation is presented.

In the “Store this Point?” dialog box shown below, you are prompted for the
point number and description of the calculated point (the occupied station/setup
point). With three or more resection points, residuals are presented showing the
accuracy of the calculation. When you press OK from the "Store this Point?"
dialog, you will be setup on the calculated point backsighting the first point shot in
the resection.

p265
Set Collection
The Set Collection routine allows you to collect and average sets of angles to
multiple foresights.

Setup
The opening dialog is the standard setup dialog shown below that allows the user
to specify the instrument and backsight information.

p266
 Confirm NEZ: This button allows you to quickly verify the instrument and
backsight coordinate values.
 Configure: This button displays the dialog shown below, and allows you to
specify options available for the way the angle sets are to be collected.

p267
For robotic total stations, the Robotic Set option is available.

Number of Sets: This input box allows you to define the number of
angle sets that are to be collected to each point. An angle set is defined
as a direct and reverse reading to the backsight and the foresight (i.e.
BD-FD/FR-BR). If multiple foresights are defined, only a single
backsight-direct and backsight-reverse set of readings will be collected
for all foresight points.
Num Dist Rdgs: This input box allows you to specify the number of
distance measurements that are to be taken during each sighting.
Obs Order: This drop list allows you to specify the order the angles are
to be completed. The definition for the abbreviations are Backsight
Direct (BD), Backsight Reverse (BR), Foresight Direct (FD) and
Foresight Reverse (FR). Since the backsight dialog is the first reading in
all cases, only the following options are available:

 Robotic Set: Only available for motorized, auto targeting

instruments. This option will turn all reverse sightings without any
assistance from the user. The order will be the same as
BD-FD/FR-BR.
 BD-FD/FR-BR
 BD-BR/FD-FR
 BD-FD/BR-FR
 BD-BR/FR-FD

p268
 Angle Only in Reverse Face: This toggle is intended for use with
non-coaxial instruments. Only direct face readings will be measured, and
all reverse face readings will be for angles only.
Auto-Turn: This toggle will allow the motorized instrument to
automatically advance to the next position if it was previously measured.
The software will pause at the next location and wait for the user to
initiate the reading.
Review Individual Reading Data: This toggle will pause the software
after every reading and display the measured data.

 Backsight: This button is required to initiate the first reading and backsight
orientation for the set collection process. The following dialog will be
displayed. The user must measure either an angle only or an angle and
distance to the backsight in order to proceed with the OK button. It is
recommended that the Set Angle or Set Angle and Read buttons be used to
record the initial backsight reading.

Define Foresight Points

After the Backsight dialog is accepted, the next step in the process is to enter in
the point IDs for all of the foresight points that you intend to sight. The dialog
shown below is intended to receive predefined point IDs. To enter points, begin in
the top left input box and work your way down to the bottom of the left column,
then start at the top of the right column and work down to the end.

p269
Take Readings
Once the foresight points have been specified, the nex t dialog will be determined
by the set order. If the next reading was to be FD, since the BD was already
recorded, then the dialog will prompt as shown below. Pay attention to the prompts
in these dialogs as they inform you as to which point and which face is ex pected
based on your configured set order. Press the Enter button or select the OK button
to record the reading.

p270
Reading Review
Unless robotic sets are involved, after each measurement an optional Reading
Review dialog appears where the measurement can be accepted or rejected. This
option is set in Configure.

p271
The sequence of shots continues.

p272
Completed Set
At the end of the set collection process the Set Report dialog will be presented.

If you had specified 2 points (or more) in the initial "Set Collection Point Order"
screen, you would obtain a tabbed dialog of all the points to review.

p273
After all of the Reciprocal Calculation and Store Point dialogs have been
accepted, the dialog below will be presented.

 Change Station: This button will take you to the Instrument Setup dialog
and advance the point numbers so that the original occupied point is the
backsight and the last foresight point is now the occupied point.

p274
 Collect More Sets: This button will take you to the Backsight dialog and
maintain all of the previous setup information.
 Review Direct-Reverse Report: This button will allow you to select the
occupied point ID from a list of points that were used with set collection. The
software will then generate a report of all of the sets measured from the
specified occupation point.

In the figure above, select a point number and tap OK to view the report. The
report is shown below.

p275
Leveling
This routine allows you to run trigonometric level loops using a total station or
digital level loops using a digital level. There are also manual entry modes
available for both types of level loops. The raw data collected for a total station is
slope distance, zenith angle and prism height. For digital levels, the vertical
difference and if available, the horizontal distance is stored in the raw data file.

The calculation routines assume there is only one loop per level file. A benchmark
is required at the beginning of the loop (BM+) and a benchmark is required at the
end of the loop (BM-). After the BM+, measurements back to a known elevation
(TP-) and measurements forward to establish an elevation (TP+) are alternated.
Any number of side shots to points (SS-) or stations (STA-) is allowed while
traversing. Spurs (series of TP+ and TP- measurements off the main loop) are
allowed and will be adjusted correctly. A spur after the BM- is allowed.

The opening dialog is where you set up the level loop. If road files are used, an
additional tab in the leveling measurement screen will be made available for
entering station and offset data. To use a digital level instead of the current total
station, click the Select button to the right of the Instrument and choose from the
available options, which include Manual 3-Wire, Manual 1-Wire, Manual Digital
Level and Sokkia SDL. Manual Total Station entry can also be done by choosing
Manual Total Station on the EQUIP tab.
p276
Click the Select button to the right of the Level File to open an existing loop or
start a new loop. The user will be prompted to enter loop data, such as project
name and operator, when creating a new loop.

Use the Select Road button to choose the horizontal and vertical alignments you

p277
wish to associate.

Click the Use Road Files toggle to enable the use of the selected files. If Use
Road Files is turned off, the STA+ tab will not be shown.
After the loop has been opened or created, select the G reen Check button (OK) to
advance to the measuring screens. The first reading of the loop must be a
benchmark (plus) reading to establish the instrument height. Enter the point ID or
known benchmark elevation, the prism height (trig levels), and a description. Then
press the Read icon or Enter to measure. Once the reading has been taken, select
the Store icon to keep it. You can take as many readings on a single point in any
face that you like. You can also review the readings, and disable any that you don't
like prior to storing.

Trig Leveling

p278
 Conventional Leveling

Some of the fields below only apply to one of the Leveling types. See screen shots
above to see which apply.

 Pt ID: Use this field to retrieve the elevation from an existing point in the
coordinate file.

 HT: Use this to enter the prism height. If using a digital level, this field will
be gray, and will be populated with the rod reading from the level.

 BM Elev: Enter a known elevation for the benchmark. This field will
auto-populate if a point ID is selected.

 Desc: Enter the point description.

 Review Readings: This allows you to enable or disable specific readings

prior to storing.

 Robotics: Use this to control the robot.

 Read: Use this icon to take a reading.

p279
 Store: Use this icon to store the reading.

 Configure: Use this icon to setup direct and reverse settings and
review options.

 Avg Direct & Revers e: This option will allow you to determine which
readings take direct and reverse pairs. (only applies to Trig Leveling)
 Review before storing: This toggle forces the Review Readings dialog prior
to storing. This is the same dialog that comes up when the Review Reading
button is pressed except the Review Reading dialog has a Store Point button
that stores the shown measurements

p280
 Trig Leveling

Conventional Leveling

The Status field shows if the measurement is turned on or off. Measurements that
are off will not be used in any calculations. Elev shows the calculated elevation
which will be the elevation at the total station or level on a plus shot (BM+ or
TP+) or the elevation at the rod on a minus shot (BM-, TP-, SS- or STA-).

p281
Any measurement can be highlighted by clicking on the measurement. A
measurement must be selected before using Edit Reading or the ON/OFF button.

All the values in the Results section are about the elevation calculations. The Sel
Error field shows how different the calculated elevation of the currently selected
measurement is from the mean of all the measurements that are on.

Once a benchmark (plus) reading has been taken and stored, the Minus Reading
dialog will be shown. This dialog allows you to read the minus reading to a turning
point (TP), benchmark (BM), sideshot (SS), or a sideshot on an alignment (STA).
Turning points advance the setup while sideshots do not. A reading to the
benchmark in the minus screen will end the loop.

 Level Reading Mode: This icon switches the interface between

taking plus or minus readings.

At any time during the loop, you can edit a reading using the Edit Levels icon to
the left of the red X (Cancel) button.

p282
Once the minus reading on a benchmark has been recorded, you can then process
the loop using the Process icon which is to the left of the Edit Levels icon. Once
you've processed the loop, a Review File dialog will be displayed. At this point
you can choose to save the report or proceed to the Processing Options screen.

The Processing Options screen allows you to update all ex isting points in the
coordinate file with the leveled elevations. It also allows you to overwrite the point
p283
descriptions using what was entered during the level loop and will compute
coordinates for any points that were defined by station and offset.

Manual 1-Wire Example

If you select the 1-Wire method of Leveling, the graphic below may be helpful in
selecting the options to conduct a simple level loop:

p284
You "+" to your "backsight" and you "-" up to your foresight, and you nam e the
points as you go. You start by referencing a benchmark, and you close the loop by
referencing the starting point or a second benchmark.

After entering the example, pressing the Edit Levels icon shows all the
measurements made. All the horizontal distances (HD) are shown as 100 because
1-wire leveling does not provide a horizontal distance. Giving all the segments the
same distance causes the level adjustment to give all the segments the sam e
weight.

p285
Pressing the Process icon shows the results.

Scrolling to the end shows the adjustments that will be applied to the last two
measurements.

p286
Pressing the green check icon brings up the Update Points in Job dialog.

Save Report will put the information shown in the Update Points in Job dialog
into a text file for your records.

Update Job saves the new elevations to the points in the job. Skip Existing will
not replace a point’s elevation if it already exists but Replace Existing will.

p287
Auto By Interval
Auto by Interval allows you to acquire and store data at a set interval value of
either distance or time. This function is available with all GPS or certain robotic
total stations only. When the routine is selected using a robotic total station with
Prompt for Setup within Configure on, you will be directed to a Confirm
Orientation dialog, in which you will be asked to confirm your orientation. The
opening or main dialog appears as shown below.

After the backsight is confirmed or measured, the Auto Store by Interval dialog
will appear as shown in the figure below. In GPS mode, you will see the Auto
Store by Interval dialog immediately. In the Auto Store by Interval dialog box , you
set the type of interval (distance or time) and the value of the interval. You also
set the starting point number for the data set. You can assign a point description
for all points acquired with this command. During actual data collection, you can
change the description.

p288
Data is acquired in the standard collection MAP view screen. The point ID,
description, and rod height fields can all be changed while the command is active.
For example, to change your point description from td (top of ditch) to gr (ground
shot), simply type "gr" over the "td" in the Desc field without interrupting your
collection.

p289
 Store: Pressing the Store icon immediately stores the point at your current
location, overriding the interval.
 GPS Start and Stop: This button alternates between stop (square, red) and
play (arrow, green) icons. While the GPS is running or the robotic total station
is tracking, the stop icon allows you to stop the surveying equipment from
taking readings. When the button is pressed, the G PS or robotic total station
stops, and the button switches to the play icon, which can be pressed to
resume the readings.
 Monitor/Skyplot: This button can be found on the bottom right of the MAP
screen for GPS. This "binocular" icon opens the Monitor/Skyplot dialog.

Note: In GPS mode, if you run Auto Points at Interval and points do not
store, check that your RMS tolerances for storing are not set too low. Points
will be stored only when your RMS values are less than those specified in
tolerances under the EQUIP tab.. Also note that you may find that the points
store at a distance apart exceeding that specified by your interval due to
latency and your speed of movement.

Remote Elevation
This command allows you to observe a point that cannot be reached vertically,
such as a power line, building top, etc. The routine uses two observations - one for
the base point and one for the vertical angle to the target object. The routine then
calculates the target point's elevation.

By placing the prism below or above the desired point, Carlson SurvCE stores
information about the base point. Then you can take a second reading, observing
only the zenith/vertical angle to the true target point. Using these two
observations, SurvCE calculates the intersection of the extended zenith/vertical
angle with a vertical line from the base point to determine the elevation. Reporting
includes the elevation of the target object as well as the elevation difference
between the prism and the target object.

Steps to take a remote elevation reading are as follows:

1. Select Remote Elevation from the S URVEY tab of the main menu.
2. Confirm your orientation, and re-shoot the backsight as necessary.
3. Press Enter to observe base point (see the figure below). Point the instrument
toward the target and press Enter.

p290
4. Press Enter to shoot target elevation (see the figure below). Sight instrument
on the desired point (such as a wire or top of pole or point on a building) and
press Enter.

Back in the REM ELEV screen, your angle, zenith, and distance are shown, along
with the remote height and remote elevation.

 Read Icon: This allows the user to take additional shots above or below the
previously defined base point. Pressing the Enter key will also repeat this

p291
 command.
 Store Icon: This button stores the current target offset point to the job file
 Configure Icon: This takes you to the Configure settings also found on the
EQUIP tab.
 Instrument Icon: This takes you to the standard Instrument Setup dialog.

Log Raw GPS

This command allows you to log static data to the receiver or a data card
(depending on instrument type) for use with post processing software.

Post Processing (Logging Static Data) for NovAtel/Sokkia

Radian/Sokkia Radian IS
Go to the SURVEY tab, and select the Log Static Data button. You will see a
screen with three buttons (see the figure below), or an error message stating that
the data collector could not connect to the receiver. If you receive an error
message, check connections and the data card.

If you want to change the groups you already have on the device, select Group
Editor. It will take up to five seconds for a dialog with group information to

p292
appear. This dialog box will be covered later, as it is only necessary for post
processing if you have no groups.

Tap on the Log Raw Data button to start logging raw data. From this point, you
can choose the File Manager button to see what files are on the receiver ’s card.
You can delete files here if memory is low. More information on the File
Manager dialog will be covered later.

The Log Raw Data dialog contains a list of groups (or a message that no groups
were found), three buttons, and a place to enter a file name. In order to continue,
select a group, enter a file name, and tap Use Selected Group For File. If you
have no groups (or wish to see/change the groups you already have) you will need
to click Edit Groups, and add a group, as shown below.

Next is the Tagging Site dialog. To start tagging a site, enter the information
requested including site name, site code, and antenna height (changing is
optional--see Changing the Antenna). You will also decide here whether you
want the site to stop automatically after a duration of your choice, or when End
Site is selected. Tap Start Site, and all the information entered will be grayed out
until the site is ended. Stop the site at any time by clicking End Site. Before
ending the site, you will have the option to change the antenna information (in case
you made a mistake). View the satellite status at any time using the View Status
button. This will not affect the tagging of the site.

p293
You can tag as many sites as you wish. When you are done, click the Exit button.
SurvCE will ask you if you want to continue logging the file. If you do, click Yes,
and the next time you select Log Raw Data, you will go directly to the dialog box
shown above. The file name will appear in the main post process screen if it is
being logged. If you wish to leave the receiver logging, you can exit the setup, and
the next time you come back to post processing, the software will know you are
still logging a file.

File Manager
Under the SURVEY tab of the main menu, select the Log Static Data button. You
will either see a screen with three buttons, or an error message stating that the data
collector could not connect to the receiver. If you receive an error message, check
connections and the data card. Click on the File Manager button to see what files
are on the receiver’s card. In this dialog, you see a list of files, along with their
respective sizes.

p294
At the bottom of the dialog, the free memory is shown, along with a cancel and a
delete button. If you are running low on memory, you can delete files here. To
delete a file, click on the file from the list and the tap the delete button. You will
be asked to verify that you want to delete the file. To ex it this dialog, click Exit.

Group Editor
Go to the SURVEY tab, and select the Log Static Data button. You will see a
screen with three buttons, or an error message stating that the data collector could
not connect to the receiver. If you receive an error message, check connections and
the data card.

If you want to change the groups you already have on the device, choose Group
Editor. It will take up to five seconds for a dialog to appear with group
information.

p295
If the Group Name is “NewGroup,” there are currently no groups on the receiver.
To add one, fill out the information and click the Save button. If there are already
groups you may add a new one by selecting New, filling in the required
information, and hitting Save.

To see other groups, click Prev or Next. To delete a group, click on the Del
button.

To edit a group, make any changes, and click the Save button. If a group name is
modified, it may take slightly longer to make the change. In order to change the
antenna, click the Change Antenna button (see Changing the Antenna).

When you are satisfied with the groups, click Close. You will be asked if you wish
to start logging data. If you click yes, you will enter the Log Raw Data dialogs.

Post Processing (Logging Static Data) for Topcon

Go to the Survey Menu, and select the Log Static Data button. You will see a
screen with four buttons.

p296
If you want to manage the files (to see how much memory they are using and to
delete files) on the receiver, click the File Manager button. If a file is open, you
can now tag sites. Otherwise, open a file by clicking the Start File button.

The file name can be chosen from a list of existing file names using the suggested
file name, or a file name of your choice. The antenna height and antenna type can
be changed using the Change Antenna button (see Changing the Antenna). The
interval can be selected from the list, or you can enter your own, in seconds.

p297
After starting a file, you will be returned to the main screen. From here you can
leave the file recording, manage files, exit, or start tagging sites. To tag a site, click
the Tag Site button.

The Tag New Site dialog shows the available space on the receiver, and gives you
the ability to enter a site name, change the interval, and change the antenna. You
can choose to have SurvCE stop logging the site automatically after a specified
time period, or stop it manually. Even if you choose to stop logging automatically,
you will still have the option to stop it manually using the Stop Point Logging
button.

p298
After you exit this screen (automatically or manually), you will be returned to the
main post processing screen. From here, you may tag more sites, close the file, or
manage your files.

When you are ready to close the file, hit the Close File button.

Post Processing (Logging Static Data) for Leica System 500 GPS
Setting Up Post Processing as a Base
In order to do post processing as a base, you m ust start when you configure the
base. From the EQUIP tab select Configure Base and enable the Log Static Data
to PC Card check box.

p299
Proceed through the Configure Base screens as normal until reaching a dialog
asking for a job name and interval. After entering these, the job will start
recording. To end the job, turn off the receiver. Your next job should start up
without complication.

p300
Setting Up Post Processing as a Rover
From the SURVEY tab choose Log Static Data. The data collector will check to
see that the receiver is connected and has satellites (if the receiver doesn ’t have
satellites, no post processing is possible). If successful, a screen with four buttons
will appear.

p301
To manage jobs, click the Job Manager button (more information on this feature
will be covered later in the documentation). To start a post processing job, click
the Start Job button. Select a job name from the existing jobs, or create a new
one. To change the antenna settings, click the Change Antenna button.

After starting a job, you will return to the Post Processing menu. Now, you will be
able to log points, close the job, or manage jobs.

To start logging a point, click the Start Point Logging button. The current job, the

p302
available memory, the interval, and the antenna height (which can be changed by
clicking the Change Antenna button) are shown. Here you will need to enter a site
name and choose whether to stop logging the point autom atically or manually.

The dialog below will appear to show information about the point being logged. It
can be exited without stopping the point.

After exiting the screen, you will return to the menu. You can choose to end the
job, log more points, or just leave it running while you do other things. To end the
job, click the Close Job button.
p303
File Manager
Go to the SURVEY tab again and click the Log Static Data button. Again, you
will see a screen with four buttons. This time, click on the File Manager button to
see what files are on the receiver's card. In the dialog box, you see a list of files
along with their respecive sizes.

At the bottom of the dialog, free memory is shown, along with a Delete button. If
you are running low on memory, you can delete files using this dialog box . To
delete a file, click on the file from the list and select the Delete button. You will
then be asked to confirm that you wish to delete the file. You can also format the
card here using the Format Card button. This will destroy all the data on the card!
Make sure you don’t need any of the data on the card before formatting it. To ex it
this dialog, choose Exit.

Changing the Antenna for Post Processing

Clicking on Change Antenna from various SurvCE Post Processing dialogs leads
you to this dialog. Here you can change the antenna height by choosing either
Vertical Height or Slant Height.

p304
For Vertical Height, click on the radio button for Vertical Height, enter a height,
and choose OK. For Slant Height, click on the radio button for Slant Height and
enter the slant height. Then, click on Load From List. Choose the antenna and
click OK. The radius should be filled in for the antenna. If your antenna is not
listed, choose Manual, click OK, and enter the radius in the edit box on the main
Antenna Height dialog.

When you are finished, click OK. The program will calculate an antenna height if
you chose slant height. Antenna height is displayed in the original dialog.

Post Processing (Logging Static Data) for Thales/Ashtech in

SurvCE
There are two methods to log static data with a Thales/Ashtech receiver. The first
is from the Log Static Data button under the SURVEY tab of the main menu. The
second is using Configure Rover and Configure Base, as described below.

Logging Static Data from the Survey Menu

Go to the SURVEY tab, and select the Log Static Data button. The result is a
dialog with six buttons, or an error message stating that the data collector could not
connect to the receiver. (If you receive the error message, check connections on
the data card.) From here, one can start a file, leave the file recording (ex it),
manage files, pause recording (stop processing), resume recording (start
processing), or start tagging sites. To manage files, see below. If a file is open, but
paused, you can choose to resume it here.

p305
If a file is open, you can now tag sites. Otherwise, open a file by clicking the Start
File button. The receiver chooses the file name based on the names of the last site
in the file. The antenna height and type can be changed via the Change Antenna
button (see Changing the Antenna). The interval can be selected from the list, or
you can enter your own, in seconds, using the edit field.

After starting a file, the software returns to the main screen. From there, you can
leave the file recording (exit), manage files, or start tagging sites. To tag a site,
click the Tag Site button.

p306
The Tag New Site dialog shows the available space on the receiver, and allows
you to enter the site name (which must be four characters) and site attribute. You
may also change the interval and the antenna height here. Y ou can choose to have
SurvCE stop logging the site automatically after a specified time period, or
manually. If you choose to stop the logging automatically, you will still have the
ability to stop it manually using the Stop Point Logging button.

The Recording Site screen can be exited by clicking the Stop Point Logging
button or the Exit-Continue Logging button (which leaves the site running but
exits the dialog). You will return to the main post processing screen. From here
you may exit, tag more sites, manage files, or close the file by clicking the Close

p307
File button.

Start Processing/Stop Processing

These buttons pause and resum e recording to the file. If the file is recording, Stop
Processing will pause the recording. If the file is not recording, Start Processing
will resume the file. When the file first starts, it is recording.

File Manager
Go to the SURVEY tab, and click the Log Static Data button. You will see a
screen with six buttons, or an error message stating that the data collector could not
connect to the receiver. If there is an error message, check connections on the data
card.

Click on the File Manager button to see what files are on the receiver ’s card. The
next screen contains a list of files and their respective sizes.

At the bottom of the dialog, free memory is shown, along with a Delete button. If
you are running low on memory, you can delete files using this dialog box . To
delete a file, click on the file from the list and select the Delete button. You will
then be asked to confirm that you wish to delete the file. You can also format the
card here using the Format Card button. This will destroy all the data on the card!
Make sure you don’t need any of the data on the card before formatting it. To ex it
this dialog, choose Exit.

Thales/Ashtech File Types & Logging Static for RTK Points

p308
The Thales/Ashtech receivers log data into various files on the receiver during Log
Static Data. These files are all contained in a U-file, which is what the File
Manager will list from the PC Card. When these files are decompressed on the
computer intended to do post processing (using the Ashtech Download program ),
they are split into the following files: an almanac file, a B-file (raw data), a D-file
(description and antenna information), an E-file (ephemeris data), and an S-file
(session information). D-files are created automatically from the antenna and site
information.
SurvCE creates O-files automatically on the data collector from receiver
information. The O-file is named the same as the coordinate file name, with an
.obn extension, and placed in the data directory. This file is needed for GNSS
Studio, as it contains vector information. However, this information can only be
added if the point stored has a GPS fixed position.

To store an RTK point into the O-file, go into Store Points with the GPS position
fixed. Enter information for point (site id), description (site attribute), and antenna
height, and click the Average button to store an OBEN average. For every reading
taken by GPS Average, an OBEN measurement will be taken to be averaged into
the final measurement. The final measurement is stored in the crd file and the
O-file on the data collector, as well as the static data files on the receiver.

Remember, the file must be recording in order to log static data from Store Points.
If a point is stored, and no site is logged, to log one, go to the Log Static Data
Menu, select Start Processing, and return to Store Points. It is now possible to
log a point from Store Points.

p309
 Note : In one reported instance, a damaged PC card caused the equipment to
display a “Card Full” message. Use the File Manager within Log Static
Data to review data on the PCMCIA card in the receiver and use File
Manager to re-format the PCMCIA card on the receiver if the card appears to
be causing errors. Be sure to copy any useful information from the PC card
before re-formatting, or install a new PC card.

Logging Static Data with Navcom Receiver

The Navcom Receiver supports logging of static data to a file. The files generated
with this option can be post-processed to increase the accuracy of your Survey
using software produced by third parties such as Way Point. SurvCE allows you to
turn Navcom static data logging on and off, and manipulate files on the receiver,
but you will still need third party software to post-process the resulting files. To
begin logging static data, go to the SURVEY tab and click the Log Static Data
Button. If an error message appears, stating that the data collector could not
connect to the receiver, check connections and the data card. Y ou have three
choices on the setup screen.

 Start/Resume File: To start a new file on the receiver or to append to an

existing file, select Start/Resume File. In the next menu, type the name of the
new file, or select the name of an existing file from the drop list, and press OK
.
 Close File: Select this to close a file that is open for logging.

p310
 File Manager: To manipulate files on the receiver, choose this button.

All of the files on the receiver, along with their sizes and creation dates, are
displayed in the list. Also, the total memory used is displayed in the lower left
corner of the dialog. To delete a file, select the file and press Delete. To download
a file to your data collector, select the file and press Download File. To format the
MMC data card on your receiver, press format card. Formatting the card will erase
all existing data.

p311
COGO
This chapter provides information on using the commands from the COGO menu.

Keyboard Input
This feature allows you to manually enter or edit coordinates in the current job file
or the current control file. The option to edit points in the control file only appears
if Use Control File is enabled in Job Settings. There are fields for Point ID,
Northing, Easting, Elevation and Description. If adding a point to an existing job,
SurvCE displays a point ID one greater than the highest in the file. If starting with
a new job, the point ID will default to 1.

p312
 Previous and Next: These buttons move back and forth through the
coordinate file, skipping points with zero coordinates. The Next button will
not store the current data to the file.
 Store: This writes the entered data to the file and advances the display to the
next point. If you are editing an existing point, when you press Store, SurvCE
will warn you that the point number has already been used. You then have a
choice to overwrite this point number or use a new number.
 Delete: The Delete button allows the user to delete a point or range of points
from the file.

If you want to create a duplicate point, simply change the point number and press
Enter or Store to save it.

If you want a duplicate point with a different elevation, change the point ID and
elevation and press Enter or Store to save it.

Inverse
This command reports the bearing and horizontal distance between any two
user-specified points that are contained within the current job. If under Units in
Job Settings, Angle is set to Azimuth, then inverse will display azimuths instead
of bearings. You can override the display settings in Job Settings by choosing

p313
between Bearing (Brg N,E or Brg E,N), North Azimuth (NAz N,E, NAz E,N) and
South Azimuth (SAz N,E or SAz E,N) at the bottom right of the Inverse screen.

Inverse can be run in either 2D or 3D mode as selected at the top of the screen. In
2D mode, the program displays only the bearing and distance between the two
points. As many as four inverses can be viewed at once, as shown below.

In 3D mode, the report also displays the slope distance, elevation difference, slope
in percent, and slope as a ratio, between each point. The Northing, Easting,
Elevation and description of the specified points are also shown.

p314
To run the inverse routine, enter the first point number at the bottom (you may also
select from a point list or select from the map screen). Press Enter, and then enter
the second point and press Enter again.

If a control file is specified in Job Settings, then when you run inverse, you can
choose the List icon at the bottom center of the screen and then select points from
the control file. In this way, you can inverse between points in your current file
and your control file as needed.

If under Units in Job Settings, Angle Unit is set to Grads/Gons, then the Inverse
command will default to the 400 circle and will display North azimuths.

 Clear Dialog: Use this icon to clear the results window.

Areas
This command calculates the area of a closed figure that is defined internally by
user-entered point numbers contained within the current job, or by a polyline
picked from the screen.

p315
You may specify individual point numbers or type in a range of point numbers to
define the area. Individual point numbers can be entered as 142,143,148,149 or
each number followed by Enter. This will calculate the area from point 142 to 143
to 148 to 149 back to 142. The area is reported at the bottom of the map screen. A
temporary polyline is also drawn between the points. Results are reported in square
feet and acres when units are set to feet, and square meters when units are set to
metric.

p316
If the polyline is used to solve the area, the program will bring up the MAP screen
after you pick a polyline. When you are certain that you have selected the desired
polyline, press OK, and the graphic screen presents the area. Since the
point-defined area is a straight point inverse, the advantage of the pick polyline
approach is that the polyline may contain arcs.

At the end of each area calculation, you are asked if you would like to “Write
result to raw file?” This will write a line in the raw file as "Calculate area of
polyline 142,143,148,149: Area = 1813.6316SF, 0.0416 acres." For point-defined
figures in metric, the raw file record would read "Calculate area of polyline
142,143,148,149: Area = 168.4918 SM".

Intersections
This command allows for the calculation and storing of points based upon standard
surveying practices of Bearing-Bearing, Bearing-Distance, or Distance-Distance
Intersection calculations. Data can be entered manually or defined by selecting
points from a point list or map. The kind of intersection calculation to be
performed determines the number of possible solutions. With a Bearing-Bearing
calculation, there will be only one possible solution. Bearing-Distance, and
Distance-Distance calculations will have two possible solutions prom pting the user
to pick the desired solution. Note that in intersection calculations of
Bearing-Distance and Distance-Distance there may be no solution for the input
data. In these cases, Carlson SurvCE will display the message, "No V alid
Solution."

p317
From the COGO Menu, select Intersections. Fill out the appropriate data fields to
perform the desired calculation. The Enter key moves forward through the edit
boxes. The current Angle setting in Job Settings, Units, dictates whether angles
are prompted as azimuth or bearings.

 Off: Use these edit controls to create intersections that are defined by parallel
offsets to the defined or computed direction.

All Intersect routines create SP records in the raw file, storing the calculated
coordinates for each new point. This SP record is identical to records created by
keyboard input.

Bearing-Bearing
This method locates a point at the intersection of two lines. Select Point 1 by
entering the desired point number, or pressing the Point List icon and selecting the
desired point. Pressing the Map icon will allow for selection of the desired point
directly from the screen. Note that when selecting a point from the screen, if the
desired point cannot be determined from the picked point on the screen, a listing of
the nearest points to the desired location will appear allowing for verification of
the targeted point. If the list appears, select the desired point from the list by
clicking on it.

Define the bearing from the first point by typing in the bearing or by specifying
two point IDs. Repeat the procedures for defining the bearing from the second
p318
point.

Bearings can be entered in three forms:

 SE40.5945 becomes S40d59’45”E

 S40.5945E becomes S40d59’45”E
 240.5945 becomes S40d59’45”E

Once data entry is complete, press the OK button. The calculated point will
appear on the screen with the input data detailed at the bottom of the screen. Store,
Modify (review and revise) and RESULTS Options are located on the right side of
the Map screen.

p319
 Save: Use this icon to save a report of the inverse.

The results screen will display the coordinates of the base points, the inverse
bearing, the distance from the base points to the calculated INT1 point (and INT2
for distance intersections), and the coordinate data for the calculated points. Note
that calculated points are labeled as Int1 and Int2 until the points are stored. These
Option Buttons are present on all Map screens displayed while in the Intersections
routine. Once Store is selected or the Enter key pressed, the stored point will
inherit the specified point number, description, and the elevation displayed at the
bottom of the screen (optional). There can be only one solution for a
bearing-bearing intersection.

All Intersect routines handle the 400 circle, if configured to grads/gons within Job
Settings, Units.

Bearing-Distance
Define the Bearing from the first point, then define the known horizontal distance
from the second point.

p320
Select OK and the map screen will appear showing a circle radiating from the
distance base point and a line from the bearing base point, defined by the entered
bearing. The line is extended to intersect the circle at the two possible solutions.

Pressing Enter or Store will display the prompt "Pick a Solution". To select the
point, simply pick it from the screen. Picking near the desired solution is
sufficient. The program will select the nearest solution position. Pressing Enter
again will accept the second possible solution for the intersection.

p321
Distance-Distance
Enter the known horizontal distances from both points.

Select OK, and the map screen will display showing circles radiating from the first
and second selected base points. Lines leading from both base points to the two
possible intersections of the circles are also shown.

p322
Pressing Enter or Store will display the prompt "Pick a Solution". Select the
desired calculated solution. To select the point, simply pick it from the screen.
Picking near the desired solution is sufficient. The program will select the nearest
solution position. Pressing Enter again will accept the second possible solution
for the intersection. If there was no solution for the input data, SurvCE will
display "No Valid Solution".

Point Projection
This command allows you to calculate the station and offset of any entered or
surveyed point relative to a known centerline or baseline. Note that the Station
Store command will calculate a point at a given station and offset. Point
Projection does just the reverse — it calculates a station and offset for any given
point. It also will calculate the “Intersect”, or the projection of that offset point on
the baseline. This baseline “intersect”, or perpendicular projection point, can be
staked out and stored. The application of the routine is shown below.

p323
The coordinates from which to project can be entered in three ways:

 By point number
 By entering the coordinate values
 By taking a GPS or total station reading

The station, offset, and vertical difference of the point is then calculated, and the
Intersect button (see the above figure) will calculate the projected perpendicular
intersect point on the baseline. This Intersect can also be staked out using the
Stake button.

You must first define the baseline. You can define the baseline by one of the
following methods:

 Define Line: Select two points to define the line.

 Define Alignment: Select a predefined centerline file (.cl file), graphically
pick a polyline or enter a sequence of points.
 Define Arc (3 Points): Select three points on the arc.
 Define Arc (PC, PT, Value): Select the start and end points of the arc and
enter the radius length.

p324
If you choose two points, you must then define the line in the Point Projection
dialog box as shown below.

With the two points method, you simply enter two point numbers, or choose them
from the point list or MAP. The azimuth and slope between the two points is
calculated, along with the ending station, based on the entered start station. With
the Azimuth method, you define the line by entering a first point and then entering
p325
an azimuth and slope. You can confirm the coordinate values of the points by
choosing Confirm NEZ. When the line is defined, choose Continue. You must
now define, or designate, the point that is offset from the line in the Point
Definition dialog.

You can enter a point ID, select one from the list, or select one from the map. Y ou
can also enter coordinates to define a new point, or read values from the
instrument. As soon as enough information is entered, the station, offset and
vertical difference is displayed or the message "OFF CENTERLINE" is displayed.
This message lets you know that a station/offset cannot be com puted for the
coordinates entered.

 Read: This command reads the instrument to gather coordinates for point
projection.
 Intersect: This command will project the coordinates entered perpendicular,
back to the centerline and enter these new coordinates into the Point
Projection dialog. From there you can store or stakeout the intersect points.
 Stake: This command will allow you to stakeout the displayed coordinates
(typically used to stakeout the intersect points).
 Store: Pressing Store after Read stores the offset coordinate. Store after
Intersect is selected stores the coordinates for the intersect point on the
centerline (perpendicular from the offset point). Store after entering
coordinates or a point number for the offset point, without selecting Intersect,

p326
 will simply store the offset point coordinates again as a new point number.
Store is most often used to save the calculated intersect points to the
coordinate file. Pressing Store will save an SP (store point) record in the raw
file, and a note record will indicate that the point was calculated within Point
Projection.

Station Store
Station Store is a pure calculation routine that will create points based on a station
and offset from an alignment. The alignment may be defined as a centerline, a
3-point arc, an arc defined by a PC, Radius and PT, a selected polyline, or a
sequence of points. The user may also assign an elevation to the calculated point.
Station Store might be used to enter elevations of pipe culverts, for ex ample, where
inlets and outlets are located at distinct stations, offsets, and elevations. Then the
two calculated points at the inlet and outlet can be used within Stakeout Line to
stake any point along the culvert, with the cut/fill calculated. Although the
command Stake Centerline, found within Stakeout Line/Arc, will directly stakeout
a particular station and offset to a centerline, some users prefer to pre-calculate the
station and offset and assign a point ID, then stake by point ID. Station Store
permits this pre-calculation of points at any station and offset.

The very first screen within Station Store offers several methods of defining an
alignment.

p327
The following screen is where you enter the station, offset, and elevation to
compute and store a point location.

Pressing Enter will move through the dialog and store the point, leaving the screen
up for more entries, while defaulting to the previous data and the nex t point ID.
The description is fixed as the station and offset, but can be edited using the
command Keyboard Input.

Transformation
This command allows you to translate, rotate, and/or scale points in the current
job. Any point drawn on the map screen will be updated automatically in addition
to updating the coordinates.

All three transformations can be performed individually or all at once if desired.

You first fill out the options in one or more of the tabs (Translate, Rotate and
Scale), and then you press Enter and obtain a second screen where you fill out the
range of points to transform.

p328
Range of Points: Enter the range of points to translate. Ranges can be entered in
the following format: 1-20,32,40-45, etc..
Add to Point Numbers: Enter a number to add to existing point numbers when
creating new point numbers. This option is not available when overwriting your
existing point numbers. See
example below under Use New Point Numbers.
Overwrite Existing Point Numbers : Overwrites the existing point coordinate
data with the new coordinate data.
Use New Point Numbers: Uses new point numbers for the new coordinate
positions while keeping the existing point numbers and coordinate data. Each time
a point is to be overwritten, you will be prompted whether to overwrite or use a
new point number. This method is only recommended when you are transforming
very few points and wish to give each a specific point number assignment.
Store in New CRD File: This option writes the transformed points to a new CRD
file while keeping the existing point numbers and coordinate data. Y ou may also
choose to input a number for Add to Point Numbers, but this is not required.

Translate
On the translate dialog, enter in the Delta North, Delta East, and the Delta
Elevation. These values represent the change in the original coordinate values and
the desired coordinate values. When com plete, select the OK button on the dialog,
or navigate to the ROTATE or SCALE Tabs for further data input.

The lower portion of the screen shows an alternate method of defining a translation
p329
by comparing an original point to a destination point. Data entered here, as point
ID or directly entered northing, easting and elevation, will lead to computation and
display of the delta N, delta E and delta Z in the upper portion of the screen.

When OK is pressed, a second screen appears which controls the range of points
to be translated.

Assuming you have 55 points in your file, you could "preserve" these 55 points by
adding 100 to the point numbers, and saving the transform ed points as 101 through
155. If you choose Overwrite Existing Point IDs , the Add to Point Numbers
option is not available. If you choose Use New Point Numbers, then you will be
prompted to enter a new point number for each existing point to be overwritten
(recommended only when you are overwriting a few points). You can even store
the transformed points in a completely new CRD file by selecting Store in New
CRD File.

Raising and Lowering Elevations: Users often ask, "How do I raise or lower
elevations on a range of points?" The answer is the Translate option in the
Transformation routine. To adjust elevation only, enter only the delta elevation
(leave Northing and Easting at 0 translation).

Rotate
The ROTATE tab is used to rotate points in a coordinate file. Enter the desired
degree of rotation into the degree of rotation data field. Specify the rotation base
p330
point. This can be accomplished by either entering the point number of the desired
point manually, or by selecting the point using the List or Map icon. You may also
enter in coordinates for the rotation point if the point is not present in the
coordinate file. Lastly, you can define the rotation by referencing two points (such
as "From 1, To 2"), then specifying the desired new bearing for these points. Even
the new bearing itself can be computed from two points used as a reference.

The second screen appears, which allows you to set the range of points to
transform and choose how to store the newly calculated points. For all rotations,
the rotation value is written into the RW5 file as dd.mmss (the current angle
format).

Scale
The scale tab is used to scale the points in a coordinate file. The northing, easting,
and optionally, the elevation, are multiplied by the specified scale factor. Enter the
desired scale factor in the scale factor field. Select the base point by entering the
point number of the desired point manually, or by selecting the point using the List
or Map icon. You may also enter coordinates for the scale base point if the base
point for scaling is not present in the coordinate file. The coordinate of the base
point will remain unchanged. All other points will scale. If the Ignore Elevations
toggle is enabled, then only the northing and easting values are scaled. Note that
you can scale your points from base coordinate 0,0,0 by entering a scale factor and
answering Yes to the warning screen.

Raw Data Records

The transformation raw data records are expressed as one string per command with
the values separated by spaces. These records will be recorded to the raw data file
for processing purposes so that all Carlson processors will recognize the records
and perform the transformation during re-processing.

 TRANSLATE: Range Dx Dy Dz Process_Zero_Z

 ROTATE: Range Angle Base_Y Base_X
 S CALE: Range Scale Base_Y Base_X Use_Z
 ALIGN: Range From1 To1 From2 To2

Example:

CC,Translate,8-9 200 50 0 0

CC,Rotate,7 33.1234 79613.662 15619.725

p331
CC,Scale,7 1.5 79613.662 15619.725

CC,Align,8-9 8 6 9 7

Calculator
This command eliminates the need to carry a separate calculator in the field. The
calculator can be used to do scientific computations, standard calculations,
conversions, triangle calculations, including angles, and curve calculations.

Standard Calculator
Most basic calculations can be performed using this tab in the calculator. Memory
functions are also available.

Scientific Calculator
Values can be entered on the X register by typing on the keypad. The values can be
rolled up and down with the up and down arrow keys and the Roll and RollD
buttons on the screen. The Enter key finishes the entry of a number and pushes the
stack. The C on the touch screen clears an entry. Additional functions on the

p332
screen can be obtained through touching the scroll [<] and [>] area of the screen.

Conversion Calculator
Conversion values can be entered for various unit types and scenarios.
 M to Ft: This option provides for conversion between many units. Enter a
value in any field and press Enter to find the conversion value. The following
units are available in Feet, Meters and International Feet Degrees, Minutes,
Seconds and Gons/Grads and Decimal Degrees

p333
 Slope Distance to Horizontal Dis tance: This option allows you to convert
slope distances with zenith angles to horizontal distances and vertical
differences, and vice versa. See figure.

 Lat/Lon-SP: This option allows you to convert from Latitude/Longitude to

grid system coordinates and vice versa. If you are configured for U.S. State

p334
 Plane Coordinates, the routine conveniently displays your zone, and you can
even change zones for quick calculations without altering your G PS zone
settings in Job Settings. Otherwise, the calculation is based on your Job
Settings GPS Zone. To solve for northing and easting, fill in the latitude and
longitude and press Solve N/E. To solve for latitude and longitude, fill in the
northing and easting and press Solve Lat/Long. Y ou can set the state plane
zone at the bottom of this dialog.

After completing a conversion, you may enter a point ID and press Save to
save the coordinates to the current job. Y ou can also change the type of
transformation or zone system used. If you don ’t want NAD 83 (primarily
used in the U.S.) you can go to Job Settings , GPS and change the
Transformation type. For example, you could change the Transformation to
UTM or NTF-France. Then, back in Calculator, your coordinate to Lat/Long
calculation would be based on the configured transformation. Note that when
converting Grid System Coordinates to WGS84 coordinates and going
WGS84 to Grid, the geoid separate file (if any) is applied to the calculation.

 Az-Br: This does a straight, simple calculation converting azimuths to

bearings. A prime example, shown below, would be converting an azimuth of
119.2547.

p335
Other Calculations
There are two types of calculations that can be performed from the OTHER tab.
Click the large, square icons to go to the Triangle or Curve calculator.

Triangle Calculator
p336
The figure below shows the Triangle calculator. The top of the dialog box
indicates the mode of calculation. To change the mode, simply use the pull-down
and to selec the desired mode.

 Side-Side-Side
 Angle-Side-Angle
 Side-Angle-Angle
 Side-Angle-Side
 Side-Side-Angle

After choosing a mode, simply apply the values to the appropriate blank and hit
Solve. Points from your current job can be selected to fill out the blanks as well.
The points can be selected from the screen or from the point list by picking the
appropriate button icon. After the calculations have been performed, you will see
the Clear, Results, and View Triangle buttons. Clear will clear the entry fields.
Results will show the results dialog again. View Triangle will draw the triangle
on the screen connecting the points chosen for the calculation. The triangle
calculator, using 3 points, is a convenient way to calculate the interior angle
between 3 points. For example, if you were setup on 1, backsighting 10, and
turned a 90 degree angle to 21, then the triangle defined by 10 to 1 to 21 would
indicate a 90 degree angle at point 1.

p337
Curve Calculator
The figure below shows the Curve calculator. Simply use the pull-down at the
upper left to select the desired method of curve calculation.

 Radius-Delta Angle
 Radius-Chord Length
 Radius-Arc Length
 Deg. of Crv.-Delta Angle
 Deg. of Crv.-Chord Length
 Deg. of Crv.-Arc Length
 Delta Angle-Chord Length
 Delta Angle-Arc Length
 Chord Length-Arc Length

p338
The type of curve can be toggled between roadway and railroad. V alues can be
entered into the blanks by keyboard entry, by selecting points from the current job,
from a point list, from the screen, or by selecting an arc drawn on the screen. Once
the values are entered, the results are displayed on the screen. The results can be
viewed by selecting the Results button. The curve can be viewed on the screen by
selecting the View Curve button.

Manual Traverse
This command allows for manual entry of angles and distances, and calculates
sideshots or traverses from a known occupied point. If the direction is defined by
a bearing or azimuth, a backsight point is not required. If the direction is defined
by angle left or right or a deflection angle left or right, then a backsight point is
required.

Manual Traverse is actually one of three options for manual traverse and sideshot
entry. A second option is to go to the Map screen, and at the command line
(Cmd:) enter "I" for inverse, to inverse to an occupied point, or from backsight
point to occupied point, then "T" for traverse or "S" for Sideshot, using angle
codes 1-NE, 2-SE, 3-SW, 4-NW, 5-AZ, 6-AL, 7-AR following the prompting for
angle and distance entry. This style works strictly off the keyboard and does not
require any screen tapping to switch from traverse to sideshot to inverse. The
points plot on the screen as you go. A third option for traverse and sideshot entry
p339
is to set the equipment type to Manual Total Station, and enter the traverse and
sideshot data within the Store Points command. All three of the methods will
store data to the raw survey file for re-processing, and will allow entry of
instrument heights and target heights. In the Map screen, Traverse Defaults (TD)
will turn instrument and target height prompting on and off. All three methods
allow for zenith angle prompting as an option.

The command centers around one main entry screen. You must enter an occupied
point for traversing. You must also enter a target point number to calculate.

 Horizontal Angle: You must select a horizontal angle method. Options here
are AR (angle right), NE, SE, SW, NW, AZ, SAZ (south azimuth), AL (angle
left), deflection left, and deflection right. If a bearing or azimuth is selected
for traversing, the backsight point number will become inactive. Only an
occupied point is required to traverse forward by bearing or azimuth. All
other turned-angle methods will require a backsight point number. The stored
descriptions for the occupied point and backsight point will display as shown
above (TRV MAG and TRV N in this case). Occupied points and backsight
points can be selected from the list or the map using the appropriate icons.
You can also enter point-defined angles, as in 6,7 for the direction from 6 to 7,
or 6,7+90 for 90 degrees to the right of the direction of 6 to 7.
 Elevation/Vertical Angle Method : There are many ways to calculate a
vertical differential between the occupied point and target point. The most
common method is zenith angle (ZE). Manual Traverse also offers vertical
p340
 angle, delta Z (elevation difference), slope by percent (SP), slope by ratio
(SR), and known elevation (Z). To get the slope from point 6 to point 7,
switch to SP mode and enter 6,7 for the slope.
 Distance Method: There are four methods of distance entry: Horizontal
Distance (in which case the elevation line is inactive), Slope Distance; Slope
Distance, No Elevation; and Horizontal Distance, No Elevation. . Both
Slope Distance methods will prompt for vertical angle/zenith angle, etc., but
Slope Distance, No Elevation will calculate a zero-elevation for the target
point number and will reduce the slope distance by the effect of the vertical
angle/zenith angle. You can also enter the distance in the form of 6,7 for the
distance from 6 to 7, or as 6,7/2 as half the distance from 6 to 7. Note that if
you wanted to interpolate a point 12 midway between 6 and 7, you can use all
3 edit boxes to accomplish this. The azimuth or bearing could be entered as
6,7. The slope would be entered as 6,7, and the distance would be entered as
6,7/2. So if point 6 is elevation 100 and point 7 is elevation 101, point 12 will
have elevation 100.5.

 Enter Elevation: If Enter Elevation is enabled, a check screen is activated

to display the calculated elevation. From here you can override the calculated
elevation with a new elevation. This option is useful in combination with
Horizontal Distance for calculating points at a known distance and fix ed
elevation.
 TR Mode: Enabling Traverse Mode will cause the routine to “traverse up”

p341
 to the target point number, so that the new occupied point number will
automatically change to the last target point number, and the new backsight
will change to the last occupied point. You can always manually change the
fields for occupied point and backsight point and “force” a traverse, but
enabling Traverse Mode will update these fields automatically, so that you
immediately “move up”, and are awaiting the next angle and distance entries.
With TR Mode disabled, Manual Traverse defaults to sideshot mode.

When you are entering in the horizontal angle, distance, or elevation/vertical angle
information, the program displays the current mode as an extra confirmation at the
bottom of the screen. Hitting Enter from the last entry line, or tapping Calculate,
or entering a C for calculate, will solve for the coordinates and display them at the
bottom of the screen. Hitting Enter again, tapping Store, or entering S will store
the points. Before storing, you can also tap the Map icon to see the location of the
calculated point, in reference to the occupied point and backsight point.

Click Back to return. You always have the option to enter new angle and distance
information, Calculate, check the Map, then Store, as desired. Point in Direction
offers the flexibility to check point locations graphically prior to storing.

 El/Off: If El/Off is clicked on for Elevation mode, a “check screen” is

activated that allows you to see the calculated elevation and potentially
override it with a new elevation. This option is useful in combination with

p342
Horizontal Distance for calculating points at a known distance and fix ed
elevation. This screen also allows you to offset the point perpendicular to the
computed traverse leg. Enter positive for right and negative for left.

p343
ROAD
This chapter provides information on using the commands from the Road menu.

Centerline Editor
This command allows you to enter new centerlines, as well as recall and edit
existing centerline files. Centerline files in SurvCE are ASCII files with a .CL
extension. When the routine is selected, a dialog will appear in which you can
load existing centerlines or begin entry of new centerline information.

p344
 Clear: This icon, at the top of the screen, clears out all information in
the dialog in preparation for entering a new centerline. With no centerline file
loaded or saved yet, the file name in the upper left is displayed as “None.”
 Start Pt ID: If the centerline starts on a point number that exists in your
current coordinate (.crd) file, you can enter the point number here, and it will
recall and display the starting coordinates. The point can also be selected
from the list or map using the appropriate icons.
 Start Station: You must enter the starting station for the centerline.
(“Station” is the same as the European term “Chainage.”) Many surveyors
and engineers prefer not to start centerlines at station 0. If the job backs up or
needs to start further back along the centerline, this method will leave you
with negative stationing. There are three centerline “forms” as set in Job
Settings, Units. A starting station of 1500 can be displayed as 1+500 (metric,
US-style, showing whole kilometers left of the “+”), as 1500.000 (pure
decimal chainage, common to Europe), and as 15+00 (feet, US-style,
sometimes also used on metric roads in Canada), often referred to as “station
15 plus 00”. In all cases, you would enter it as 1500, but it would display in
the correct format after pressing Enter. For example, you would see
1+500.0000 if configured to kilometers. The program will also accept use of
the “+” in the entry of the station, and will convert to the configured form after
you press Enter.
 Northing, Easting: If the northing and easting are not recalled from a starting
point number, you will need to enter the northing and easting for the start of
p345
 the centerline. It is not necessary to enter the northing and easting if you use
the Pick PL (pick polyline) option for defining a centerline, since the starting
coordinates of the selected polyline are automatically used, and would
overwrite anything previously entered.
 Load: This command allows you to load an existing centerline for review or
edit.
 Edit: Use this button to edit the highlighted element.
 Delete: Use this button to remove the highlighted element.
 Add: Returning to the starting dialog, you can add elements to get a
centerline started. Typically, you will start with a line or tangent segment, but
you can also start on a curve or spiral curve element. When you select Add,
you get to choose which element to use. These options include:

 Add (Line): A tangent section of the alignment. This option allows you to
enter a point ID or coordinates to define the end of the tangent, or enter the
station, or distance and the direction. To force the element to be tangent to the
previous element, toggle on the Tangential to the previous elem option. This
will gray out the direction field and will compute the tangent direction and
enter it for you.

p346
 Add (Curve): A typical circular curve section of the alignment. The first
element of the curve defines what the options for the second element can be
(See Lists Below). The RR toggle allows the user to use Railroad definitions.
The Review button allows you to verify the Tangent In and Tangent Out
bearings or azimuths (depending on Job Settings, Format, Angle Display
settings), as well as confirm PC and PT coordinates. For ex ample, this allows
you to verify computed Tangent Out bearings against paper plans, before
continuing entry of new elements.

p347
 Add (Spiral-Curve-Spiral): The Spiral-Curve-Spiral element is really just
two implementations of Spiral Only (line-spiral-curve and curve-spiral-line).
The advantage of Spiral-Curve-Spiral is that it completes three elements at

p348
 once and is a fairly common application on high-speed highways. This routine
also allows the user to define the spiral-curve-spiral using known points as
long as the spiral in and spiral out lengths are entered first.

 Add (Spiral Only): The Spiral Only element will handle a spiral between any
line and arc segment (e.g. line-spiral-arc or arc-spiral-arc).

p349
 Pick PL: This option is only visible if you Clear the dialog. With this option,
you can pick a centerline from any screen polyline, including polylines with
arcs. When you choose Pick PL, you are immediately presented with the
graphic screen, where you can pan by dragging your finger across the screen,
or zoom using the many zoom options. You can choose not to select a
polyline (maybe there were none to select!) by pressing OK or Enter. When
you select a polyline, it will highlight as a darkened polyline. After selecting a
polyline and pressing OK or Enter you will see the polyline elements. Note
that if you change the start station to 500, all the stationing for the polyline
elements will change accordingly. This is also true regarding the starting
northing and easting. If these are changed, all element coordinates will
change accordingly, as can be verified using the Edit option.

p350
 EQ: The EQ button allows you to enter station equations.

 Save As: This saves the file. Enter a name.

Note : You can create new points with Input-Edit Centerline. When you
enter and save a centerline, it will prompt “Do you want to save

p351
 centerline points?” You may answer Yes and save point IDs for the start,
end, PI, PC, radius point, PT and any key spiral points found in the file.
In the same way, a centerline that you load can be re-saved with new
coordinate IDs assigned to all key points, as long as you make some
change, like adding a point number to one of the Pt ID fields for a CL
Element. If you answer Yes to Save Centerline Points, the dialog box
below appears. If you have entered point IDs of your own choosing in the
Input-Edit dialogs, use the upper option. The lower option will
auto-number from the starting point ID without regard to any numbers
you’ve entered, but will respect and not overwrite used points in the file.
Points are not stored to the centerline file itself, so after loading a stored
centerline, no point IDs will appear.

Draw Centerline
Draw Centerline will draw the selected centerline on the screen. All the zooming
commands [Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window, Zoom Previous and Pan] are
available to you in the Draw Centerline command. The program will
automatically zoom to the extent of the centerline when drawn. If there are point
numbers and polylines on the screen in that area, they will appear as well. This

p352
command only temporarily displays the centerline for reference and does not draw
it on the screen as part of the dxf file associated with the job. To actually draw the
centerline as a permanent feature (unless erased later), use Map (globe icon),
Tools, Centerline, CL to Polyline.

Profile Editor
This routine allows field entry of vertical alignment files for roads, sewers and
other types of alignments. Vertical alignments can also be loaded and edited. In
addition, high and low points can be calculated and the elevations of individual
stations can be calculated. Vertical alignments are stored as files with a .PRO
extension. Vertical alignments are typically referred to as profiles. In Carlson
SurvCE, the station ranges of the profile and centerline do not need to match. As
long as they have station ranges in common, any profile can be used with any
centerline for all advanced Roading commands as well as Survey menu routines
such as Offset Stakeout and Elevation Difference by Road Design files.

Profile Entry
Profiles are extremely easy to enter. When the command is selected, if no prior
profile has been entered, you will encounter the blank Input-Edit Profile dialog.
You can also obtain a blank screen and start a new profile by tapping the Clear
icon (eraser) at the top of the screen.
p353
 PVI Station: PVI stands for Point of Vertical Intersection, similar to a PI
(Point of Intersection) for the horizontal alignment. In some locations, the
term VPI is used (Vertical Point of Intersection). You can start immediately
by typing in the starting station under the PV I column. For our highway
example, the starting station is 10078.69.
 PVI Elevation: The starting elevation is 526.49. So simply press Enter and
move from the PVI column to the PVI Elev. column and enter 526.49.
Pressing Enter again moves onto the next PVI field, where you can enter
10600 for the next station, then 529.10 for the next PVI elevation.
 Slope %: Once a second station and elevation are entered, the program will
calculate the percent slope. Alternately, if you enter under the Slope % before
entering the PVI elevation, then the program will calculate the PV I elevation.
The slope column is a nice check against bad entries in the PV I elevation
column. In other words, you often expect even slopes, and you can check the
computed slopes against the plans. Slopes can be entered as ratios when that
option is clicked, and if you click "Show Zeroes", the dialog will show a
consistent number of decimals (typically 4) in all columns, causing the data
and decimal places to line up vertically.
 VC Lng: For road jobs, you can enter the vertical curve length in this
column. This is the total length of the vertical curve. If the length entered is
600, this means that the vertical alignment transitions through a curve
(parabola) beginning 300 units (feet or meters) before the PV I and ending 300

p354
 units after the PVI. If a vertical curve is uneven, that is, it transitions from,
say, 400 feet before the PVI to 200 feet after the PVI, then the curve must be
entered using the form 400-200 (the before and after distances separated by a
dash). SurvCE assumes all vertical curves are parabolas (U.S. road industry
standard). However, you can tap the circular curve option when that applies.
For sewer and water line alignments, there is typically no vertical curve
transition, so this column can be left blank, or 0s can be entered for vertical
curve lengths.
 Check Station: When the profile for a highway job has been entered in a
dialog, you can also enter a value to Check Stations. This feature is at the
bottom of the dialog. This will check the grades at any desired station. When
entering stations, you may include the “+” that is often used, as in 12+680.5
(English) and 126+80.5 (metric).
 Load: The Load command presents a list of all previously stored profiles.
When one is selected, it displays the profile information in the dialog. To load
a stored file, you simply enter the name (for ex ample, "Demo"). No file
extension is necessary. Alternatively, you can select a name from the list and
accept it by pressing OK or Enter.
 Add: The Add button will create a new row at the curser position with 0
entries (with the exception of slope, which will compute based on the 0
entries). If, for example, you touch line 1 (to move the blinking cursor to line
1--the first row), the Add command will allow you to insert a new row in the
front of your profile. This would be necessary if you needed to start the
profile at an earlier station. To add to the end of your profile, just click the
down arrow key at the right until a blank line becomes available and make
your new entries.
 Remove: This button deletes the current line.
 High-Low: This button can be used to calculate high and low points.

p355
 Save As: This command will save your profile to a specified file name.
There is no need to enter a file extension. If you want to save the file as
Baker.pro, just enter "Baker". The Save As command will default to the
current profile name. If you are entering a new profile, it will default to the
current coordinate file name.

Draw Profile
The Draw Profile command will draw the selected profile on the screen. The
profile will be exaggerated (typically 10:1 or 20:1) in order to maximize detail.
You can control the vertical exaggeration by selecting the vertical scale icon,
located at the lower left of the Draw Profile screen. All the zooming commands
[Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window, Zoom Previous and Pan] are available to
you in the Draw Profile command.

p356
If you want to change the display scale, click the icon in the lower left corner. The
dialog shown below will appear. Change the scale and tap OK.

Template Editor
Templates for roads, levees, ditches and other earthwork can be created in Carlson
Software products such as Carlson Civil or Carlson Roads, or alternately they can
be entered in the field using Input/Edit Template. These templates can then be
used in Carlson SurvCE in the Stake Slope command, where the template is one of
the design files for slope staking, along with the centerline and the profile.
Templates are also used in Stake Road (for staking those portions of the road

p357
from left shoulder to right shoulder) and for Elevation Difference by Road Design
Files. Templates can be reviewed graphically using the command Draw Template
. Templates are not necessary for the command Stake Offset, found on the
SURVEY tab. In Offset Stakeout, road or other cross slopes from centerline are
entered within the command itself.

Currently, SurvCE uses only templates created in Carlson Civil and Carlson Roads
or entered directly within SurvCE using the command Template Editor. Every
point on a template has an ID such as “EP” and “SH” or “CB1”. Templates in
SurvCE have only one surface—the surface you are staking. To stake out a
subgrade, you could enter the surface grade information, then use a vertical offset
in Stake Road or enter the subgrade surface directly as a template.

After selecting Template Editor, you are presented immediately with the input
dialog shown in the figure below. If an existing template is loaded (based on the
last template used), you can clear the screen by clicking the clear icon (eraser) in
the upper right.

Template grades are entered top to bottom, and ex tend out from the middle
position of the template. If you are dealing with a symmetrical template, keep the
Right Side Same as Left option enabled. This will reduce entries by half.
Otherwise, you must select the appropriate side and use Add to add entries, or
Edit to revise. One trick, if you have non-symmetrical grades, is to keep Right
Side Same as Left on and enter the symmetrical portion (perhaps the pavement

p358
lanes and first shoulder lane), then when you get to the outside shoulder or other
lane where one side is different than the other, disable Right Side Same as Left
and complete the non-symmetrical portion of the template. With the Right Side
Same as Left turned off, you can click the words Left SURFACE or Right
S URFACE and the left or right columns become active for editing. Alternatively,
you may simply click into the items in the columns and edit or add.

In the curb-and-gutter template shown below, the Add option is used to enter the
grade breaks from centerline out to the back of shoulder.

Since templates used in Slope Staking help define all grades into the centerline
from the slope stake, it makes sense to focus on the subgrades that are built by the
dozer, motor grader or trimmer. Thus, despite all the surface grades involved,
there are only three distinct grades in this example curb and gutter template
between centerline and the pivot point of the cut and fill slopes: 12.00 at -2%
(subgrade at back of curb), 0.01 horizontal and 1 vertical, and 8.00 at 4%. For the
Vertical method, some positive horizontal distances must be entered, such as 0.01
or 0.001. By pressing Add in the dialog, we can enter the first two grades.

p359
Downhill slopes, going out from the middle of the template, are entered as
negatives. Note that it is necessary to enter an ID for each break point in the
template. This helps identify the description of the grade on the progressive slope
stake report (e.g. from the outside going in, 8 ’ at -4% to TC, 0.01’ at -1 vertical to
EP, 12’ at 2% to CL). The shoulder slope going out (8 ’ at 4%) is entered
similarly, as above. The Input-Edit Template dialog now appears.

p360
You can press Save any time to save your work. Here the template has been saved
and named “curb.” Now it is time to enter the Cut and Fill slopes, which are used
in slope staking. If the cut slope is 3:1, but the fill slope is 4:1, you would select
Cut/Fill above and enter as shown. Distinct left side and right side cut and fill
slopes can be defined. After entry of the cut and fill slopes, press OK or Enter to
return to the main Template Editor dialog, and press Save. Templates can be
drawn using the command Draw Template.

p361
For highway projects or subdivision roads with cut slopes down to a ditch line,
four template definitions may be necessary for slope staking: (1) Cut Left, Fill
Right, (2) Cut Left, Cut Right, (3) Fill Left, Cut Right, (4) Fill Left, Fill Right.
The appropriate template can then be used for any condition. Shown below is the
Cut Left, Fill Right for a 2-slope (pavement and shoulder) road. The last slope in
each column acts as the "pivot point" for the slope stake calculation. The fill slope
is set at 4:1 and the cut slope at 3:1.

p362
Using this template, cut slopes on the left side of the road will find the pivot at the
base of ditch, while fill slopes on the right side of the road will pivot from the edge
of shoulder.

Draw Template
p363
The Draw Template command will draw the selected template on the screen. All
the zooming commands [Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Window, Zoom Previous and
Pan] are available to you in the Draw Template command. Tap the Menu button to
exit this command. The figure below illustrates this command using the “demo.tpl”
template.

Utilities
Road Utilities includes necessary routines to convert centerlines, profiles and
cross sections from other formats to the formats used by SurvCE. SurvCE uses
ASCII file formats for centerlines (“.cl” files), profiles (“.pro” files) and cross
sections (“.sct” files). These same formats are used by other Carlson products such
as Carlson Civil (formerly SurvCADD), Carlson Survey, and Carlson Roads.

Road Utilities will also scale up or down centerlines and profiles, usually to
convert between metric and English units. In addition, Road Utilities includes a
command for entering a superelevation file (“.sup”). This file can serve as an
optional input file and react with templates in commands such as Stake Road,
Slope Staking and Elevation Difference . Finally, Road Utilities has an option for
a Template Series file (".tsf" file). This file will transition from one template to
another automatically, as long as the templates share identical IDs. The Template
Series file can be substituted for a standard template file in Slope Staking and
p364
Stake Road, wherever design files are applied.

File Conversion and LandXML: The LandXML file format is quickly becoming
an encouraged standard of many departments of transportation (DOTs). This
standard is also recommended by Autodesk, Microstation., and several other
software companies such as Carlson and G eopak. LandXML files have an “.xml”
extension and may contain various road design files including centerlines, profiles,
and cross sections. The “header” lines within the “.x ml” file will indicate what
design files are included. In some cases, several files of the same type, such as
three or four centerlines or profiles, may appear in the same LandXML file. As
more and more software companies offer LandXML file output, this file type may
become the preferred form of data exchange. Be aware that each company tends to
implement the LandXML format in slightly different ways, much like DXF files
for drawing data exchange were sometimes slightly different in format between
Autodesk and Microstation, or from release to release. Therefore, if a LandXML
file containing centerlines, profiles or cross section files fails to convert, it is
recommended that the file be emailed to Carlson Software so changes can be made
in SurvCE to enable conversion. LandXML is an evolving format that is likely to
solidify in the near future.

Centerline Conversion
This command converts horizontal alignment files to and from the Carlson
centerline format (*.CL). Supported file types include:

p365
 ASCII Inroads (.ASC)
 ASCII LDD (.TXT)
 CLIP (.PLA)
 Geopak (.OSD)
 ISPOL (.ALI)
 LandXML (.XML)
 Leica (.GSI)
 MOSS (.INP)
 SDMS (.ALI)
 SDR (.SDR)
 TDS (.RD5)
 Terramodel/Geodimeter (.RLN, .ALN and .ARE formats )

The SurvCE format has a “.CL” extension. These source files can be loaded into
SurvCE using Data Transfer, located in the File menu options. When performing
the conversion, and selecting a particular format, SurvCE automatically looks for
the corresponding file extension.

Report Icon for LandXML Files: If you are importing a LandXML file
specifically, you can click the Report icon left of the "Return" icon in the upper
right of the dialog, and review the source of the data as shown:
p366
Conversion: Clicking Existing File in the upper right (in the Land XML section)
will load the file, and clicking Select New under the CL File section will save the
centerline file in the correct format for use in SurvCE. To convert in the opposite
direction, select Existing File under the CL section to recall a SurvCE centerline
file, and then click New File in the upper left (under LandXML file) to save it
back to a LandXML file, for use in other software.

For file types in which both Import and Export options are available, the
conversion procedure forms a “criss-cross”: You bring the files into SurvCE by
going upper right (“Existing”) to lower left (“Select New”). You send the files
back to the “non-SurvCE” format by going lower right (“Select Existing”) to upper
left “New”.

When the files have been selected, the appropriate action is highlighted below,
"Import to CL" or "Export to <type>". When the process is completed, the
program announces “Process Done,” and you are free to move on to the nex t
command. Most formats only convert to SurvCE and not back again, and therefore
only have “one-way” dialogs. These include ASCII-Inroads, ASCII-LDD,
Geopak, Moss, TDS and Terramodel/Geodimeter.

Importing TDS RD5 Files

Importing TDS RD5 Files: If TDS is selected, centerlines can be converted
one-way to SurvCE centerlines (centerline files CANNOT be converted back to
TDS files). It is important to note that the TDS RD5 file is a dual centerline and
profile file. Because the TDS RD5 file does not display the starting station, an
extra dialog will appear requesting starting coordinates (which can be recalled

p367
from a point) and a starting station.

Verify the Conversion

It is recommended that after converting centerlines, profiles or cross section files
to SurvCE format, you go to the Editor and Draw options for these file types and
review the data to verify that the correct file was converted and that the conversion
was successful. So, for example, after converting a centerline from Inroads format
to SurvCE “.cl” format, go directly to Centerline Editor in the Roads menu and
verify the data.

Recognizing File Formats

For reference, portions of four of the file types are shown below, as they might
display in a Text Editor. The LandXML, SurvCE and SDR examples all reference
the file DOT1.CL. These displays may help you recognize these file types in the
future. The new LandXML format, endorsed by many Departments of
Transportation in the United States, may soon become the standard in the future
for internet transfer of roading and other types of design files.

p368
p369
Centerline Transformation
This routine is designed primarily to convert centerline data from Metric to Survey
Feet or from Survey Feet to Metric. The image below shows the dialog and scale
factor when converting from Metric to Survey Feet.

Apply scale factor for start station: If this option is enabled then the starting
station will be converted using the scale factor. For example, a start station of
1000 would become 3280.833. If disabled, the start station would remain at 1000.
If the goal is to change the starting station by a certain amount unrelated to the
scale factor, then you must use Input-Edit Centerline and enter a new start station
in the initial dialog. This will automatically translate all stations in the centerline
by the appropriate amount.

When Apply Scale Factor for start station is enabled, the centerline is adjusted
by the scale factor, after a confirming warning screen.

Profile Conversion
This command converts vertical alignments to and from the Carlson profile format
(*.PRO). Supported file types include:

 ASCII-LDD (.TXT)
 Caice (.KCP)
 CLIP (.ALZ)

p370
 ISPOL (.RAS)
 LandXML (.XML)
 Leica (.GSI)
 MOSS (.INP)
 SDR (.SDR)
 TDS (.RD5)
 Terramodel/Geodimeter (.RLN, .ALN and .ARE)

The SurvCE format has a .PRO extension. These source files can be loaded into
SurvCE using the Data Transfer feature in the FILE tab. The conversion screen
is similar to Centerline Conversion, with the characteristic “criss-cross” logic for
2-way conversion (LandXML and Leica) and one-way conversion for the other
options.

The SurvCE Profile File Format: It should be noted that of all the SurvCE file
types that are ASCII and therefore viewable in standard text editors, the profile
(.pro) file has the simplest format. The format is station, elevation, length of
vertical curve, and description for road profiles. For ex ample, the Demo.pro file
that is typically provided with the software has the following four lines (which can
be viewed in Notepad):

0.0000, 997.0000 , 0.0000,

p371
200.0000, 1005.0000 , 200.0000,
308.0000, 1003.9200 , 0.0000,
0.0, 0.0, 0.0 (this is an “end-profile” line)

Profile files can be created from within SurvCE, but are simple enough to be
hand-entered using a text editor as well. Other ASCII file types, such as
centerlines, can be deciphered, but are generally of a more complicated design and
are best created using the editors provided within SurvCE.

Profile Transformation
Like Centerline Transformation, this routine is primarily used to scale a profile up
or down to go from Survey Feet to Metric or from Metric to Survey Feet.

Unlike Centerline Transformation, Profile Transformation can directly

translate the profile up or down. You can also scale the profile stationing and
elevations. If you want to apply a translation to selected stations, tap the Translate
button. The Translate option leads to its own dialog of entries, which allows you to
translate both the stationing and the elevations, as shown below. In this way, you
can make the starting station 1000, or raise the entire profile 15 feet or meters.

p372
By default, the entire range of stations is selected. If you wish to only translate a
range, highlight the beginning station, then click End Station and highlight the
end station. Next enter the amount to translate in the Change Station box. You
may also translate the elevation using the Change Elevation box. Tap OK when
you are finished.

Section File Conversion

This command converts section files to and from the Carlson section file format
(*.SCT). Supported file types include:

 Caice (.FFF)
 CLIP (.TRV)
 Geopak (.XRS, .XSR, .SOE & .TXT)
 IGRDS (.LIS, .RDS & .TXT)
 ISPOL (.SC1 & .RAS)
 LandXML (.XML)
 Columnar Text (.TXT, CSV & .ASC)
 Terramodel/Geodimeter (.XSC)

The SurvCE format is “.SCT”. Section files are used for Stake Slope, Stake
Road and Elevation Difference . Cross Section Survey also has the ability to
output section files. TDS will store cross sections in an RD5 format that behave as
p373
a series of templates, following "rules" for slopes coming from the design profile
grade. You can import TDS-style cross sections using Input-Edit Template
Series within Road Utilities, and for "Files of Type", select TDS.

Note that if you select XML Info at the top of the screen, you’ll see some of the
“header” information associated with the XML file to be ex ported or imported.

To export to LandXML, you need to load a LandXML file that already contains a
centerline covering all or part of the station range in the SCT cross section file.
Otherwise, you will see an error message.

p374
Despite the message, you can add the horizontal alignment portion to the
LandXML file after creating the file with sections only. However, if you first
create a LandXML file containing one or more alignments, then choose that
existing LandXML file to export to, you can select among those centerline
alignments when making the cross section file.

Section files in SurvCE can contain descriptions useful for reference in other
routines such as Stake Road. If descriptions are found in the source section file,
they will be captured by the import process into the “.sct” file for use in SurvCE.

Input-Edit Section File

This routine is a convenient cross section editor. It can be used for entering new
p375
sets of cross sections or for editing and reviewing an ex isting set of cross sections.
One nice application is Slope Staking. If you know the left and right “pivot
points” on stations to be slope staked, you can enter very sim ple, two-point cross
sections consisting of the left pivot offset and elevation, and the right pivot offset
and elevation. Then, without taking a cheat sheet into the field, you can slope
stake by cross section method, and the program will seek these pivot points, and
even interpolate the correct pivot points between entered cross sections.

A better approach would be to include all break points in the sections from pivot
left to pivot right, along with descriptions. Then Slope Staking will report the
progressive information to grade each point from the catch all the way into
centerline. This “section-based slope staking” is a cross between user-defined
(where you need the cheat-sheet!) and design files, where the pivot offsets and
elevations are taken from the pivot points in the template as they react with the
profile and superelevation files. Sections used in Stake Road should be complete
cross section files, with all offsets, to enable precise, interpolated stakeout within
the left-to-right range of the sections, on station, or at interpolated stations.

The Input-Edit Section File routine begins by prompting for a cross section file
name. If you wish to start a new cross section file, just enter a new name.

If you choose to select an existing cross section file, such as DEMO.sct, after
selecting the file, you will see the “Section List” dialog.

p376
From this dialog, you can Add stations, Edit existing stations, Remove stations,
Load entire new cross section files, Save As (to save your changes to the current
loaded file or to a new cross section file), and Clear the list of stations (not
recommended unless you want to start from scratch). Select Edit to review a
station.

In this dialog, you can Add , Edit , Remove , Rearrange , or Clear existing offsets
p377
and elevations. Note that cross section offsets are negative for left of centerline and
positive for right of centerline, and can have descriptions such as SH, EOP, CL,
Ditch, 21, 22, 23, etc. These descriptions, where they exist, are potentially useful
for description-based interpolation between stations, as applied in Stake Road . If
you want to add an offset at -42.867 called RP, click Add . You don ’t have to
highlight the correct offset to add above — the software will sort and place the
new entry appropriately.

When you click OK, your new entry will be in the list.

The Edit box leads to the same entry dialog as Add. Remove will provide a
warning and then delete the highlighted offset and elevation. Up and Down should
not be used unless a file conversion led to out-of-order listing of offsets and
elevations. When you click OK from the station edit dialog, you can save the
revised cross section file back in the section list dialog.

Input-Edit Superelevation
Roads can contain one or more curves, and each curve can have its own
superelevation data. This data includes start station for super transition, station
for full super, percent of full super, station for end full super, and station for
ending the super transition back to normal crown. In SurvCE, each superelevation
data set for each curve would be entered as a “line” of superelevation data in the
“.sup” file.

p378
If we had two curves, both with superelevation, then we would do two Adds using
this dialog. Let’s say, for simplicity, that we have a road with a 2% “normal
crown” which has one curve to the left followed by one curve to the right, with the
following information:

Curve 1 Curve 2
Start Super Pivot Sta: 100 Sta: 2200
Full Super Sta: 600 Sta: 2500
Full Super %: 3% Left 4% Right
End Super: Sta: 1400 Sta: 3500
End Super Pivot: Sta: 1900 Sta: 3800

The first curve to the left goes through three stages as it pivots into full super: (1)
the right side pivots to “flat”, (2) the right side pivots to “reverse crown”, where
the slope is the same across the template and (3) both the right and left sides pivot
from the hinge point (centerline) into full super. All of these key pivot points are
entered in the superelevation dialog.

p379
You enter all these key stations (begin, flat outside lane, reverse crown, full super)
both going up to full super and transitioning back down to normal crown.
Recognizing that the normal crown of -2% transitions from station 100 through a
slope of 5%, the transition is 1% per 100 feet, assuming an even rate of transition.
Therefore, a “flat” outside slope occurs at station 300, reverse crown at station 500
and full super at station 600, as shown. You will need to compute these stations in
advance. These intermediate stations are entered in the superelevation dialog to
allow for different rates of transition from normal crown to flat to reverse crown to
full super. Normally, the rates of transition are consistent. Note that super left or
right is always entered as a positive percent slope — the road centerline curve
direction will control the direction of pivot. You are now ready to click Add and
enter in Curve 1.

p380
When you click OK, the first line of the superelevation dialog is filled in. Curve 1
is complete. Next, we enter Curve 2 as follows, using similar logic.

When OK is clicked, the two curves are complete and the summary dialog
appears. There is one line (or row) for each curve.

Note: If any of the columns are too narrow to display all the text, you can

p381
 “grip” the vertical line separating columns, much like in programs such as
Excel, and make the column wider.

The superelevation file is one of the optional “roading” or “design” files in Stake
Slope, Stake Road and Elevation Difference . After a superelevation file has
been entered and saved, it will appear as the default superelevation file in all of
these commands, unless removed from the design file list by the user.

Input-Edit Template Series

SurvCE allows for two types of transitioning: (1) a single template can transition
by being “acted upon” by template transition files (made in Carlson Roads,
Topsite, Leica Site Manager or Carlson Civil) and superelevation files, or (2) a
template series file can transition between several templates sharing identical IDs,
but having different slopes and widths between ID points within the templates.

You can load an existing TDS template series file, in the RD5 format, by clicking
Load, then clicking the down arrow for Type of File, and selecting TDS format.
TDS templates always have IDs and the same number of template points per cross
section, so once imported, they behave ex actly like SurvCE-defined templates.
Using the Draw Template option, any particular template in a template series file
can be selected and displayed as shown:

p382
The Template Series approach can even be used to transition from normal crown
to superelevation, avoiding the need to use superelevation files. The Template
Series approach is commonly used to expand the width of a lane to accommodate,
for example, a passing lane. Since template IDs must match, if a “special slope”
lane “appears” for a certain station range, then the Template Series approach can
still be used as long as you add the ex tra ID point (e.g. EP2) to the normal
template, perhaps making that point 0.001 units in dimension initially. In the
second, transitional template, the EP2 lane can have the full width of 3.5 meters or
12 feet or whatever applies. If the transition starts at station 500 and ends at
station 600, EP2, will be 1.75 meters or 6 feet or exactly half the full dimension at
station 550.

Starting with the demo.tpl file, with a 10’ lane to ID “EP” followed by a 6’
shoulder lane to ID “SH”, you can make another template called Road.tpl, with a
12’ lane to “EP” and an 8’ shoulder to “SH”. Note how we have made sure to use
the same ID for the road lane (“EP”) and the shoulder lane (“SH”).

p383
If the demo.tpl is used from station 0 to 500, and the Road.tpl is used from 600 to
the end of the project at station 1000, then the entry process for a Template Series
is as follows:

Click Add and you will obtain the next dialog.

p384
Choose Select File and pick the first template (demo.tpl). Click OK. Back in the
main dialog, click Add again and specify the ending station for demo.tpl as station
500. Then click Add again and specify the first station for Road.tpl as station 600.
You do not need to specify an end station, as Road.tpl will be used for the
remainder of the project.

You then Save the Template Series File. When running Stake Road, Stake Slope
p385
or Elevation Difference by Roading Design Files and recalling a template file,
you now have the option to recall a Template Series File and process a set of
transitioning templates.

Stake Slope
The Stake Slope command calculates and stakes out the location of the “catch
point” where fill slopes or cut slopes contact the original ground. The command
will also set offset stakes to the catch point and will produce a report of the slope
stake information. The location of the slope stake is dependent on the position of
the “pivot” point where the slope begins and on the slope itself (eg. 2:1, 3:1, 4:1,
etc.). Slope stakes are typically used in highway work to locate the top of slope or
top of cut. If design file information is available for the road template and profile,
then the slope stake routine will calculate distance and offset information for all
“break points” on the template from the slope stake itself back to the centerline.
This also applies to slope staking conducted by section files, and descriptions
associated with the break points on templates and/or sections are identified by
name in the slope stake report.

Note: Slope Staking can be conducted within the Stake Slope command from the
fixed "pivot point" of the template, the end-points of cross sections, or the
centerline points of a horizontal and vertical alignment (as for a ditch). Slope
staking, however, can also be conducted directly within the command Stake Road
p386
from any picked pivot point on the template or cross section. One of the
advantages of the Stake Slope command is the ability to obtain catch point
information "real-time" using the "non-interval" method of walking parallel to
centerline. Stake Slope will also automatically detect the ditch pivot point in cut
scenarios using templates defined by Carlson Civil and Carlson Roads. Plus Stake
Slope knows which side of the centerline you are on and slopes stakes
automatically to that side. The main advantage of Stake Road is the ability to
slope stake from any picked point going either Left or Right as specified, for
"staged" or partial roadwork design, or for finding catch points towards the interior
of the template (eg. central median). Stake Road also has a cross section view
option (within the Helmut Help). All slope staking is improved if the instruction to
the user is In-Out from centerline and Forward-Back along the axis of the
centerline. For this reason, it is best to set the View Point within FILE, Configure
to In-Out and Left-Right, but also click on "Use Centerline for Reference Object
".

There are “rules” for slope staking. The slope stake is measured from a pivot
point, which is user-entered, or starts at the centerline itself in “point-defined”
alignments, or starts at the last template point before the cut or fills when templates
are involved, or starts at the left and right end-points of sections when using
section files. Note that in the command Stake Road (which works with both
sections and templates), slope staking can be initiated from any desired point. This
allows for slope staking of interior, central median catch points and slope staking
of any side of an eventual divided highway, being built in stages. Slope staking
can be interval based, or accomplished based on where you are standing right now,
independent of station interval.

Although office plans may predict the position of the catch points, slope staking is
necessary to accurately determine the catch points based on actual field conditions.
Slope stakes are often set at an offset to the actual catch points, since stakes at the
precise top of slope or bottom of fill are likely to be knocked out by earthmoving
activity. Furthermore, slope stakes are often marked with information on the
slopes and distances in toward centerline or in toward the building pad or other
feature. The information on the slope stake is often written in “progressive” form:
distance and slope from offset stake to slope stake, distance and slope from slope
stake to outside shoulder, distance and slope from outside shoulder to edge of
pavement, on into centerline. Thus, the slope stake, placed safely beyond the area
of construction, tells the story of the cuts and fills in toward centerline or toward
the center of the work.

Catch points for both cut and fill are shown in the typical section graphics below.

p387
See these two figures.

Note in the “cut” example above (bottom figure) how the catch point may be closer
or farther from the pivot point based on the slope of the original ground. With flat
ground at virtually the same elevation as the centerline of the road, the catch is
found approximately 15 feet from the pivot point in the base of the ditch. But with
ground sloping slightly uphill, it takes a full 30 feet or so to find the catch point.
The program helps find the catch quickly by modeling the surface of the ground
with each shot taken. Thus, by projecting the ground slope outward, the program
advises the user how far to go to find the anticipated catch point. Unless the
ground slope changes dramatically, the catch point is usually staked within just a
few tries. With GPS, the process is even more automatic, since the ground
elevation is being computed continuously as you walk toward the catch point. No
“shot” has to be taken until you are positioned right on the catch point itself. This
next figure shows a cut condition slope stake in 3D. The “catch” is located at the
top of the cut.

p388
Four Methods of Slope Staking
 User-Defined: This is the most commonly used method of slope staking.
Here, you simply enter the station, offset and elevation of the pivot point. Do
not enter a minus sign for a left offset as in –25, since the program detects
whether you are left or right of centerline. The only prerequisite is the
selection of a centerline file. Cut and fill slopes are entered in the field.
 Point-Defined Alignments: This method is often used for staking the top of
cut for a ditch, particularly a V-ditch. You can select the centerline by any of
the three classic methods of centerline file, a picked polyline on the screen, or
a sequence of points. The vertical alignment can be derived from any picked
3D polyline or from the elevations on the sequence of points, or you can
separately enter a profile. This method is useful for slope staking ex isting
flow lines, where you simply take two shots at either end, create an alignment
by point number, then set the slope stakes at the user-entered slope ratio.
 Design Files: This is the most “formal” way of slope staking, but typically
only applies to uniform, simple road, drainage ditch or levee projects where
the pivot offset positions do not vary from station to station. While all
methods require that a centerline be selected, the design file method
additionally requires, at a minimum, a template file and a profile (vertical
alignment). For more complex roads, superelevation files and template lane
width transition files may also be entered. With the exception of the
centerline, profiles and simple templates, the other files are usually created at
the office using Carlson Civil, Carlson Roads or TakeOff, and then
downloaded onto the field computer.
p389
Note: Whenever the Road Design File option is selected, templates can
be selected as a single “TPL” file, or as a series of templates organized as
a “TSF” file (Template Series File). The TSF file can be entered within
Road Utilities. If the left pavement lane of a road expanded from 10’ to
20’ for a passing lane, from station 1100 to 1200, you can create two
templates, Road1 with the 10’ lane and Road2 with the 20’ lane. Then if
you create the Template Series File shown below, the program will
auto-calculate a 15’ left pavement width at station 1150. This same
feature can be accomplished by using one template and applying a
Template Transition File, which instructs on the changing dimensions of
portions of a single template. Unlike the Template Series File, the
alternate Template Transition File can only be created at the office using
Carlson Civil, Carlson Roads or Carlson TakeOff.

One advantage of the design files method is that since each template
point has an “ID”, the slope stake report will include information to
locate all ID’d template points from the slope stake back in to the
centerline. In this way, the entire road can be built from the information
marked on the slope stake, which is placed outside the construction area
at a user-specified (eg. 5’) offset to the actual catch point.

A report might appear as follows:

p390
 HDIST VDIST SLOPE
OFFSET to CATCH 5.02 -0.17 CUT 3.4%, 29.5:1
CATCH to PIVOT 32.20 16.10 FILL 50.0%, 2.0:1
PIVOT to SHLDR 14.00 33 FILL 16.7%, 6.0:1
SHLDR to EOP 12.00 0.48 FILL 4.0%, 25:1
EOP to CL 12.00 0.24 FILL 2.0%, 50:1

Within the program itself, the report might appear as shown here:

Progressive or Total: The above report is sometimes referred to as a

“progressive” report, since it lists the incremental information from each
break point to the next, going in toward the centerline. In some areas, the
stake is referred to as a “story stake” or “progressive story stake”,
because it tells the whole story of the gradework. The program is able to
identify the names of the break points (eg. “SHLDR” and “EOP”)
because the templates used by the program must have pre-defined IDs for
all break points. Specifically with office-defined templates where cut
conditions can have downslopes for ditches followed by upslopes, the
program will auto-detect whether to pivot into fill or to create a cut
condition, and pivot from the ditch line. You can also click the "Total"
option and get offset distances to all break points as totals measured from
the offset stake. In either case, the report is issued only if you stake the
p391
 offset point to the catch.

 Section Files: Section files can be used to identify the pivot points left and
right and minimize fieldwork. Consider the sections shown below.

Shown are stations 0+20 and 0+40, with the pivot points for slope staking
identified on station 0+40. For the section approach to work, the
left-most point in the cross section must be the left pivot, and similarly,
the right-most point in the cross section must be the right pivot point.
The section should only be entered from pivot left to pivot right (the
“designed” catch points should be dropped). But since the interior
section points have no bearing on the slope staking, they can be om itted,
too. So in the case of station 0+40, a 2-point cross section could be
entered, consisting of pivot left and pivot right. That 2-point section is
also shown in the graphic above. It is just as effective for slope staking
as a section containing all the break points between pivots. The one
exception is if you have entered descriptions for your section points, you
can obtain a progressive slope stake report, just as with the templates.
Note that if descriptions do not exist, the report leaves them out.
Section-based slope staking requires selection of a centerline file and
field-entry of the cut and fill slopes.

Section-based slope staking is useful when the pivot points for stakeout
vary unpredictably and don’t conform to a fixed template. Section-based
slope staking has 2 advantages. First, all sections can be entered in the
office as 2-point sections (left and right pivot), minimizing field
paperwork and reference material. Secondly, odd stations can be staked
out (eg. station 0+27.5), since the pivot points can be straight-line

p392
 interpolated by the program.

Note: Section files can be used for slope staking within the command
Stake Road . In this routine, you can choose sections or templates to
stake, and you can pick any point to slope stake from —so any point on
the section can become the pivot point. The advantage of slope staking
by section file within Stake Road is that you can pick any point (greater
flexibility). The advantage of slope staking by section file within the
Stake Slope routine is that it automatically uses the left and right end
points of the section as pivot points, which means less screen picks are
involved (greater speed).

Section files may be entered in Road Utilities, or in an external program

such as Carlson Civil, Roads or TakeOff.

Choosing the Slope Staking Method

When Slope Staking is selected, you are presented with a Definition Method
screen, where you choose among the 4 methods of Slope Staking: User-Defined,
Point-Defined Alignments, Design Files or Section Files. The application of these
methods is discussed above.

 Stake Station Interval: When clicked on, your slope stake target is always a
fixed point. It is the slope stake at the specified station in the input dialog in
all 4 methods. But if clicked off, the slope stake target point moves
p393
 forward/back station as you move. In User-Defined, the pivot offset and
elevation is used regardless of station position. In the other methods, the pivot
elevation is recalculated dynamically as you move based on the known
information (3D points, profile, sections).
 Round Station: This option applies only if you turn off “Stake Station
Interval” and move to “fluid” slope staking. If you “round” to an interval,
such as 5, then the elevation to stake from is calculated to the rounded station
value, as is the up-down station position for the offset. Rounding only applies
to the stored report—the target still moves fluidly as you walk forward or back
parallel to the alignment.
 Load Road Net File/Select Road Element: Carlson Civil 2008 and Carlson
Roads 2008 have the option to output an "RNF" file, or "Road Net File", from
the RoadNet feature. This file contains every centerline, cul-de-sac and road
intersection "curve return" treatment for an entire road network. For ex ample,
a complete subdivision road system can be output as a single RNF file, and
then SurvCE can stakeout any element of the RoadNet file that is loaded.
Since the RNF file contains both templates and final sections, the Load
RoadNet File option is accessible when slope staking by Design Files and
Section Files. If you select, "Load RoadNet File", it merely loads the files,
announces "Process Done" and all road files are placed into a temporary
directory. You then need to click "Select RoadNet Element" to choose the
element of interest. The three choices are centerlines, cul-de-sacs and the
curve returns at intersections. For centerlines, the Center ID of the design
template (if that method is used) is applied to the horizontal alignment. Keep
in mind that for cul-de-sacs and curve-returns, the position of the horizontal
alignment is set in RoadNet within Carlson Civil and Carlson Roads, and
typically is set to the edge-of-pavement alignment position. Slope staking will
therefore use just the outer part of the template, for ex ample, from EP ID
outward, to find that pivot point. If you re-load the same RoadNet File, the
program warns you that the prior temprorary files will be erased and new ones
created. This is done in case you actually modified a profile or other files in
the temporary files, in which case you should use SaveAs in the appropriate
command to preserve the changes in a new file name. When you Select
RoadNet Element after loading an "RNF" file, you can highlight any element
to stake, which then appear "dashed" when highlighted:

p394
When you click out of the opening dialog that offers the 4 methods of Slope
Staking, you obtain additional input screens.

 User-Entered Dialog: If the User-Entered method is selected, you are first

prompted for a centerline, and a dialog appears.

p395
 At each station, you can enter a specific pivot offset, pivot elevation and the
cut and fill slope ratio that governs. Slope ratios can be entered as percent as
well, is "Display As Ratio" is clicked off. Pivot offsets should be entered as
positive numbers even left of centerline, since the program will detect which
side of centerline you are on from the first total station or GPS reading. The
program will take the absolute value of the pivot offset entry, in any case. You
can obtain the position to stake from “Read Instrument”, which calculates the
station, offset and pivot elevation from a measured position. Or you can enter
a point number to obtain a station, offset and pivot elevation.
 Point-Defined Alignment Dialog: The selection of the Point-Defined method
leads to the classic alignment selection screen, familiar to users of Offset
Stakeout and Stake Centerline.

p396
Though this is the classic use of the Point-Defined option (using points), slope
staking can be conducted from a single centerline and single profile or from a
picked 3D polyline. Points can be selected by number or picked directly off
the screen.

When a new horizontal alignment is selected by 3D polyline or point method,

the program will ask if you wish to overwrite any existing vertical alignment
p397
 selection. The typical answer is yes—you want it for both, and you are ready
to stake any station at any interval based on user-entered slopes. Think of
points 6 to 7 as the flow line of a ditch with steep side slopes, and the goal is
to lay the slopes back at 2:1 —a perfect application for Point-Defined Slope
Staking.
 Design File Dialog: If you select Design Files, a dialog appears.

Centerlines, profiles and templates can be made using SurvCE. In fact,

centerlines and profiles can be imported from a variety of file formats using
the commands within Road Utilities. Note that templates can be either single
template “.tpl” files or multiple templates with transitions in a Template Series
“.tsf” file. If the roads have superelevation, the “super” files can be made in
Road Utilities. If template transition files are to be used for lane changes, then
this file type must be made using external software such as Carlson Civil or
Carlson Roads. Note that “sets” of Roading Files can be saved and loaded
using the buttons at the bottom of the screen. The Settings icon at the top of
the screen, to the left of the checkmark, allows you to place the profile grade
at an offset to centerline, such as at the inside edge-of-pavement for divided
highways, as shown below:

p398
 Section File Dialog: If Section Files are selected, a dialog appears.

The Section file (which has an “sct” file extension) can be entered in Road
Utilities or imported from the LandXML format using Section File
Conversion, also in Road Utilities. Note that for all roading design files, there
is no requirement that starting and ending stations (chainage) m atch. All that
is necessary is that they have a station range in comm on (in the above case,
p399
 10+00 through 20+00 is common to all files). Roading File sets (as in the
above Boneta files) can also be saved to a named set and then re-loaded later
for convenience. With cross sections, the profile is not required, but including
the profile will lead to more accurate slope staking between known cross
sections, such as at high and low points in the road.

Setting the Station and Interval for Stakeout

The next screen sets the station to stakeout and the interval and will appear in some
form in all cases except section and design files slope staking with interval turned
off. In effect, there are 8 ways of going into Slope Staking: 4 methods times 2
interval options (on=fixed station/off=fluid, real-time). You also have 3 more
methods if you include the Stake Road routine which offers Slope Staking by
Section, Template or Sections Cut from DTM, all fixed station.

The station to stake can also be read from the GPS or total station measurement,
allowing you to slope stake "where you are". You can also get the station by
entering a point number, in which case it projects the point onto the centerline to
determine the station. In the non-interval method, the above screen does not
appear. You slope stake wherever you are all the time, and are freed of the
constraints of staking a specified station.

The User-Defined and Point-Defined Alignment methods have their own pair of
“follow-up” screens for the location to stake.

p400
For flow line or V-ditch staking, a 0 pivot offset would be entered from the
point-defined alignment. If the ditch were a trapezoidal ditch with a 2 meter
bottom width, and the alignment was the centerline, each side of the ditch could be
slope staked using a pivot offset of 1 (1/2 of the ditch width from center to pivot
point).

Both the Road Design Files and Section Files methods go straight to the navigation
(stakeout) screens if no interval is selected (Stake Station Interval turned off). The
pivot offset is built into these methods based on the “rules” outlined earlier -- you
stake from the pivot to cut or fill in templates, and from the ex treme left and right
points of cross sections. With interval turned off, slope staking by "User-Entered"
method simply asks for the pivot offset and elevation at the current location, and
slope staking by point-defined alignment asks only for pivot offset, obtaining the
elevation from the vertical alignment.

Slope staking cannot occur outside the station range of the horizontal alignment. If
your horizontal alignment runs from station 0 to 308, you can ’t stake station -10,
either by interval method (naming the station) or by the non-interval, fluid
“where-you-are” method.

p401
In live stakeout mode, you will get “Off Centerline” when beyond the range of the
horizontal alignment.

All paths lead on to the navigation or stakeout (som e call it “set out”) screen.

The Navigation (Stakeout) Screen

When configured for GPS, the navigation screen then appears.

Note that because the GPS reads continuously and models the ground surface, the
program calculates immediately where the catch point (the circle with the X) is
located. You simply walk right to it. If the ground goes uphill or downhill as you
approach the point, then the X will move closer or move away, until you are right
on it.
As you get closer to the point (within the stake tolerance distance) the program will
present a bullseye screen.

p402
When you are satisfied with the accuracy of the slope stake position, you then
touch S for Store (or press Enter to take the shot). In this case, its time to drive the
stake.

Interval and Non-Interval Methods Impact Stakeout Screen

The stakeout screens above are for the interval method. In the non-interval, “fluid”
slope staking, where you can drive the stake anywhere, the “Forward-Back”
portion of the screen becomes vertical “Current Fill” or "Current Cut". In this
fluid stake-out mode, you simply move in or out from the centerline to set the
slope stake—there is no correct or incorrect forward or back station. So the
program instead reports the vertical up to the fill slope above you or down to the
cut below you.

p403
If you are moving out to the catch point along the ground, you would get a report
of “CrtF 1.25” or some such number, and the “Current Fill” amount to the ground
would decrease as you approach the catch. The actual stakeout screen would
appear as shown below. Note that some surveyors will watch the lower line (1.6:1
for 3.65) and just keep moving out until they see 2:1 (or the desired slope) and
drive the stake. Others will watch the “CrtF” value decrease to 0 and drive the
stake, or watch “OUT” decrease to 0.

Storing the Slope Stake and Offset Stake Points

When S for Store is pressed, you may store the actual slope stake point. Y ou can
also store a first offset point (since the slope stake itself can be removed by
construction). The slope stake information is typically written on the first offset
stake. Then you can also stake a second offset point, to obtain “line” to reset the
slope stake if it is knocked out. The first and second offset stakes provide a
direction back to the slope stake. When the slope stake is set, the program prompts
for setting the first offset stake. When the first offset stake is set, the program
prompts for setting the second offset stake. Both offset stakes are optional.

p404
The storage of the slope stake points is an option turned on by clicking “Store
Point to CRD File”. With this clicked off, you can simply slope stake and avoid
storing any points. The Description for the point will default to the station and
offset. Slope Staking will not respond to settings in Configure Reading for the
Height/Description prompt screen. If you are using a named “Slope Stake File”
(set in File, Job Settings, Stake tab, Cutsheets option), you can still control at the
point of staking whether you choose to append data to the file by clicking on or off
“Store Data to Report File”.

p405
Note that there are two options for the slope stake report: Elevation and Offset.
The standard option is the Elevation method. This assumes you were able to
survey the actual slope stake point with reasonable accuracy, and it reports the
actual stake to pivot point results. If you were staking a 2:1 cut slope, it reports
your actual slope (as 1.997:1 in this case), and you can choose to round the result
and write "Cut 2:1, 9.25 V, 18.48 H" on the stake. But if at the catch point there
are boulders in the way, you can walk out and away from centerline in cut and in
toward centerline in fill, and drive the stake where you can. In this case, you
would choose the Offset method. In the Offset example above, we had to walk past

p406
the catch point about 2 units (from 36.50 to 38.56). We drive the stake, and note
that the catch is at 956.03 rather than 955.01, so we measure up 1.02 on the stake,
and draw a horizontal line there as the catch point. An extra line appears in the
report that tells us to write "Cut 2:1, 10.28 V, 20.56 H" on the stake. In cases of
fill where there are obstructions, walk into centerline so when you drive the stake,
you can mark where the fill intersects the stake. Note that this same level of
reporting occurs with "non-interval" staking, where you get real-time cut and fill at
any point, also allowing you to drive the stake to avoid obstructions.

When Enter or OK is pressed, you are prompted for whether to stake the first
offset stake.

If you are doing “User-Defined” or “Point-Defined Alignment” methods, you are

shown the horizontal distance and vertical fill or cut difference to the pivot point,
which can be written on the Slope Stake. Additional break-point information
appears if you are using the “Design File” or “Section File” method. If you trust
that the Slope Stake will not be knocked out, then you are done —no need to set an
offset stake.

Pressing OK leads to the prompt to set the first offset stake. If you choose to set
the first offset stake, then you can set the offset distance.

p407
Press OK and then you are in a standard stakeout screen. The offset point is a
fixed location and the stakeout procedure is sim ilar to point stakeout. This leads to
a report of information that can be written on the Slope Stake. Finally, you will be
prompted for staking out a second Slope Stake, to establish “line.” After the first
offset stake is set, and before the prompt for the optional second offset stake, a
summary screen will appear. If you have used the Road Design File or Section
File methods, you will be presented with every break point into centerline.

p408
Finally, you will be prompted for staking out a second Slope Stake, a more rarely
used option whose purpose is to establish “line” (the direction) from the first offset
stake to the slope stake itself. This permits accurate replacement of the slope
stake when it is knocked out by construction activity.

Note : When using Road Design or Section Files in Slope Staking, setting the
first offset point is the recommended procedure, as it produces the full report,
referenced to cross section and template IDs, for all break points all the way
into the centerline point.

Procedure for Slope Staking with Total Stations

The procedure is nearly identical for Total Stations, except that you must press R
for Read (or Enter) to take shots and allow the program to begin calculating the
Slope Stake position. Unlike the GPS, SurvCE cannot predict the location of the
target slope stake point until at least one measurement is taken.

p409
Note: When using either GPS or total stations for slope staking, you can
obtain more graphics and less screen information by pressing the down arrow
key. It literally has the effect of bringing the graphic screen down (see below).
Pressing the up arrow key will pull the screen back up and show the full text.
This works in all modes except GPS Simulation, where the up arrow moves
the cursor faster, down arrow slower.

p410
The Slope Stake Report and Writing on the Slope Stake
Surveyors doing slope staking have the option to write the information on the stake
as each is surveyed, or to come back at a later time, refer to the slope stake report,
and write on all the stakes after the surveying is complete. The slope stake report
file is a comma-separated “.txt” file, configured in Job Settings, Stake, Cutsheets
, which might appear as follows if formatted in Excel or another spreadsheet form:

#Des Sta Des Off Des Elv Staked Sta Staked Off Staked Elv Desc
1+00.000 L33.849 998.075 0+99.966 L33.453 998.075 Catch
Point
1+00.000 L38.849 ------ 1+00.019 L38.866 998.15 First
Offset
Point

Here is another example as viewed in the Edit mode within Job Settings, Stake,
Cutsheets, Edit Slope Stake.

The columns are configurable with the Slope Stake formatting in Job Settings.
Shown above is a "total" report (as opposed to "progressive"). No offset stake was
set. The template involved was flat from centerline for 12', then had a 2:1 slope
for 6' into a ditch point (ID="BD" for "base of ditch). This cut downslope
condition was created within an office-entered template using Carlson Civil or

p411
Carlson Roads, and SurvCE automatically detected the cut condition and used the
ditch points as pivot points, offset 18 with elevations 945.75 at station 6+00 and
946.50 at station 6+50. Some survey teams use one person to set the slope stakes
and another to enter data on the stakes, which is easily done using the stored slope
stake report above.

Store Sections
This function collects as-built cross sections of roads or other alignm ents and
stores them optionally as points, as cross sections or as an ASCII file organized by
station. The station and offset can be stored into the description field of the points.
The station itself can be set to automatically round to the nearest 5, 10 or other
station interval (eg. a shot at 177+98.23 would round to 180+00 if a rounding of 5
or 10 is used). The information can be stored into a “.tx t” ASCII file in addition to
the points themselves, if "Store Comma Separated File" is turned on, and if point
storage is turned on, you can save a ".not" file of the station and offset. Y ou can
save the cross section data to a cross section file in .SCT or RAW/G eodimeter
format. Store Sections can also be used simply to verify your current station and
offset as you move along a centerline using GPS or taking total station shots.

This routine is often combined with office software to check as-built road cross
sections against desired grade and to calculate quantities for payment. The field
crew begins by taking shots along each desired cross section, as shown in this
figure.

If, for example, four sets of cross sections were taken from station 0+75 to 1+50,
p412
the points would appear as shown in the plan view below, and the 3D view shown
below that. There is an option to turn off point number storing, in which case the
shots can still be stored to a cross section (.sct) file and report file (.tx t).

Here, below, we see the 3D view of this area.

p413
The command begins with a screen where you select the method for defining a
centerline.

p414
The next screen allows you to choose whether or not to store a file summarizing
cross section data. Because the SCT method requires that you choose an
alignment, the option for no alignment (“None”) only applies to the
Raw/Geodimeter method, in which case a named file is required. Ex cept for this
case of option “None”, the Section output file is optional because the information
will be stored with the points. When you click Select File, you have two file type
options when using a horizontal alignment.

The Raw file format is a design that is compatible with the old Geodimeter section
file format, and includes special prompting for job type. It is discussed in detail
below (see the discussion of “None” as centerline option). It leads to a different
set of screen options than the SCT format.

Unless you are looking for Geodimeter file format compatibility, you should
consider storing a section output file in the “.SCT” format, since it can be
converted, using Road Utilities, to LandXML form and then imported to several
different roading software packages for plotting and computation of volumes. The
“.SCT” section files can also be used directly for volume calculations with Carlson
Roads, Leica Site Manager, Topcon Topsite and Carlson Civil. You can also set
the rounding—here, a rounding of 10 units (feet or meters) has been selected. The
station and offset can also be stored as the point description and as a note file, if
the lower options are clicked on.

p415
Note that the rounding is fully automatic. If you choose a 5-unit rounding, and are
targeting station 0+75, but take a shot at 0+77.93, it will round up to 0+80.

Before collecting the cross sections, it is important to click X-SCT Settings near
the top of the dialog, and set the stations you wish to capture. This way, if the
station rounds, per the above screen, to a station that doesn ’t exist in your list, you
are warned before proceeding with storing. This list also includes the left and right
“tolerances” for the offsets, which will lead to warnings if you exceed that distance
from centerline. If you set a tighter “Station Tolerance” in X-SCT Settings (option
Edit) than the “Rounding” Tolerance, you will be warned even though the
rounding is correct. In the screen shown below, station 16+70.000 has been
added as a special station. Clicking the first line (10+00.000-23+00.000) allows
you to set the standard interval, and the additional stations in the list would be for
special stations in addition to the standard interval.

p416
The below, smaller dialog appears when you tap Add Odd Stations, shown in the
above figure.

With the first line highlighted, selecting Edit leads to the settings options for the
full range of stations.

p417
With an interval set of 50, and Start/End Stations turned on, the program will only
expect you to capture stations at 50 units intervals starting at 10+00 through to
23+00, but also including 10+11.57 and 16+70 in this case. The Offset from
alignment to X-Section option lets you, in effect, use an alternate, parallel
centerline at a left (negative) or right offset from the main centerline. Unless the
Raw/Geodimeter method is used, a station “warning” screen is used if the rounded
station is not in the list or pre-selected stations. A capture of station 1075 would
round to 1080, but since 1080 is not in “the list”, you will be warned before
storing. A station of 1667 would round to 1670, which is in the list, leading to no
warning screen. Since the rounding was set to 10 in this ex ample, data collected at
45 to 55 would round to 50 (station 1053 would not round up to 1055), and
therefore only “even 10” stations will be collected to begin with. So the additional
“Station Tolerance”, which rounds the collected station data to the listed stations,
will not activate.

When OK (green check mark) is clicked from the Store Sections dialog, the
program immediately proceeds to a point collection mode, with continuous
presentation of station and offset (if running GPS or robotic total stations).

p418
 Storing Points using GPS: There are two methods for storing points in
real-time GPS mode: Press the S icon at right (or pick Alt S) or simply press
Enter. The “binoculars” icon will bring up the Monitor/Skyplot dialog. You
can survey as many cross sections as desired within the command. Unlike in
Slope Staking, Store Sections will respond to the setting for Hgt/Description
prompt on save, found in Configure Reading, allowing you to arrow key to
desired descriptions or change your rod height after taking the shot. Option C
goes to the Configure Reading directly from the data gathering screen. When
done, simply select the Menu button, and you are returned to the Road menu.
When exiting by pressing Menu, if you have opted to store to an SCT file, you
will be prompted to store the cross section information in SCT form.
 Storing Points using Total Stations : After confirming the occupied station
and backsight, as with all total station work, proceed through the sam e options
above until you reach the store point dialog. In the ex ample below, our
centerline is metric, starting at station 0+000.

p419
Here, your options are R for read, followed by S for Store, or simply Enter to
Read and Store. The backsight icon can be pressed to set a new occupied
point or backsight point. Note that we have a very “busy” screen of points. If
you just want to see your setup, backsight and last point that was measured,
press Alt F. This produces the screen below. You will stay in this mode until
you press Alt F again and toggle back to the presentation of all points.

p420
If a shot is taken that doesn’t round to a station in the list of “approved” cross
section stations (X-SCT Settings), then a warning screen appears. In the warning
dialog shown below, the tolerance has been exceeded on two accounts. We round
to 0+80, which is not in the list, and our offset is 186.891 left, which ex ceeds our
anticipated maximum offsets of 100 left and right.

Points Store with Station/Offset Descriptions, as shown below:

29 0+125 L23.58

30 0+150 L33.24

31 0+150 L19.39

32 0+150 R1.98

33 0+150 R18.12

The comma-separated file would appear as follows if presented in a tab-delimited

form:

#Point Station Offset Elevation Description

ID

p421
29 0+125 Left 23.5759 991.2901 0+125 L23.58

30 0+150 Left 33.2363 989.9193 0+150 L33.24

31 0+150 Left 19.3923 996.8921 0+150 L19.39

32 0+150 Right 1.9816 998.2340 0+150 R1.98

33 0+150 Right 997.0731 0+150 R18.12

18.1201

When you exit the routine by clicking Menu from the data gathering screen, and
have Store SCT file turned on, you will be asked if you want to “process” or add
the last shots you collected to the named SCT file. You have the choice to
“Process” (use the data) or “Discard”.

The program will even keep the section data “on file”, so that if you Cancel the
above screen, and re-enter Store Sections, you will be prompted again whether to
save (process) or discard the cross section data collected earlier.

Options When Storing in Raw/Geodimeter Format

Different options present themselves when the Raw/G eodimeter Format, or File
Type, is chosen.

p422
When Raw/Geodimeter is selected, a distinct set of screens are obtained. This
particular format was adapted for highway departments and survey companies that
had built cross sectioning practices around the G eodimeter format. This method
requires that you enter the station (chainage) being surveyed, and only uses the
centerline position to advise you on your station and offset. A horizontal
alignment is not required. The program detects the selection of this format, and
before proceeding, opens with a starting screen where job-based information is
entered.

p423
There are pre-set job categories and tasks, which save into defined number
categories in the old Geodimeter raw file format. Whereas the SCT method
recognizes the station you are on and automatically rounds to it when you are
within tolerance, the Raw/Geodimeter method requires that you click the Station
button, and set your target station for collection of cross section data.

p424
Then you proceed from the current location to the target station. In fact, although
the points that are stored may contain station and offset descriptions, the data
stored to the raw file pays no attention to the centerline information. The station
and offset on the screen act only as a check on your current location. The
direction of taking the sections, (L to R or R to L), is important and is set by
specifying “Chainage Direction”. Unlike with the SCT format method, pressing
Menu to exit does not store the data, but instead the data is automatically stored as

p425
you go, as a series of 37 (N), 38 (E) and 39 (Z) record types (Geodimeter format),
with header line records, as shown below:

50=XSEC1
54=104 North
0=As-Builts 240-300
53=VF
90=2
97=0
51=3-28-2004
56=65.0
74=30.10
55=3
96=2
6=2.100
80=280.000
91=1
37=5105.857
38=5069.091
39=991.905
37=5104.091
38=5074.931
39=990.724

Starting left to right, the data points begin with a 91=1 record. A right to left
section would begin with 91=2. When you “cross 0” or are on the centerline or
baseline, you click the CL/BL button which sets a 92=1 record for centerline and
92=2 for baseline, and the next shot is the centerline/baseline shot. If you select
the “-0.00” button, this indicates whether the next shot is a tie-in (catch) or
extension beyond the tie-in. This sets a 93=1 record for the catch and 93=2 for the
extension prior to the subsequent coordinate record. In effect, you tell the
program where the centerline or baseline is by shooting that point. Then the
station and offsets of the shots for that cross section are determined relative to that
center-of-alignment shot. It does not use a horizontal alignment combined with
rounding to determine the station and offset of the shots (like the SCT method
does). You tell it the station, the direction of measurement (left to right or vice
versa) and you tell it which one is the center shot. This is why the
Raw/Geodimeter method is the only method that works with no centerline (the
“None” option). For each section, you tell it the station and center shot, and all
other measurements are used to determine the left and right offsets relative to the
center shot. If the L to R method was used, shots before the center shot are on the
left, for example, and their offset is determined by the inversed distance to the
p426
center shot. The centerline file or other form of horizontal alignment, if selected,
is academic and only used to advise you on your current station and offset. The
CHK button will allow checking into known points to be sure that tight coordinate
control is maintained. N moves onto the next station as defined by the interval set
using the Sta button.

Note: The .SCT file method is the standard Store Sections method. The
RAW/Geodimeter method is a flexible routine designed to adapt to customers
who have built their cross section processing systems around the G eodimeter
raw file format.

Stake Road
Stake Road is one of four major commands used in highway work. This
command is designed to stakeout specific stations and offsets along a centerline.
For example, if your goal is to stakeout the break points at station 87+80 on a
given road centerline, you would use Stake Road. Stake Road, therefore, is used
primarily to lay out road surfaces for construction. Stake Road is typically used to
set cut and fill stakes or “blue tops” at specific stations and offsets. The elevation
used to determine the cut or fill at each offset is derived from either design files
(the template interacting with the profile and centerline) or from cross sections or
from sections that are “cut” from alignments. At any specific station, you will be
guided to the desired offset and will get a cut or fill. By contrast, if the goal were
to simply set random cut and fill stakes along an alignment, at no particular station
or offset, then the command Elevation Difference would be used. If the goal is to
stake out the “catch” in cut and fill, where cut slopes and fill slopes meet ex isting
ground, then Stake Slope would be used. However, you can also Slope Stake
within Stake Road. The fourth, major highway-oriented feature is Store Sections,
which is used to gather “as-built” information on a road. In this command, you
take cross sections of data points along the road, at random or specific stations. In
summary, Stake Slope starts the cut and fill work, Stake Road directs the precise
roadbed work and fine grading, Elevation Difference acts as a quick grade check,
and Store Sections produces the final confirmation of the as-built road for
payment and certification. It is highly recommended for all road stakeout that you
set on "Use CL for Reference Object" within Configure, View Point tab.

Defining the Road

The first dialog that comes up when you select Stake Road is where you define the
road by selecting one of the following options.

p427
 Design Files: In Carlson SurvCE, design files include templates, centerline,
profile and optionally, superelevation and template transition files. If you wish
to “clear” a file such as a superelevation file, just click it and choose Cancel.
The definitions for each of these files is covered in their own sections of this
manual. Design files are recommended for subdivision streets, access roads
and simpler highway designs.
 Section Files: Sections are made up of simple offsets and elevations that can
have descriptions such as “EOP”, “DL” or “SH” and must be accompanied by
a horizontal alignment file (centerline). Every cross section is a “snapshot” of
the template at a given station. SurvCE supports using multiple surfaces
simultaneously in Stake Road by using multiple section files or by extracting
the section for each surface when all surfaces are within a single file. Each
surface can exist on its own layer with its own color for easy identification
while in the Stake Road dialog. For complex designs, with non-conforming
intersections, transition lanes, special ditches, etc., it is recommended to use
cross section data if available.
 Cut Section from Alignments: Provides the ability to extract cross sections
directly from 3D polylines that exist within SurvCE. The first thing you need
to define is the horizontal and vertical alignment files. These form the basis
for cutting the sections and determining left and right offsets from the
horizontal alignment or centerline. The centerline-defining screen is similar to
the screens found in Stakeout Line and other commands.

p428
This just starts the process. With both horizontal and vertical alignments
defined, click OK. You will then be asked to define a template point
alignment (TPA) file. In this process, you must either pick or identify by
point number or file each alignment “pair” (H and V) that define an
edge-of-pavement or other feature of the sections. It takes a 3D polyline,
or a pair of horizontal and vertical files, or any mixture of points,
polylines and files, to define a single offset feature.

Click on Left Surface, for example, then Click Add. This brings up the
same screen used to define the centerline. If you have a drawing of 3D
polylines (brought in as a DXF file, for example), it is very easy to
illustrate this command by the Pick Polyline option. When chosen, you
obtain the next screen, where you can pick the EP.

p429
 Now click OK, say Yes to Overwrite vertical alignment (if the polyline is
3D), and simply OK the screen (no need to save the file as a named
alignment). This brings up the name template ID dialog.

Repeat for the outer polyline (SH, left side), then for the EP on the right
side and SH on the right side. You now have a centerline and 4 offset
alignments from which to cut sections. When you get the full contingent
of alignments defined, click Save As to save the TPA file . Now any
design offset at any station will be automatically interpolated, and normal
template/section stakeout can proceed.

 Save Roading Files: This button will save the selected set of roading files as
an RDF file for recalling later.
 Load Roading Files: This button loads all of the files previously saved to an
RDF file. The files must still be present in the original locations.

Interpolation
If descriptions are provided, “intelligent” interpolation is performed between
similar descriptions on slope transitions or widening lanes as well as vertical
curves for all methods described above.

Stake Road
p430
The next screen is the heart of the program. Here is where you select the station
and offset to stake out. You can even launch into a slope stake and then return to
stake out other template points.

 Settings: The “Additional Stake Stations” that appear in the List are set in the
lower portion of the dialog. The Vertical Scale option will allow for
“exaggeration” of the vertical on the template graphic. Though defaulting to
1, we can double the exaggeration by setting this to 2. In fact, an ex aggeration
of 5 works fine for the “demo.tpl” template file. The “Next Station Method”
governs how “N” for next, from the stakeout graphic screen, moves you up.
When set to “None”, N for Next will stay put until you change your entries.
But if set to “Next Offset (Left to Right)”, Next will stay on the current station
and move to the next offset. The “Next” in the dialog below, however, always
increments the current station by the next station in the List. Don’t confuse
the Next button on this screen, with the N button on the graphic screen to
follow, which is influenced by “Settings”, and moves you along after you
complete each point stakeout.
 Station: The value of the Station to Stake.
 Interval: The horizontal distance to increment the stationing when using the
Next and Previous buttons.
 Play/Pause: This button allows the user to play through the road file like
watching a drive-through movie.
 List: Depending on the settings and specified interval, “List” will list the
p431
 defined stations including intervals and critical stations.
 List Offsets: This dialog allows the user to pick from the known offsets by a
list rather than using the graphic screen below. It also allows the user to select
an optional second point of "Reference" for reporting cut/fill information
while staking. So you could stake the shoulder but also reference cut and fill to
the centerline, as an option.With this option, the selected offset and the
secondary reference offset will both be reported to.

The resulting plan view in stakeout shows cut and fill to both the
reference and the target point.

p432
 Design Offset: Any offset can be entered, even if it is not a “break point” on
the template. For example, an offset of Left 5 (-5) or Right 7.23 could be
entered. For every design offset point selected, the elevation is calculated and
presented. You can select the offset point from the offset list or literally pick
it on the screen. The touchscreen is active in the graphic, so you can select the
-12 (EP) just by picking it. Picking on the graphic screen will take you to the
“Offset List” screen for verification, where you can confirm your pick by
pressing Enter or selecting another offset.
 Stk Off(H): Horizontal offset from the design offset. If you enter an stake
offset of 2 and the design offset point was at 12, then the stake would go in at
offset 14 off of CL, but the cut/fill would refer to the elevation at the design
offset location of 12. The stake offset and Off. to CL inter-react. A stake
offset entry of 15 with a design offset of 12 left calculates to a setback of 3. If
you click the "Stake Off" button, you can choose from a variety of methods to
create an offset point, including extend current slope, apply next slope,
vertical offset, or user-defined slope.

p433
 Your offset is then computed and shown graphically:

Note that you can zoom and pan in the dialog above. Pan using your
finger or stylus.

 Stake Off Button: This button allows the user to specify the horizontal and
vertical offsets relative to the design offset. Various methods can be used for
p434
 computing the offsets based on the template or section points and their
elevations.
 Off to CL: This is the total distance that the stakeout position is from the
defined road centerline.
 Vert. Off (V): Vertical offset from the design elevation.
 Elevation: Elevation to be staked. This value is based on the combined design
elevation and vertical offset.
 Run Slope Stake: This feature allows for dynamic slope staking in the
middle of the Stake Road routine. This option is very useful for road staging,
and also for staking interior catch points like central median ditches. When
the slope stake is completed, the program returns to the main Stake Road
dialog. Any point in the template or section can be used for running in a slope
stake. You are asked to specify the desired cut-and-fill slope ratios. The slope
can be auto-defined or user defined as follows:

Define Slope by Next Section Point: This option allows you to select
the edge of the road and use the proposed design catch point for
auto-determining the slope rate.

Define Slope by Previous Section Point: This option allows you to

select the proposed design catch point and then use the nex t point toward
CL for auto-determining the slope rate.

Extend Current Slope: This option will allow you to pick the edge of

p435
 the road or catch point and use the nex t point toward CL to end the slope
between then away from CL.

User Defined Slope: Allows you to enter the slope ratio by hand for
on-the-fly slope changes.

Slopes by Template: This option extracts the slope definitions from the
template file itself.

If you click Slope Stake, you can stake by the template slope for the ditch
shown on the left side, or you can enter a user-defined slope to override
what is in the template.

 Pivot Point: This option allows the user to perform on-the-fly offsets relative
to the stakeout position.

Stakeout Views
Stake Road now allows you to navigate to the point in either plan view or cross
section view. Select the helmet icon and choose Section to see a section view and
choose Plan to return to plan view.

p436
Cutsheets
Stake Road will produce Alignment-style cutsheets that include the option to
report station and offset as well as the cut and fill to any point. These are fully
described in Stake Line/Arc, Elevation Difference and in Job Settings, Stake Tab.
If using Slope Stake within Stake Road, a slope stake report, including
"progressive" and "total" distances to all template or section points, can be output.

p437
MAP
This chapter describes the use of the MAP screen. The MAP screen commands are
available in the pull down menus or at the command prompt. The MAP screen is
useful for drawing, COGO, creating points for stakeout, and for the import and
export of DXF and shape files. No measurements are taken from the MAP screen.

Basics
The basic operations of the MAP screen are described here.

Map View Icons

The commands associated with the MAP View Icons are described in the figure
below:

p438
Executing commands in Carlson MAP
The MAP screen defaults to a pull down menu format containing approx imately 60
additional commands, virtually doubling the number of commands found in the
Menu Screens. Many of the commands in MAP offer CAD-like features such as
layer freeze and thaw, predetermined area, polyline offsets and even contouring.
One of the most important commands is Polyline to Points, which allows you to
create points for stakeout (set out) from any selected polyline. The MAP screen
also includes a command line format that can be set using Preferences. Several
MAP screen pull down menu commands involve “fly out” options, as shown
below.

p439
Alternatively, you can enter the command name, or command alias, at the
command prompt and press ENTER. In many cases, the user can start a command
while using another command. The newly started command is called a
"transparent" command. Each command from the left-toolbar menu is a
"transparent" command.

Usually, a command does not immediately execute. Carlson MAP either displays a
dialog box or displays prompts at the command line requesting more information
from the user. Typically, the user can select objects on the screen or enter data on
the command line. Many commands consist of a series of options, structured as
follows:

Cmd:Command name-Option1/oPtion2/opTion3/.../<default option>

To select one of the options, the user can enter the entire option name or only the
capitalized letters, and then press ENTER. If available, the default option always
appears in angle brackets (<>). To select the default option, just press ENTER. If
no command is active, the user can repeat the previous command by pressing
ENTER.

Panning the Screen

The user can move the drawing display (PAN) anytime. To use this command, the
user must hold down and slide a finger — or the proper pointing device — on the
screen. The drawing display is moved in the same direction as the pointing device.

p440
When you release the pointing device, the panning stops. Only the display m oves
and all objects retain their correct coordinates. Be careful to start the pan by
picking in “empty” space. If you hold down on a point, you may obtain the “Point
Details” screen, or you may see a list of points to select from (to see Point Details).

Point Details
Unless you are in the middle of a MAP screen command, you can click on a point
and see a Point Details dialog. If you tap near several points, a list of nearby
points will appear from which you can select the target point. Otherwise, you will
go straight to Point Details, and see a screen such as this:

If you are in total station mode, and actively surveying (with a setup and backsight
specified), clicking on the setup or backsight point will lead to a special graphic, as
shown here:

If you have assigned attributes to the points (e.g. Description Pole, Type-Metal,
p441
Wires-4, etc.) by use of the Feature Code capabilities, these attributes can be
reviewed. The Point Details option works both within the MAP screen (when you
are not being prompted for entering points or selecting objects) and in all graphic
screens within the Menu options. It is not as transparent and available as the
dynamic pan option, but nearly so.

Notes: All polyline vertices and all points contain x, y and z coordinates.
Also, the user can move the drawing display (PAN) anytime. To use this
command the user must hold down and move the pointer device on the screen.
The drawing display is moved in the same direction as the pointer device.
When the user release the pointer device, panning stops.

FILE
DXF File - Import DXF (IDXF)
Similar to the AutoCAD DXFIN command, will bring in polylines from AutoCAD,
Microstation and other CAD formats that can ex port data into a DXF file format.
Points, text and blocks such as symbols are not imported. However, many
software packages such as Carlson Civil (formerly SurvCADD) allow tex t to be
converted into polylines – in which case the text will import for reference.

DXF File - Export DXF (EDXF):

The EDXF command, similar to AutoCAD’s DXFOUT command, will export a
p442
DXF file. It captures not only 2D and 3D polylines and their layer names but also
exports all visible (layer on) points from the CRD file into AutoCAD “Point”
entities form (layer PNTS). All points and polylines that are visible (layers on)
would be exported, not based on the current screen zoom, but based on the full
extent of the drawing.

LandXML - CRD from Land XML (XML2CRD):

This command allows you to import points from LandXML format to SurvCE.

LandXML - CRD to Land XML (CRD2 XML):

This command allows you to export points from SurvCE to LandXML format.

LandXML - Export Chain File to LandXML (CHAINXML):

This command allows you to export all the polylines from the current drawing
created using Feature Codes, as LandXML chain objects into a LandXML file.
For example, if you made strictly 3D polylines for break lines using descriptions
such as EP for edge-of-pavement or DL for ditch line, then the 3D polylines can be
exported as a LandXML chain file and used as break lines for contouring in other
CAD programs. The combination of points and break lines can lead to optimal
contouring. Most CAD packages will import linework using the DXF file
approach, but many now recognize linework in LandXML “Chain” file format.

SHP File - Import Shape File (ISHP) (e.g. from ESRI):

This command allows you to import entities and also the associated attributes

p443
values from a SHP file. The routine displays "Import from SHP" dialog box. If the
SHP file has POINT or POINTZ type, the entities will be stored into a CRD file.
In the cases of an ARC, ARCZ, POLYGON or POLYGONZ SHP type, the entities
will be stored into the current drawing. The attribute values will be stored into a
*.vtt file. The routine requires a feature code name from the user, which will be
used to store the name and the type of the attributes from the SHP file.

SHP File - Quick Import SHP (QISHP):

This command allows you to import entities from SHP files (used by most
programs produced by ESRI). The routine displays the Import from SHP dialog
shown below. POINT or POINTZ type entities will be stored in a CRD file. ARC,
ARCZ, POLYGON, or POLYGONZ entities will be stored in the current drawing
as POLYLINES.

Current SHP: Displays the name of the SHP file that will be imported
when this command is completed. Read-only, you must use the Select
SHP button to specify the file name.
Select SHP: Tap this button to select a SHP file name.
Current Job: Available when importing coordinate data. Specify
whether to Overwrite Exiting Point Numbers or Use New Point
Numbers.
Attribute used to fill Description: Available when importing coordinate
data. Lists the attributes in the currently selected SHP file. Select which
attribute to use to fill out the Description field in the CRD file.

p444
 Layer used to store new entities : Available when importing geometry.
Select the layer to store the new entities.
Process: Tap this button to begin the import process. If you are importing
a large file, a progress bar at the bottom of the dialog will indicate the
progress of the import.

SHP File - Export SHP File (ESHP):

This command allows you to export entities from the current drawing and also the
associated attributes values, into a SHP file (or more accurately, multiple shape
files). The routine will allow the user to select which entities will be ex ported,
based on entity type and also based on the feature code name. The routine displays
"Export to SHP" dialog box.

Click on Export All and include special attributes and optionally the Z coordinates.
If you have point, arcs (non-closed polylines in ESRI terminology) and polygons
(closed polylines), all with one attribute, you will obtain up to nine files as shown
below:

Ascot1_11.dbf
Ascot1_11.shp
Ascot1_11.shx
Ascot1_13.dbf
Ascot1_13.shp
Ascot1_13.shx

p445
 Ascot1_15.dbf
Ascot1_15.shp
Ascot1_15.shx

The selection of the Z coordinate places the 1 after the underline character.
Otherwise, the file form would be, for example, Ascot1_1.shx (special attributes
only). The “1” group represent points, the “3” group represent arcs (unclosed
polylines) and the “5” group represent polygons (closed polylines). Within Ex port
Shape file, the field name in the dbf file is expanded to handle up to 254
characters.

SHP File - Quick Export SHP (QESHP):

This command allows you to export polylines and/or points to an SHP file. The
dialog that displays will have the following options:

Current SHP: Displays the name of the SHP file that will be created
when this command is completed. Read-only, you must use the Select
new SHP button to specify the file name.
Select new SHP: Tap this button to select a SHP file name.
Do not export points: When this option is checked, only polylines are
exported to the SHP file.
Export entities from selected Layers : Lists the layers in the current
map. You may select certain layers for ex port.
Select All: Selects all layers in the list.

p446
 Clear All: Clears all selected layers in the list.
Remove Arcs (offset cutoff): Specifies the maximum distance that a
vertex on a polyline segment will deviate from the original arc.
Include Z Coordinates: When this option is checked, elevation data (or
Z coordinates) will be included in the SHP file.
Process: Tap this button to begin the export process. If you are exporting
a large file, a progress bar at the bottom of the dialog will indicate the
progress of the export.

DTM Import - DTM from DXF (TDXF):

Allows you to import 3DFACE entities from a DXF File and save them as a
triangulation (FLT) file and also draw them as 3D faces.

DTM Import - DTM from Land XML (TXML):

Allows you to import 3DFACE entities from an XML File and save them as a
triangulation (FLT) file and also draw them as 3D faces.

p447
The DTM file is stored in SurvCE as an FLT file and can be used for commands
such as Elevation Difference (obtaining cut/fill by comparing field measurements
to the DTM).

The 3DFaces are placed on a layer (TRI_FACE by default), and that layer can be
turned off and removed from view. If you choose E for Erase, you can pick the 3D
Face entities and erase them on command. There is no particular value to seeing
p448
the 3D Faces, so it is not recommended that they be drawn. The main value is to
capture the FLT (triangulation) file for use in Elevation Difference.

Preferences (SETT):
This allows the user to turn on/off the pull-down MAP menus. The graphic screen
style of normal or reverse (solid dark) background is set here.

Command Aliases (AL):

Brings up a list of commands in the MAP mode for which the user can substitute
an alias. If you would prefer to type A for Area rather than AR, you can substitute
“A” as an alias for AR. Three commands will not accept substitutes: Inverse,
Traverse and Sideshot (I, T and S). In addition to commands, you can toggle over
to the “Linework special code” option, and substitute aliases codes for the default
special codes such as PC, PT and END (used to control linework using feature
codes). As an example, you could choose the “X” or “..” to End a line, or use
“CS” for curve start instead of PC.

p449
p450
p451
p452
Quick Save (QS):
Saves the current DXF file without prompting for the file name.

p453
Save As(CRD):
Saves the current coordinate file to the location you choose as a backup copy.

Exit (X):
This exits the MAP and CAD session and brings you back to the Menu screen.

Help (H):
Launches the interactive Help screen describing various MAP screen commands.
Scroll up and down to review.

VIEW
The View menu is found next to the File menu in MAP view. Below you will find
each feature described.

p454
Zoom (Z):
Increase or decrease the apparent size of polylines and distances between points, in
drawing area. The Zoom command options can also be accessed using the first 5
buttons from left-toolbar menu. The order of buttons, starting with the first top
button, is: Extents, In, Out, Window, Previous. The menu also has Num which lets
you enter in a point number and zoom to it.

Layer (LA):
This command manages layers and layer properties.

p455
 To add a new layer: Type in a new name into the New Layer edit box .
The New button will appear at the bottom. Tap this button. If you type in
a new layer name and the New button does not appear, then the layer
name you entered contains invalid characters.
To set a layer current: Highlight the layer name in the list and then tap
the Set button. You cannot set a layer current if that layer is turned Off.
Turn the layer On first and then set it current.
To delete a layer: Highlight the layer name in the list and tap the Delete
button. You cannot delete layers that contain objects. If you select a layer
and the Delete button is not visible, then this layer contains objects.
To turn a layer On/Off: Highlight the layer name and tap the On/Off
button. Objects on layers that are On will be visible, objects on layers
that are Off are not visible.
On all: This button will turn all layers on
Off all: This button will turn all layers except the current layer off.
Color: Clicking on the color bar will bring up the color palette allowing
you to set or change the layer color of the highlighted layer.

One of the main purposes of the Layer command is to permit the import, by DXF,
of a drawing containing all possible polyline work to stake out (set out). Then you
can reduce clutter on the drawing by turning layers off, leaving only the layers you
want. You can then do the command Cogo, Interpolate Points, Polylines to Points
and make point numbers out of all vertices (corners) of polylines where you need
to set stakes. Then proceed with Stakeout by Points.

p456
View Options (VO):
This command controls the appearance of point objects on screen. This is ex actly
the same as touching the lower left graphic icon. The routine displays the View
Point Options dialog. Pt#, Description and Elevation toggles control whether these
attributes are labeled with the points. If Freeze All is on, the points are placed on
the map, without attributes. Available point symbols are: ".", "+", "x ". The
“Decimal is point location” toggle determines if the decimal point used in the
display of elevations represents simultaneously the point location and symbol. This
slightly reduces screen clutter.

Small and Large toggles determine the size of font used to display the point object
on screen. Set Color Attributes brings up the color palette (available only on color
CE devices). This lets you choose the color of the point sym bol, elevation and
description text. The Traverse Defaults button brings up a dialog that has the
settings for prompting each time for instrument and rod height and the vertical
angle. This applies to the T for Traverse and SS for Sideshot commands that allow
point calculation within the MAP Screen. For Cogo work, turn off Instrument/Rod
Height and Vertical Angle prompting. For manual entry of actual field
measurements, turn them back on.

p457
Isolate Points (ISO):
This is another useful command to reduce screen clutter. If you have 500 points
on the screen, you can isolate to only those points you wish to see, by entering a
distinct point range, in the form 1-10, 22, 25-30, or a certain description. This
would isolate to points 1 through 10, point 22 and points 25 to 30, and other points
are “frozen”. Repeat the ISO command and enter the full point file range (or “all”)
to restore all points.

Isolate Layer (IL):

Select any polyline layer and isolate it to keep that layer. Other polyline layers are
turned off (frozen), but point layers are retained. Use the Layer command to turn

p458
layers back on as needed.

Aperture (AP):
Controls the size of the rectangle area used to select points or polylines from
screen. Initially, the size in pixels is 40 units for points selection and 10 units for
polylines selection. The routine displays the Aperture size dialog.

UCS (UCS) User Coordinate System Indicator:

This toggles the visibility of the UCS icon shown in the MAP screen.

Find Point (FND):

This command allows you to find a point on the MAP screen. Enter the point you
want to find and a zoom height. If you enter a point that is not on the map, the
dialog will warn you and allow you to enter another point number.

p459
Click Find and the SurvCE zooms to the selected point at the entered scale.

Scale Bar (SB):

This toggles the visibility of scale bar on or off. The scale bar is normally shown at
the bottom of the MAP screen.

List (LI):
This lists the layer, 2D or 3D status, Closed or Open status, perimeter (length), and
area or projected area (if not closed).

DRAW
The Draw menu is found next to the View menu in MAP view. Below you will
find each feature described.

p460
2D Polyline (PL) (AutoCAD style):
This command allows you to draw a polyline between points. You can pick points
from the screen or type in point numbers. First, pick your starting point then you
have several options on the command line. The default option is to keep picking
points and the other options are described below.

Cmd:Polyline-Arc/Close/Undo/<End>
A: Starts an arc segment. See below for details.
C: Closes the polyline (you must have at least two polyline segments
drawn before you can close)
U: Will undo the last segment drawn.
E: Will end the Polyline command.

Constructing an arc segment

After choosing A, the command line will change to:
Cmd: Polyline-Arc CEn/Len/Sec/<Rad>
You have various options for constructing an arc as part of your polyline.
CEn: Allows you to specify the center point (or radius point) for the arc.
After picking the center point, you must specify the arc end point and
then the arc direction.
Len: Allows you to specify the arc length. First you pick the arc end
point and then you can enter the arc length. The minimum arc length is
given to you.
Sec: Allows you to specify the second point and end point to define the

p461
 arc.
Rad: Allows you to specify a radius length. First you pick the arc end
point and then you can enter the radius length. The minimum radius
length is given to you.

2D Polyline (Road) :
This command allows you to draw a 2D Polyline. This command is similar to the
polyline command described above with the following additions:

+/-: The +/- options activate an additional prompt that allows you to plot
line segments at a 90 degree deflection angle from the last line. [+] is a
right deflection and [–] is a left deflection.
Len: This option prompts you for the length of a line segment. Enter the
length and a line segment will be drawn that length using the same
bearing as the previous line segment. If the previous segment is an arc,
then the new segment will be tangent to that arc.

3D Polyline (3DP):
The 3D Polyline command is similar to the 2D polyline command. It will even
draw arcs, but will create a polyline on the screen with many vertices at different Z
elevations which are linearly interpolated around the arc. If the start of the arc is
point 17 at elevation 100 and the end of the arc is point 9 at elevation 90, then
using View, List, you would see intermediate vertices (note that the segment length
between vertices is about 0.05 units).

p462
If you select 3D Polyline but pick points that are all at 0 elevation, you will create
a 2D polyline.

Circle (CR):
This command draws a circle entity, based on diameter defined by two points or
based on a center point and a radius.

Erase (E):
Erases all selected polylines. It will not erase points. Note that you can erase an
entire area by drawing a Window through the polylines (picking first a lower left
point in “blank space”, then picking an upper right point). If you even contact or
enclose any polylines with this window selection, they will be erased. So the
“window” erase procedure mimics the “crossing” selection method of AutoCAD.

Delete Layer (DL):

Select from a list one or more layers, then the routine will delete all the polylines
on those layers.

p463
Change Layer (CHG):
This changes the layer of the selected polylines. One form of selection is to type L
and press Enter in order to select last created polyline from the drawing. The
routine displays the "Change entities to layer" dialog box . When the dialog appears
on the screen, the selection in the layer list will be set to the current layer. Clicking
the color bar brings up the color palette, letting you change the color by picking or
ByLayer.

p464
Offset - 2D (O2):
Mimics the AutoCAD Offset command, and only works with 2D polylines. Enter
the offset distance and pick the left or right offset amount.

Offset - 3D (O3):
This offsets 3D polylines both horizontally and vertically. It is great in
combination with road/utility centerlines to create offset polylines to stake. If you
do the “segment” option versus the “continuous” option, it will break the corners
and offset the projection of the line. This creates vertices that can be turned into
points using the command P2P, and is useful for building offsets.

p465
Modify - Remove Arcs (RMA):
Pick any polyline with an arc, specify the “offset cutoff” spacing, and turn the arc
into chords. Offset cutoff refers to the maximum separation between the chord and
the original arc. If you enter a small cutoff distance of 0.1, then at no point do the
chord segments differ from the arc than 0.1. Be careful with this command – there
is no “Undo” to restore the arcs (though you can im mediately start a new job and
“re-load” the last, saved DXF file of the drawing).

Modify - Fillet (F):

Similar to AutoCAD’s Fillet command. It prompts: Cmd: Fillet -Ra/Pl/eXit/First
seg 25.00. If you are trying to inscribe a curve at the corner of a polyline, you
enter the desired radius first (at the above prompt). Then you choose the P option.
This leads to the prompt, Cmd: Fillet -Ra/Pl/eXit/Select pl 25.00. Select the
polyline near the vertex where you want the curve to go. This completes the
process. If you wish to change the radius, enter R. If you want to fillet the corner
of 2 distinct polylines, then just pick them as prompted (do not do the P for
Polyline option). This command will only work with 2D polylines, completed with
the command 2DP, or imported from a DXF file as 2D polylines, or converted
from 3D using the command C2D.

p466
See the above two figures. Because in the top figure, from 1 to 2 to 3 was one
continuous polyline, after the radius was set at 15, P was entered to set up the
one-pick approach for polylines, leading to the completed fillet command and the
result as shown in the bottom figure. Now you can do Cogo, Interpolate Points,
Polylines to Points (P2P) and solve for the points for the beginning of the arc,
radius and end of arc, for purposes of stakeout (set out).

p467
Modify - Join (JN):
This command allows you to join polylines. Enter D to specify a new max imum
separation distance, then select the polylines on the MAP screen. The advantage
of joining polylines is that they can then be offset as a unit, and the vertices of the
offset polylines can be turned into points for stake out. The offset command, in
effect, does all the complicated bearing-bearing intersects for you. For ex ample, if
the resulting polyline were a pipeline with a 20 meter total right-of-way, then to
stake the right-of-way points, you would offset the polyline 10 units left, then 10
units right, then turn both offset polylines into points.

p468
Modify - Trim (TM):
This allows you to trim polylines to the edge of other polylines just like in
AutoCAD. Then the command Polyline to Points (P2P) will turn all vertices,
including the trimmed end points, into points for stakeout.

p469
Modify - Reverse Polyline (RV):
When you turn a polyline into points, it will start the point numbering at the
beginning of the polyline. Thus it may be useful to control the direction of the
polylines. This is done with the command Reverse Polyline. Each time you pick a
polyline using this command, you reverse its direction, and little temporary arrows
are displayed along the polyline indicating the current direction. If it is not the
direction you want, reverse again.

p470
Place (Draw) GRID (DG):
This command toggles a horizontal and verticle grid display over your drawing,
allowing you to set the grid resolution in drawing units.

Transform (MOV, ROT, COP, SCL, MIR):

This command allows you to reposition polylines in the drawing to new locations
based on your point geometry. The transformation options are Move, Rotate,
Copy, Scale, Mirror. These work much like they do in AutoCAD, with input
being the base point, and the destination or target point. Note: This command only
moves the graphics and does NOT reposition the corresponding points in the
drawing.

p471
 (Centerline moved from Pt 4 to Pt 8)

COGO

p472
The COGO menu is found next to the Draw menu in MAP view. Below you will
find each feature described.

Inverse (I):
Inverse command Inverses and presents the bearing and distance between point
numbers. It has the added benefit that the previous point inversed becom es the
backsight, and the current point inversed becomes the occupied point, allowing
you to sequence directly into the Traverse or Sideshot commands. (Use angle code
7 to turn an angle right from the backsight to the foresight.)

Traverse (T) (also TR):

Similar to the Sideshot command, the Traverse command will “move up” to the
last point traversed, holding the previous occupied points as the backsight. Ex it
with Esc.

Sideshot (SS) (also S): This allows for sideshots from any point that is “occupied”
by use of the inverse command. For ex ample, if you inverse from 126 to 150, you
are “on” 150 and backsighting 126. Then at the prompt: Cmd: Inverse –
Tr/Ss/Pick point or point No: You can enter S for Sideshot. The first prompt is the
Angle-Bearing Code: Sideshot-eXit/I/Tr/H/Angle-BC(1-7)<7>, which can be any

p473
of the following:

1-NE (0 through 90 if degrees, 0 through 100 if gons/grads)

2-SE (same as above)
3-SW (same as above)
4-NW (same as above)
5-Azimuth (360 circle if degrees, 400 circle if gons/grads)
6-Angle Left (degrees or gons)
7-Angle Right (degrees or gons)

Note that at the Angle/Bearing prompt, you can transition back to inverse (from
your occupied point) or to traverse, which would move you up to the nex t
traversed point. Within Sideshot, you stay on your current point, holding the
backsight, and foresighting (calculating) as many points as desired. X returns to
the MAP screen as does Esc.

The remaining prompts are the angle itself (as in 85.3522, DDD.MMSS), zenith
angle, slope distance, description and point num ber. Exit with Esc anytime. In
gons/grads, angles are also in decimal form, and angles such as 397.9871 are valid.

p474
Interpolate Points - Polyline to Points (P2P):
This command converts any selected polylines into points. It is useful in capturing
points for stakeout from polylines created as offsets or brought in from DXF files.
This allows you to react to circumstances in the field by creating points from
polylines, when and where needed. For example, if you wanted to make point
numbers out of the lot corners below on the SW lot, Select Cogo, Interpolate
Points, Polyline to Points (or more simply enter P2P at the command line) . Then
pick each desired polyline. The program will avoid making duplicated points on
vertices that already have point IDs.

p475
The new points are shown in “large” format, for emphasis.

Interpolate Points - Divide Along Entity (DVS):

This divides a polyline into the number of segments entered. A dialog will allow
you enter in the number of segments. There are settings to prompt for descriptions
and elevations and to create points at the end points of the polyline.

p476
The command will create new vertices along the polyline, but can also create point
numbers starting at the entered Point ID, and you can elect to be prompted for
descriptions and/or elevations at each new point. If a property line were divided
into two segments, you would create three new points.

Interpolate Points - Interval Along Entity (DVI):

p477
This divides a polyline by the distance entered. Curves can have a different
interval. There are settings to prompt for descriptions and elevations and to create
points at the end points of the polyline.

This command is often used for creating points on centerlines. Note the program
resets the interval at break points like PI ’s and PC’s.

p478
Triangle Calculator (TC):
Goes directly from the MAP view to the Triangle calculator. See COGO -
Calculator for detail.

Curve Calculator (CC):

Shortcut to the curve calculator, then returns to MAP. See COGO - Calculator for
detail.

Area (AR):
This will report the area of any picked polyline. If you pick an unclosed polyline,
the program will draw a temporary line for the closing segment and report the area.

Hinged Area (HA):

This command can be used to determine the dimensions of a figure when the area
is fixed and three or more sides are known. The figure must be defined by a closed
polyline. After executing the command, select the polyline. Next, select the hinge
point, the polyline segment clockwise from your hinge point will be the segment to
move. SurvCE will then ask you if you want to keep the existing polyline. If you
answer Yes, a new polyline with the desired area is created, if you answer No, the
polyline you pick is modified. Next, the current area of the polyline is shown. At
this point, enter the new area in the units specified under Job Settings. (If your
units are set to feet, the area will be specified in square feet). See the top figure
below.

p479
p480
Note how the hinged side occurred on the clockwise side of the polygon perimeter
(side 57 to 43). If we erase the new polyline, reverse the original polyline (RV)
and repeat the command, this time answering “No” to “Keep existing” and again
targeting 24000 s.f. area, we get the following:

p481
Sliding Area (SA):
This command adjusts one side of a polyline to meet a specified area. Y ou must
specify the new area in the same units as specified under Job Settings. The area to
adjust must be a closed polyline. After executing the command, select the polyline.
SurvCE will then ask you if you want to keep the existing polyline. If you answer
Yes, a new polyline with the desired area is created, if you answer No, the polyline
you pick is modified. Next, the current area of the polyline is shown. At this point,

p482
enter the new area in the units specified under Job Settings. (If your units are set to
feet, the area will be specified in square feet). Let's choose to divide our new
parcel into two equal areas of 12,000 square feet each.

p483
Slope Report (SR):
This command reports the horizontal area along with the slope area of a figure
defined by a range of points. The command actually executes the
TRIANGULATION command to compute the slopes within the defined area.
There are options to include breaklines, use a predefined TIN model, and prompt
for inclusion/exclusion areas.

Consider the figure defined by points numbered 570, 97, 569, 584, 585, 75, and
back to 570 as shown below. From the COGO AREA command, we see that the
horizontal area of the enclosing polygon is 11,653.4122 Sq Ft. Performing the
SLOPE REPORT yields the same horizontal results, but also reports the slope
area, and the maximum, minimum, and average elevations and the average slope
within the area.

p484
p485
Bearing & 3D Distance (3D):
This command reports the horizontal distance, elevation difference, slope distance,
vertical angle, percent slope, slope ratio, bearing and azimuth between two 3D
points. The user can pick or enter the number of two points, select a polyline
segment or pick two points on any polylines from MAP.

p486
TOOLS
The Tools menu is found nex t to the COGO menu in MAP view. Below you will
find each feature described.

p487
Polyline to CL (P2CL):
Converts any polyline into a centerline file for use in the Roading commands and
in Centerline, Curve and Offset Stakeout. You will be prompted for starting
station and you will obtain a centerline report. Use Reverse Polyline (RV ) and
repeat the command to change the direction of the stationing. If we choose the
existing polyline as shown, we obtain the following CL file report:

p488
CL to Polyline (CL2P):
This command draws a POLYLINE entity using the data from a centerline file.
You can practice this command by selecting the file Demo.cl, provided with the
program.

Convert Polylines to 2D (C2D):

Pick any 3D polyline and convert it to 2D (elevations of vertices are set to 0).

Edit - Polyline (EDP):

Remove vertices, insert vertices and update (alter) the coordinates of any vertex .
For example, if we pick the centerline that was used above, we obtain the edit
dialog, with options to add or remove segments or arcs, edit curve information, etc.
Saving changes updates the graphics on the screen.

p489
Edit - Input-Edit GIS Data (EGIS):
This command allows you to input or edit GIS attributes associated with an entity.
Select the entity from the screen or for the case of a closed polyline, pick inside the
area defined by that entity.

Only polylines (open or closed) can be selected. This command does not apply to

p490
attributes associated with points (use List Points to edit point attributes).
Attributes are associated with points, polylines and polygons (closed polylines)
either through use of feature codes or by importing shape files. If a polyline is
closed, you can use the Pick option and simply pick inside its interior. This
“ROAD” description included a “SURFACE MATERIAL” attribute, which now
can be edited.

Offset Settings (OF):

This command allows you to set the type of corner that SurvCE should create
when offsetting entities.

p491
Traverse Defaults (TD):
This sets the elevation prompting (none, zenith, vertical, elevation difference),
within the Traverse and Sideshot commands within the MAP view. Also enables a
prompt for Instrument and Rod Height. Default setting is no instrument or rod
heights and no vertical angle prompting, so inputs are simplified as angle/bearing
code, angle/bearing, distance, description, point num ber. Traverse and Sideshot
entries within the MAP screen are stored to the RW5 file.

Note: 3D MODE must be enabled in Equip/Configure for this dialog to become

active. Otherwise, choices are "grayed out."

Triangulate & Contour (TRGC):

Triangulate and Contour can create a final contour map based on user given data:
points, polylines. This function has many options which are specified in its dialog
box. The routine will prompt also for inclusion and exclusion polylines. To delete
entities drawn with this command, turn off all of the drawing options and
reprocess.

p492
Volume (VOL):
Volumes can be computed by several methods, using point ranges and/or layers to
define existing and final surfaces. Perimeters can be used to further limit the area
of the volume calculation.

p493
Referring to the graphic below, which illustrates a stockpile, the “Final” point
range could be defined as ALL points, and the “Original” point range could be
defined as the base points of the stockpile or points 1-15.

So using the settings above in the V olume routine, you would verify your two point
ranges, then click OK. For example, the “Original” surface point range would be
set as follows within the “Define” button for “Original”.

p494
Clicking OK moves forward to a shrink and swell factor screen. Only if you are
set to English units do you get the option for tons based on a density factor. In
metric units, the volume is presented in cubic meters.

Clicking OK continues on to the Volume Report.

p495
The report can be saved to a text file using the “Save to Disk” icon at the top of the
screen within “Volume Report”. Click the “Return” arrow to continue back to the
Map screen. If you draw a 3D polyline perimeter connecting points with elevation
representing the outer limits of the volume calculation (using Draw, Polyline, 3D),
then you can click on Inclusion and use the polyline as an inclusion perimeter.
You can also use drawn elements on different layers as part of the volume
calculation, if they are 3D, by moving them over to the right-colume using the
“Define” button. Volumes can also be conducted between “File” surfaces, TIN
files made with Triangulate & Contour or within the Volume command itself using
the option “Save Surface to File.”

p496
Finally, if you are doing a stockpile and make the effort to put this outer perimeter
in the “Perimeter” layer, then you can select the “Stockpile” option within V olume
and it goes directly to the shrink/swell factor screen and then to the report, without
any other selections by the user. This is because the Perimeter layer will define
both the inclusion perimeter and the original surface in this case.

p497
List Elevation (LELV):
This command allows the user to pick on an entity and retrieve the elevation of
that point.

Field to Finish (F2F):

This command will redraw the linework created with Feature Codes based on the
current coordinates of the points. So if a GPS file was “processed” using a new
localization, or a total station survey was adjusted, the ex isting linework made by
use of Feature Codes will erase and redraw by connecting to the adjusted
coordinates. In this way, polylines on the MAP screen created by field surveying
will be redrawn to recapture their association with the adjusted point coordinates.

Place World Image:

This command will attach an image database to the SurvCE drawing. Image
databases are georefenced aerial photography or image maps. These image
databases can contain mulitple large images that have been processed for quick
display in SurvCE. The boundary for the image-set is shown by a dashed line.
Images are inserted in coordinate system and units of the image. Image databases
are processed with the Image X-Port utility of Carlson X-Port.

p498
p499
Tutorials

This chapter contains five tutorials designed to assist you in learning Carlson
SurvCE.

Tutorial 1: Calculating a Travers e (By Hand) with SurvCE

To do a hand traverse with SurvCE, go to the MAP screen. To get there, click the
icon in the upper right corner of your screen labeled MAP. Once there, you will set
your defaults for traversing.

Tutorial 2: Performing Math Functions in SurvCE Input Boxes

Various input boxes in SurvCE allow the user to calculate math functions
"on-the-fly". The basic steps for getting started are shown here.

Tutorial 3: Performing a Compass Rule Adjustment

This tutorial shows a compass rule adjustment, with various SurvCE screen
captures to guide you.

Tutorial 4: Defining Field Codes, Line/Layer Properties & GIS Prompting

This tutorial will assist users in defining Field Codes in SurvCE. SurvCE can have
one pre-defined FCL (Feature Code List) file loaded with the job coordinate CRD
file. The Feature Code List file stores pre-defined field codes that define
Line/Layer drawing properties and, optionally, GIS prompting. More than one
FCL file can exist, but only one can be loaded at a time per job coordinate CRD
file. The operator builds this FCL file using option 5 “Feature Code List” in the
File main menu.

Tutorial 5: Standard Procedures for Conducting GPS Localizations

This tutorial is intended to assist users with the recommended localization method
for SurvCE. Other methods can be used, and it is up to the individual users to
determine which is best for them.

Tutorial 1: Calculating a Traverse (By Hand) with

SurvCE
In order to do a hand traverse with SurvCE, go to the MAP screen by clicking the
icon in the upper right corner labeled MAP. While in the map screen, select the
Map Settings icon to set your Traverse Defaults

p500
 .

Traverse Steps:

1 To begin, you must key in the command for inverse by typing “I”. This will
establish your occupied and backsight points. The command prompt will
display the following:
Cmd:Inverse - Tr/Ss/Pick point or point No
2 Key in the backsight point number followed by the [ENTER] key.
3 Key in the occupied point number followed by the [ENTER] key.
4 Key “T” for Traverse or “S” for Sideshot followed by the [ENTER] key.
5 If you keyed in “T” for traverse, the command prompt will be waiting for an
angle code by displaying the following:
Cmd:Traverse - eXit/I/Ss/Angle-BC(1-7)<7>
If you keyed in “S” for sideshot, the command prompt will also be waiting
for an angle code by displaying the following:
Cmd:Sideshot - eXit/I/Tr/Angle-BC(1-7)<7>
The code choices you can key in are as follows:
1 - Northeast Bearing
2 - Southeast Bearing
3 - Southwest Bearing
4 - Northwest Bearing
5 - Azimuth
6 - Angle Left
7 - Angle Right
6 Key in the angle code of choice followed by the [ENTER] key
7 Key in the angular value in the dd.mmss format followed by the [ENTER]
key.
8 If you selected a vertical prompt under Traverse Defaults, then key in the

p501
 appropriate value followed by the [ENTER] key.
9 Key in the slope distance followed by the [ENTER] key.
10 Key in the point description followed by the [ENTER] key.
11 Press the [ENTER] key to accept the next available point number or key in
a new point number followed by the [ENTER] key.
12 If you traversed, then you are now occupying the new point and are
backsighting the previous point of occupation. If you sideshot the new
point, then you are still at the previous setup and ready to compute the next
point.
13 Options at the command prompt when presented with the messages listed in
step 5 are as follows:
X - Exit
I - Inverse
S - Sideshot
T - Traverse
Note: in order to establish new occupied and backsight point information, you
must use the “I” (Inverse) command and define the backsight point first and the
occupied point second.

Tutorial 2: Performing Math Functions in Carlson

SurvCE Input Boxes
Many input boxes in SurvCE allow the user to calculate math functions
"on-the-fly".
To enter rod heights while in a GPS setup screen that is not in your current units
(e.g. you’re using a 2 meter pole but working in U.S. feet), key in the following:
The Rod Height followed by “m” for Meters, “ft” for Feet and “ift” for
International Feet followed by the [ENTER] key will convert the measurement
into your current units (e.g. 2m = 6.5617).
To compute the azimuth from one point to another to automatically enter in the
azimuth while using the Point by Direction option in Point Store, key in the
following:

p502
Point ID,Point ID (e.g. "1,2")
To add or subtract a value from the computed azimuth, key in the following:
Point ID,PointID+Angle (e.g. "1,2+90")
Or
Point ID,Point ID-Angle (e.g. "1,2-90")

Tutorial 3: Performing a Compass Rule

Adjustment
In the example below, as shown in the next figure, the traverse was performed by
occupying point 1 located at the NW corner of the block. The initial backsight was
established by azimuth, measured and stored as point 2 shown NW along the
hanging leg. Angles and distances were measured in a clockwise direction. Point
numbers 6 and 1 are at the same location and point numbers 7 and 2 are at the
same location. This method allows for the closing of the angles and the
measurement of all traverse legs.

Process Raw File

Select “Process Raw File” from the “COGO” tab, as shown below in this figure.

p503
Select Raw File
The next figure below shows the standard Windows file selection dialog. Select the
RW5 file you want to process followed by the “OK” button.

Select “Compass” from the adjustment options dialog box as shown in this figure
below.

p504
Reference Closing Point
Key in the initial occupied point number for the “Reference Closing Point #:” and
toggle on the “Apply Angle Balance” option, followed by the “OK” button, as
shown in the next figure below.

Closed Traverse
In a closed traverse scenario, the reference closing point will always be your initial

p505
occupied point name.
Note that you will need two known points, or one point and a known azimuth, for a
closed traverse. The angle balance point will be the same location as the original
backsight and will not be adjusted.

Open Traverse
In an open traverse scenario, the reference closing point will be a stored point
name or coordinates that represents the known values for the last occupied point in
the traverse.
Note that you will need two known points, or one point and a known azimuth, at
the beginning and at the end of an open traverse; one point at the end will be used
to close on and other will be used for angle balance (when Angle Balance is
applied). The angle balance point will be the same as the last foresight point in the
traverse and will not be adjusted.

Traverse Points
You’ll notice in the Angle Balance Measurement figure below, since you keyed in
the data yourself, that the number of traverse points in this survey is 7. Since point
7 was only measured to avoid and record the closing angle balance measurement
by hand, in this example the traverse is only from points 1 through 6. Replace the
7 in the “Ending Point Number” input box with a 6, as shown in this next figure
immediately below, followed by the “OK” button.
Note that point 6 should be the same location as point number 1 in a closed
traverse.

p506
Angle Balance
Select the foresight shot from the last occupied point to the original backsight
location. In this example we would select the leg measured from point 6 to point 7,
since point 7 was our foresight angle balance shot to point 2. Press the “OK”
button. In an open traverse, this would be the measured leg that represents the
known azimuth or bearing at the end of the traverse.

p507
Reference Closing Angle
Finally we need to provide the reference closing angle (record). This is the original
backsight azimuth. Key in point 1 and point 2, or key in the known azimuth or
bearing, followed by the “OK” button.
In an open traverse, key in the stored point numbers that represent the values for
the known control points at the end of the traverse, or key in the known azimuth or
bearing.
The adjustment report should be presented, and the adjustment should be
complete. The angle balance point number 7 will not be adjusted to fit point
number 2, and can be discarded.

p508
Tutorial 4: Defining Field Codes, Line/Layer
Properties & GIS Prompting
SurvCE can have one pre-defined FCL (Feature Code List) file loaded with the job
coordinate CRD file.
The Feature Code List file stores pre-defined field codes that define Line/Layer
drawing properties and optionally GIS prompting. (More than one FCL file can
exist but only one can be loaded at a time per job coordinate CRD file.)
The operator builds this FCL file using option 5 “Feature Code List” in the File
main menu. See the figure below.

p509
After you select 5 Feature Code List, the following Code List pop-up box is
displayed. See the figure below.

FCL (Feature Code List) files can be created, edited or reviewed on a PC using
Carlson X-Port or any Carlson Surveying office software. (SurvCE’s FCL file is
equivalent to Carlson’s Field-to-Finish FLD Table used in their PC office software.
Transfer all PC Field-to-finish FLD table files using SurveyCOM or Carlson

p510
Export. Select the Field Code Table option to upload the FLD file to SurvCE as a
FLC file.)

Defining Field Code Line/Layer Properties

To define codes with line/layer drawn features and, optionally, GIS prompting,
select in the Code List pop-up box “Add” (as shown in the previous figure). The
following Add Code pop-up box allows the operator to define Field Code
Line/Layer drawing properties.

 Code: Input one-word Field Code

 Layer Name: Defines the layer the linework 2D & 3D will draw in using
Store Points
 Full Text: User defined full text description for code

 Polyline On: Yes or No defines to draw or not to draw between similar codes
e.g. EP, EP1
 Polyline is 3D: Yes or No  Yes draws in 3D, No in 2D

 New Attributes: This highlights after inputting all the Line/Layer drawing
properties

p511
The following EP code has been input in the FCL file. When Surveying using
Store Points in the Survey menu, inputting field codes EP, EP1, EP2 and so on will
draw 3D Polylines between these similar codes in the EOP layer. A 3D Polyline
will be drawn in real-time when collecting data and inputting EP or EP# codes in
Surveyed points descriptions.
As mentioned above, “New Attributes” becomes highlighted after inputting all the
Line/Layer drawing properties. GIS prompting information can be added for this
field code. If no GIS prompting is applicable for this field code, simply pick OK
and create another field code, or exit and store the FCL file.

Defining Field Code GIS Prompting

To add GIS prompting to a defined Line/Layer code, select “New Attributes”. This
button can be seen in the above figure at the bottom of the dialog. The following
GIS Feature pop-up box is displayed. See the next figure below. To define GIS
prompting for the EP field code, select “Add” in the Feature dialog shown below.
The next pop-up box that appears, titled New attribute, is then displayed (shown
below, underneath the Feature dialog). The New attribute dialog creates GIS
prompting.

p512
Load will load any existing Field Code GIS prompting for reuse. Edit reviews or
revises existing GIS prompting. Add creates individual GIS prompting, as shown
in the figure immediately above (New attribute dialog). Remove deletes any
highlighted GIS attribute. Up and Down reorders the sequence of GIS attribute
prompting. Save stores input or edited GIS prompting and exits to Line/Layer
drawing properties.

p513
Defining GIS Prompting

 Feature Code Name: No spaces GIS title for database

 Codes: Special codes, e.g. Date, Time, Lat, Long.

 GIS Prompt: Including spaces full name for GIS

 Default Value: Most common GIS value/default value

 Set: Lets the operator highlight and select the default value if there is a List of
attribute Values.
 Type: Offers 4 options CHAR, INT, REAL and Code. Code Type will default
to character type corresponding to special Codes. Codes can be Char, Int. or
Real automatically.
 Req: Requisite/required entry. Operator cannot leave any GIS prompt empty
when this field is set to Yes.

To add GIS attribute prompting for List Values, select the “Add” button within the
New attribute dialog, as shown immediately below. The figure below that shows
the New value pop-up box. The operator inputs, after selecting Add again, for
each possible material (e.g. macadam, concrete, brick, stone cobbles and so on).

p514
The data input for all GIS List Values is shown in following figure below. Note
that Macadam is highlighted and will be the default value. If there are more than
s ix attribute List Values, scroll bars will appear. This defines only one GIS entry
Material for the EP field code. Each GIS prompt for the field code EP (e.g.
Material, Location, Condition, Width, Slope and so on) will require being created
using Add in the Feature pop-up box, as shown earlier in this tutorial.

Add, Remove, Up and Down pertain to GIS List Values prompting. Add and
Remove create or delete List Values entries. Up or Down reorders the highlighted
List Value up or down. OK exits the GIS prompting screen retaining the GIS

p515
prompting entries and Cancel exits and discards all new inputs. The completed GIS
field code for EP is shown below in the Feature dialog.

With all of the GIS Features input – Material, Location, Condition, Width and
Slope – the operator can now select Save to store the GIS prompting for the field
code EP. When storing points in the Survey menu in Store Points with EP or EP#,
3D linework when ended will prompt for EP GIS data as defined here. If 2D or
3D linework is created the GIS data will be attached to the linework. Note that
Location, Condition and Width are required input GIS fields. Load allows
selecting any existing field codes GIS prompting for reuse. Edit reviews or revises
existing GIS prompting. Remove deletes highlighted GIS attribute prompting.
The Up and Down buttons will reorder GIS attribute prompting. Save stores and
exits.

Importing & Exporting GIS Information from SurvCE

SurvCE imports and exports ESRI SHP files. SurvCE solely uses ESRI SHP files
to interface with all GIS programs. ESRI SHP files are open architecture and are a
widely used and accepted GIS format for most common GIS packages. To import
or export GIS data to or from SurvCE, select in MAP – File – SHP File – Import
or Export SHP File (Quick Import or Export only reads and writes the drawing
entities and doesn’t include the GIS info). There are two figures later in this
tutorial that depict this.

p516
S urvCE Creates Three ESRI GIS Drawing Objects: Points, Arcs (Polylines)
and Polygons (Closed Polylines)
There are only three types of drawing entries in ESRI SHP files points, arcs (open
2D or 3D Polylines) and polygons (closed 2D or 3D Polylines). The EP field code
creates points and arcs and/or polygons. GIS information is stored only to the arcs
or polygons and not the EP points. All GIS information for EP will be attached to
the 3D Polylines. The second Field Code UP in the FCL job file creates points
only with no linework. The UP field code attaches GIS information to the UP
points. See the next two figures below.

p517
Save Feature Code List File
With two field codes (EP and UP) with GIS information input and stored, using
option 5 “Feature Code List” (in the File main menu), let’s collect some Survey
data in Store Points with GIS information. First, Save As these two codes into a
Feature Code List file, as shown below.

p518
The Add and Edit buttons create or revise Line/Layer drawing properties and GIS
prompting. Remove deletes field codes highlighted. Load unloads the current FCL
file and loads another existing FCL Field Code List.

Collecting & Storing GIS information in SurvCE

To demonstrate collecting Survey data with GIS information, SurvCE is set to
either Manual Total Station or GPS Simulation.
For Manual Total Station, go to the menu Survey – Store Points (see the next two
figures). Follow the figures for Manual Total Station. It is important, in the main
menu, that File – Configure Reading – HGT/Desc Prompt on Save is toggled ON!

p519
For GPS Simulation, go to the menu Survey – Store Point (see the next two
figures) and follow figures for GPS Simulation.

p520
See these Manual Total Station example screen captures, shown here in the nex t
four figures.

p521
p522
GPS Simulation screen capture examples are shown in these nex t four figures.

p523
p524
The sequence of shoots started with G PS Simulation storing points 2 and 3 as EP
codes. Point 3 was stored as EP END. A 3D Polyline was drawn between 2 to 3
and GIS prompting popped-up after point 3 was stored shown above. Note in the
Condition field the operator input data not found in the default settings. Point 4
was stored using manual total station as a UP point code. Point 4 ’s UP GIS
prompting appeared after point 4 was stored. Points 5 through 7 were stored as a
closed polygon. This was done by storing point 7 as EP1 CLO to close back to the
start point 5 of the EP1 3D Polyline. The GIS prompting appeared for EP1 (not

p525
shown) and entered. The last sequence above was to ex it Store Points and select
MAP.

Editing GIS Information on Arcs and Polygons – Input-Edit GIS Data

To edit existing GIS information stored on Arcs (2D/3D Polylines) or Polygons
(closed 2D/3D Polylines) in the MAP pop-up box, select Tools – Edit – Input/Edit
GIS Data, and pick any polyline or polygon. There are two figures below. The top
figure shows how the closed 3D Polyline between points 5, 6 and 7 was selected
using this command. GIS data for the closed 3D Polygon is shown in the second
figure.

The above figure displays the nex t EP code EP2 stored using GPS Simulation.
When ended with a END or CLO description after EP2 SurvCE will prompt for EP
GIS data to attach to the polyline as defined above.

p526
The figure above displays the ease of reviewing, creating or editing G IS data using
Input-Edit GIS Data. From the MAP screen Input-Edit GIS Data was selected and
the closed 3D Polyline picked on the screen. The GIS data stored prior was
displayed for review or editing. Any data point, polyline or closed polyline could
be selected using the Input-Edit GIS Data command in MAP and new GIS attached
to this entity or existing GIS data reviewed and edited.

Editing GIS Information on Points using Lis t Points

Input-Edit GIS Data only works creating, reviewing or editing G IS information on
Arcs or Polygons. To create, review or edit GIS information on points use List
Points shown below under File – 3 List Points.

p527
Highlight point 4 and select Edit (see figure immediately above). Point 4 is the
only Surveyed number with GIS data stored to the point. The Edit Point pop-up
box appears, and can be seen in the next figure below. To create, review or edit
GIS information select Input/Edit Attributes (See Figure 9-32).

Note: At the +UP box on top the down arrow can be selected and one or more
GIS field codes could attach GIS data to this same point. Points, Arcs or

p528
 Polygons can all have one or more GIS field codes attached to these entities.

Exporting SurvCE GIS Data as ESRI SHP files

p529
These final two figures, above, display the exporting of our VA_Beach MAP and
GIS data. The ESRI SHP file consists of 9 points, 2 arcs and 1 polygon (closed
polyline). Only one point, point 4, has UP GIS data. Two arc polylines and one
polygon have EP GIS information attached. Note that Include special attributes is
checked. This adds to polyline arcs and closed polygons the polylines length and
area to the GIS data automatically. Process with Export All checked stores the

p530
VA_Beach three SHP files automatically to a user defined subdirectory and a
fourth SHP file with 8 points without GIS data.

Tutorial 5: Standard Procedures for Conducting

GPS Localizations
This tutorial is intended to assist users with the recommended localization method
for SurvCE. Other methods can be used and it is up to the individual users to
determine which is best for them.

File Extensions
Localization File: *.dat
Geoid Model File: *.gsf
Coordinate File: *.crd
Raw Data File: *.rw5

Projections
It is essential that the proper plane coordinate projection is selected prior to
creating a localization file. This should be the first step performed during the
creation of the job file and be performed easily through File  Job Settings 
GPS.

Geoid Model
An important item to note is if the user intends to use a geoid model (typical for
localizations that contain less that 3 control points), the geoid m odel must be
applied prior to the creation of the localization file.

A local portion of the geoid grid must be extracted from the Carlson Geoid Model
using Carlson X-Port, SurvCOM, Survey or Civil/SurvCADD, and the geoid
model file must be installed prior to the creation of the local geoid file. It is also
highly recommended that the local geoid file grid size does not exceed 100 miles.

Web Link to the Geoid Files

http://update.carlsonsw.com/public/CarlsonGeoidGrids.exe
Transfer or Enter the Known (local) Points
It’s a good idea to simplify the process by transferring the known (local) points to
the data collector prior to going to the field. Conversely, the user can keyboard

p531
enter the known coordinates for these points into the CRD file, one at a time, using
File  List Points  Add. It is not recommended that the user keys in the local
coordinates from within the localization process as transpositions can occur easily.
However, this can be done as well.
Collect the GPS Locations with Averaging
Using the Survey  Store Points routine, specify your point ID. It is good to use
something that will relate to the original known point. Example, if the known point
for the first control point is 1, then you may want to collect the measured location
as 1001.
Use the average reading icon <A> to collect several epochs of data at each point.
Typically when using a 1 Hz receiver, 10 to 30 readings will be collected to ensure
that the RTK solution is consistently reporting the same position for 10 to 30
seconds. On a 5 Hz receiver, the user may want to collect 50 or more readings as
50 readings would be 10 seconds.
Create the Localization File
Once the data collector has points that represent the known (local) coordinates and
the measured data for these points, the localization file can be created.
Select Equip  Localization  Add to enter each point into the localization file.
Local Point
The first dialog presented to the user will be the Local Point dialog shown below.
Enter the known (local) coordinate point ID or coordinates. If the point does not
exist in the CRD file and coordinates are entered into this dialog, do not enter a
point ID. Select OK when the known (local) position has been defined.

p532
 GPS Coordinates
The next dialog presented will be the GPS Coordinates dialog shown below. Since
the measured locations for each point has already been recorded, the user will want
to use the option From Raw File in this dialog. Select OK to continue.

p533
 Surveyed Point
Next, the user will be presented with the Surveyed Point dialog shown below (top
image). This dialog allows the user to select or enter the GPS measured point that
represents the known (local) point. If the user selects the GPS measured point
using the list icon, they should ignore the current coordinates displayed in the List
Points dialog shown below (bottom image), as they only reflect the non-localized
position at this point. The important thing to remember is that if the local point was
1, and the GPS measured point was 1001, the user must enter 1001 in this dialog.

p534
Save the Localization File

p535
Once all of the points have been added to the localization dialog, save the
localization file before exiting using the Save button.
Reprocess Raw File and Update Coordinates
At this point all of the coordinates in the CRD file that represent the measured
positions need to be updated to reflect the newly created localization. To do this,
select COGO  Process Raw File and process the raw file through the localization
file. This will update the previously measured GPS points. Verify that the positions
look valid by viewing the points in File  List Points. You should be able to
compare the known and measured positions to see if they look right. Depending on
the localization method, the measured values may not be exactly the same as the
original known positions due to error that may have existed in the original
positions.
Additional GPS Measurements
Once the localization is defined, all of the GPS points measured after its creation
will be recorded to the CRD file based on this localization.
Changing the Localization
If the user determines that they want to redefine the current localization during a
job, they must reprocess the entire raw file after making any changes to the
localization file. It may be prudent to simply define a new localization file from
scratch, leaving the original intact, and reprocess the raw file through this new
localization file. Just remember that the last localization loaded, will be the current
localization.
Selecting Projections for use in Localization
Whenever you select a projection or coordinate system, you can place it in a “most
used” list of coordinate systems to choose from under the GPS tab in Job Settings.
This list can contain one projection system or many different systems the user
selects.

p536
This is a special list of either predefined (eg. KY North NAD83) or user-defined
coordinates systems. To get the list started or add to the list, select Edit Projection
List and click Add Predefined. In the U.S., for example, surveyors might want to
keep the UTM (WGS84) system plus the NAD83 and NAD27 “state plane” zones
in the list for quick access, covering the region of your work. European and other
worldwide zones can be added. When setting up a UTM selection, you can choose
your zone, referencing the graphic below for the US:

p537
 You can see a map of the UTM zones online at:
http://www.dmap.co.uk/utmworld.htm

To edit the list of saved projections, click on Edit Projection List. Here we select a
user-defined UTM system from the list to Delete or Edit.

p538
 Choosing Edit will bring you to the screen below:

From this screen, you can select the Projection calculation method as well as
calculation parameters. Projections include:
Lambert Conformal_Conic_2SP,
Transverse_Mercator,
Oblique_Sterographic (Double),
Lambert_Conformal_Conic_1SP,

p539
Oblique_Mercator_83,
Stereographic, Oblique_Mercator_27,
Transverse_Mercator_OSTN02,
Oblique_Stereographic_RD2000,
Oblique_Mercator,
Cassini_Soldner,
Transverse_Mercator_27,
Lambert_Conformal_Conic_27,
Transverse_Mercator_Alaska_27
Transverse_Mercator_34.

You may also use the buttons on this screen to edit the ex isting datum or create a
new datum definition.

The Datum definition screen is where you select the ellipsoid and Helmert
parameters to apply.
If you select Add User Defined within the Coordinate Projection List screen, you
proceed to the screen below:

p540
Here you enter the name of the new system and select the projection type and
parameters, or you can “Load File” to load a pre-defined system stored earlier (in
the form *.sys or *.csl).

If you select “Add Predefined” to create a new, stored projection system, you will
be presented with this screen:

p541
Here you can select the country and then the corresponding system for your area.
There is a very extensive list of European and Asian systems including in the list.
The “quick-access” short list of most used projections enhances job efficiency.

p542
Instrument Setup by Manufacturer

Total Station (Geodimeter/Trimble)

The following information describes the various options available for the
Geodimeter 600 and Trimble 5600 total stations. It's important to note that
firmware 696-03.xx or later is required. To check firmware version, select Menu 5,
4, 1 on the instrument.

Comms
Geodimeter/Trimble default communication settings in SurvCE are 9600,8,None,1.
To check these settings on the instrument, do the following:

1. Select MNU, ENT, 4 (Data com), 1 (Select device), 2 (Serial)

2. At prompt “Serial ON?”, select ENT
3. Verify COM=1.8.0.9600 followed by ENT

The software allows you to run the instrument in several modes, depending on the
capabilities of the instrument. Selecting a model that says DR informs the software
that the instrument is a reflectorless (Direct Reflex) model, and the reflectorless
EDM mode will be made available.

Settings/Search (Station)
If the instrument is not robotic or you want to operate it as a standard total station,
the Station mode should be used.

p543
 EDM Mode: Allows you to specify the EDM measurement setting as one of
the following types:

Standard: Standard EDM mode.

Fast: Fast Standard EDM mode.

p544
 Reflectorless: Reflectorless EDM mode (DR Models).

 Turn to point in stakeout: Turns the instrument to the horizontal angle as

computed to the stakeout location specified.
 Turn to vert. point in stakeout: Turns the instrument to the vertical angle as
computed to the stakeout location specified. This option is not typically used
unless a true elevation is known for the stakeout location specified.

Settings/Search/Remote (Direct Robotic)

This mode works exactly as the GeoRadio mode except a cable must be used in
lieu of the radio. For this mode,the instrument must be robotic and be operating in
the Remote mode with the faceplate removed.

 EDM Mode: This selection allows the user to specify the EDM measurement
setting as one of the following types:

Standard: Standard EDM mode.

Fast: Fast Standard EDM mode.
Reflectorless: Reflectorless EDM mode (DR Models).

 Guide Lights: This sets the track lights to one of the following options:

Off: Turns off the track lights.

p545
 Low: Turns on the track lights on low power.
High: Turns of the track lights on high power.

 Allow Weak Signal: This will allow the instrument to return a distance when
the signal is weak.
 Always Initialize Compensator: This will reset the compensator every time
the instrument is restarted.

 Search on Read: This setting will force the instrument to perform a search
before initiating a reading if the instrument is not locked on the prism.
 Diode Backsight: This setting allows the user to specify if the backsight has
an active diode prism or not.
 Horizontal/Vertical Range: These input boxes allow the user to specify the
range to search for the prism when a search function is initialized.
 Minimum/Maximum Distance: Determines the range by distance that the
instrument will search for or track a prism.

p546
 Standard Deviation: Defines the allowable standard deviation of the
instrument readings.
 Search When Lost Lock: This setting will force the instrument to begin
searching for a prism as soon as lock is lost.
 Turn Off Instrument: Turns off the instrument.
 Initialize Instrument: Turns on the instrument and initializes the instrument.

GeoRadio Settings (Remote)

These settings are accessed by selecting G eoRadio as your communication type
and pressing the Configure button. This mode works exactly the same as the
Direct Robotic mode, except a GeoRadio must be used in lieu of the cable. The
instrument must also be robotic and be operating in the Remote mode with the
faceplate removed. The only additional settings are for the G eoRadio itself.

p547
 Channel: Specifices the channel of the GeoRadio.
 Station Address: Specifies the station address of the GeoRadio.
 Remote Address : Specifies the remote address of the instrument's radio.

Putting the 600 in the “Remote Mode”

1. # Power the 600 on.
2. # Answer the initial questions.
3. # If you have not selected the Radio Channels and Address, do the following:
4. # Press <Menu>.
5. # <1> for Set.
6. # <5> for Radio.
7. # Select Channel (1-8).
8. # Select Station Address (1-99).
9. # Select Radio Address (1-99).
10. # Press <RPU>.
11. # Press <3> for Remote.
12. # Press <1> for OK.
13. # Press <No> for Sector.
14. # Press <No> for Measure Ref Object.
15. # Press any key when prompted. You do not have to remove the keyboard as
prompted unless you are using the Direct Robotic option instead of GeoRadio.
SurvCE will control the total station.

p548
Total Station (Leica TPS Series)
This series covers most of the current Leica total stations such as TPS 100, TPS
300, TPS 700, TPS 700 auto, Builder, TPS 400, TPS 800, TPS 1000 (including
TC1010 and TC1610,) TPS 1100,and TPS 1200. For the older 600 and 900, turn
off ATR and use the TPS 100/300 configuration. Many of these units include the
“motorized” option. Some settings may vary by model.

 Comm Setup: Default settings for these instruments are a baud rate: 19200,
none parity, Char Length: 8 and Stop Bits:1
 Instrument Series: Instruments supported are TPS 100, TPS 300, TPS 700,
TPS 700 auto, Builder, TPS 400, TPS 800, TPS 1000 (including TC1010 and
TC1610,) TPS 1100,and TPS 1200

 Read Method: The available read methods are Fast, Tracking, User-Defined,
and Reflectorless. The default setting is Fast. The "Standard" option
produces a 3-second reading while the “Fast” setting produces a 1-second
reading. One application of Reflectorless is to toggle between a 0 prism offset
(shooting a rock face or brick wall) versus shooting a prism with a non-zero
prism offset. When set to Reflectorless, the rod height and prism offset
automatically change to zero. When returned to Standard, the previous
non-zero prism offset is recalled, and the original rod height is restored. Turn
p549
 to Point for stakeout and PowerSearch are disabled in Reflectorless mode.
The Read Method (Std, Fast, Reflectorless) will appear in the upper right of
the graphic screen for most types of Leica total stations, in commands such as
Store Points, Stakeout Point, etc.
 Foresight/Backsight Prism Offset: Here is the list of standard prism offsets.
Note that Leica prisms default zero to equate to -34.4 mm. So a prism offset
of 34.4 equals a zero “net” offset. Whenever a prism constant is changed, a
note is written to the raw (RW5) file. When you select one of the prisms from
the list (Circle, Mini, etc), the value that is shown in parenthesis is the actual
value sent to the instrument. i.e. 0.0 for Circular, 17.5 for Mini. If you select
"30mm" or "40mm", - 4.4 and 5.6 are sent, respectively (30-34.4 and 40-
34.4). You may also type in any value you choose. In this case, we will send
that value exactly, unmodified, to the instrument.
 23.1 (360): Leica Model
 4.4 Mini (360)
 34.4 (0mm)
 0.0 (circle): Standard Leica round prism.
 17.5 (mini): Leica mini prism.
 34.4 (ReflTape): Equates to zero offset (wall, surface).
 4.4 (30mm): Other manufactures (Sokkia, Seco).
 -5.6 (40mm): Other manufacturers.
 Laser Pointer: Ideal for indoor or dark evening surveying, this feature causes
the instrument to emit a red beam. It is often used when doing reflectorless
work and makes a red mark on the wall, floor or object being surveyed. This
is usefule for confirming the position prior to the shot. The beam should not
be directed into someone’s vision or eye.


p550
 Motorized: When this option is disabled, many other options will also not be
available. These options are ATR, Power Search, Turn to Point in Stakeout,
and Turn to Vertical point in stakeout.
 ATR (Auto Target Recognition) : For the TPS 700, TPS 1000 and TPS
1100, this option will find the prism after you point in the approx imate
direction. It searches over a fixed range of motion and detects all prism types
and locks on to the exact center of the prism. Saves “dial in” time.
 Power Search Enabled: The Power Search option can be purchased with all
motorized Leica total stations. This option activates the “PowerSearch”
button in the “banner line” at the top of the survey and stakeout screens.
When Power Search is pressed, the total station will typically find the prism in
10 seconds regardless of the direction it is initially pointed. If it has found one
prism and you hit “Power Search” again, it will leave that prism and find the
next one. If you have only 2 prisms on the job (foresight and backsight), it will
conveniently rotate from the foresight to the backsight and back again each
time it is pressed.
 Turn to Point in Stakeout: This option should always be enabled with a
motorized total station. In stakeout (with the exception of slope staking), the
program knows the angle and distance to turn. When enabled, this feature will
automatically rotate to correct horizontal angle for the stake point. When on,
the associated "Turn to Vertical Point in Stakeout" option will also be made
available. Turn to Point in Stakeout is disabled when in Reflectorless mode,
since staking out should require the certainty of a prism placed vertically over

p551
 the target point.
 Turn to Vertical in Stakeout: When auto-turning to stakeout points, you
have the option to turn horizontally but not vertically. If “Turn to Vertical” is
disabled, you would need to manually dial in the vertical position of the prism
in stakeout. However, if rod heights are unchanging, this feature can be
enabled, and will turn the gun to the correct vertical position as well, factoring
in the current rod height setting.

For Leica TPS equipment that offers the reflectorless option, screens such as Store
Points and Stakeout now have a handy icon which, when toggled, switches from
non-reflectorless to reflectorless and back. The button appears in both the graphics
and text modes of these screens. Rod heights and prism constants will
automatically be adjusted when switching from one mode to the other.

Leica 1200 Robotic

The new Leica robotic total station requires the activation of the “Ex tended
GeoCOM” option before it will allow the use of third party data collection
software (i.e. SurvCE or Carlson Field).

 Activation Information: The following information was provided by Leica in

document Su11-05G.

TPS1200 Instruments (TCA, TCP, TCRA, TCRP) require a special key code
to operate in Robotic mode when using an AllegroCE/RCS running SurvCE
Version 1.5. The following table lists the part number for the code:

Product Part Number Description

TPS1200 734754 GeoCOM Robotics License

Note: When ordering a TPS1200 Robotic Instrument, AllegroCE/RCS and

SurvCE, you must order part number 734754 – this is a no charge item.

 Procedures for Checking Activation Status : A simple way to determine

whether the “Extended GeoCOM” option is activated is to enter the Robotics
dialog of SurvCE and attempt a power search. If the instrument
communicates, but the power search feature fails, the "Ex tended GeoCOM"
option is not activated. If you suspect that this is the case, you can verify that
the feature is on in the instrument using the following steps:
o Power on the instrument.

p552
 o Select the “User” button on the keyboard.
o Select the F3 button for “STAT”.
o Select list item number 3 for “System Information”.
o Use the down arrow key to scroll to the bottom of the
“Instrument” page.
o Verify that “Extended GeoCOM” is on.

 Defining the Port: The Leica 1200 needs to know that you intend to use the
GeoCOM interface through the external port. The following steps will set the
Leica to communicate with SurvCE:
o Power on the instrument.
o Select “Config”.
o Select menu item 4 for “Interfaces”.
o Arrow down to “GeoCOM Mode” and select F3 for “Edit”.
o Select F5 for “DEVCE”.
o Select “RS232 Geocom”
o Select F3 for “Edit” and verify the communication settings.
 Baud Rate: 19,200
 Parity: None
 Data Bits: 8
 Stop Bit: 1
o Select F1 for “STORE”.
o Select F1 for “CONT” and verify the following option on the
GeoCOM Mode page:
 Use Interface: Yes
 Port: Port 1
 Device: RS232 GeoCOM
 Protocol: RS232 GeoCOM
o Select F1 for “CONT”.
o Verify that the only device active is RS232 GeoCOM and select
F1 for “CONT”.

 Prediction Settings: The Leica 1200 has several prediction modes for when
the instrument has lost lock. The following are the recommended settings
while using SurvCE:
o Select 3 for “Manage”.
o Select 5 for “Configuration Sets”
p553
 o Pick New or Edit (Recommend New for First Time)
 New - Input Name, Desc and Creator Initials then F1
Store/Cont
o Select F1 for “CONT” 8 times until the "Automatic Prism
Search" screen appears.
o Select the down arrow one time and set "After Prediction Search
With:" to "No Search" by tapping the right arrow key one time.
o Select F1 for “CONT”.
o Select F1 for “CONT” 2 more times until the "Interfaces" screen
appears.
o Select the down arrow key to highlight GeoCOM mode and
press F5 for “Use”. Make sure no other mode is set. To toggle
off any other mode highlight and press F5 for “Use” to toggle
off.
o Select F1 for “CONT” 5 times to save and exit to the Main
Menu.

TC1010/1610
For the Leica TC1010/1610 series instruments, it's important that the following
settings are true:
 Communications Settings (SurvCE & Instrument): 9600,7,even,1
 Communication Mode: Make sure you set the instrument to communicate
RS232 mode, not module.

SurvCE Settings
 Instrument: Leica TPS Series
 Instrument Series: TPS 1000/1100
Make sure all of the toggles in the settings dialog are off.

Total Station (Leica Robotic)

This series covers most of the current Leica standard total stations including the
TPS 1000, TPS 1100 and TPS 1200 series. For best results, set the instrument to
Geocom Online mode. From the Main Menu, go to Configuration/Communication
Mode/GeoCom Online Mode.

Comms

p554
The default communication settings are baud rates 19200, Parity None, Char
Length 8, and Stop Bits 1.

 Wireless Connection: Using the Juniper Allegro CE/RCS, a built-in radio

modem and internal antenna is included which permits wireless
communication with the robotic total station when using the RM2410 radio.
This wireless connection is through the Leica propriety radio and does not
involve Bluetooth per the Comm Setup screen. The Comm port for the
internal radio on the Allegro is COM 3. For one-man operation, the pole and
prism become “freed” from wire connection and can be placed anywhere for a
shot or reading, with the process driven “remotely” by the data collector
communicating with the robotic total station.

Settings/Search

p555
 EDM Mode: Available methods are Standard (1.5 to 2 seconds), Fast, and
Reflectorless. In all modes of data collection, you are in “Rapid Tracking”
mode. Clicking that icon goes to the “No Distance” or “Tracking Only Mode”
(no distance measurements). Avoiding taking distance measurements will
save battery usage. So the “Dist” button refers to the selectable mode you will
“go to,” not the mode you are currently in. In Rapid Tracking mode, the store
icon will always take a “Rapid Tracking” shot, and pressing enter will take a
Rapid Tracking shot if Enter is configured to Store only (to mimic the store
icon). Pressing the read icon will always cause configured reading to be
taken, as will Enter when set to Read and Store. The next figure shows the
Rapid Tracking mode, which follows the movement of the prism by taking
rapid distance measurements, much like RTK GPS.
 Foresight/Backsight Prism Offset: This drop down menu provides a list of
standard prism offsets. Note that Leica prisms default zero to equate to -34.4
mm. So a prism offset of 34.4 equals a zero “net” offset. Whenever a prism
constant is changed, a note is written to the raw (RW5) file. When you select
one of the prisms from the list (Circle, Mini, etc), the value that is shown in
parenthesis is the actual value sent to the instrument. i.e. 0.0 for Circular, 17.5
for Mini. If you select "30mm" or "40mm", we send - 4.4 and 5.6 respectively
(30-34.4 and 40- 34.4). The user may also type in any value they choose. In
this case, we will send that value exactly, unmodified, to the instrument.
 23.1 (360): Leica Model
 4.4 Mini (360)

p556
  34.4 (0mm)
 0.0 (circle): Standard Leica round prism.
 17.5 (mini): Leica mini prism.
 34.4 (ReflTape): Equates to zero offset (wall, surface).
 4.4 (30mm): Other manufactures (Sokkia, Seco).
 -5.6 (40mm): Other manufacturers.
 Guide Lights: This setting causes the instrument to show flashing lights. This
makes it easy to tell when the instrument has turned towards you in tracking
mode. Can be set to Off, On, or Auto.
 Laser Pointer: Ideal for indoor or dark evening surveying, this feature causes
the instrument to emit a red beam. It is often used when doing reflectorless
work and makes a red mark on the wall, floor or object being surveyed. This
is usefule for confirming the position prior to the shot. The beam should not
be directed into someone’s vision or eye.

 Power Search Enabled: The Power Search option can be purchased with all
motorized Leica total stations. This option activates the “PowerSearch”
button in the “banner line” at the top of the survey and stakeout screens.
When Power Search is pressed, the total station will typically find the prism in
10 seconds regardless of the direction it is initially pointed. If it has found one
prism and you hit “Power Search” again, it will leave that prism and find the
next one. If you have only two prisms on the job (foresight and backsight), it
will conveniently rotate from the foresight to the backsight and back again
each time it is pressed.

p557
 Work Area: This will define a limiting area for searching. This can speed
up both the standard ATR Search and the PowerSearch. The Work area angle
ranges apply to both searches. The Show button will show the two positions
of the search window, first by moving immediately to Position 1. Y ou will be
prompted to press OK to see Position 2. Having defined a “window” of
searching, Center will move that window to a new center position. Y ou will
be prompted to “Sight on Centered Position and Press OK”. The Define
button prompts you to shoot the lower left and upper right positions, which are
then displayed above under “Work Area”. If the Work Area is set to start at
0.0000 horizontal, for example, searching would send the instrument to the
backsight point.
 Use ATR: When this feature is enabled, ATR (Auto Target Recognition) will
be used when configured to standard or fast reading. When running the robotic
in remote mode with ATR turned on, and when performing a “Set Angle and
Read” in the backsight screen (a standard measured backsight), the ATR
connection will be taken into consideration, so that the angle set is relative to
the center of the prism, not necessarily the crosshairs of the instrument. The
“Set Angle” and “Check Angle” functions will still be relative to the
crosshairs.

Work Area Settings

More settings appear when you press the "Work Area Settings" button from the
SEARCH tab.

p558
The upper left of the screen controls the ATR Search, and the upper right controls
the PowerSearch. The Work area angle ranges apply to both searches. The Show
button will show the two positions of the search window, first by moving
immediately to Position 1. You will be prompted to press OK to see Position 2.
Having defined a “window” of searching, Center will move that window to a new
center position. You will be prompted to “Sight on Centered Position and Press
OK”. The Define button prompts you to shoot the lower left and upper right
positions, which are then displayed above under “Work Area”. If the Work Area
is set to start at 0.0000 horizontal, for example, searching would send the
instrument to the backsight point.

Tracking
The instrument can also easily switchin between tracking and non-tracking mode
from the store points screen by toggling the icon of the m an in the upper right hand
corner. In the image below, we are in tracking mode.

p559
Next the icon has been toggled to non-tracking mode, which can be energy saving.
No distances are taken in this mode.

 Tracking and Reflectorless: If you switch to reflectorless mode while the

instrument is tracking, the instrument will be put in standby mode to allow use

p560
 of the tangent screws. For all Leica robotic total stations and for the Leica
1200 Direct (TPS Series), the timeout for reflectorless mode is 30 seconds.
You always have the option to Cancel from a reflectorless reading and if you
do, the measurement will not be automatically re-initialized.

Leica 1200 Robotic

The new Leica robotic total station requires the activation of the “Ex tended
GeoCOM” option before it will allow the use of third party data collection
software (i.e. SurvCE or Carlson Field).

 Activation Information: The following information was provided by Leica in

document Su11-05G.

TPS1200 Instruments (TCA, TCP, TCRA, TCRP) require a special key code
to operate in Robotic mode when using an AllegroCE/RCS running SurvCE
Version 1.5.

The following table lists the part number for the code:

Product Part Number Description

TPS1200 734754 GeoCOM Robotics License

Important Note:
When ordering a TPS1200 Robotic Instrument, AllegroCE/RCS and SurvCE,
you must order part number 734754 – this is a no charge item.

 Procedures for Checking Activation Status : A simple way to determine

whether the “Extended GeoCOM” option is activated is to enter the Robotics
dialog of SurvCE and attempt a power search. If the instrument
communicates, but the power search feature fails, the "Ex tended GeoCOM"
option is not activated. If you suspect that this is the case, you can verify that
the feature is on in the instrument using the following steps:

o Power on the instrument.

o Select the “User” button on the keyboard.
o Select the F3 button for “STAT”.
o Select list item number 3 for “System Information”.
o Use the down arrow key to scroll to the bottom of the
“Instrument” page.

p561
 o Verify that “Extended GeoCOM” is on.

 Defining the Port: The Leica 1200 needs to know that you intend to use the
GeoCOM interface through the external port. The following steps will set the
Leica to communicate with SurvCE:
o Power on the instrument.
o Select “Config”.
o Select menu item 4 for “Interfaces”.
o Arrow down to “GeoCOM Mode” and select F3 for “Edit”.
o Select F5 for “DEVCE”.
o Select “RS232 Geocom”
o Select F3 for “Edit” and verify the communication settings.
 Baud Rate: 19,200
 Parity: None
 Data Bits: 8
 Stop Bit: 1
o Select F1 for “STORE”.
o Select F1 for “CONT” and verify the following option on the
GeoCOM Mode page:
 Use Interface: Yes
 Port: Port 1
 Device: RS232 GeoCOM
 Protocol: RS232 GeoCOM
o Select F1 for “CONT”.
o Verify that the only device active is RS232 GeoCOM and select
F1 for “CONT”.

 Prediction Settings: The Leica 1200 has several prediction modes for when
the instrument has lost lock. The following are the recommended settings
while using SurvCE:
o Select 3 for “Manage”.
o Select 5 for “Configuration Sets”
o Pick New or Edit (Recommend New for First Time)
 New - Input Name, Desc and Creator Initials then F1
Store/Cont
o Select F1 for “CONT” 8 times until the "Automatic Prism
Search" screen appears.

p562
 o Select the down arrow one time and set "After Prediction Search
With:" to "No Search" by tapping the right arrow key one time.
o Select F1 for “CONT”.
o Select F1 for “CONT” 2 more times until the "Interfaces" screen
appears.
o Select the down arrow key to highlight GeoCOM mode and
press F5 for “Use”. Make sure no other mode is set. To toggle
off any other mode highlight and press F5 for “Use” to toggle
off.
o Select F1 for “CONT” 5 times to save and exit to the Main
Menu.

Troubleshooting: If your Leica robotic total station has any communication

issues, it is typically a matter of verifying firmware and configuration settings.
Investigate and note down the firmware version of the various components on your
instrument.

Total Station (Leica/Wild Older Models)

 Data Collector Model: Many of the older instrument could be set to operate
as different models. These include T1000, T1600 and T2000 modes . Set
SurvCE to match your instrument. Two different models are available for
T1000 with a one-row keyboard, and T1000 with two-row keyboard. Choose
the appropriate one.

p563
Total Station (Nikon)
Nikon 310/500 Series
This configuration covers such instruments as the Nikon 520, 521, 522 and 552.

Although the Nikon total stations have their own configuration, they also can be
set to Sokkia emulation. If set to Sokkia emulation, they should be configured as
Sokkia Set. In this mode, you can turn on the “2-way” communication mode. This
enables the Nikons to “turn to zero” in stakeout (set out) mode. In this setting,
when you stake point 10 and the angle right to turn is 75 degrees, 15 minutes, the
instrument panel will display 75 degrees, 15 minutes, and as you turn towards the
point, the display will count down to zero. So without looking at your data
collector, you watch the screen until you obtain zero degrees — this means you are
on target. In a sense, the performance of the Nikon total stations is enhanced in
Sokkia emulation mode.

Nikon 800 Series

The 800 Series configuration will also apply to the older 700 series. To use that
product the user must select SET mode on the instrument and have the connection
speed set at 1200 baud then select the Nikon 800.

Trimble TS415
Users who own this instrument can use SurvCE by selecting the Nikon 800 Series
p564
configuration.

Total Station (Pentax)

Pentax PTS3 Series
For Pentax instruments, select the "PTS3" checkbox if you are using a PTS3 series
instrument.

PTS3 instruments will first send out the last reading before sending the current
reading. For some users, you may wish to choose to record the 3rd reading for the
most accuracy.

Pentax ATS Series

The following information outlines the settings for the Pentax ATS Series
instruments.

p565
This information was compiled using an ATS-105.

1. Power up the Unit & Level it up.

2. Set the baud rate in the instrument. Hold down the Blue “S” key and press the
number 6 key in the upper right. This will open the Configuration Menu for Baud
Settings.

3. Set the baud rate in SurvCE by selecting the Equip tab, and then select the
Comm Setup button. SurvCE defaults to 1200 / None / 8 / 1. Match the Baud,
Parity, Char Length & Stop Bits with whatever the instrument is currently set to.

4. Connect the data collector, hold down the Blue "S" key and press the "F5"
button. This puts the Total Station into Remote Mode for use with ex ternal data
collectors. [RM] blinks in the upper left corner.

NOTE: SurvCE has advanced options for setting the Read Method, Number of
Readings & use of the instrument lights. Not all models or firmware support these
features. If these options do not work, you might be able to update the firm ware, or
manually adjust the settings using the instrument.

p566
Total Station (Sokkia Set)

The following information describes the various options available for the Sokkia
Set total stations.

 1-Way vs 2-Way: The 1-Way option mimics the operation of most total
station instruments using SurvCE. The 2-Way option has the one big
advantage of sending the angle to turn into the instrum ent during stakeout,
so that looking at the instrument panel, you “turn to zero” to aim at the
target point. It is recommended that Nikon instruments be run in Sokkia
Set emulation mode, enabling the 2-Way communication.

 EDM Mode: Available methods are rapid and fine.

 Target Offset: Enter the prism offset here.
 Zero Hz Angle to Target: This option specifies whether or not SurvCE will
set the horizontal angle of the total station to zero in the direction towards the
stakeout point. When stakeout is completed, the horizontal angle is set back to
the original value. This option only applies to Sokkia total stations or to total
stations such as Nikon which have a “Sokkia emulation” mode.

The driver applies to all current Sokkia total stations, including the 110M when

p567
used in manual mode. It also applies to many non-Sokkia instruments which have
a Sokkia or “Set” emulation mode, including Nikon, Pentax and Topcon. The
advantage of Sokkia emulation is that the Sokkia driver includes a “2-way” setting
that will upload configuration settings into the instrument such as units, prism
constant and the backsight circle. Most important, for stakeout, the “2-way”
setting will upload the angle to turn, so that you turn to zero to get on target. The
Sokkia Series 30R is reflectorless.
The “On” key is the upper right, which takes you to the “Measure” screen where it
is ready to work with SurvCE. Commands would not be accepted, for ex ample, if
you were in the “Config” screen. Use the instrument to activate reflectorless
mode, and in SurvCE, be sure to set target height to zero. The gun will control
prism offset in non-prism modes

Sokkia Motorized Series

This driver is necessary to utilize the motorized features of the motorized
instruments. For example, in stakeout, it will turn to the point automatically. The
motorized features will turn to the appropriate horizontal and vertical angle in most
commands when the instrument is set to “Remote” mode.

p568
Note that baud rates on motorized instruments must be set to 9600 in remote mode
but are typically set to 1200 baud in direct mode. Change on the instrument and in
SurvCE, Equip, Com Setup. The Settings options for the motorized instruments are
shown below:

p569
Joystick speeds are 1 to 6 (for arrow key response turning gun). For reference 6 is
approximately 6 degrees per arrow press. Search types are Sight (field of view of
gun, or 1 degree, 30 minutes or 10 meters at 100 meters ), H Wide, V Wide and
HV Wide. The wide views are 6 times field of view. Auto Search before Read
finds the prism center exactly before taking a measurement (useful in Set
Collection, for example, and in Stakeout). Run Remotely sets the left and right

p570
turning of the gun, referenced from the pole, and not from the instrument. This is
distinct from left and right referencing for stakeout which refers to movement of
the rod. For the Sokkia instruments with RMC search device, there are 2 buttons
in the joystick screen for RC Search: “RC Left” and “RC Right”. Left and right
will be determined by the Run Remotely setting.

Total Station (Sokkia Robotic)

The following information describes the various options available

for the Sokkia Robotic total stations.

The instrument “Measure” screen should be shown on the total

station in order to work with SurvCE. Commands will not be
accepted, for example, if you were in the “Config” screen.

Note that baud rates on the Sokkia robotic must be set to 9600. The
Settings options for the Sokkia robotic are shown below:

p571
Joystick speeds are 1 to 6 (for arrow key response turning gun). For
reference 6 is approximately 6 degrees per arrow press. Search types
are Sight (field of view of gun, or 1 degree, 30 minutes or 10 meters
at 100 meters), H Wide, V Wide and HV Wide. The wide views are
6 times field of view. Auto Search before Read finds the prism
center exactly before taking a measurement (useful in Set Collection,
for example, and in Stakeout). Run Remotely sets the left and right
turning of the gun, referenced from the pole, and not from the
instrument. This is distinct from left and right referencing for
stakeout which refers to movement of the rod. Use RC Unit will
enable the RMC search option in SurvCE..

Total Station (Topcon 800/8000/APL1)

The following information describes the various options available for the Topcon
800/8000 total stations.

p572
Carlson SurvCE supports the Topcon 800 s eries (800, 802, 800A, 8000, 8200),
when running in direct mode (measurements taken from the instrument, no radio
connection to the prism). All 800 series instruments are motorized. The Topcon
8000 is a reflectorless unit. The Topcon 800A is motorized but not fully robotic.
The 800AR is motorized and robotic. The Topcon 802 refers to a “2-second”
version of the 800 series, for example.

To operate either direct or remote, press the Power button to turn the instrument
on. After you level, the instrument will go through a motorized self-test. Y ou
obtain a 6-icon menu. To run direct, press F2 for Standard. This puts you in the
measure screen. Note that in Direct mode, the Topcon 800 typically ex pects 1200,
E, 7, 1 for communication, but 9600, N, 8, 1 in Remote mode. Note that the
Topcon 820 and 8200 are a new series of instruments, where Topcon 822 indicates
a “2-second” version of the 820 series. Running Direct, the Topcon robotic
instruments that have the reflectorless option offer a handy, one-click reflectorless
off-on icon at the top of the screen, as shown above in the discussion of the Leica
TPS series where it also applies.

Direct
The following settings are presented by selecting the Topcon 800/8000 Direct
instrument.

 EDM Mode: Choose between coarse, tracking, fine and reflectorless.

 Turn to point in stakeout: Turns the instrument to the horizontal angle as
computed to the stakeout location specified.
 Turn to vert. point in stakeout: Turns the instrument to the vertical angle as
computed to the stakeout location specified. This option is not typically used
unless a true elevation is known for the stakeout location specified.
 Use CR/LF: If set, this must match the settings on the instrument.
 Auto Aim: This forces the instrument to lock onto the prism before a
configured read. This is particularly useful when turning robotic sets. Auto
Aim is not available in reflectorless mode.

p573
Remote
This configuration works for the Topcon 800 series running in remote mode (radio
link active, equipment operation driven from the prism). The optional RC unit,
mounted on the prism pole, provides a “quick lock” feature for rapidly guiding the
instrument to the prism. Additionally, the RC provides an alternative to radios

p574
allowing limited remote communication between the data collector and
instrument. Be sure that the RC unit is pointed directly at the instrument before
executing a “quick lock.”

To operate in remote mode, on the instrument obtain the 6-icon menu, press F1 for
Program, F6 for More, then F3 for External Link. Press F2 to verify your currents
settings, then hit Escape and press F1 to ex ecute the remote settings.

Type: Topon Remote has two types in addition to the standard Cable, Bluetooth,
and Radio options. The two additional types support RC Only communication
using either Bluetooth or Cable. If RC Only is selected use the RC tab (described
below) to specify which type of RC unit is in use.

p575
 EDM Mode: Choose between Fine 0.1mm, Fine 1mm, Tracking 1mm and
Tracking 10mm EDM settings.
 Guide Lights: Turns on and off the guide lights.

 Lock on Read: For the Topcon 800/8000 remote, there is a “Lock on Read”
option which behaves similarly to the Auto Aim for direct mode, but is not as
p576
 precise as Auto Aim.
 Search Pattern: Defines the pattern the instrument will search.
 Joystick Speed: This option defines how fast the instrument will turn when
using the arrow keys to steer it.

The RC tab refers to the configuration of the RC unit. This tab allows you to
specify which type of RC device is being used and whether there is a connection
between SurvCE and the RC unit. If there is a connection please use the configure
button to set communication parameters for the RC unit. Note that the RC “quick
lock” function has a maximum range of 1500ft, while the two way remote
communication is limited to 800ft.

Topcon provides distinct cables for radio communication and RC communication.

The “Y” cable is used with radios and RC in combination, but is not required. You
can press the yellow button on top of the RC to initiate a “quick lock”. The “Y ”
cable is not used for RC only communication. The advantages of using both radio
and RC are range (works remotely over 800ft), speed (faster reading), and ease of
operation.

Within SurvCE, go to Equipment, select Topcon 800 Remote, use default port and
baud settings.
p577
The recommended settings are as follows:
 Tracking: 10mm
 Search Pattern: Normal
 Track Sensitivity: High (best with Quick Lock)
 Search Scan Range: Middle (applies to APL1 only)
 Tracking Speed: Middle
 Joystick: Middle (this changes the response of the arrow keys)
 Vertical Range: 10
 Horizontal Range:10
 Wait Time (how soon it starts searching when you lose the link): 3 to 5
seconds (low traffic areas) and 120 (2 minutes, in high traffic areas)
 Guide Lights: User choice

SurvCE will track the prism in the fastest mode (10mm), then switch to configured
reading when a shot is taken. Note, configured reading was also set to Tracking
10mm, which will take a nearly instantaneous shot. If configured for Fine (1mm),
the shot will take 2-3 seconds. Here we have taken a foresight to point 3 and have
moved in tracking mode to a new position, ready for a configured reading on point
4. “Configured Reading” shots are taken with Enter or R for Read. The “S”
button will take a “fast read” or Tracking Read, no matter what the Configured
Reading mode.

If using RC, Select QuickLock button. Otherwise, use arrow keys to turn the
instrument, look for the 2 blinking lights (if track lights are turned on) and then tap
Search. Above, we set the vertical and horizontal search ranges to 10 degrees.
When you obtain lock, you will get 3 beeps from the RC, and in all cases, SurvCE
will say Tracking, meaning you are locked on.

Pressing the Search icon does an RC “quick lock” search if you are configured for
RC. Standby let’s the instrument hold its position and stop tracking allowing you,
for example, to place the rod on the ground and drive a stake, then get on line
again and use Search icon to regain the link.

With robotic total stations, commands such as Turn to Angle, Set Collection
(choose “robotic” sets) and Check Backsight will turn robotically.

Set Collection Notes

p578
Set Collection works best with radio linkage (radio alone or radio with RC), but
has limited functionality in RC only mode. Robotic sets use BD-FD/FR-BR
observation order. Note, “non-robotic” sets can be done with a robotic total
station. The “Angle Only in Reverse Face” can be toggled on for faster Face 2
readings. “Auto Turn,” available for all observation orders but Robotic Set, will
turn the gun automatically to all known points. An hourglass will appear when
Robotic Sets is selected, during which time SurvCE initiates constantly streaming
data. When in robotic Set Collection, an option to obtain the Robotic screen
(search and joystick features) is available. After all sets are collected, the user is
prompted whether to move to a new setup station, collect still more sets, or review
the set data. Close this dialog and Set Collection is complete for that backsight
and foresight.

Topcon APL1
This is an older Topcon robotic total station with ex cellent tracking.
It’s a larger instrument often used in construction and m achine control
applications. It communicates only by radio with the 2ASx type radios. You must
set the Com parameters on APL1. You only have to do this once.

1. Turn the APL1 on.

2. Press <Menu>.
3. Press <F1> for Parameters.
4. Press <F3> for COM.
5. Press <F3> for Terminate.
6. Select ETX (ONLY) and press <Ent> to accept.
7. Select F2 for Transfer Speed.
8. Select 9600 and press <Ent> to accept.
9. Select F1 for Bit Format.
10. Set to BS, S1, and NONE, Press <ENT> to accept.

Putting the APL1 in the “Remote Mode”:

1. Turn the APL1 on.

2. Press <Menu>.
3. Press <F3> for Remote.
4. Press <F1> for Remote.

The total station is now in the Remote Mode.

p579
Total Station (Topcon GTS)
Most standard Topcon total stations will work configured to Topcon G TS Series.
This includes the Topcon 200,300,600,700,2000 and 3000 series ins truments, and
newer models such as the Topcon 230 (which uses Bluetooth wireless
communication). This driver does support the reflectorless capability of the
“thousand” series instruments (Topcon 2000 and 3000, for ex ample). Typical
baud rates for instruments in this group are 1200, E, 7, 1.

Topcon 200 Series

This is another option that can be tried when the GTS Series or other configuration
does not communicate. It uses a different speed and mode of linkage.

Topcon 300/600/700/2000
Similar to the Topcon GTS Series, these drivers offer the reflectorless option.
Typical baud rates for instruments such as the Topcon 303 and Topcon 313, for
example, are 1200, E, 7, 1.

Topcon GTS 3/3B Series

This driver supports the older Topcon GTS 3 and GTS 3B standard total stations.
Some of the GTS Series Topcon instruments offer Reflectorless, and in stakeout
routines and Store Points (both graphics and tex t modes), there is a convenient
reflectorless icon at the top of the screen to turn on/off reflectorless and show
current status. (See discussion of Leica TPS above.)

GPS (Allen-Osbourne)
The first time into this selection, as with most other setup procedures, the program
shows the Comms Setup screen.

There is no Configure Base, Configure Rover or Receiver Utilities for

Allen-Osbourne. SurvCE reads the NEMA string characters and all of the setup is
done on the instrument itself.

GPS (CSI - DGPS Max)

This GPS system is typically used for GIS-type surveys with 1 to 3 meter accuracy.
Corrections are obtained from Omnistar, WAAS, U.S. Corps of Engineers
beacons, or by RTCM message string from an RTK unit. The rover setup offers
p580
the ability to set elevation mask and the DGPS Max Age.

GPS (DataGrid)
Using DataGrid with SurvCE

DataGrid GPS can be connected using either a bluetooth or cable connection. The
GPS switches to bluetooth communications when the cable is disconnected and the
receiver is powered on. DataGrid receivers communicate at a baud rate of 115200.
DataGrid uses ARWest UHF radios for RTK corrections.

Connecting with Bluetooth

To use DataGrid GPS in bluetooth mode remove data cables prior to powering on
the receiver. The GPS will automatically switch over to bluetooth. No PIN is
required for bluetooth communications.

Radio Configuration
DataGrid uses ARWest UHF radios for RTK corrections. The base G PS has an
external radio connected to a radio port on the receiver and the rover uses a built in
radio. DataGrid uses one message type for RTK corrections. RTK message
selection in SurvCE will show the default message selection and be greyed out.
Radio channel selection displayed on the GPS unit and is selectable on the unit.
Setting the radios to channel 0 will set the radio selection to an automatic mode.

GPS (Leica 500/1200)

Default values in Comm Setup are 9600, Parity None, Char Length 8, Stop Bits 1.
These can be set by hitting “Defaults”. For the G X1200 series GPS, the default
baud rate is 115200.

Warning
For Leica 1200 GPS units, only firmware versions 2.12 and higher are supported!

p581
GPS Base
This command opens the Base Configuration dialog.

 Base Antenna: This option allows the user to specify the antenna in use. The
most common setting for the base antenna is AT502 Tripod type.
 Antenna Height: Input the base antenna height. The AT501 Tripod, AT502
Tripod, AT503 Tripod and AT504 Tripod settings will all prompt to
“Measure to Base of 36cm Height Hook”.

When the height hook is used, the Antenna Height is measured down to the
hub and tack elevation from the fixed mounting position of the height hook.
The measurement is typically in meters, so if you are configured to units in
feet, you can enter the Antenna Height in meters with the “m” suffix, as shown
above, and the program will do the conversion automatically. You can omit
the “m” suffix if you are configured to metric units.

p582
 Other Antenna settings for Leica GPS are AT201, AT202/302,
AT202/302GP, AT303, AT501, AT501 Pole, AT502, AT502 Pole, AT503,
AT504, SR299/399 Internal, AX1201, AX201 Pole, AX1201 Tripod,
AX1202, AX1202 Pillar, AX1202 Pole, AX1202 Tripod and “Other”. In all
these cases, the antenna height is measured from the ground elevation to the
base of the antenna (the “base” is where it would rest if you removed it and
placed it on a table —the “base” is the lowest point).
 Elv Mask: This specifies the cutoff vertical angle above the horizon. Any
satellites below this angle will be left out of calculations. An elevation mask
of 10 degrees is typical. It is advisable to use some elevation mask between 5
and 15 degrees. Satellites low to the horizon can actually degrade the
resolving of the GPS position.
 Log Static Data to PC Card: This option will log static data in binary form
to the PC Card in the GPS receiver whether or not you choose to conduct
RTK GPS work. The static data can be processed using the Leica SKI-Pro
program.
 Use Glonass: This option will only apply for System 1200 instruments that
support Glonass.

GPS Rover
This command is used primarily to set the appropriate antenna height and antenna
type for the rover. Leica typically offers a 2-meter pole, so for antenna height, the
most common entry is 2m or 6.5617 feet. The default antenna is the AT502 Pole.

p583
 Antenna Height: Input the rover antenna height. The AT501 Tripod, AT502
Tripod, AT503 Tripod and AT504 Tripod settings will all prompt to
“Measure to Base of 36cm Height Hook”. When the height hook is used, the
Antenna Height is measured down to the hub and tack elevation from the fix ed
mounting position of the height hook. The measurement is typically in meters,
so if you are configured to units in feet, you can enter the Antenna Height in
meters with the “m” suffix, as shown above, and the program will do the
conversion automatically. You can omit the “m” suffix if you are configured
to metric units. Other Antenna settings for Leica GPS are AT201, AT202/302,
AT202/302GP, AT303, AT501, AT501 Pole, AT502, AT502 Pole, AT503,
AT504, SR299/399 Internal, AX1201, AX201 Pole, AX1201 Tripod,
AX1202, AX1202 Pillar, AX1202 Pole, AX1202 Tripod and “Other”. In all
these cases, the antenna height is measured from the ground elevation to the
base of the antenna (the “base” is where it would rest if you removed it and
placed it on a table—the “base” is the lowest point).
 Elv Mask: This specifies the cutoff vertical angle above the horizon. Any
satellites below this angle will be left out of calculations. An elevation mask
of 10 degrees is typical. It is advisable to use some elevation mask between 5
and 15 degrees. Satellites low to the horizon can actually degrade the
resolving of the GPS position.
 Log Baseline Data: This option stores raw vector data and Cartesian
coordinate data for both the base and the rover and stores to the SurvCE data
collector, in the “Data” directory. The file will be Jobname_SKI.ASC,
depending on the name of the coordinate file. This vector file can be further

p584
 processed in the Leica SKI-Pro program.
 Use Glonass: This option will only apply for System 1200 instruments that
support Glonass.
 Rover Antenna: This option allows the user to specify the antenna in use.
The most common setting for the rover antenna is AT502 Pole type.
 Base Antenna: For best results, specify here the type of antenna used at the
base.

GPS (Leica GIS System 50)

The Leica System 50 gets its corrections from the Corps of Engineer ’s beacons
(free) or you can sign up for an annual subscription and pick up corrections from
the Racal satellite at a rate of approx imately $800 per year. You would need to
order a special part with your GS50 system to read the satellite corrections.
Though the Corps beacons are free, they are not available everywhere, and
coverage is typically up to about 100 miles from each beacon. There are also
line-of-sight issues, and you can “lose” the Corps beacons when in deep valleys,
for example. Typical accuracies are 0.3 to 1 meter horizontal and 1 to 2 meters
vertical. Configure Base, Configure Rover and Receiver Utilities do not apply, but
the Localization command can be used to translate (1-point) or transform
(multi-point) from the configured coordinate system to local coordinates. It is still
important, under Job Settings, GPS tab, to set the correct Transformation (eg.
NAD83) and Zone (eg. KY North) so that the Lat/Longs are converted to
coordinates on the local system.

GPS (Navcom)
Using Navcom with SurvCE

Always connect the data collector to COM1 on the Navcom receiver. The baud
rates are searched after selecting Navcom in the Instrument dialog. The receiver
model is automatically detected. Models that start with SF are capable of Starfire,
but that does not mean that the Starfire license is active. Models that are capable of
RTK have “RTK” put after the model name.

Configure Base

p585
GPS Rover

p586
RTK Tab
 Device: This list contains the supported devices that deliver or receive RTK
messages, such as a radio or IP modem. If an External Radio is selected, the
user will need to specify the Port, Baud, Parity and Stop Bits that the radio

p587
 manufacturer requires. For internal radios, SurvCE will detect the proper
settings.
 Network: This list allows you to configure and connect to various networks
(e.g. NTRIP).
 Message Type: You must select the RTK message type that you wish to
broadcast and receive. This is the format of the RTK message string that is
either sent from the base or received at the rover.
 Base ID: This is typically used to isolate paired devices. The user specifies
that the base it ID 1, then the rover should be set to only listen to ID 1 so that
other base station that might be in the area do not interfere.
 Send Rover Position to Network: This will output a NMEA GGA message
for networks that require it.

Navcom GPS handles “QuickStart”. When QuickStart is used, RMS values in

Monitor and elsewhere will be displayed as “0.0” as valid numbers will not be
reported from the receiver in this mode.

When configuring the rover -- even if the message “Failed to clear Navcom base
position” appears -- the software will continue to configure the rover. This
message should not affect the operation of the rover.

There are three sets of three LED's on the front panel of the Navcom receiver. The
GPS lights indicate the quality of the receiver's G PS position reading. One or more
base lights will be on if the receiver is acting as a base. These lights will also
indicate the RTK message type being broadcast. When functioning as a rover, all
base lights should be off. The number of link lights indicates the strength of the
signal the receiver is getting from a base. Blinking link lights, or no link lights,
indicates that a base has not been found. For a full description of the meanings of
these LED's, read below and also consult your Navcom User's Manual.

Navcom Receiver LED Lights

NavCom receivers have three groups of LED lights labeled LINK, BASE and
GPS. Each group contains a green, amber, and red light. They are very useful for
quickly understanding what state the receiver is in.

GPS LED Lights

Whatever GPS LED lights are on, they blink at the rate of position calculation
(1Hz, 5Hz, etc.). If the red LED is on then there are not enough satellites to
calculate a position. The amber LED blinking by itself indicates that a
non-differential position is being calculated. Blinking green and amber means

p588
 there is a differential position (WAAS, DGPS, Starfire, or RTK Float). If the
receiver has Starfire capability, then when the green LED is the only GPS
LED blinking, the receiver has a Starfire position. If the receiver does not
have Starfire, the single green LED indicates RTK Fixed mode. If the
receiver has both Starfire and RTK ability, then a single green LED indicates
either Starfire or RTK Fixed mode.

Base LED Lights

The Base LED lights blink at the rate RTK corrections are being sent. If the
receiver is configured as a rover, all Base LED lights will be off. Which color
of LED is blinking depends on the RTK correction format being sent. Green
indicates Navcom proprietary format, amber indicates CMR and red indicates
RTCM.

Link LED Lights

Carlson Software programs the behavior of the Link LED lights to depend on
whether the receiver is configured as a base or rover and whether using an
internal or external radio for RTK corrections. The following table
summarizes the possible configurations:

Base Rover

Internal Radio LED’s off Signal Strength

External Radio Sent correction Received correction

When using an internal radio on a rover, the LED ’s show radio signal strength.
Full strength is shown by all Link LED ’s being on and not blinking. As signal
strength fades, The green LED will start blinking then turn off, then the amber
LED will start blinking and turn off, then the red LED will blink when signal
is lost.

Every time a correction is sent or received when using an external radio, a

Link LED blinks. The color of the Link LED that blinks depends on the RTK
correction format. Green indicates Navcom proprietary format, amber
indicates CMR and red indicates RTCM.

Troubleshooting

Not able to establish connection to receiver

p589
If the data collector is connected to COM2 and configures COM1 to receive CMR
corrections, the receiver will no longer recognize commands on COM1. To
correct the problem, connect the data collector to COM2, go to the Configure
Rover window, set the correction type to Navcom and press OK. Now connect to
COM1, go to the Comm Setup window and press OK. It will then search through
the baud rates to find the right one.

Unable to update Navcom firmware

A common problem people have when updating the firmware on the Navcom is
they connect the computer to COM1 on the Navcom instead of COM2. They must
connect to COM2 to update the firmware. The transfer will go faster if they set
COM2 to run at 115200 baud before starting the firmware update utility.

GPS (NMEA)
This GPS configuration is typically used to pick up the standard, commonly output
NMEA string from a variety of receivers, including Thales MobileMapper CE,
Magellan, the Sokkia GPS01 Toughbook and some brands of Trimble equipment.

Thales MobileMapper CE
To use the internal GPS of the MobileMapper CE unit from Thales, set the
following:

Instrument
NMEA GPS Receiver

Communications
Port Number: COM2
Baud Rate: 57600
Parity: None
Char Length: 8
Stop Bits: 1

Configure Reading
Make sure that you toggle off the option to Store Fix ed Only.

p590
Sokkia GPS01
The Sokkia GPS01 Toughbook, for example, has an integrate L1 GPS receiver
using WAAS for corrections and has accuracies of 1 to 2 meters. That same unit
can be connected to real-time GPS or total stations and therefore functions as a
dual-use device, locating on-the-ground positions (Lat/Long, state plane, UTM)
and permitting standard precision surveying. The GPS receiver is powered on
whenever the Toughbook 01 is on, and uses COM3 as the G PS port. Note the
“stabilizer bar” which effectively secures the com port connection for use in the
field.

p591
Some low-accuracy (10 to 50 meter) GPS outputs NMEA Lat/Long data by default
and has no accurate “setting” or method. Alternately, certain accurate RTK brands
of GPS, if setup with their proprietary equipment to run RTK, will transmit the
NMEA string and allow GIS-CE to pick up the message from the rover receiver.
For this reason, NMEA has no Configure Base, Configure Rover or Receiver
Utilities option. It is a “plug and play” method, which will pull from the receiver
whatever position it is outputting. That Lat/Long position will respond to the
transformation defined in Job Settings, GPS and will also respond to any
localization file to transform it further to local coordinates.

GPS (Novatel)

p592
This is the driver for the original Sokkia Radian “real-time” GPS with centimeter
accuracy. Sokkia Radian GPS, like all real-time, high-accuracy GPS requires a
base receiver sending corrections to a rover receiver. Most commonly used GPS
antenna types include the SK600 and SK502. All Sokkia GPS receivers will
accept and transmit RTCM, RTCA and CMR message strings.

GPS (Septentrio)
Using Septentrio with SurvCE

48-channel dual-frequency GNSS receiver.

Septentrio PolarRx2 GPS is a
There are several variants for this GPS line supporting different
features including SBAS, DGPS and GLONASS. SurvCE supports
the general GPS functions of this unit.

GPS (Magellan/Ashtech)
The following information describes the various options available for
Magellan/Ashtech GPS.

SurvCE works with the following high precision, centimeter accurate RTK GPS
equipment produced by Thales/Ashtech: Z12/Sensor, ZSurveyor, GG 24, Z-Xtreme
and Z-Max. SurvCE also works with the Ashtech Reliance USCG/DGPS RTCM
sub-meter RTK GPS receivers.

Shown below is the front panel view of the Ashtech Z-Xtreme, as it appears in the
top of the backpack.

p593
Shown in the next photo is the cabling for the Z-Xtreme, looking at the back panel.

Configure Base or Rover

 Current tab - Model: You must specify the model of Magellan/Ashtech
equipment to be used.

p594
 Receiver tab - Antenna Type: A pull down list that includes approx imately
50 different antenna types. Shown in the below photo is the Geodetic 4
antenna.

 Receiver tab - Antenna Height: This is entered as a "vertical" or "slant"

height in the current job units. The slant height is the distance from the base
of the pole or from the “hub and tack” up to a mark or defined slant
measurement point on the edge of the antenna (See NGS for more details).
The vertical height is measured plumb, straight down from the base of the
antenna (where it screws into the antenna).
 Receiver tab - Elevation Mask: This specifies the cutoff vertical angle above

p595
 the horizon. Any satellites below this angle will be left out of calculations.
 Receiver tab - Log OBEN Data for Averaged RTK Readings : This setting
specifies that the software will log the standard Thales OBEN file as specified
by Thales during averaged readings.

 Ports tab - RTK Port: You must select the data port on the GPS receiver that
is connected to the radio modem. The default setting is A. Changing this
setting will change the internal setting of the receiver.
 Ports tab - Radio Type: This allows the user to specify the various supported
radios.
 Ports tab - Message Type: You must specify the message type. For high
precision centimeter RTK GPS, set this to Ashtech (CPD). For USCG/RTCM
DGPS sub-meter accuracy, set this to RTCM.
 Ports tab - Baud: This setting allows you to change Pacific Crest radio baud
settings through the receiver. The default baud rate is 9600. (Note: If there
are communication problems with either port A or B on the Ashtech
ZSurveyor receiver, turn off receiver and turn it back on with both keys
depressed to reset receiver to factory defaults.)
For more information on this tab, see "Connecting G PS"

Configure Rover (Parameters)

p596
 Multipath Type: You must specify this setting in order to filter out
interference in the satellite signals caused by nearby objects.
 Dynamics: This setting is applied to all Thales equipment types with the
exception of the Z-Max. Here you may specify the dynamics setting. Static is
selected only when the Rover receiver is stationary. The default is Walking.
When set to Static, the HRMS and VRMS values (measurements of accuracy)
will fall to very low numbers (high accuracy), but lock will not hold unless the
antenna is motionless. Static is recommended when the antenna and pole are
secured by a tripod or bipod.
 Ambiguity Fixing Parameter: This controls the confidence level of fixed
positions. The default is 99.0. At a lower confidence interval the system solves
much faster. If the system incorrectly solves the position, then the position
error will be much greater than the reported RMS value.
 Fast CPD: This option specifies whether or not the program will allow
approximating the rover’s position if your position is lost briefly. Off is the
default. Fast CPD is generally toggled on when Dynamics is set to
Automobile.

GPS (Sokkia)
Sokkia GSR 2700 IS - What do I do when I get the Bluetooth pass key
prompt?
p597
This receiver does not require a pass key. If you are prompted for one, do a factory
reset on the receiver by holding the power key down until the message displayed is
Factory Reset. Then turn the device off and back on again. In Carlson SurvCE,
clear the receiver from the Bluetooth connections list and add it back in.

Sokkia Radian
This is the driver for the original Sokkia Radian “real-time” GPS with centimeter
accuracy. Sokkia Radian GPS, like all real-time, high-accuracy GPS requires a
base receiver sending corrections to a rover receiver. Most commonly used GPS
antenna types include the SK600 and SK502. All Sokkia GPS receivers will
accept and transmit RTCM, RTCA and CMR message strings.

Sokkia Radian IS
The Radian IS is an “integrated” GPS receiver with a fixed antenna type, the
SK600. Antenna height on the integrated Radian IS with built-in SK600 antenna is
measured to the base of the rubber bumper around the antenna. Sokkia provides a
measuring tape that connects to the rectangular indentations for precise height
measurement. A diagram of the phase center offset (antenna height) is included on
the receiver. Similar “hook points” exist on all Sokkia antennas.

Sokkia GSR2600 GPS

The GSR2600 is a modular version of the Radian IS, with a variety of antenna
p598
types available. The Log Static Data routine in SurvCE will initialize the storing
of raw data to the receiver. This raw data can be post-processed in Sokkia
Spectrum Survey.

Sokkia Axis/Axis 3 GPS

The Sokkia Axis 3 is the current GIS-level GPS product from Sokkia and obtains
corrections from Coast Guard beacons, WAAS and OmniStar. There is no
subscription fee for beacons or WAAS, but there is for OmniStar. The
subscription can be by month or year or any other time period (even “weekend”
use). Accuracy varies on correction method used, but is typically sub-meter to 3
meters. For example, 0.5 meter accuracy (1.5 feet) is common with beacon
corrections when located within 60 miles of a Coast Guard beacon. The Ax is 3 is
designed for GIS and environmental applications, which are effectively addressed
by SurvCE through use of attributing on feature codes and through ESRI import
and export features.

GPS (Topcon)
This configuration covers all Topcon GPS receiver types. Some of these receivers
utilize Glonass satellites as well as the standard U.S. satellites. In the Configure
Base routine for Topcon GPS, the firmware version of the receiver will be checked
and the correct message for setting the base position will be sent according to the
firmware version in use.

Note: Glonass refers to the Russian satellite constellation (Global Navigation

Satellite System). There are approximately 24 U.S. satellites active (more will
launch over time) and there are approximately 10 Glonass satellites currently
active. A full “24 satellite constellation” is anticipated by 2006 for the
Glonass satellites. With a minimum of 2 Glonass satellites available or “seen”
by the base and rover receivers, satellite coverage is improved, and work is
sometimes possible in canopy, urban or deep pit environments where
non-Glonass receivers do not have coverage. All Topcon G PS receivers have
a "stat" light on the front panel that flashes green indicating number of U.S.
satellites and orange indicating the number of Russian satellites.

Comm Setup
 Port Number: This drop list allows the user to select the communications
port of the data collector.
 This is a Bluetooth Port: This toggle allows the user to specify that the
selected port number is in fact the communications port that the Bluetooth
p599
 device in the data collector is assigned to.
 Find Bluetooth Port: This button will auto-detect the Bluetooth port number
in most devices.
 Bluetooth Type: Select the manufacturer of the Bluetooth device if known.
Typically, Socket will be the preferred brand and often the installed brand, but
if the brand is not known, select Other.
 Baud Rate: Set this value to match the data baud rate of the GPS serial port.
Typically this will be 115200 but may also be 9600 or 38400.
 Character Length: Set this value to match the data Character Length of the
GPS serial port. Typically this will be 8.
 Parity: Set this value to match the data Parity of the GPS serial port.
Typically this will be None.
 Stop Bits: Set this value to match the data Stop Bits of the GPS serial port.
Typically this will be 1.

Bluetooth
In addition to the discussion of Bluetooth (wireless) connection found under the
help subject Equip - Comm Setup, there are additional trouble-shooting
considerations with Topcon Bluetooth.
 Note that the PIN for all Topcon devices is 11111.
 If the OAF file is not current the Bluetooth will not work. An OAF file is used
by Topcon for the firmware of their receivers. With an ex pired OAF file,
many features (including Bluetooth) will not work.
 Normally the Bluetooth port (usually B) must be enabled in the OAF file for
the Bluetooth to work.
 It is possible to set the Bluetooth port baud rate. Normally it is 9600, 38400 or
115200. This can be checked from the “A” com port using GRIL (command
manual for Topcon receivers) commands. The baud rate in the Com Setup
should be the same.

Configure Base Station

 Receiver Type: You must select the receiver type (e.g. Hiper Lite).
 Antenna Type: You must select the Antenna Type (e.g. Hiper Lite). See the
figure below.

p600
p601
 Antenna Height: This is entered as a vertical or “slant” height in the job
units. The Vertical option is measured from the tip of the pole to the unit's
ARP (For the Hiper series GPS units, this is the bottom of the unit where the
pole screws in). Vertical is typically used for fixed height poles and tripods.
For the Hiper series, the Slant option is measured from the point on the ground
to the bottom edge of the square housing. This point is approx imately
30.50mm higher than the ARP and is located at the bottom edge of the
receiver's metal housing and is marked by a small arrow. For detailed
information on antenna heights, please see
http://www.ngs.noaa.gov/ANTCAL/.
 Elevation Mask: This value establishes the cutoff value above the horizon in
degrees where satellites will not be considered.

Configure Base Radio

 Radio Type: There are two options available, PDL or Spread Spectrum.
When using PDL, you must define the radio port, baud and RTK message
p602
 type. When using Spread Spectrum, you only have to define the RTK message
type. Most of the modern Hiper series units come with Spread Spectrum
radios. When using PacCrest radios, a “TX” light blinks about every second
indicating the radio is transmitting. The “RX” light would blink if you were
getting interference.
 Radio Port: You must select the radio port. This setting on the TOPCON
base and rover receiver is usually C. Data Port is always A when using a
cable and B when using Bluetooth. When using Pacific Crest radios,
TOPCON recommends the new PDL Pacific Crest radios. These must be set
to 38,400 baud rate. TOPCON can also use Spread Spectrum radios, which
work at 115,200 baud rate. The HiperLite GPS uses Spread Spectrum radios
running at 57,600 baud. The standard Hiper uses Pacific Crest PDL.
 Radio Baud: This defines the over-the-air baud rate that the radio will use. In
many cases, the user must know what the radio expects this setting to be based
on the radio's firmware or pre-programming.
 RTK Mess age Type: You must select the RTK message type that you wish to
broadcast.

Configure Rover Station

 Receiver Type: You must select the receiver type (e.g. Hiper Lite).
 Antenna Type: You must select the Antenna Type (e.g. Hiper Lite).
 Antenna Height: This is entered as a vertical or “slant” height in the job
units. The Vertical option is measured from the tip of the pole to the unit's
ARP (For the Hiper series GPS units, this is the bottom of the unit where the
pole screws in). Vertical is typically used for fixed height poles and tripods.
For the Hiper series, the Slant option is measured from the point on the ground
to the bottom edge of the square housing. This point is approx imately
30.50mm higher than the ARP and is located at the bottom edge of the
receiver's metal housing and is marked by a small arrow. For detailed
information on antenna heights, please see
http://www.ngs.noaa.gov/ANTCAL/.
 Elevation Mask: This value establishes the cutoff value above the horizon in
degrees where satellites will not be considered.

Configure Rover Radio

 Radio Type: There are two options available, PDL or Spread Spectrum.
When using PDL, you must define the radio port, baud and RTK message
type. When using Spread Spectrum, you only have to define the RTK message
type. Most of the modern Hiper series units come with Spread Spectrum

p603
 radios. When using PacCrest radios, a “TX” light blinks about every second
indicating the radio is transmitting. The “RX” light would blink if you were
getting interference.
 Radio Port: You must select the radio port. This setting on the TOPCON
base and rover receiver is usually C. Data Port is always A when using a
cable and B when using Bluetooth. When using Pacific Crest radios,
TOPCON recommends the new PDL Pacific Crest radios. These must be set
to 38,400 baud rate. TOPCON can also use Spread Spectrum radios, which
work at 115,200 baud rate. The HiperLite GPS uses Spread Spectrum radios
running at 57,600 baud. The standard Hiper uses Pacific Crest PDL.
 Radio Baud: This defines the over-the-air baud rate that the radio will
receive. In many cases, the user must know what the radio expects this setting
to be based on the radio's firmware or pre-programming.
 RTK Mess age Type: You must select the RTK message type that you wish to
receive.

Configure Rover Parameters

 Position Update Rate: In Configure Rover, the RTK Calculation Mode
should be set to Delay, which forces a fresh reading, as opposed to
Extrapolate, which will project the next reading by your direction of
movement, and may apply to difficult shots in tree lines.
 Ambiguity Fixing Parameter: This determines how tight the ambiguities of
the RTK solution must be before a fixed position is achieved. It is
recommended that High be used for greater accuracy.
 RTK Calculation Mode: In Configure Rover, the RTK Calculation Mode
should be set to Delay, which forces a fresh reading, as opposed to
Extrapolate which will project the next reading by your direction of
movement. Extrapolate may apply to difficult shots near obstructions such as
trees or buildings.

Receiver Utilities
 Power Cycle Receiver: Use this button to power cycle the receiver. At times
this may help if communications fail and cannot be restarted by Configure
Base or Rover.
 Restore Factory Defaults: Use this button to re-boot the receiver back to
factory default settings.
 Clear Non-Volatile Memory: Use this option to clear the unit's non-volatile
memory.
 Send Command to Receiver: This button allow the user to send command
p604
 directly to the receiver if necessary.
 Set Base/Rover Radio: Use Set Base Radio and Set Rover Radio to be sure
that both radios are on the same channel. Recommended settings are base on
low “digisquelch” (low sensitivity) and rover on medium or high digisquelch.
 Set Satellite Status: This command enables you to “turn off” particular
satellites, both U.S. and Russian. In SurvCE's Monitor/SkyPlot command,
located on the Equip tab, the Sat Info screen displays the Russian satellites
numbered 45 and up and the U.S. satellites numbered from 1 to 24.
 Initialize to Known Point: Use this option to speed up the initialization
process.

Post-Processing
All Topcon GPS receivers can be used for post processing and will store raw GPS
data on the on-board RAM in the receiver. The post-processing can be activated
by the Log Static Data command found in the Survey menu of SurvCE. On every
receiver, you can also activate logging purely through hardware by holding down
the FN key, watch the light turn orange to green, then release. To turn off by
hardware, press FN until the light turns off. Since SurvCE will prompt for antenna
height, type and other parameters, it is recommended that software be used to
initiate logging. Topcon logging files typically start off with the word “Log”
followed by the date, and are post-processed using Topcon Tools. Topcon Tools
will output a Rinex ASCII file of the logging data for use with programs such as
NGS’s OPUS.

GPS (Trimble)
Trimble 4000 GPS
The Trimble GPS 4000 is an older series of GPS receiver. The panel on the
receiver itself can be used on the Trimble 4000 to configure for RTK. There is no
Configure Base or Configure Rover in SurvCE for the Trimble 4000.

p605
Trimble GPS General (4700, 5700 and 5800)
This configuration is used for most current brands of Trimble GPS, including the
Trimble 5700 and Trimble 5800. The Trimble 5700 is often used as a base in
conjunction with the Trimble 5800, which has the wireless “Bluetooth”
communication feature. To use the Bluetooth feature, the Trimble TSCe is
outfitted with an adapter on one of its serial ports which includes the internal radio.
For use with SurvCE, the standard serial cable is recommended. To use the cable,
disable “Bluetooth”.

p606
The Trimble 5800 with Zephyr antenna has a panel that includes an On-Off button
at right.

p607
There are three LCD lights. From left, the first round light is yellow and flashes or
pulses at 1 per second when sufficient satellites have been acquired for RTK, and
flashes quickly when insufficient satellites are available. The second round light is
a pulsing green light indicating radio linkage. When the pulse is intermittent, radio
connection is being interrupted. The third, rectangular light is green and indicates
battery status. It is steady on when there is sufficient battery power.

p608
Note on the Trimble 5700 that the power on-off button is on the right, the nex t two
buttons to the left show the usage of battery 1 and an optional battery 2. Three
LCD lights appear along the bottom left of the 5700 panel. The middle button
pulses red and is a satellite indicator: steady 1 second pulse means good satellite
reception and fast pulsing means insufficient satellites. The LCD to the left is
steady on amber if static data is being logged to the receiver. When you configure
the base with the Trimble data loggers, you can set it to do RTK with PPInfill,
which will do both RTK and static logging. SurvCE can be used to configure the
base or will drive the rover when the base has been configured by the Trimble data
logger. A typical antenna usage would be the Zephyr Geodetic for the base
(mitigates multi-path) and the Zephyr for the 5800 rover. Consult your Trimble
reference manuals for more detailed information.

p609
Trimble Pathfinder
This is another “GIS-level” receiver, which typically gets corrections from either a
Beacon or a dedicated satellite in space (Racal), and has an approx imate accuracy
of 1 meter. An option to read OmniStar has been added. There is no Configure
Base or Receiver Utilities option, but there is a Configure Rover option.

p610
GPS Utilities by Manufacturer

GPS Utilities (Leica 500/1200)

This command is used to configure the GPS radios and set the message type to use.
This command is used to set radio configurations for both base and rover
receivers. If SurvCE is used in conjunction with the Red Controller from Leica, a
serial port to radio baud rate of 38400 is often pre-set. SurvCE should be set to
conform to that baud rate. A useful feature of the Receiver Utilities is to verify the
status of the receiver as either a Base or a Rover (bottom status line).

 Power On/Off Receiver: The receiver can be turned off and on in the
command “Receiver Utilities”, option “Power On/Off Receiver”. The
Configure Base and Configure Rover commands will typically turn on the
receiver automatically. Sometimes, turning off and turning on the receiver can
be used as a “troubleshooting” technique to clear conditions and start from a
clean slate.
 Radio Type: The Pacific Crest PDL radio type is the default setting, operating
at 38400 baud rate. Older Pacific Crest radios are often type RFM96W,
defaulting to 9600 baud rate. Other options include Satel radios, Modems,
p611
 RS232 and User Defined Modem. Phone numbers for cell modems will
accept up to 49 characters. When using Freewave or Tait “spread spectrum”
radios, the radio type doesn’t matter, but can be set to “User Defined
Modem”. Baud rate for Freewave is often 19200 baud.

Connections: With Freewave and other spread spectrum radio linkages,

communication must occur within a line-of-sight distance, typically no
more than 2 to 5 kilometers except in very flat terrain. With PacCrest
radios, the signal can “bend” somewhat, and achieve maximum distances
of 10 kilometers, typically. Cell phone linkage allows corrections to be
transmitted within the coverage of the cell phones themselves and
maintains accuracy up to as much as 50 kilometers. Contact your Leica
GPS vendor for appropriate cables for connectivity details. When you
select a modem configuration, the “Set Radio Channel” button becomes
“Connect Modem”, and when tapped, you are prompted for a Phone
Number or IP address and port (for the rover to call the base). The base
must also be hooked to a cell phone or modem. The base can actually be
set to both cell phone and radio linkage, with the rover set to either cell
or radio as preferred. The rover will go from autonomous to float (cell
phones are communicating) to fixed with cell phones just like with radio
linkage.
Note: Base and rover GPS receivers must have matching radio
configurations. If cell phones are used for the rover, then the base must
be configured for cell phone use. If PacCrest PDL radios are used on the
rover, than PacCrest PDL radios must be used on the base. Also note that
cell phone switching is made possible through the C icon or Alt C “on the
fly” from commands such as Store Points or Stakeout Points. This is
because of the availability of a “Utilities Tab” in Configure Reading
when configured Leica GPS.
Reference Station: To obtain corrections from a reference station to a
single rover, you typically must set to cell phone or modem linkage,
depending on what is required by the reference station.

 Set Radio Channel: This is normally set to channel 0 or channel 1. SurvCE

allows up to 16 radio channels (0 to 15). The procedure is to pick the channel,
then tap “Set Radio Channel”. Radios on base and rover must be set to the
same channel.

p612
 Radio Ports: The Leica GPS receiver has 2 commonly used radio ports
(ports 1 and 3). Port 2 may be used in rare occasions.
 Radio Stop Bits: Typically set to 1.
 Message Type: Standard setting is Leica Proprietary. Other message string
options are RTCM (an industry standard) and CMR (Trimble message string).
RTCM and CMR are used when it is necessary to communicate with
non-Leica GPS.
 Radio Parity: Typically set to None.

GPS Utilities (Navcom)

p613
 Configure RTK Device: Use this page to change your RTK data port
settings. This can also be done during base or rover configuration.
 Check RTK: This tells the user why they aren’t in RTK fixed.
 QuickStart (Starfire Only): Starfire corrections often take some time to
acquire high levels of accuracy. If you’re returning to a previously surveyed
area, you can save time by storing a known position to a reference file. Then
you can initialize the Starfire system with this position upon returning to the
site by performing a QuickStart.

At the end of the first day, verify that you’re receiving Dual-Frequency
Starfire corrections (RTG or WCT) by entering the Navigation Status
utility. Enter the QuickStart menu, and press Read GPS. Be sure to
physically mark this position in some way so that the exact position can
be returned to later. When you have a GPS position, click Save to save
the position to a reference file. When you return to the site, first ensure
that you’re receiving dual-frequency Starfire corrections, and that you're
set up on the position marked the previous day. Then enter the QuickStart
menu and choose Load to select the previously stored reference file.
Press Initiate to input the loaded starting position to the receiver. To
disable an input position, press Disable. Note that if the input position is
inaccurate, using the QuickStart routine will slow down the processing of
acquiring an accurate position.

p614
 Reset Receiver: Use this tool to reset your receiver (soft reset)
 Factory Reset: Use this tool to reset your receiver (factory reset).

The buttons available in Receiver Utilities depends on the capabilities of the

receiver. If a Starfire license is not active, the QuickStart button is not shown.

Check RTK is a very useful tool. It tells the user why they aren ’t in RTK fixed and,
if connected to a base when pressed, it determines if the base is transmitting
corrections, and if not, tells the user why. If connected to the rover, it tells the user
if in RTK Fixed and if not, and it tells the user why. Configure RTK Device is the
same as the Configure button in the RTK tab of the Base and Rover dialogs.

“QuickStart” allows the user to save a QuickStart point or to QuickStart from a

previously saved QuickStart point.

Starfire and QuickStart

Starfire is a space-based GPS correction system capable of 10 cm horizontal
accuracy. Vertical will be 1.5 to 2 times as much. It is kind of like WAAS on
steroids. The positions that it calculates are ITRF 2000. This is different from the
p615
positions calculated in RTK surveys. Since the RTK survey is based on a base
point on the ground and the Starfire position is a space based position, they do not
match. A localization created from an RTK system cannot be used by a Starfire
receiver. The localization must be created using Starfire positions.

It normally takes about an hour to get to the 10cm accuracy. The receiver does not
have to be stationary during that time. QuickStart is a method of reducing the
“pull in” time to 50 seconds. If a QuickStart point has been saved using the
QuickStart dialog, it can be loaded and used to perform a QuickStart. Best results
are obtained by performing the QuickStart 5 minutes after turning on the receiver.

Performing a QuickStart to point with a position that is wrong will increase the
“pull in” time to 2-3 hours. It will start at the bad position and then drift toward
the correct position. It is better to not perform a QuickStart if the receiver has
already been on for 30-40 minutes.

RTK Extend™

Introduction
An industry first from Navcom, RTK Extend™ enables continuous RTK position
accuracy during radio communication outages by utilizing Navcom ’s global
Starfire™ corrections. Traditionally, when an RTK rover loses communication
with the base station, it is unable to continue to provide position updates for more
than a few seconds, resulting in user down-time and reduced productivity. A
Navcom Starfire receiver, operating in RTK mode, can transition to RTK Extend
mode and maintain centimeter accurate positioning during communication loss for
up to 15 minutes or in some cases even longer. RTK Extend allows the user to
work more efficiently and without interruption, thus enabling them to concentrate
on the work rather than the tools.

The Concept
Using a receiver capable of Starfire and RTK at both the base and the rover
locations allows the receivers to compute Starfire and RTK solutions (or
corrections) simultaneously. If a communication outage occurs and the rover stops
receiving RTK corrections from the base station, the receiver automatically and
seamlessly transitions to RTK Extend mode by employing the Starfire signal.

Using RTK Extend, the receiver is able to compute an RTK equivalent position for
up to 15 minutes. If the receiver remains in RTK extend mode for more than 15

p616
minutes, the position solution will slowly degrade to the typical 10cm accuracy of
the Starfire system. Once the communication link is restored, the rover
automatically switches back to the standard RTK solution. The break in
communications and the seamless mode transition of RTK Extend is designed to
go unnoticed by the user with the exception of the mode flag indicating the
receiver is operating in the Starfire-aided RTK Extend mode rather than standard
RTK.

How it Works
To enable the RTK Extend process, the base station must compute a Starfire
solution and constantly difference this position against the known RTK base
station position. This difference information is transmitted to the rover as an
additional RTK message. The difference results from two different sources: 1)
The Starfire system inherently operates on the ITRF coordinate system and the
solution will differ for the known base station position if it was entered using a
different coordinate system. 2) Because RTK and Starfire use different techniques
to compute a position solution at any given time there will be a few centimeters
difference between the two solutions. The rover uses this difference information to
prevent any position jumps from occurring when transitioning into or out of RTK
Extend mode such that the geodetic datum of the rover position will always be the
same as the RTK base station position.

The RTK extend process works by continually forcing agreement between the
Starfire and RTK rover solutions at every epoch while receiving a signal from the
base station. Prior to initializing Starfire at each epoch, the RTK solution is
modified by the delta received from the base station. By first applying the delta,
Starfire is initialized to a true Starfire position but with a known offset from the
desired RTK position.

When the system transitions to the RTK extend mode all that is required is to
subtract the delta prior to outputting the position. Had the delta not first been
applied to the RTK position prior to initialization, Starfire would immediately
attempt to return to the correct Starfire position once it was no longer locked to the
RTK position. In addition to the loss of accuracy that would result if the Starfire
solution diverged from the RTK position there would also be a sudden position
jump when the link to the base station was restored. Thus by making use of this
additional information, the rover is able to extend RTK through position gaps that
would normally result from loss of communication with the base station.

Setup
Setting up an RTK system to take advantage of RTK Extend involves very little

p617
additional effort. The Starfire-activated receiver at the base station is setup ex actly
the same as if it were a standard RTK receiver using an ex ternal communication
link with the addition of two key steps:

1. The unit will be configured to navigate as a Starfire™ rover in addition to

operating as an RTK base station.

2. The unit will be configured to output a third RTK message , namely Navcom ’s
binary 0x5D message, which carries the Delta between the fixed RTK position
and the Starfire-aided navigation position to the rover.

The rover, being able to translate and adjust for the bias mentioned in item two
above, is able to instantaneously QuickStart to the Starfire-aided navigation
solution when standard RTK corrections are unavailable. While the receiver is
navigating in Starfire mode, the position is flagged in its binary output indicating
that the Starfire solution is actually “coasting” through an RTK communication
dropout.

Frequently Asked Questions

Q: How long are the near-RTK level accuracies maintained if the communication
link is lost?
A: To allow a Starfire receiver to work anywhere in the world, rather than just
within a few kilometers of an RTK base station, unique processing techniques must
be used and the typically obtainable accuracy is around 10 cm rather than the 1-2
cm obtainable with an RTK system. The errors that cause Starfire to fluctuate
around the true position by a few centimeters change very slowly. As a result,
once Starfire is initialized to a known position, it will stay within 1-2 cm of truth
for many minutes, but within an hour or so will begin varying from the true
position by a greater amount. Testing has determined that once initialized the
Starfire position will stay within 1-2 cm of the true position for at least 15 minutes
and in many cases even longer depending on the num ber of satellites visible and
their geometry. Every time the receiver reestablishes the link to the base station
and is able to compute an RTK position the 15 minute period is restarted. Thus
RTK Extend will coast through several back to back outages as long as none of
them are longer than 15 minutes.

Q: Does the base station send more than standard RTK messages to the rover?
A: Yes. The RTK Extend base outputs an additional correction which allows the
rover to resolve any biases between the Starfire and RTK solutions. The rover

p618
makes use of this information to seamlessly transition between modes of
operation.

Q: Can another manufacturer’s receiver or Navcom receiver without Starfire

capability be used as a base station?
A: Entering precise ITRF00 Starfire coordinates for the base position will allow
the rover to make use of the RTK Extend feature although at a reduced level of
performance. In this mode of operation, RTK Extend may only be able to coast
through short outages of a few minutes. Depending on the length of the outage
there is the possibility of a small position jump when transitioning from RTK
Extend back to RTK. The coordinate transformation required to convert the local
position into an ITRF00 position can be difficult, and if not done correctly will
cause the RTK Extend position to rapidly diverge from truth. As such, a G PS
receiver capable of navigating in Starfire mode coupled with the ability to output
the bias between these two sets of coordinates is the best approach to ensuring
seamless operation.

Q: Which Navcom products are capable of RTK Ex tend?

A: Navcom’s SF-2040 and SF-2050 product lines are capable of employing RTK
Extend. In order to be used in this mode, each receiver (base and rover) must have
the RTK option enabled as well as an active Starfire license.

Q: Can a user define whether they want the RTK Extend™ feature to be active?
A: Yes. Each receiver is fully configurable to ignore or accept a variety of
correction types. As such, the user may choose to disable the Starfire navigation
ability, making the receiver a primary host to RTK, or vice versa.

Q: What is Starfire™ convergence or “pull-in”, and why is it necessary to achieve

advertised accuracies from Starfire?
A: When positioning with GPS, there are two types of error sources that affect the
accuracy obtainable 1) the errors generated by the GPS satellite system and 2)
errors created by the receiver when processing the GPS signal.

The Starfire system is designed to compensate for all satellite based errors by
continuously tracking the GPS satellites and calculating the clock and orbit errors
in real-time. These errors affect all GPS receivers, but are removed by applying
the Starfire corrections. Correcting for the remaining error created by the G PS
receiver, involves a different process that must be done by the receiver itself. The
process of eliminating these errors involves smoothing the code measurements for
up to an hour during which time sufficient satellite geometry changes occur
allowing these errors to be estimated. This process is called convergence or

p619
“pull-in”.

Q: What is Starfire QuickStart?

A: Navcom offers the unique feature called QuickStart where an accurately known
ITRF00 position can be used to initialize Starfire navigation and eliminate the
convergence period. This is typically a position previously surveyed and converted
to ITRF00 prior to initialization. It can also be a position obtained from the
Starfire receiver while in steady state (or fully converged) navigation. For
example, vehicular installations can be initialized using the last position from when
it was parked and powered down. Employing QuickStart from a position that is
not geodetic truth will be followed by a longer-term convergence to geodetic truth,
so entering false coordinates into this function is not a recomm ended approach.

Note: RTK Extend™ is an “automated extension” of QuickStart.

GPS Utilities (Sokkia and Novatel)

The NovAtel and Sokkia GPS options, like Ashtech, allow for hard and soft resets,
permit sending commands to the receiver (consult your dealer) and allow the
review and re-setting of base and rover radio channels for Pacific Crest PDL and
RFM series radios. Additional options check the communication status (shows the
quality of the message string). The Review REF File will display the reference file
(which stores the GPS base position information), which also helps in
troubleshooting.

GPS Utilities (Magellan/Ashtech)

The Magellan/Ashtech Receiver Utilities screen has the following options:

p620
 Base and Rover Radio/GSM Setup: The Base and Rover Radio/GSM setup
options will read the receiver, display the current radio channel, and allow the
user to change to another channel. This feature is available for Pacific Crest
PDL and RFM Series radios and Ashtech internal radios. Be sure that you
have the right Radio Port set under the Configure Rover or Configure Base
“Ports” tab. For GSM, see discussions under Configure Rover. The Base and
Rover radio buttons work similarly. It is important for the user to choose the
right button (base radio setup for base receiver and rover radio setup for rover
receiver) to ensure that the software will try to connect to the radio on the
correct port.

Thales/Ashtech Radio Setup – PDL

If the radio is an American PDL radio, it will appear as shown below.

p621
The user can change the channel, the digisquelch (sensitivity), and the over air
radio link baud rate. If it is a European radio, channels are not available. Instead,
the user will be able to set the frequency, the digisquelch, and the over air radio
link baud rate. The digisquelch is best high on rovers and low on bases. To set
changes, click on the Set Radio button and the following screen appears:

Magellan/Ashtech Radio Setup – Thales UHF

p622
Select the appropriate button (see above). The following screen will appear.

Change the frequency to the desired frequency and click Set Radio.

Magellan/Ashtech Radio Setup – Cable

No configuration options are available when the software is configured to cable.

Magellan/Ashtech Radio Setup – Older Receivers

Currently, the only radio option available for non-ZMAX Thales/Ashtech receivers
is a PDL radio. The Base/Rover radio setup options will assume the radio is a PDL
radio on these receivers, and try to configure them accordingly. All the same
settings (channel, digisquelch, over air link rate) should still be available,
however.

 Hard Reset: Shuts down the receiver and brings it up again with default
settings. Resets all port baud rates to 9600 and resets the internal memory.
 Set Factory Defaults: Resets the receiver and changes all parameters to the
factory defaults. It is useful in troubleshooting problems.
 Save Settings to Receiver: Use this command is issued as part of the
Configure Base and Configure Rover operations. However, you can run this
command at any time as an extra “confirmation” of your settings changes
(including settings changes within Receiver Utilities). This sends the
$PASHS,SAV,Y command to the receiver.

p623
 Beep Off: This disables the Beep sound that emanates from the Receiver
when it is turned on.
 Send Command to Receiver: You can send what are known as “pash”
commands, internal Thales/Ashtech codes, to the receiver. This should be
done only in consultation with your Thales dealer.
 Reset RTK Engine: This resets the carrier phase ambiguities. This is a useful
command if you are having difficulty obtaining lock and want to start the
process of fixing over again. Receiver settings are retained (so you can think
of it as a “soft reset”).
 Bluetooth Settings: The Bluetooth settings in SurvCE ’s Bluetooth Manager
(discussed in Comm Setup) do not actually change anything in the receiver
itself. In order to make changes to the receiver ’s internal Bluetooth settings, it
is necessary to go into Receiver Utilities and click on Bluetooth Settings.

In this dialog, the user can change the Bluetooth receiver name (Receiver ID
in Bluetooth Manager), the Bluetooth passkey (PIN in Bluetooth Manager), or
the country code (currently the only choices are France and other countries
because France has unique Bluetooth specifications). To change the name,
change it in the appropriate text field and click Set New Bluetooth Name. A
message confirming success will appear.

p624
 To change the passkey, change it in the appropriate tex t field and click Set
New Bluetooth Passkey. A similar message confirming success will appear.
To change the country code, click the appropriate radio button for the country
and click Set Bluetooth Country Code. A similar message confirming success
will appear.
 Power Off Receiver: Sends a command to power off the receiver.
 Update Clock from GPS: This will update the clock on your CE device
based on the time recieved from the GPS satellites.

GPS Utilities (Topcon)

 Power Cycle Receiver: This command is the same as turning the TOPCON
receiver off and then on.
 Restore Factory Defaults: This command resets the TOPCON receiver to
factory settings and the receiver stops acting as base or rover. The baud rate
of Port A will be set to 115,200. Reset this to 9600 by turning the receiver off
and then on while holding down the FN button. Watch the REC light go from
orange to green to red and then let up the FN button. This method can be used
if SurvCE cannot establish communications at any time.
 Clear Non-Volatile Memory: This command does everything Restore
Factory Defaults does and also clears the almanac data that tells it where to

p625
 look for the satellites. The receiver then downloads a new almanac from the
satellites.
 Send Command to Receiver: This command allows experienced users to
type in commands using TOPCON GPS receiver commands to set or report
internal settings. (See the TOPCON operations manuals for a complete list of
TOPCON GPS receiver commands).
 Set Satellite Status: This feature allows the user to disable a satellite if
necessary.
 Initialize to Known Point: The Topcon GPS has a special feature to
Initialize to a Known Point which can greatly speed up “move ups” from one
base position to another.

GPS Utilities (Trimble)

 Reset Receiver: This will reset the receiver.
 Select Rover Input: If you choose Select Rover Input, you can identify the
“station id” of the base to avoid picking up inappropriate base corrections
from the wrong base receiver.
 Check Battery: This will display the condition of the receiver's battery.
 Power On/Off Receiver: This will turn on and off the receiver.

p626
Troubleshooting
This chapter contains troubleshooting tips for Carlson SurvCE, and the various
hardware devices supported by SurvCE.

GPS Heights
SurvCE records GPS heights as the ellipsoid height, ex pressed in meters, at either
the phase center or the ARP of the antenna, depending on the GPS manufacturer. If
the position is recorded to the ARP, then the LS record (antenna height) will only
reflect the user-entered value. If the position is recorded to the phase center, then
the LS record (antenna height) will reflect the user-entered value plus the phase
center offset.

SurvCE records the ARP position for the following GPS manufacturers:
 Leica
 Geodetics

Handheld Hardware
How do I reset the computer after a lock up?
Ranger
Hold down the power button until the computer resets or instructs you to hold it for
5 more seconds to reset.

Allegro
Hold down the power button until the computer resets.

Why can’t I load the software?

The computer may disconnect from ActiveSync when there is not enough memory
allocated to “Storage Memory”. In the control panel, select the “System” icon
followed by the Memory tab. Position the slider so that there is 5mb (5120 kb)
allocated and not in use (i.e. if the “In Use” value says 1024 kb then add 1024 &
5120 to determine what the “Allocated” value should be).

How do I clear the RAM backup and why?

Clearing the RAM backup seems to improve performance on the Ranger platform
p627
after new programs have been installed or removed. Make sure that all software
applications are closed and select the “RAM Backup” icon from the control panel.
Select the Delete button and answer Yes to the three resulting message boxes.

Why can’t I communicate through the COM port?

If you cannot communicate with the instrument, verify all COM settings in SurvCE
and make sure that they match the COM settings on the instrum ent. If
communication has previously been working and the COM settings have not been
altered, try one of the following to clear up the COM port:

 Exit SurvCE, turn off the computer, Restart the computer and re-enter
SurvCE.
 Exit SurvCE and perform a soft reset on the device (V erify that all
applications have been closed).
 Exit SurvCE and perform a hard reset on the device (Verify that all
applications have been closed).

How do I set the CAPS LOCK status?

Ranger
1) Hold down the yellow shift button [ ^ ] and the [ALT] buttons, then press and
release the power button.
2) A small keyboard should be showing. On the small keyboard, press the [CAPS]
button then repeat step 1 to dism iss the keyboard.

Allegro
Press and release the blue function button followed by the CapLk/Shift button
located at the lower left side of the keyboard.

How frequently should I charge the device?

We recommend starting every day with a fully-charged battery. Refer to your
hardware manual for specifics on charging your battery.

How do I calibrate the touch screen?

In the control panel of the CE device, select the “Stylus” icon to configure the
“Double Tab” and “Calibration” of the touch screen.

How do I turn on/off the back light?

Ranger
Hold down the shift button [ ^ ] and then press and release the power button.

p628
Allegro
Press and release the yellow function button followed by the F3/F8 button located
at the top center of the keyboard.

How can I speed up the Allegro performance?

In the control panel of the Allegro, select the “System” icon and then the
“Memory” tab. Set your “Storage Memory” allocation to 8000 KB or 8 MB +/-.
This should provide more RAM to the system for operating the programs and
increase performance.

How can I Recover the SurvCE Icon if it Disappears?

It may be possible to lose the SurvCE Icon off the desktop if, for ex ample, the
power drains out of the CE device. There are safeguards against this, but if it
happens, follow these steps to restore the icon:
1. Select Start (lower left on most CE devices, Ctrl Esc on the Ranger) and
choose Windows Explorer under Programs.
2. Navigate to the SurvStar directory (the directory containing SurvCE), which
on some devices is \Disk\SurvStar.
3. Look for the SurvCE Shortcut and highlight it.
4. Choose the Edit pull down in Windows Explorer and choose Copy.
5. Then return to the desktop where the icons are visible and press ALT then tap
into blank space on the screen (sometimes referred to as ALT-Click).
6. Choose Paste Shortcut. That should restore it.

If the icon disappears, this indicates some problem in the original installation of
SurvCE, since a process occurs to make the icon permanent. You can help ensure
that your restored icon is permanent by going to Start, Settings, Control Panel and
choosing Perform Ram Backup. Select Backup Now, as prompted. This should
make the SurvCE icon remain even after full loss of battery.

Can I lose data or get bad data if I Re-Boot my CE device?

If you re-boot your Allegro or Carlson Explorer or Ipaq or any other CE device
you are using, you can lose your antenna height or prism height information,
because SurvCE does not store to memory changes in antenna height or prism
height, except in the following scenarios:

The hard save of antenna/prism heights is done when you ex it the program, when
you save a configuration from the instrument icon at the top of the screen, when
you say OK to Configure Rover, Configure Base or Equip/Settings (for TS), when
you change jobs, and when you enter Equip/Com m Settings. Prior to release

p629
1.50.007, in November, 2004, even Configure Rover did not save the height
information "to disk".

Therefore, if you re-boot, perform a hard reset, or otherwise ex it the program by

any method other than the normal File, Exit method, recent changes to the prism
height or antenna height may not be saved. On re-entering the program, the X,Y
position for GPS work, for example, will very likely be correct, but elevations may
have been lost. When using GPS, it is recommended, after a re-boot, that you do
the command Configure Rover to re-establish the correct elevations, and in all
cases (GPS and Total Station) it is recommended that you double-check your
antenna or prism heights before proceeding.

Miscellaneous Instrument Configuration

Leica Robotic - Do I need to be in RCS (Remote Control) mode?
You must verify that you are NOT in RCS mode when using SurvCE with Leica
robotic equipment. It will appear as though you are not communicating with the
instrument if this mode is active. Refer to the Leica documentation for how to ex it
RCS mode.

Leica GPS - What firmware will allow radio channel changing?

Firmware version 3.52 or later is required for SurvCE to have radio channel
changing functionality.

Geodimeter 600 - What firmware version is required?

Firmware version 696-03.xx or later is required for SurvCE to operate with this
instrument. To check the firmware on the instrument, follow the key strokes:
Menu, 5, 4, 1. The Geodimeter 640, for example, does not take measurements in
reverse face. Therefore, when doing D&R, set reverse face to angle only.

Sokkia GSR 2700 IS - What do I do when I get the Bluetooth pass key
prompt?
This receiver does not require a pass key. If you are prompted for one, do a factory
reset on the receiver by holding the power key down until the message displayed is
Factory Reset. Then turn the device off and back on again. In Carlson SurvCE,
clear the receiver from the Bluetooth connections list and add it back in.

Supported File Formats

p630
What file types does SurvCE use or convert?

 ALI ISPOL Centerline File (Spain)

 ALN TerraModel Road Alignment File
 ALZ Form of CLIP Vertical Alignment File
(Spain)
 ASC ASCII text file for point imports or
Inroads Centerline File
 CL Carlson Horizontal Road Alignment File
 CR5 TDS Binary Coordinate File
 CRD Carlson coordinate file in binary form.
 DAT Carlson Localization File
 DXF Drawing file format that can be used for
exchanging drawings.
 EGM Carlson EGM Geoid File
 FCL Carlson Field Code Library file.
 FFF Older form of Caice Cross Section File
 FLT Carlson Triangulation Mesh File
 G99 Carlson Geoid99 File
 GRD Carlson Grid File
 GSI Leica file extension for Raw files, Roading
files, etc.
 INF Carlson User Preferences Settings File
 INP MOSS Roading Files (Horizontal and Vertical
Alignment)
 LIS Form of IGRDS Cross Section File
 NOT Carlson Note File
 OBS Geodimeter Coordinate File
 OSD A form of Geopak Centerline File
 PLT Horizontal Alignment Report file from CLIP
(Spain)
p631
 POS Sokkia or Trimble Coordinate File
 PRO Carlson Vertical Road Alignment File
 RAS ISPOL Vertical Road Alignment File (Spain)
 RD5 TDS Road Alignment File
 RDS IGRDS Cross Section File
 REF Carlson Base Station Reference File
 RLN TerraModel Road Alignment File
 RW5 Carlson Raw Data File, TDS Raw Data File
 SC1 ISPOL Cross Section File (Spain)
 SCT Carlson Cross Section File
 SDR Sokkia file extension for Raw Files,
Roading files, etc.
 SHP ESRI Shape File
 SUP Carlson Road Superelevation File
 TPL Carlson Road Template File
 TPT Carlson Road Template Transition File
 TRV Traverse PC Coordinate File and CLIP Format
for Sections (Spain)
 XML LandXML File may contain a variety of file
types (eg. Roading/DTM)
 XRS Form of Geopak Cross Section File

p632
Raw Data
This section outlines the Carlson SurvCE RW5 format.

File Format
Carlson SurvCE RW5 Format
This document outlines the Carlson SurvCE RW5 format in detail. The format is a
comma delimited ASCII file containing record types, headers, recorded data and
comments.

The format is based on the RW5 raw data specification, with the ex ception of
angle sets. Angle sets are recorded as BD, BR, FD and FR records to allow
reduction of all possible data that can be recorded by Carlson SurvCE using the
Set Collection routine. Essentially, these records are identical to a sideshot record.

With the exception of the aforementioned angle set records, if the RW5
specification is modified to provide enhanced functionality, the added or modified
data will reside in comment records to avoid incompatibility with ex isting
software.

Backsight Record
Record type: BK
Field headers:
OP Occupy Point
BP Back Point
BS Backsight
BC Back Circle
Sample(s):
BK,OP1,BP2,BS315.0000,BC0.0044

Job Record
Record type: JB
Field headers:
NM Job Name
DT Date
TM Time
Sample(s):
JB,NMSAMPLE,DT06-27-2003,TM14:21:53

p633
Line of Sight Record
Record type: LS
Field headers:
HI Height of Instrument
HR Height of Rod*

*GPS heights may be recorded to phase center or ARP

depending on GPS make.

Sample(s):
LS,HI5.000000,HR6.000000
LS,HR4.000000

Mode Setup Record

The mode setup will be recorded at the beginning of the
raw data file.
Record type: MO
Field headers:
AD Azimuth direction ( 0 for
North, 1 for South)
UN Distance unit (0 for feet, 1
for meter)
SF Scale factor
EC Earth Curvature (0 for off, 1
for on)
EO EDM offset(inch)
Sample(s):
MO,AD0,UN0,SF1.00000000,EC1,EO0.0,AU0

Occupy Record
Record type: OC
Field headers:
OP Point Name
N Northing (the header is N
space)
E Easting (the header is E
space)
EL Elevation
-- Note
Sample(s):
OC,OP1,N 5000.00000,E 5000.00000,EL100.000,--CP

p634
Off Center Shot Record
Record type: OF
Field headers:
AR Angle right
ZE Zenith (actual)
SD Slope Distance
Sample(s):
OF,AR90.3333,ZE90.0000,SD25.550000
OF,ZE90.3333,--Vert Angle Offset

Store Point Record

Record type: SP
Field headers:
PN Point Name
N Northing
E Easting
EL Elevation
-- Note
Sample(s):
SP,PN100,N 5002.0000,E 5000.0000,EL100.0000,--PP

Traverse / Sideshot Record / Backsight Direct / Backsight

Reverse / Foresight Direct / Foresight Reverse
Record type: TR / SS / BD / BR / FD / FR
Field headers:
OP Occupy Point
FP Foresight Point
(one of the following)
AZ Azimuth
BR Bearing
AR Angle-Right
AL Angle-Left
DR Deflection-Right
DL Deflection-Left
(one of the following)
ZE Zenith
VA Vertical angle
CE Change Elevation
(one of the following)
SD Slope Distance
HD Horizontal Distance
-- Note
Sample(s):

p635
TR,OP1,FP4,AR90.3333,ZE90.3333,SD25.550000,--CP
SS,OP1,FP2,AR0.0044,ZE86.0133,SD10.313750,--CP
BD,OP1,FP2,AR0.0055,ZE86.0126,SD10.320000,--CP
BR,OP1,FP2,AR180.0037,ZE273.5826,SD10.315000,--CP
FD,OP1,FP3,AR57.1630,ZE89.4305,SD7.393000,--CP
FR,OP1,FP3,AR237.1612,ZE270.1548,SD7.395000,--CP

GPS
Record type: GPS
Field headers:
PN Point Name
LA Latitude (WGS84)
LN Longitude (WGS84, negative
for West)
EL Ellipsoid elevation in
meters*
-- Note

*GPS heights may be recorded to phase center or ARP

depending on GPS make.

Sample(s):
GPS,PN701,LA42.214630920,LN-71.081409184,EL-21.8459,--C
P /Brass Disk

Alphabetical listing of Record Types

BD Backsight Direct
BK Backsight
BR Backsight Reverse
FD Foresight Direct
FR Foresight Reverse
GPS GPS Position in Lat (dd.mmss) Lon (dd.mmss -
Negative for West) and WGS84 Ellipsoid Elevation in
meters
JB Job
LS Line of Sight
MO Mode Setup
OC Occupy
OF Off Center Shot
SP Store Point
SS Side Shot
TR Traverse
-- Note Record

p636
Alphabetical listing of Field Headers
AD Azimuth Direction ( 0 for North, 1 for South)
AL Angle-Left
AR Angle-Right
AZ Azimuth
BC Back Circle
BP Back Point
BR Bearing (this field will be recorded as
N123.4500W)
BS Backsight (when back point is not defined)
CE Change Elevation
DL Deflection-Left
DR Deflection-Right
DT Local Date (MM-DD-YYYY)
E Easting (the header is E space)
EC Earth Curvature (0 for off, 1 for on)
EL Elevation (GPS value is ellipsoid elevation
in meters)
EO EDM Offset
FE Foresight Elevation
FP Foresight Point
HD Horizontal Distance
HI Height of Instrument
HR Height of Rod
LA Latitude
LN Longitude
N Northing (the header is N space)
OC Occupy Point Coordinates
OP Occupy Point
PN Point Name
SD Slope Distance
SF Scale Factor
TM Local Time (HH:MM:SS)
UN Distance Unit (0 for feet, 1 for meter, 2 for
US feet)
VA Vertical Angle
ZE Zenith
-- Note

p637
Index
-A-
Abbreviations 41
About SurvCE 193
Add Job Notes 113
Areas 315
Authorizing SurvCE 20
Auto By Interval 288

-B-
Basics 438
Battery Status 23

-C-
Calculator 332
Carlson Technical Support 24
Centerline Editor 344
Check Level (Total Station) 184
COGO 472
Color Screens 22
Configure (General) 153
Configure (Sets) 159
Configure (View Pt) 158

-D-
Data Transfer 101
Delete File 111
DRAW 460
Draw Centerline 352
Draw Profile 356
Draw Template 363

-E-
p638
Elevation Difference 250
End-User License Agreement 7
Exit 113

-F-
Feature Code List 89
FILE 442
File Format 633

-G-
GPS (Allen-Osbourne) 580
GPS (CSI - DGPS Max)
GPS (Leica 500/1200) 581
GPS (Leica GIS System 50) 585
GPS (Magellan/Ashtech) 593
GPS (Navcom) 585
GPS (NMEA) 590
GPS (Novatel) 592
GPS (Sokkia) 597
GPS (Topcon) 599
GPS (Trimble) 605
GPS Base 131
GPS Heights 627
GPS Rover 141
GPS Utilities 150
GPS Utilities (Leica 500/1200) 611
GPS Utilities (Magellan/Ashtech) 620
GPS Utilities (Navcom) 613
GPS Utilities (Sokkia and Novatel) 620
GPS Utilities (Topcon) 625
GPS Utilities (Trimble) 626
Graphic Mode 25
Grid/Face 258

-H-
Handheld Hardware 627
Hardware Notes 22
Hot Keys & Hot List 31

p639
-I-
Import/Export 107
Input Box Controls 36
Installing SurvCE 16
Instrument Selection 36
Intersections 317
Inverse 313

-J-
Job 43
Job Settings (Format) 52
Job Settings (New Job) 44
Job Settings (Options) 47
Job Settings (Stake) 53
Job Settings (System) 46

-K-
Keyboard Input 312
Keyboard Operation 40

-L-
Leveling 276
List Points 63
Localization 162
Log Raw GPS 292

-M-
Manual Traverse 339
Memory 22
Microsoft ActiveSync 11
Miscellaneous Instrument Configuration 630
Monitor/SkyPlot (GPS) 180

-O-
Orientation (Backsight) 199
Orientation (Instrument Setup) 195
Orientation (Remote Benchmark) 201
p640
Orientation (Robotics) 203

-P-
Peripherals 187
Point Projection 323
Profile Editor 353

-Q-
Quick Calculator 29

-R-
Raw Data 67
Receiver (GPS)
Remote Elevation 290
Resection 262

-S-
Save System 24
Set Collection 266
Setup (GPS) 128
Setup (Total Station) 123
Stake Line/Arc 228
Stake Offset 245
Stake Points 222
Stake Road 427
Stake Slope 386
Station Store 327
Store Points (GPS Offsets) 216
Store Points (GPS) 213
Store Points (TS Offsets) 210
Store Points (TS) 205
Store Sections 412
Supported File Formats 630
System Requirements 10

-T-
Template Editor 357

p641
Tolerances 185
TOOLS 487
Total Station (Geodimeter/Trimble) 543
Total Station (Leica Robotic) 554
Total Station (Leica TPS Series) 549
Total Station (Leica/Wild Older Models ) 563
Total Station (Nikon) 564
Total Station (Pentax)
Total Station (Sokkia Robotic) 571
Total Station (Sokkia Set) 567
Total Station (Topcon 800/8000/APL1) 572
Total Station (Topcon GTS) 580
Transformation 328
Tutorial 1: Calculating a Traverse (By Hand) with SurvCE 500
Tutorial 2: Performing Math Functions in Carlson SurvCE Input Boxes 502
Tutorial 3: Performing a Compass Rule Adjus tment 503
Tutorial 4: Defining Field Codes, Line/Layer Properties & GIS Prompting 509
Tutorial 5: Standard Procedures for Conducting G PS Localizations 531

-U-
Using the Manual 10
Utilities 364

-V-
VIEW 454
View Options 28

p642
FAST Survey
Reference Manual

Magellan
Survey Solutions Contact Information:
In USA +1 408 615 3970 ■ Fax +1 408 615 5200
Toll Free (Sales in USA/Canada) 1 800 922 2401
In South America +56 2 273 3214 ■ Fax +56 2 273 3187
Email [email protected]

In Singapore +65 9838 4229 ■ Fax +65 6777 9881

In China +86 10 6566 9866 ■ Fax +86 10 6566 0246
Email [email protected]

In France +33 2 28 09 38 00 ■ Fax +33 2 28 09 39 39

In Russia +7 495 980 5400 ■ Fax +7 495 981 4840
In the Netherlands +31 78 61 57 988 ■ Fax +31 78 61 52 027
Email [email protected]
www.pro.magellanGPS.com

Magellan follows a policy of continuous product improvement; specifications and descriptions are thus subject to change without notice. Please contact Magellan for the latest product information.
©2003-2008 Magellan Navigation, Inc. All rights reserved. All product and brand names are trademarks of their respective holders. P/N 630884-B